Home

Process CPU User`s Manual(Function Explanation

1. File name DEF File name ABC Standby program XO Execution of the CALLP100 PIO oo Xo sub routine program i 1 INCP DO Sub routine program ees RET END ee Read write of the Local devices used by local devices Local devices used by the file name ABC the file name DEF Operation at SM776 ON f File name DEF File name ABC Standby program no Execution of th P1004 H CALL P100 Seo OTe e 3 a E 2 Sumi Xo sub routine program a 7 7 INCP DO Sub routine Read write of the i program 2 local devices foes et he ete 4 i RET _ END Pee e Local devices used by PER Local devices used by the file name ABC the file name DEF 2 Cautions e If SM776 is ON the local device data is read when the sub routine program is called and the local device data is saved after the execution of the RET instruction Accordingly scan time is elongated by the time as when a sub routine program is executed once with the setting of SM776 ON See Section 10 13 1 ON OFF setting of SM776 is enabled in CPU modules Setting in file units is not enabled If the ON OFF setting of SM776 is changed while a sequence program is executed the control is made according to the information after change For details
2. 3 N NS N N N N a R o N N D Clock data read OFF Ignored e Reads clock data to SD1025 to SD1028 in BCD when request ON Read request SD1028 is on The SM1029 relay is turned on using a sequence program to process all data communication requests accepted during one scan in the END processing of that scan e The batch processing of the data communication requests can be turned on and off during running e The default is OFF processed one at a time for each END processing in the order in which data communication requests are accepted Batch processing OFF Batch processing not of data conducted M9029 SM1029 communications ON Batch processing requests conducted oe 0 05 M9030 SM1030 0 1 second clock Seconds aconds 04 e Generates each of 0 1 sec 0 2 sec 1 sec and 2 sec M9031 SM1031 0 2 second clock seconds 0 1 clocks seconds e This relay does not turn ON OFF for each scan it turns 05 ON OFF when the predefined time elapses even during M9032 SM1032 Le 1 second clock seconds 0 5 f eeennins seconds M9033 SM1033 ea 2 second clock senda seconds e Starts from OFF when the PLC power is turned ON or the Alternates between ON and OFF according to the h minute clock seconds specified at SD414 Default n 30 m9034__ Sm1034 1 minute Not turned on or off per scan but turned on and off even clock e during scan if corresponding time has
3. 100 120 140 160 180 Y190 Y1BO Y1D0 S 11F 13F 15F 17F 18F Y1AF Y1CF Y1EF 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 2 Changing the I O number of slots Change the I O number of an empty slot slot No 3 to X200 through X21F so that the I O numbers of slot No 4 and later slots do not change when a 32 point input module is mounted to the empty slot slot No 3 a System configuration and I O number assignment before the I O assignment with GX Developer Q38B CPU module Input module Input module Input module ro Empty oo Output module gt amp Output module o amp Output module gt oe N oe N N u fs 5 amp Output module n n Power supply module points points points points points points points X00 X20 X40 60 Y70 Y90 YBO YDO X1F X3F X5F 6F Y8F YAF YCF YEF Q68B wo A a Intelligent function module Intelligent function module Intelligent function module Intelligent function module Output module Output module Output module oe N w N oe N a N oe N Power supply module points points points FO 110 130 150 170 Y180 Y1A0 Y1C0 y3 10F 12F 14F 16F 17F Y19F Y1BF Y1DF 2 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q b I O assignment with GX Developer Designate the head I O number of slot No 3 to
4. errors D9123 ex ojo 1 I O verification 4 error present Indicates an I O module verification error Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new one This flag is cleared by error resetting operation New to New Corresponding ACPU Do IT Set by When set Corresponding CPU Set the basic period 1 second units use for the process Basic period control instruction using floating point data Floating points data SD1501 SD1500 Process control Process control instruction detail instruction detail error code error code Process control Process control instruction instruction e Shows the error process block that occurred in the process S Error generated error generated error control instruction occurrence location location D1 if i SD1506 Dummy device Dummy device iba i specify dummy devices by a process contro U SD1507 instruction e Shows the detailed error contents for the error that occurred S Error in the process control instruction occurrence APP 44 APP 44 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDIX 3 List of Interrupt Pointer Nos and Interrupt Factors Priority Priority Interrupt Factors Interrupt factors 0 ee Empy UNIT VERIFY ERR FUSE BREAK OFF SP UNIT ERROR OPERATION ERROR SFCP OPE ERROR QI60 interrupt Error factor 3 SFCP ECE ERROR module factor EX POWER OFF FILE OPE ERROR See Empy 13th point F Specifies wh
5. CPU shared memory Host PLC s operation information area CPU shared memory Host PLC s operation information area System area System area Automatic refresh area for the use of No 1 machine writing 2 Read with FROM instruction or UL G Data written with the S TO instruction 1 Writing performed with the S TO instruction Sequence program S TO instruction execution PLC No 1 processing 1 Data is written into the user s free area on the PLC No 1 with the S TO instruction Sequence program FROM instruction execution PLC No 2 processing 2 An FROM instruction or the intelligent function module device U_ G_ is used to read data from the free user area of the PLC No 1 to the designated device Refer to the following manual for further details on the S TO and FROM instructions QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions The Motion CPU cannot use the S TO instruction FROM instruction or intelligent function module device Use automatic refresh of the CPU shared memory or communication dedicated instructions between multiple PLCs to communicate between the Process CPU and Motion CPU For the accessing method from the PC CPU module to the CPU shared memory refer to the manual of the PC CPU module command between multiple PLCs 16 9 16 9 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE PL
6. Writing of the file register to the QCPU Writing of the parameter to the QCPU 10 45 10 45 10 DEVICES 1 Designating file registers for use The standard RAM or the memory card file registers which are to be used in the sequence program are determined at the PLC file tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box Qn H Parameter EJ LC name Atos SFC l r Fie register Initial Device value a i Notused Notused _ a Use the same file name as the program C Use the same file name as the program b Conespondina Memory cardfRAM Catespondng gt memory Z memory c F Use the following file C Use the following file Corresponding Z Coresponding x memory memory Fie name File name Capacity K 1K 1018K points Comment file used in a command File for local device Notused Notused Use the same file name as the program Use the following fie Corresponding rz Corresponding memory memory Use the following file rm Corresponding File name memory a File name Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple PLC settings Default Check End Cancel a When selecting Not used This setting should be selected for the following cases e When not using the file registers e When designating the file registers to be used in the sequence program The QDRSET instruction is used to designate which
7. Q5DB extension base unit Extension cable Q52B Q55B QC05B QC06B QC 12B Q60 B extension base unit QC30B QC50B QC100B Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B egg Power supply module 2 I O module Intelligent function module of the Q Series Motion only module POINT 1 Only one memory card can be mounted Select the memory card SRAM Flash and ATA in accordance with application and capacity When commercial memory cards the operation is not assured 2 The Q Series power supply module is not required for the Q5UB extension base unit 14 1 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 2 Configuration of peripheral device MITSUBISHI oogoog Memory card 1 Q2MEM 1MBS Q2MEM 2MBS Process CPU USB cable 2 Q2MEM 2MBF Q2MEM 4MBF Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU To be procured yourself Q2MEM 8MBA Q2MEN 16MBA Q2MEM 32MBA RS 232 cable QC30R2 lt L LEE SSE 55 EES ES EEO SERS ER EEE EEE EEE DS ERIE o f R LS PC card adapter Personal computer 7 GX Developer Q2MEM ADP Version 7 10L or later x1 For writing into memory card on GX Developer and USB cable refer to the operating manual of the GX Developer POINT e Refer to the Motion Controller User s Manual for connection between the Motion CPU and peripheral modules e T
8. Sampling trace Watchdog timer OFF Does not reset WDT WDT reset ON Resets WDT Sampling trace preparations Selection of OFF Output until NULL code number of encountered characters output ON 16 characters output CHG instruction OFF Enabled execution disable ON Disable switch ON I O partial refresh a K E 5 5 N a a is Main side P set request Sub side P set request SamplingTrace progress the number of times preset by parameter after STRA completed ON Sampling trace instruction is executed completed Reset when STRAR instruction is executed Turning on off SM803 can execute STRA STRAR instruction STRA SM803 is forcibly turned on off by a peripheral device Same as execution When switched from OFF to ON STRA instruction O M1044 M Smig shes STRAR When switched from ON to OFF STRAR instruction Same as execution The value stored in SD1044 is used as the condition for the sampling trace At scanning at time Time 10 msec unit The SM1015 relay is turned on to reset the WDT when ae batch processing are executed used when the scan time exceeds 200 ms 7 OFF Trace not in progress ag x SM1046 SM802 Sampling trace ON Trace in progress Switched on during sampling trace OFF Sampling trace Sampling trace is not executed unless SM801 is turned SM1047 SM801 suspended ON ON
9. C Detail Jsettings should be set as same when using multiple PLC 8 fixation 12 fixation settings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple PLC setti 3 Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Read PLC data g Default Check End Cancel Precautions a The system will be adversely affected by noise etc when the input response time is set to high speed Set the input response time in consideration of the operating environment b The input response speed setting is valid in the following cases e After the PLC is turned on e When the Process CPU is reset 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 7 3 Selecting the response time of the interrupt module 1 Selecting the response time of the interrupt module Changing the response time of the interrupt module means to amend the input response speed for interrupt modules QI60 that support the Q Series to 0 1 ms 0 2 ms 0 4 ms 0 6 ms and 1 ms Input from external devices is accepted at the input response speed set for the interrupt module The default setting for the input response time is 0 2 ms ON a OFF External input ON i i i o OFF Interrupt module y Input response time 2 Setting the Input Response Time Input response time is set up at the I O assignment tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box Select Interrupt among the slot typ
10. Process CPU Program A Program memory Standard ROM Memory card Main routine program s Write File of program A FEND Sub routine lt program P8 lt vi1 4 x See Section 10 9 for details on local and common pointers See Section 10 8 for details on sub routine program nesting 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q b Using the sub routine program as a separate program Sub routine programs can also be managed as separate separate programs stand by type programs See Section 4 2 4 for details on stand by type programs 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 1 3 Interrupt programs 1 Definition of interrupt program a An interrupt program begins from the interrupt pointer 1 _ and ends at the IRET instruction 1 b Interrupt programs are executed only when an interrupt factor occurs 1 1 See Section 10 10 for details on interrupt factors and interrupt pointers 2 Interrupt program management Interrupt programs are created after the main routine program after the FEND instruction and the combination of main and sub routine programs can be managed as one program a When created after the main routine program e An interrupt program is created between the main routine program s FEND and END instructions e Because there are no restrictions on the order in which interrupt prog
11. PLC No 1 PLC No 1 y PLC No 1 settings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Setup of parameters other than the multiple PLC system settings Set parameters written onto the hard disk or floppy disk 19 6 End alata 4 PLC No 1 Selects CPU Empty for the slots on which CPU modules are not to be mounted by type Select Detailed Settings on the I O assignment window to display the detail settings window Control PLC settings required item e Selects the control PLCs PLC No 1 to No 4 for each slot e Function version A intelligent function modules set the control PLC No 1 Output modules and special function modules that support the AnS series set a single PLC in all slots 19 6 MELSEC Q 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 19 2 3 Using existing preset multiple PLC settings and I O allocations GX Developer started up Refer to the GX Developer s operation manual Qn H Parameter x C system PLC file P CRAS De ice Pr gram le yot file SFc l 0 assignment Opens the GX Developer s PC parameter setup window Select Multiple PLC settings to display the multiple PLC setup window Label Comment r No of PLC f a Transferring multiple PLC settings manc EZ Click on Diversion multiple PLC parameters Change screens Selina z ple
12. Readable from the buffer memory with the FROM command and UD GO b Itis not possible to write in the buffer memory of intelligent function modules being controlled by other PLCs e TO instruction e Intelligent function module devices UL GD e Intelligent function modules dedicated commands An SP UNIT ERROR error code 2116 will be triggered if an attempt to write in the intelligent function module controlled by other PLCs is carried out 3 4 7 lt Slot No PLC No 1 PLC No 2 o Input module Input module o Output module o Output module ro a 2 3 wn D z io a Intelligent function module Intelligent function module Intelligent function module Control PLC settings PLC No 1 PLC No 1 PLC No 2 PLC No 2 Not writable write in the buffer memory with the TO command and UO GO Not writable write in the buffer memory with the TO command and UD GO 17 4 17 COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM S I O MODULES AND INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES MELSEC Q 5 Accessing MELSECNET H modules Only control PLCs can access MELSECNET H modules Link direct devices cannot be used in MELSECNET H modules being controlled by other PLCs OPERATION ERROR error code 4102 occurs if a program that uses link direct devices is used in MELSECNET H modules being controlled by other PLCs 18 PROCESSING TIME FOR MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM PROCESS CPUS MELS
13. SD227 1st character from the right 2nd character from the right SD227 Unit to which The header I O Online number of the unit module to which Online 10H is added to the value of the header I O number of which the D2 S0293 change is module cxchange Online module change is being performed S During Online New module being is being performed Exchange performed 10H 0 Automatic mode aa SD240 Base mode i Stores the base mode S Initial New 1 Detail mode 0 Main base only 1 to 7 No of Stores the maximum number of the extension bases being extension installed B2 B1 BO differentiation 0 QA Bis Main base 1st expansion installed gt base P i S Initial O Rem i ae 2nd expansion nitial ew bi differentiation A moos ase When no expansion 1 Q Bis to base is installed the installed Ak value is fixed to 0 expansion Q mode rae B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 BO SD243 Expansion 3 Expansion 2 Expansion 1 Main No of base No of base slots SD244 slots No of extension S Initial New n n g g N N A nN a n g N as N Expansion 7 Expansion 6 Expansion 5 Expansion 4 S Initial New As shown above each area stores the number of slots being installed Loaded Loaded maximum _ When SM250 goes from OFF to ON the upper 2 digits of the final S Request New O4Rem maximum 1 0 I O No I O numb
14. The direct access is indicated as DX in the sequence program For example a 10 input becomes DX10 The direct access input can be made in a LD AND OR instruction that uses an input in units of 1 point b Differences between refresh input and direct access input The direct access input accesses an input module directly when an instruction is executed which results in slower processing speed compared with the refresh input The direct access input is used only for inputting to the input module or the intelligent function module mounted on the main base unit or extension base unit The refresh input and direct access input differences are shown in Table 10 2 below Table 10 2 Differences Between Refresh LD X DX Q25PHCPU Extension base unit 4 8 us Input module mounted on base extension Input of intelligent function module mounted on base extension base unit Input of I O link module mounted on extension base unit Input used at MELSECNET H network 1 See Section 4 7 1 for details on the refresh mode 10 6 10 6 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q c The same input number can be designated for a refresh input and a direct access input If the number is used as a refresh input after being used as a direct access input the operation is executed with the ON OFF data read by performing a direct access input Operation is based on the ON OFF data read at the input refresh before sequence program operation starts
15. 3 Calculation examples Calculation examples are shown below the nnnnn X indicates an X system data expression a Storing 10 1 Oho gt 1 01 0 o gt 1 01000 x 28 o Mantissa code Positive to 0 Characteristic 3 to 82H to 10000010 z2 Mantissa 010 00000 00000 00000 00000 z Therefore the data expression will be 41200000 as shown below Code Characteristic Mantissa 0 10000010 01000000000000000000000 3 V e s y k V y EK y DA V BA y k y J l l l l l l l j 4 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 4 49 4 49 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q b Storing 0 75 0 75 10 gt 0 11 2 1 100 x2 Mantissa code Positive to 0 Characteristic 1 to 7En to 01111110 2 Mantissa 100 00000 00000 00000 00000 z Therefore the data expression will be 3F400000n as shown below Code Characteristic Mantissa O 01111110 01000000000000000000000 XX V J V J V A y X y J y A y IN y 4 l j 4 1 4 4 3 F 4 0 0 0 0 0 POINT 1 The monitor function for GX Developer permits monitoring the real number data of the Process CPU However if an attempt is made to monitor the data that cannot be represented as a real number e g FFFFH is displayed 2 For a 0 value 0 will be indicated at all the bO to b31 bits In binary notation the portion of the value following the decimal point is calculated as follows 0 1 1 0 1 t t f t This bit expresses 2 This bit expresses 2 This bit
16. MELSECNET H Remote station Remote station CC Link When using Process CPU device input X and output Y in remote stations I O numbers that succeed the numbers used by the main base unit and extension base units O modules and intelligent function modules will be allocated For example if X YO to X Y3FF are being used by the main base unit and extension base units I O modules and intelligent function modules then numbers above X Y400 can be used by the remote station However the I O numbers for remote stations should be set in consideration of additions to the main base unit and extension base units I O modules and intelligent function modules For example if 1024 points from X YO to X Y3FF are being used by the main base unit and extension base units and 256 points from X Y400 to X Y4FF are to be held back for use with future additions then the situation shown in the diagram below is to be observed 1 0 X Y X YO to L 1 O numbers being used by the main base unit and extension base units X Y3FF X Y400 to Held back for future additions X Y4FF X Y500 For MELSECNET H remote I O station For CC Link remote station O numbers that can be used by remote stations If network parameter setting is not made in the CC Link system 2048 points in the range from X Y1000 to X Y17FF are assigned to the master local module of the CC Link having the lowest number There
17. Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits PLC In the self loopback test of the serial communication EP Computer link data tat ti D9072 D1072 communications cheek module the serial communication module writes reads Number of Number of empt PY Stores the number of empty blocks in the olnphy DOCKS iN S Proce In communication request registration area to the remote D908 SD1081 communications communications q g APP 40 APP 40 terminal module connected to the MELSECNET MINI S3 master unit A2C or A52G e Stores the step number in which error 84 occurred in Sieb nimbe whera the SFC program in BIN code D9052 SD1052 p Stores 0 when errors 80 81 and 82 occurred error occurred A Stored the block starting step number when error 83 occurred Sequence step Stores the sequence step number of transfer condition e Stores the software version of the internal system in ASCII code The data in the lower byte A position is indefinite Software version of Higher byte Lower byte The software version is stored D9060 SD1060 SD392 Software version t in the higher byte position internal software ae oe valine For version A for example 41H is stored Note The software version of the initial system may differ from the version indicated by the version information printed on the rear of the case check data automatically to make communication checks request request registration AX registrtion area jarea APPENDIC
18. Q68B type extension base unit 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 d For 12 slot base unit 12 slots are occupied Power supply Q312B type main base unit 0123 45 67 8 9 1011 2 3 T fe a Oo Q612B type extension base unit 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Power supply 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 2 Detail mode a b In Detail mode the number of mountable modules is assigned to the individual base units main and extension base units at the I O assignment tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box Use this mode to match the number of slots to the one for the AnS Series base units 8 fixation Cautions on setting the number of slots The number of slots can be set regardless of the number of the module being used However the number of slots must be set for all the base units in use If the number of slot is not set for all the base units I O assignment may not work correctly The followings result if the preset number of slots differs from that of the installed base units 1 When the designated number of slots is larger than that of the installed base unit Among the designated slots those after the slots occupied by the installed base unit will be empty slots For example when 8 slots are designated for a 5 slot base unit 3 slots will be empty slots Q35B type main base unit 0123 4
19. When the type is not selected o ea 4 3 3 the type of the installed module EC will be selected al4alalatalaiyate If the start X and Y are not input the PLC assigns them automatically It is not possible to check correctly when there is a slot of the unsetting on the way Standard setting Base mode Auto Detail 8 fixation learn 12 fixation Settings should be set as same when Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Read PLC data using multiple PLC Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple PLC settings Default Check End Cancel c I O number assignment after the I O assignment with GX Developer Q38B o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 2 2e 2 2 2 2 s 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 g pz iS iS amp o 3 3 E 3 E E E z E gt 5 s 8 38 s s s s8 ej a a 2 2 2 2 S amp S Q E 5 5 5 5 a e o o o o e 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 a points points points points points points points points X00 X20 X40 60 Y80 YAO YCO YEO X1F X3F X5F 7F Y9F YBF YDF YFF Q68B 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 2 2 2 2 elz e 2 2 3 le3le3l e33 2 3 3138 e Se se selse 4 2 2 e gt Sco l Scl ealSec _ 5 amp esl es gsj egs 2 2 2 a noar 8 8 8 8 Sle ls So o gt S 5 3 Sh ee oo 32 32 32 32 16 32 32 32 oe Q _ points points points points points points points points
20. rogram Boot file SFC 1 0 assignment 1 Dev Latch 1 Latch 1 Latch 2 Latch 2 Local dev start dev end Default value Dev point can be changed for the device where a Dev point value is shown in brackets Device total 8 8 K words The total number of device points is up to 29 K words The bit device total is up to 64 Kbits Word device 26 0 Latch 1 It is possible to clear using the latch clear key ordan a Ceard Cera ths etch class kesh ADe Bit device 44 0 K bits Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple PLC setting Default Check End Cancel 1 Setting range in the internal user device The number of points for internal user devices other than the input X output Y step relay S link special relay SB and link special registers SW can be changed within a 29 k words including 3 7 k words for an internal user device range at the Device tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box The following gives more information a Setting range 1 The number of device points is designated in 16 point units 2 Amaximum of 32 k points can be designated for one device The maximum total number of points for the internal relay latch relay anunciator edge relay link relay link special relay step relay timer retentive timer and counter is 64 k points 1 point is calculated as 2 points 1 for coil 1 for contact
21. on 4 1 1O Empty __ Empty __ Empty 7 4 Power supply CPU module gt Three slots are occupied The number of points for the empty slots is the one designated at the I O assignment tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box Default value is 16 points 2 When the designated number of slots is smaller than that of the base unit being used The slots other than those designated are disabled For example when 8 slots are designated for a 12 slot base unit the 4 slots on the right of the base unit are disabled If a module is mounted to the prohibited slot an error SP UNIT LAY ERR occurs Q312B type main base unit 01234567 Prohibit Prohibit D 3 3 55 PIE Sis Q gt 5 c o Pala ojo Jo Module can be mounted When module is mounted When eight slots are set an error occurs 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 3 Setting screen and setting items for Base mode of GX Developer 1 0 Assignment Switch setting Detailed setting If the start Xx and Y are not input the PLC assigns them automatically It is not possible to check correctly when there is a slot of the unsetting on the way Standard setting Increase cable fed Base mode Base model name Power model name pes Points G Ato Main C Detail es Inctease2 Increase3 Bfixaton e In
22. PLC No 3 reset cancel PLC No 3 resetting S Status No 4 CPU reset change flag PLC No 4 reset cancel PLC No 4 resetting PLC No 1 normal including a PLC No 1 during stop error PLC No 2 normal PLC No 2 during stop error PLC No 3 normal PLC No 3 during stop error PLC No 4 normal No 1 CPU error flag No 2 CPU error flag No 3 CPU error flag e Designate whether to receive arrival stations only or to receive all slave stations APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued aa ie A MELSECNET H module 1 information MELSECNET H module 2 information MELSECNET H module 3 information MELSECNET H module 4 information CC Link error Presence absenc e of SFC program Start stop SFC program SFC program start status Presence absenc e of continuous transition for entire block Continuous transition prevention flag Output mode at block stop OFF Operative network ON Standby network Goes ON for standby network If no designation has been made concerning active or S Initial New standby active is assumed For refresh from link to CPU B W etc indicate whether ON Does not read to read from the link module For refresh from CPU to link B W etc designate ON Does not write whether to write to the link module OFF Operative network ON Standby network Goes ON for standby netw
23. SH 080316E This manual describes the programming procedures device names and other items necessary to 13JF67 implement PID control using process control instructions Sold separately How to Use This Manual This manual is prepared for users to understand memory map functions programs and devices of the CPU module when you use MELSEC Q Series PLCs The manual is classified roughly into three sections as shown below 1 Chapters 1 and 2 Chapters 3 to 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapters 9 and 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapters 13 to 19 This manual does not explain the functions of power supply modules base units extension cables memory cards and batteries of CPU module For these functions refer to the manual shown below e Process CPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Describe the outline of the CPU module and the system configuration The feature of CPU module and the basics of the system configuration of CPU module are described Describe the performance specifications executable program I O No and memory of the CPU module Describes the functions of the CPU modules Describes communication with intelligent function modules Describe parameters and devices used in the CPU modules Describes the CPU module processing time Describes the procedure for writing parameters and programs created at the GX Developer to the CPU module Describes an overview of th
24. n R a oO oO ua a O lo o S a Q O fo x 2 second clock SM411 SM412 SM413 SM414 2n second clock n R a a to 3 ie R ors After RUN ON for 1 scan only This contact can be used for scan execution type programs only After RUN OFF for 1 scan only e This contact can be used for scan execution type programs only After RUN ON for 1 scan only This contact can be used for low speed execution type programs only After RUN OFF for 1 scan only This contact can be used for low speed execution type programs only This relay repeats ON OFF at every 5 ms e Starts from OFF when the PLC power is turned ON or the CPU module is reset Note that the ON OFF status changes when the designated time has elapsed during the execution of the program This relay repeats ON OFF at every predefined constant time Starts from OFF when the PLC power is turned ON or the CPU module is reset Note that the ON OFF status changes when the designated time has elapsed during the execution of the program This relay repeats ON OFF in accordance with the number of seconds designated by SD414 Starts from OFF when the PLC power is turned ON or the CPU module is reset Note that the ON OFF status changes when the designated time has elapsed during the execution of the program This relay repeats ON OFF in accordance with the number
25. 1 Host PLC operation information area OH to 1FFH a The following information is stored in the host PLC with multiple PLC systems These will all remain as 0 and will not change in the case of single CPU systems 1 Table 16 1 List of host PLC operation information area CPU shared memory Detail Description address The area to confirm if information is stored in the host PLC s operation information area 1H to 1Fx or not On Availability of Information 0 Information not stored in the host PLC s operation information availability flag information area e 1 Information stored in the host PLC s operation information area Diagnostic error ve The numbers of errors during diagnostics is stored with BIN The year and month that the error number was stored in the CPU shared memory s 1H address is stored with two digits of the BCD code The day and time that the error number was stored in the CPU shared memory s 1H address is stored with two digits of the BCD code The minutes and seconds that the error number was stored in the CPU shared memory s 1H address is stored with two digits of the BCD code Stores an identification code to determine what error information Error information Error information P A ie has been stored in the common error information and individual identification code identification code error information 2 Corresponding special register Time the diagnosis Time the
26. 3 When using an extension cable do not bind it together with the main circuit high voltage and heavy current line or do not lay down them closely to each other 4 When setting the No of the expansion stages set it in the ascending order so that the same No is not set simultaneously by two extension base units 5 Although there are no particular restrictions in the order of the installation of the Q50B and Q6LB refer to Section 6 6 for usability 6 Connect the extension cable from OUT of the extension cable connector of the base unit to IN of the extension base unit on the next stage 7 lf 65 or more modules are installed an error will occur 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 2 2 Precaution on System Configuration This section describes hardware and software packages compatible with Process CPU 1 Hardware a The Process CPU can be used with the MELSEC Q series I O and intelligent function modules It cannot be used with the MELSEC AnS Q2AS series I O and special function modules b The number of modules to be installed and functions are limited depending on the type of the modules e QJ71BR11 Q Series MELSECNET 10H QJ71LP21 25 Up to 4 units network module f e QJ71E71 ae Ethernet interface QU71E71 B2 Up to 4 units e QJ71E71 100 Q series CC Link system master local module TQJeTBTII Nome iit a POY etme x A maximum of 4 modules if the network parameters for CC Link
27. Direct access input eee ceed is based on the ie data read from the input module Operation is based on the ON OFF data read at the direct access input 1 When debugging a program an input X can be set to ON OFF as described below OUT Xn instruction OUT X1 ON OFF command F4 gt X1 e GX Developer test operation 2 An input X can be used in the following cases e Destination device for RX refresh of CC link e Destination device for refresh of link input of MELSECNET H 10 7 10 7 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 2 Outputs Y 1 Definition a Outputs give out the program control results to the external devices such as solenoid electromagnetic switch signal lamp and digital display Signal lamp Digital display Output Y Sequence operation Contact yu b Outputs give out the result equivalent to one N O contact c There are no restrictions on the number of output Yn N O contacts and N C contacts used in a program provided the program capacity is not exceeded Programmable No restrictions on the quantity used controller y Program Out ladder external device Figure 10 4 Output Y 2 Using outputs as internal relays M Y corresponding to the slots installed with input modules and empty slots can serve as internal relays M 5 elelee 555 EI5I3 3 Salsa TTG S TO O gelee E
28. Memory card A OFF Unusable a Initial SM600 usable flags ON Use enabled ON when memory card A is ready for use by user S Initial SM601 Memory card A QFE Ne protect Goes ON when memory card A protect switch is ON S Initial New protect flag ON Protect SM603 Drive 2 flag OFF No drive 2 Goes ON when drive 2 card 1 ROM area is present S Initial New ON Drive 2 present smeo4 emoy card A OFF Notin use Goes ON when memory card A is in use S Initial New in use flag ON In use Memory card A OFF Remove insert enabled remove insert ON Remove insert prohibit flag prohibited SMe602 Drive 1 flag ono ne een Goes ON when drive 1 card 1 RAM area is present S Initial New Goes ON when memory card A cannot be inserted or removed Turned ON by user to enable the removal insertion of Memory card OFF Remove insert memory card remove insert prohibited j enable flag ON Remove insert enabled S by thesystemafterthe memory card is Memory card B OFF Unusable 7A Initial N usable flags ON Use enabled Aways ON S Initial a Memory card B OFF No protect Cr Initial N protect flag ON Protect Aways ON S intial SM622 Drive 3 flag A e f S Initial A OFF No drive 4 be OFF File register not in use i a S Status SM640 File register use ON File register in use Goes ON when file register is in use change New SM650 Comment use OFF FiS register not use Goes ON w
29. 5 Timer T 6 Retentive timer ST 7 Counter C 8 Data register D 9 Link register W 2 Latch Range Setting The latch range setting is performed at the Device tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box There are two types of range in which the latch clear key RESET L CLR switch and remote latch clear operation become valid or invalid in the latch range setting 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 Clearing the Latch Range Device Data The status of devices to which latch clear is made is shown in the table below Latch setting Clear retention after latch clear Devices not designated in latch range Latch 1 setting Devices with latch clear option Clear Latch 2 setting Devices without latch clear option Refer to Section 4 6 for the clearing method File registers R cannot be cleared with latch clear See Section 10 7 for clearing file registers 4 Precautions a Even if the device has been latch specified it will not be latched the when the local device or the device initialization is specified b The device details of the latch range are maintained with the battery Q6BAT attached to the Process CPU 1 The battery is necessary to latch the device if ROM operation is performed using the sequence program that has been stored on the standard ROM or memory card 2 Take care that if the battery connector is disconnected from the connector of the Process CPU when the Process CPU i
30. Example To leave the ERR LED off when a fuse shutoff error is detected set the factor number setting area to 0 where the error number is 2 x sD209 gt k SD208 gt k D207 0 0 A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 0 1 Because the factor number 2 is not set the ERR LED remains off even if the fuse shutoff is detected In this case even if another error with the factor number 2 I O module verify error or intelligent function module verify error is detected the ERR LED remains off 2 Even if the LED is set to be turned off error code storage is performed for SMO diagnosis error flag on SM1 self diagnosis flag on and SDO CPU diagnosis error register 7 FUNCTION els MELSEC Q 7 20 Module Service Interval Time Reading The Process CPU can monitor the service interval time time from service acceptance to next service acceptance of the intelligent function module network module or GX Developer This indicates the frequency at which access to the CPU occurs from outside To read the module service interval time operate the following special relay and special registers 1 Special relay Turning this relay from OFF to ON reads to SD551 and SD552 the module service interval time of the Module service interval intelligent function module specified in the special time read register SD550 ON Read OFF No processing 2 Special registers Set the I O number of the module whose
31. Stop File setting error FILE SET ERROR e When the power is turned on when reset File access error Default Stop Instruction execution not possible CAN T EXE PRG e When the power is turned on when reset e When the power is turned on when reset Parameter setting check PARAMETER ERROR lt When switched from STOP to RUN e When the power is turned on when reset Link parameter error LINK PARA ERROR When switched from STOP to RUN SFC parameter error SFC PARA ERROR e When switched from STOP to RUN lnvalliggabiunchommoaile SP PARA ERROR e When the power is turned on when reset parameter error FILE OPE ERROR When an instruction is executed 1 Can be changed to Continue in the GX Developer function parameter setting 2 Can be set to No in the GX Developer function parameter setting Also checking is not performed when SM251 is on gt 3 Can be set to No in the GX Developer function parameter setting 7 63 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q Self Diagnosis List Continued from the preceding page Diagnosis description Diagnostic timing When the power is turned on when reset REMOTE PASS ERR Paswoderr _fpewove passer f When switched from STOP to RUN e When the power is turned on when reset INSTRUCT CODE ERR STRESS e When switched from STOP to RUN e When the power is turned on when reset No END i i MISSING END INS SSG S e When switched from STOP to RUN e When the power is turned on when reset
32. The priority is set with the special registers SD207 to SD 209 in the following manner Factor number default value Hexadecimal 15 to 1211 to 8 7 to 4 3 to 0 bit 15 to 0 bit D207 Priority order 4 Priority order 3 Priority order 2 Priority order 1 SD207 4 3 2 1 a Factor number setting area D208 Priority order 8 Priority order 7 Priority order 6 Priority order 5 SD208 8 si Factor number setting area Priority order 10 Priority order 9 gt SD209 0 Neglected Factor number setting area 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q The description and default priority for the factor number to be set in the special registers SD207 to SD209 are as follows o Factor number 3 Priority Description Remarks Hexadecimal AC DC DOWN Power shutoff UNIT VERIFY ERR I O module verification error 2 2 FUSE BREAK OFF Fuse shutoff SP UNIT ERROR Intelligent function module verify error OPERATIN ERROR Calculation error LINK PARA ERROR Link parameter error z SFCP OPE ERROR SFC instruction calculation error SFCP EXE ERROR_ SFC program execution error a o FILE OPE ERROR _ File access error encom ccna Low speed execution monitoring time time up CHK instruction o E l Tamm 1 When leaving the LED turned off at the error described above set the factor number setting area each 4 bits which stores the factor number corresponding to SD207 to SD209 to 0
33. 12 8 12 8 13 OUTLINE OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS MELSEC Q 13 OUTLINE OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS 13 1 Features 1 Multi control a Since each system is not configured on one Process CPU but on the Process CPU Motion CPU and PC CPU module according to the system the development efficiency and ease of maintenance of the system can be enhanced b Each CPU module in the multiple PLC system controls the I O module and 13 intelligent function module of the base unit slot by slot GX Developer groups the I O modules and intelligent function modules controlled by each CPU module in the multiple PLC system 2 Enables system configuration through load dispersion a By dispersing the high load processing performed on a single Process CPU between several Process CPU s it is possible to reduce the overall system scan time Data processing low speed Control at 1 ms or higher Control at several to several tens of ms Mechanical control Mechanical control PLC high speed J k A Everything controlled on a single CPU Data processing CPU Mechanical control made even father by load dispersion in accordance with control tact b Itis possible to increase the amount of memory used throughout the entire system by spreading the memory used between several Process CPU s Expansion possible in CPU modules One CPU module added Program memory expanded e Device memory expanded 3
34. 7 19 1 LED display 1 The details of the LED display are shown below LED name Display Description Indicates the Process CPU mode ON green Q mode No registration of enforced ON OFF for external I O Flicker green with registration of enforced ON OFF for external I O Indicates the CPU module operation status On When operating with the RUN STOP switch at RUN Off When stopped with the RUN STOP switch at STOP Or when an error that stops operation is detected Flicker When writing parameters ad programs during STOP and when setting the RUN STOP switch from STOP RUN Perform the following operations in order to illuminate the RUN LED after program writing Set the RUN STOP switch to RUN STOP RUN e Reset the system with the RESET L CLR switch e Switch on the power to the PLC again Perform the following operations in order to illuminate the RUN LED after parameter writing e Reset the system with the RESET L CLR switch e Switch on the power to the PLC again When the RUN STOP switch has been set to RUN STOP RUN after the parameters have been amended the parameters related to intelligent function modules and other network parameters will not be reflected back Indicates the CPU module error detection status On When a self diagnosis error that does not stop the operation except for battery error is detected Set the operation error set mode to continue in the
35. ABC DEF GHI JKL 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 2 When changing the execute type of the scan execution type programs and stand by type programs by the scan execution type programs having the condition for switching the execution type e The scan execution type program being executed changes the next program to be executed from a stand by type program to a scan execution type program e If the condition realizes when ABC and GHI programs have been set to scan execution type and DEF program to stand by type the execute types of ABC and DEF programs are switched as shown below Before execution of PSCAN and PSTOP instructions Scan execution type program ABC e PSCAN is an instruction that switches Mo the specified DEF program to a scan PSCAN DEF type program ESTOP taper PSTOP is an instruction that switches the specified ABC program to a stand by type program Stand by type program DEF Scan execution type program GHI PSCAN GH PSCAN ABC PSTOP DEF PSTOP GHI I When M0 is on After execution of PSCAN and PSTOP instructions Stand by type program ABC MO PSCAN DEF PSTOP ABC Scan execution type program DEF Scan execution type program GHI PSCAN GHI PSCAN ABC PSTOP DEF PSTOP GHI 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITION
36. CALL P205 FEND Label b The same pointer No cannot be used again as a label Such use will result in a pointer configuration error error code 4021 10 54 10 54 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 2 Common pointer range of use In order to use common pointers the first common pointer No must be designated at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box A range of common pointers starts from a specified pointer number to P4095 However only pointer numbers subsequent to the local pointer range can be designated by parameter setting as common pointers If a total of 400 points are used in three programs 100 points in Program A 100 points in Program B and 200 points in Program C for example all local pointers after P400 can be used as common pointers If the last number of local pointers used in several programs overlaps the first number of common pointers a pointer configuration error Error Code 4020 will occur Program A Program B Program C PO to P99 used PO to P99 used PO to P199 used in program in program in program PO to P99 occupy 100 points PO to P99 occupy 100 points PO to P199 occupy 200 points y Total of 400 points used All pointers after P400 can be used as common pointers Common pointer settings screen Set the head number of the common pointers here Qn H Parameter PLC name P
37. Constant scan is a function to execute the sequence program repeatedly while maintaining the scan time at a constant time Because I O refresh is made prior to execution of the sequence program use of the constant scan function helps maintain the I O refresh interval at a constant rate even if the sequence program execution time varies Scan time when constant scan is not used Sequence program END processing END 0 ENDy 0 END 0 pp H 5ms Scan time when constant scan setting is set to 7 ms ___ Sequence program END processing END 0 END 0 END 4 eae Wait time 7 5ms 2ms 7ms Sequence program A Sequence program B Sequence program C 7 END processing Wait time 8ms 10ms Fig 7 1 Constant scan operation When using a low speed execution type program the constant scan function setting or low speed execution type program execution time must be set 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Setting the constant scan time a The constant scan time is set at the PLC RAS tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box The constant scan can be set in the range of 0 5 ms to 2000 ms A setting can be made in 0 5 ms units e When executing constant scan set the constant scan time e When not executing a constant scan leave the constant scan time blank Example When the constant scan is set to 10 ms Qn H Parameter PLC name PLC system
38. Default Value Setting Range Reference Section e Refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H manual e Refer to the Q Corresponding Ethernet manual e Refer to the CC Link manual 9 PARAMETER LIST MELSEC Q x1 N and M indicate the following N Indicates the module number M Indicates the network type Network Type MELSECNET 10 mode Control station MELSECNET H mode Control station MELSECNET 10 mode Normal station MELSECNET H mode Normal station MELSECNET H Remote master MELSECNET H Stand by station x2 N and M indicate the following N Indicates the module number M Indicates the network type Network Type Master station Local station 2H Standby master station 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 DEVICES This chapter describes all devices that can be used in the Process CPU 10 1 Device List The names and data ranges of devices which can be used in the Process CPU are shown in Table 10 1 below Table 10 1 Device List Default Values Parameter Reference Device Name S Designated j Number of Points Range Used Section Setting Range 8192 points XO to X1 FFF Section 10 2 1 Output 3 8192 points YO to Y1FFF Section 10 2 2 Anunciator 2048 points FO to F2047 Section 10 2 5 Step relay 3 re ele e gt 29k words 3 devices 7 Link relay 8192 points BO to B1FFF Section 10 2 7 2048 points TO to T2047 a x Section 10 2 10 Retentive timer STO to ST20
39. For example 5 slots are assigned to a 5 slot base unit and 12 slots are assigned to a 12 slot base unit b In Detail mode the number of slots is determined as the one designated at the I O assignment tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box 2 Order of I O number assignment The I O numbers are assigned to the modules from left to right consecutively starting from OH assigned to the module on the right of the Process CPU in the main base unit 3 Order of I O number assignment for extension base units The I O numbers for extension base units continue from the last number of the 1 O number of the main base unit The I O numbers are assigned to the extension base units from left I O 0 to right consecutively in the order in which the setting connectors of the extension base unit are set 4 I O numbers of each slot Each slot of base units occupies the points of I O numbers of the mounted I O modules or intelligent function modules When 32 point input module is mounted on the right of Process CPU XO to X1F are assigned as I O numbers 5 I O numbers of empty slots If the base unit has empty slots mounted with no I O modules or no intelligent function modules are mounted the points designated at the I O assigment tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box are assigned to the empty slots Default value is 16 points When the assignment of base units is conducted in Auto mode the number of empty extension s
40. Internal relay e Range where link relay latch is performed Latch relay b There are no restrictions on the number of contacts N O contacts N C contacts used in the program No restrictions on the quantity used BO switches ON at XO OFF to ON SET BO H The link relay B0 ON can only be used for internal QCPU processing and cannot be output externally K20 To 4 Y20 gt BO ON OFF information is output from the output module to an external destination B100 gt HH kei FFH Figure 10 7 Link Relay 2 Using link relays in the network system In order to use link relays in the network system a network parameter setting is required Link relays for which no network parameter setting has been designated can be used as internal relays or latch relays 1 For details on the network parameters refer to the For Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual 2 The MELSECNET H Network Module has 16384 link relay points assigned Process CPU has 8192 link relay points assigned When using subsequent points after Point 8192 change the number of link relay points at the Device tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box 10 17 10 17 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 8 Link special relays SB 1 Definition a A link special relay indicates the communication status and error detection of an intelligent function module such as the MELSECNET H Network Module b Because
41. LW12 link register o alalaliala HAREHARRI ae de tah ESLIS 581818818 Link register designation Za Aeee loko 2 a alele oo F ZOS ee ed dd ed ae Network No designation a 8iRfef e QjO O 5 5 2 8 3 Sit ititjaja Sae egg G G G O JO Zz Q 3 Zz fo a 1 10 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 2 Edge relays simplify pulse conversion processing a The use of a relay V that comes ON at the leading edge of the input condition simplifies pulse processing when a contact index qualification has been made Circuit example M1000 RST Z1H Reset index register Z1 FOR K1000 H Repetition 1000 times designation X0Z1 VOZ1 A MOZ1 gt Pulsing MO to M999 M1000 t nc z H Increment Index Register Z1 1 c NExT H Return to FOR instruction Timing chart ON XO OFF ON When Z1 0 VO OFF es ON MO OFF 1 Scan ON X1 OFF he ON When Z1 1 V1 OFF l ON M1 OFF l 1 Scan 3 Simple data processing a Real numbers floating decimal point data and character string constants can be used in the programming as they are XO Real number data Real number data Real number data E P E1 23 DO RO E123 4 DO E3 45 RO E4 68 Real number ADD instruction D R1 P D5 CPU D10 Character Character Character Character string data LINK instruction string data string data string data Ds
42. OFF Not being executed M9252 SM1252 Loop test status ON Forward or reverse loop test execution underway Master station OFF RUN Or STEP Rus Depends on whether or not the master station is in STOP SM1253 j status operation status ON STOP or PAUSE status or PAUSE mode Link status Relay M9233 M9235 M9236 M9237 M9238 M9240 M9241 Depends on whether or not the local station is executing a forward or a reverse loop test Local station i oiner thanhost Pepe ET Depends on whether or not a local station other than the Rete station operation status host is in STOP or PAUSE mode status F ON STOP or PAUSE status 5 Local station SM1255 other than host station error OFF Normal Depends on whether or not a local station other than the ON Abnormal host is in error 10 Process control instructions Set by ACPU Applicable OFF No hold e Specifies whether or not to hold the output value when a SM15900 Holenars ON _ Hold range over occurs for the S IN instruction range check g nee OFF No hold e Specifies whether or not the output value is held when a SM13501 Holdimede ON Hold range over occurs for the S OUT instruction range check x New APP 16 APP 16 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDIX 2 Special Register List APP 17 The special registers SD are internal registers with fixed applications in the PLC For this reason it is not possible to use these registers in sequence pr
43. ON Device t OFF Ignored est executed ON Set request GX Developer When this relay goes from OFF to ON clock data being stored from SD210 to SD213 after execution of END instruction for changed scan is written to the clock device ON when error is generated in clock data SD210 to D213 value and OFF if no error is detected i Aii S Request M9026 SM213 Clock data read request Online module change flag OFF Ignored e When this relay is ON clock data is read to SD210 to ON Read request SD213 as BCD values OFF Online module change is not in progress ON Online module change in progress S During online module change S When online module change is complete Turns on during online module change OFF Online module change incomplete ON Online module change complete Turns ON for one scan after online module change is complete e This contact point can only be used by program for local unit Online module SM236 change complete he scan Goes OFF when reset of the PLC No 1 is canceled PLC No 1 reset cancel Comes ON when the PLC No 1 is resetting including PLC No 1 resetting the case where the PLC is removed from the base The other PLCs are also put in reset status Goes OFF when reset of the PLC No 2 is canceled e Comes ON when the PLC No 2 is resetting including the case where the PLC is removed from the base The other PLCs result in MUL
44. S Status change Program number of low speed program currently being executed is stored as BIN value e Enabled only when SM510 is ON S Every END processing S Every END processing Stores current scan time in 1 ms units Range from 0 to 65535 e Stores current scan time in 100 us units Range from 00000 to 900 Example A current scan of 23 6 ms would be stored as follows D520 23 D521 600 e Stores scan time for initially execution type program in 1 ms units e Range from 0 to 65535 e Stores scan time for initially execution type program in 100 ps units Range of 000 to 900 S Every END processing S First END processing S Every END processing S Every END processing e Stores minimum value of scan time in 1 ms units e Range from 0 to 65535 Stores minimum value of scan time in 100 us units Range of 000 to 900 Stores maximum value of scan time excepting the first scan in 1 ms units Range from 0 to 65535 e Stores maximum value of scan time excepting the first scan in 100 us units Range of 000 to 900 e Stores current scan time for low speed execution type program in 1 ms units Stores current scan time for low speed execution type program in 100 us units Range of 000 to 900 Stores minimum value of scan time for low speed execution type program in 1 ms units e Range from 0 to 65535 Stores minimum value of scan time for low speed execution
45. The remote password is transmitted to QJ71E71 when the power is switched on or the system reset GX Developer A check is run on the remote password The remote password is set up amended or cancelled and the result written in the QCPU 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Remote password lock unlock processing Unlocks the Ethernet module remote passwords for the access source via modems serial communication modules and the Ethernet Access to the High Performance model QCPU is enabled if the remote password matches up For example an outline of what will happen during remote password lock unlock processing with an Ethernet module is shown below The remote password is unlocked relesed and access to the QCPU is allows The remote password locking process is performed when the line is closed GX Developer Ethernet QJ71E71 Power supply i N CPU module The remote password is transmitted to QJ71E71 when the power is switched on or the system reset A check is run on the remote password GX Developer 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 Procedure for setting up the remote password GX Developer Remote Password Remote Password Setup screen Advanced Remote Password Setup screen a Setup screen Remote password setup Detail is required with the QU71E71 Remote password se tings r Password settings Password fo m Password active mod
46. b When Do not load output condition outside of group has been set It is not possible to load ON OFF data output to output modules and intelligent function modules by other PLCs into the host PLC s output Y remains at OFF 17 3 17 3 17 COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM S I O MODULES AND INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES 17 4 3 MELSEC Q Output to output modules and intelligent function modules It is not possible to output ON OFF data to non control modules ON OFF will be performed within the Process CPU when the output from output modules and intelligent function modules controlled by other PLCs such as sequence programs have been set to ON OFF but this will not be output to output modules or intelligent function modules Accessing the intelligent function module buffer memory a Itis possible to read data from the buffer memory of intelligent function modules being controlled by other PLCs with the commands listed below e FROM command e Commands that use intelligent function module devices UL GL 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 Slot No Input module gt 7 2 2 n oO ola O jal Output module Intelligent function module Intelligent function module Input module Output module Intelligent function module Control PLC settings PLC No 1 PLC No 1 PLC No 1 L PLC No 1 PLC No 2 PLC No 2 PLC No 2 Readable from the buffer memory with the FROM command and UD GO
47. e Fuse blow check is executed also to the output module of remote I O station If normal status is restored clear is not performed Therefore it is required to perform clear by user program Fuse blown module e Sets value for the step transfer monitoring timer and the number of F which turns on when the monitoring timer timed out b15 to b8b7 to bO Step transfer Timer setting valve monitoring timer and the f number at setting time out Timer setting 1 to 255 s in seconds F number setting By turning on any of MSM708 to SM1114 the monitoring timer starts If the transfer condition following a step which corresponds to the timer is not established within set time set annunciator F is tuned on When I O modules of which data are different from those entered at power on have been detected the V O unit numbers in units of 16 points are entered in bit pattern Preset I O unit numbers when parameter setting has been performed 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 Bit pattern in units spi116 o o o o olo o o o VO module of 16 points SD1117 o o fojo o o o o o indicating the eae Res verification error WiGdileswith D1123 o o Jax 0 o o o olo verification errors liis I O module verify error I O module verify check is executed also to remote I O station modules If normal status is restored clear is not performed Therefore it is requir
48. no operations operations with external input program operations externally Performs sequence program Outputs ON externally regardless During enforced ON Joperations in the enforced ON of the results of sequence program status operations Performs sequence program Outputs OFF externally During enforced OFF operations in the enforced OFF regardless of the results of status sequence program operations The operations when enforced ON OFF is performed are shown in the diagram below Output enforced ON OFF operations Y10 device enforced OFF Y10 output xterna Output refreshed weiss sensor hehe output OFF yi OFF Input refreshed ___X0 input ON gt External 7 P ba input Input enforced ON OFF operations X0 device enforced OFF X0 ON Po Sequence execution Mo Ss E lt q vio p xO External input d i D EE forcibly set at OFF Y10 M1 gt Set at ON on the rudder even during enforced OFF external output set at OFF END 1 Explanation of specifications a Enforced ON OFF can be performed regardless of the Process CPU s RUN STOP status However enforced ON OFF is only allowed for input during stop errors The output is only performed to device Y b Devices can be registered within the ranges input X0 to X1FFF output YO to Y1FFF 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q c The input and output eligible for en
49. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Annunciator ON detection xO X10 SET F S 7 4 SM62 OFF to ON gt SD62 0to5 SM62 SD63 Oto 1 _ BcpP spe2 k4y20 SD64 Oto 5 SD65 0 Output of annunciator No which switched ON SD79 0 10 12 10 12 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 2 Anunciator ON procedure a Anunciator ON procedure Anunciator operation can be controlled by the SET Fi and OUT csinstructions 1 The SET F lt instruction switches the anunciator ON only at the leading edge OFF to ON of the input condition and keeps the anunciator ON when the input condition switches OFF In cases where many anunciators are used the OUT F lt instruction can be used to speed up the scan time 2 The OUT F instruction can switch the anunciator ON or OFF It takes longer to do so than the SET F instruction If the anunciator is switched OFF by using an OUT F instruction this will require the execution of an RST Fi or LEDR instruction Use a SET Fi instruction to switch the anunciator ON POINT 1 If switched ON by any method other than the SET Fi and OUT F instructions the anunciator functions in the same way as the internal relay Does not switch ON at SM62 and anunciator Nos are not stored at SD62 SD64 to SD79 b Processing at anunciator ON 1 Data stored at special registers SD62 to SD79 a Nos of anunciators which switched ON
50. 1 MELSECNETHH link refresh processing 4 6ms 8k word approx 4 3 times 1 x1 Where Q25PHCPU is compared with Q4ARCPU Increase in debugging efficiency through high speed communication with GX Developer In the Process CPU a time required for writing reading of a program or monitoring has been reduced through the high speed communication at a speed of 115 2kbps max by the RS 232 and a communication time efficiency at the time of debugging has been increased In the Process CPU a high speed communication at a speed of 12Mbps is allowed through the USB 26k step program transfer time Q25PHCPU USB 12 Q25PHCPU RS 232 30 Q4ARCPU i 86 A2USHCPU S1 S 94 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Unit s 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 10 Saved space by a reduction in size The installation space for Q series has been reduced by approx 60 of the space for AnS series Comparison of installation space MELSEG Atse2p MELSEG AiSH pl Aisyso PORE RNO IROA he ERROR RESET i MITSUBISHI H i NERSE e poyer CZAOPU 7 OXTO AJIRI RDN Al a ATE R ERR USER BAT BOOT i 0 0 0 T T T T 98mm 3 j j 5 3 86 lt IPULL 5 inch Pye lo Fo A S USB 9 9 9 ge A A nN A Y B B B B Cc Cc C C PULL D
51. 32 points points points points points points points points X00 X20 X40 X200 Y70 Y90 YBO YDO X1F X3F X5F X21F Y8F YAF YCF YEF Q68B wo A ol as oO 2 2 E Intelligent function module Intelligent function module N function module Intelligent function module Output module Output module oe Po ao oO N oe N oe N Power supply module 8 5 amp Output module n points points points points points points FO 110 130 150 170 Y180 Y1A0 Y1CO ke O w 53 N n 10F 12F 14F 16F 17F Y19F Y1BF Y1DF 5 8 Checking the I O Numbers System monitor of GX Developer allows the check of the mounted modules of Process CPU and their I O numbers For system monitor refer to Section 7 18 6 PROCESS CPU FILES MELSEC Q 6 PROCESS CPU FILES 1 Process CPU file type a b The Process CPU parameters programs comment data etc are assigned file names and extension and are then stored in the following memories e Program memory e Standard ROM e Memory card When reading and writing this data from GX Developer to the Process CPU files can be specified by type parameter program comment etc without regard to their extension GX Developer automatically assigns the appropriate extension for the file type which has been specified It is impossible to set and use the same extension sta
52. ALARM LED SM52__ Battery low OFF Normal Same as SM51 but goes OFF subsequently when S Error M9006 ON Battery low battery voltage returns to normal Comes ON it a momentary power interruption of less than 20ms occurred during use of the AC power supply OFF AC DC DOWN not module and reset by turning the power OFF then ON msa PORE DOWN dptocted S Error M9005 detection ON AC DC DOWN Comes ON if a momentary power interruption of less detected than 10ms occurred during use of the DC power supply module and reset by turning power OFF then ON Error OFF Normal Battery low latch ON Battery low OFF Normal ON when operation error is generated Operation Errors g Stays ON subsequently even if normal operations S Error M9011 ON Operation error restored Comes ON even if there is only one output module with a Blown fuse OFF Normal blown fuse and remains ON even after return to normal S Error M9000 detection ON Module with blown fuse Blown fuse status is checked even for remote I O station output modules Comes ON if there is a discrepancy between the actual V O modules and the registered information when the power is turned on O module verification is also conducted for remote I O station modules V O module OFF Normal verification error JON Error Annunciator OFF Not detected detection ON Detected Goes ON if even one annunciator F goes ON Instruction execution OF
53. Dn 1 For example if register D12 is designated in the DMOV instruction the lower 16 bits are stored in D12 and the upper 16 bits are stored in D13 H _ pov ks00000 oH Processing object D12 D13 D13 D12 Upper 16 bits _Lower 16 bits Ha Je Two data registers can store a range of numeric data from 2147483648 to 2147483647 or from OH to FFFFFFFFn d Data stored by the sequence program is maintained until another data save operation occurs 10 28 10 28 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 13 Link registers W 1 Definition a A link register is the Process CPU memory used to refresh the Process CPU with data from the link registers LW of intelligent function modules including MELSECNET H network module Link registers are used to store numeric data 32768 to 32767 or 0000H to FFFFn __ Process CPU MELSECNET H network module Link register Link register W LWO f Link refresh Link refresh setting range When used outside the MELSECNET H network system s range link registers can serve as data registers b Link registers which consist of 16 bits per point read and write data in 16 bit units b15 a bo ie a a a a c If the link registers are used for 32 bit instructions the data is stored in registers Wn and Wn 1 The lower 16 bits of data are stored in the link register No Wn designated in the sequence program and the
54. Enables system configuration through function dispersion By dispersing the functions so that control for production line A and control for production line B is performed on different Process CPU s it is possible to debug each function individually 13 1 13 1 13 OUTLINE OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS 13 2 MELSEC Q 4 Communication can be made between CPU modules in the multiple PLC system The following data transfer can be made between CPU modules in the multiple PLC system a Automatic refresh setting at GX Developer enables the data transfer between CPU modules b The Process CPU can use the FROM S TO instruction to read data from other PLC as necessary c Instructions dedicated to Motion can be used to issue control commands from the Process CPU to the Motion CPU 1 d The Process CPU can issue instructions dedicated to communication between multiple PLCs to read or write device data from to the Motion CPU or PC CPU module The Process CPU can issue events to the PC CPU module 2 x1 Refer to the manual of the Motion CPU for instructions dedicated to Motion x2 Refer to the manuals of Motion CPU and PC CPU module for instructions dedicated to the communication between multiple PLCs 13 2 13 OUTLINE OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS MELSEC Q 13 2 Outline of Multiple PLC Systems 1 What is a multiple PLC system a Amultiple PLC system is a system in which main base units are mounted on several maximum fo
55. In units columns of the Program Setting sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box See Section 4 2 5 c Scantimes of programs being executed except the fixed scan execution type program can be checked on the monitor of the program list See Section 7 11 1 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 2 Flow of each program of Process CPU The flow of each program after power ON or STOP of the PLC to RUN switching of the CPU module is shown below Power ON STOP to RUN K ta Executed only once at power ON Initial execution or STOP to RUN type program lt e Ea Se ea Se eS ey eek e ee Pa Run only when constant scan or oe execution Ng low speed program execution time e program ype prog has been set xo END processing gt Fxied scan execution Pye i see hatha specified cyclic type program Scan execution Stand by type Run only when execution request type program program 1S Jiven Not all execute types need to be set for the Process CPU Use the items marked with as needed such as the Initial execution low speed execution stand by and fixed scan execution type programs 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 3 Changing the Execute Type a The Execute Type setting made at the Program tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box can be changed at
56. PLC Parameter dialog box You should also designate System setting at the intelligent function module To execute an interrupt program by the interrupt from the intelligent function module refer to the manual of the intelligent function module being used 8 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE MELSEC Q MEMO 9 PARAMETER LIST MELSEC Q 9 PARAMETER LIST There are two types of parameters used in Process CPU s procedures PLC parameters that are used when operating a PLC and network parameters that are used when connecting to the MELSECNET H or CC Link system This chapter shows a list of PLC parameters and network parameters used for GX Developer For details on each setting item refer to the section or manual indicated For GX Developer setting procedures refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual The parameters written from the GX Developer will be validated within the QCPU in the following cases e When the power supply to the PLC is switched on e When the CPU module is reset e When the CPU module changes from STOP to RUN However the PLC parameter s I O assignment switch settings and the network parameters will be transmitted from the Process CPU to a specified intelligent function module in the following cases and will be validated within the intelligent function module e When the power supply to the PLC is switched on e When the CPU module is reset The PLC parameter s I O assignmen
57. PLC file PLCRAS Device Program Boot file SFC 1 0 assignment WDT Watchdog timer setting 4 p Error check WDT Setting 200 ms 10ms 2000ms IV Cary out battery check Initial M Carry out fuse blown check execution ms 10ms 2000ms I Cary out 1 0 module comparison Low speed 10ms Constant scannin ash eh ms 10ms 2000ms g 1d ms 0 5ms 2000ms r Operating mode when there is an error Computation error Stop Low speed program execution time Expanded command error Stop id zz ms Ims 2000ms Fuse blown Stop coe Re 1 0 module comparison error Sto X ine eee P Intelligent module program stp z Recordin PLC RAM execution error P C Record in the following history file Memory card access error Stop ba Corresponding e Memory card operation eror Stop veren be File name Extemal power supply OFF fStop bd it History No Item 16 100 Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple PLC settings Default Check End Cancel b Set the set time of the constant scan longer than the maximum scan time of the sequence program Also set the constant scan set time shorter than the WDT set time WDT Set Time gt Constant Scan Set Time gt Sequence Program maximum Scan Time If the sequence program scan time is longer than the constant scan set time the Process CPU detects PRG TIME OVER an error code 5010 the sequence program is executed with the scan time by ignoring the constant scan Constant
58. Poi i AN T SET P SENP When switched from STOP to RUN e When the power is turned on when reset Poi i AN T SET I a SEIO When switched from STOP to RUN Operation check error Default ad Stop 1 OPERATION ERROR When an instruction is executed FOR to NEXT i i Bak to instruction structure FOR NEXT ERROR CALL to RET instruction structure Ee CAN T EXECUTE P When an instruction is executed Program error error Interrupt program eror SFC operation check error al SFCP OPE ERROR When an instruction is executed Default Stop SFC program execution error ISFCP EXEERROR EXE ERROR When switched When switched from STOPtoRUN STOP to RUN SFC block execution error BLOCK EXE ERROR When an instruction is executed SFC step execution error STEP EXE ERROR When an instruction is executed Watch dog error supervision WDT ERROR PLC error Program time exceeded PRG TIME OVER Al MULTI CPU DOWN Heel e When the power is turned on when reset Multiple PLC consistency error CPU VER ERR e When the power is turned on when reset Instruction code check When an instruction is executed Other PLC major error e When the power is turned on when reset Annunciator check F 2k k ok k When an instruction is executed CHK Instruction check lt CHK gt ERR x gt x x When an instruction is executed 1 Can be changed to continues in the GX Developer function parameter setting 7 64 7
59. Process CPU uses the I O Refresh setting to update output and input from an I O module and an intelligent function module The I O Refresh Setting button is used to update the range of selected programs Make the I O Refresh setting for a scan execution type program if you want to receive an input X or produce an output Y before executing the fixed scan execution type program Initial device value Comments can not be used in the program b There are following 5 execute types 1 Initial execution Initial This program type is executed once only at power ON or when STOP RUN switching occurs See Section 4 2 1 2 Scan execution Scan This program type is executed once per scan beginning from the scan which follows execution of the initial execution program See Section 4 2 2 3 Low speed execution Low speed This program type is executed only when a constant scan setting is made or when a time is set for execution of low speed execution type programs e When a constant scan setting is made the program is executed during the surplus time of a scan execution type program When a time for execution of low speed execution type programs is set the program is executed during this set time See Section 4 2 3 4 Stand by Wait This program is executed only when its execution is requested See Section 4 2 4 5 Fixed scan execution Fixed scan Program that is executed at time intervals specified in the Fixed scan and
60. RUN Status The output Y status before the STOP status when switching from STOP status to Run status can be set at the PLC System tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box Qn H Parameter PLC name PLC system Jeuc file Puc RAS Device Proaram Boot file SFc 10 assignment Timer limit setting Low 100 ms 1ms 1000ms speed High f10 0 0 1me 1 Seal ms 0 1ms 100ms r RUN PAUSE contacts RUN Xx 0 1 FFF PAUSE Xx lt 0 lt 1 FFF Output mode setting at STOP to RUN r Remote reset I Allow r Output mode at STOP to RUN Previous state Recalculate output is 1 scan later Floating point arithmetic processing ri Perform internal arithmetic operations in double precision r Intelligent functional module setting Interrupt pointer setting Settings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple PLC settings Common pointer P After 0 4095 Number of empty slots fie gt Points m System interrupt settings Interrupt counter start No l 0 768 Fixed scan interval 128 100 0 ms 0 5ms 1000ms 129 40 0 ms 0 5ms 1000ms 130 20 0 ms O 5ms 1000ms High speed interrupt setting 131 M00 ms 0 5ms 1000ms d r Interrupt program 7 Fixed scan program setting T High speed execution r Module synchronization IV Synchronize intelligent module s pulse up rA PLC
61. SM330 ON Method in which even if there is surplus time low speed execution type program operation is not continued and operation starts again from the next scan Execution condition for low speed execution type programs speed execution type i When constant scan time When low speed program programs is set execution time is set The low speed execution type program is re executed The low speed execution type program is re executed 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 1 If a constant scan time has been designated the low speed execution type program will be executed repeatedly during the constant scan s surplus time Therefore the low speed execution type program s execution time varies from scan to scan As the low speed execution type program will not be executed at all if the constant scan s surplus time is 0 5 ms or less a constant scan time setting should be designated which provides a surplus time of more than 0 5 ms 2 If a low speed program execution time has been designated the low speed execution type program will be executed repeatedly in accordance with that time setting Therefore the scan time will vary from scan to scan x3 If a constant scan time has been designated the surplus time after completion of low speed END processing is waiting time and execution of ascan execution type program starts when the constant scan time has elapsed This means t
62. Sampling trace started Sampling trace is suspended when SM801 goes OFF When SM701 is OFF characters up to NUL 00H code are output M1049 aie e When SM701 is ON ASCII codes of 16 characters are output e Switched ON to disable the CHG instruction SM1051 Switched ON when program transfer is requested e When SM1052 is ON the SEG instruction is executed as SEG instruction OFF 7SEG segment display an I O partial refresh instruction M9052 1 SM1052 e When SM1052 is OFF the SEG instruction is executed as a 7 SEG display instruction M9054 SM1054 SM205 STEP RUN flag OFF STEP RUN not in effect Switched on when the RUN key switch is in STEP RUN ON STEP RUN in effect position QnA Status latch OFF Not completed e Turned on when status latch is completed Turned off by M9055 SM1055 completion flag ON Completed reset instruction OFF Other than when P set M9056 SM1056 being requested Provides P set request after transfer of the other ON P set being requested program for example subprogram when main program is SM1057 being requested off when P I setting is complete SM1058 SM1060 APP 12 OFF Sampling trace in e Turned on upon completion of sampling trace performed M9043 SM1043 SM805 the ZCOM instruction and data communication request Automatically switched OFF when transfer is complete OFF Other than when P set being run is complete during run Automatically switched SM1059 Sub program 2
63. When a monitor condition is established during the monitor interval of GX Developer the monitor will be performed even if a monitor condition is established at a shorter interval than the monitor interval Step No 100 MO l XO D1 5 Monitor timing QCPU 2 Monitor Stop Condition Set Up Choose Online gt Monitor gt Monitor stop condition to open the Monitor Stop Condition dialog box The following shows an example of stopping a monitoring operation at the leading edge of Y71 Monitor stop condition V Device Device Condition C word device E a DEC i bit integer x _Suspend_ Close Bitdevice YF ll p z peers Step No aways a When Step No is specified 1 Monitoring is stopped when the status at execution of the specified step becomes as specified 2 The specification method for the execution status is shown below a When changing from non execution status to executing status lt P gt b When changing from executing status to non execution status lt F gt c Always when executing only lt ON gt d Always when not executing only lt OFF gt e Always regardless of status lt Always gt 3 When Step No is not specified the monitoring operation is stopped after the Process CPU END processing 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q b When Device is specified Word Device or Bit Device can be specified 1 When Word Device is selecte
64. and parameter data The program capacities of the CPUs are shown below Q12PHCPU 124 k steps e Q25PHCPU 252 k steps If the CPU module capacity is only adequate for the program the parameter data should be stored in the standard ROM memory card Designating a program file name The file name of the program to be stored in the Process CPU must be designated This file name is used when writing the program and parameters from GX Developer to the Process CPU and when designating the program to be executed in the Process CPU See Chapter 6 for details regarding file names Designating devices The number of devices required for the program must be determined See Chapter 10 for details regarding devices which can be used in the Process CPU Device initial value setting Designate whether or not the device initial value settings are to be used in the Process CPU devices and intelligent function modules See Section 10 13 2 for details regarding device initial values 12 1 12 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAMS TO PROCESS CPU MELSEC Q 12 1 2 Procedure for writing programs to the Process CPU 12 2 The procedure for writing programs and parameters created with GX Developer to the Process CPU standard ROM is shown below In order to write programs and parameters to the Process CPU standard ROM the valid parameters settings must be designated by the Process CPU DIP switches SW2 SW3 and the boot settings must be design
65. cen ROM ori haved memory 8 kbyte Program memory 14 252 1 Memory card RAM 256 So lt Standard RAM 2 Only one file register and one local device Standard ROM oo o o oa S a G Standard ROM number of writings Max 100000 times Po X 1 124 is the maximum number of programs that can be executed on Process CPU x 2 The maximum number of sequence steps for one program for which the parameters are stored in another drive and executed with the Process CPU can be calculated with the following expression Program size File header size default 34 steps Refer to the Process CPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals for details on the program size and file x 3 The CPU shared memory is not latched The CPU shared memory is cleared when the power is turned on to the PLC or when the CPU module is reset 3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION MELSEC Q Performance Specifications continued a poet Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Number of I O devices points 8192 points X YO to 1FFF Number of devices usable on program Number of points Number of occupied I O points 4096 points X YO to FFF accesible to actual I O modules Default 8192 points MO to 8191 Latch relay 7 Default 8192 points LO to 8191 Link relay B Default 8192points BO to 1FFF Default 2048 points TO to 2047 for low high speed timer 3 Select between low high speed timer by instructions The measurement unit of the low high speed ti
66. e Collation check of I O unit e Check of battery Set when an operation error detail factor is stored at SD1091 and remains set after normal status is restored e Set when an error occurred at execution of the microcomputer program package and remains set after normal status is restored After the head address of the required I O module is set to SD251 switching SM251 on allows the I O module to be changed in online mode One module is only allowed to be changed by one setting To be switched on in the program or peripheral device test mode to change the module during CPU RUN To be switched on in peripheral device test mode to change the module during CPU STOP RUN STOP mode must not be changed until O module change is complete Turned on if the SFC program is registered and turned off if it is not Should be turned on by the program if the SFC program is to be started If turned off operation output of the execution step is turned off and the SFC program is stopped e Selects the starting step when the SFC program is restarted using SM322 ON All execution conditions when the SFC program stopped are cleared and the program is started with the initial step of block 0 OFF Started with the step of the block being executed when the program stopped Once turned on the program is latched in the system and remains on even if the power is turned off Should be turned off by the sequence program when turn
67. for the timer retentive timer and counter 2 Memory capacity Use the following expression to obtain the memory capacity of an internal user device 3 7 Bit devices capacity Word devices capacity Timer retentive timer and counter capacity lt 29k a For bit devices For bit devices 16 points are calculated as 1 word M L F V B total number of points Bit device capacity 16 Word 10 3 10 3 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q b For timer T retentive timer ST and Counter C For the timer retentive timer and counter 16 points are calculated as 18 words T ST C total number of points 16 Timer retentive counter capacity x 18 Word c For word devices For data registers D and link registers W 16 points are calculated as 16 words D W total number of points 16 Word device capacity x 16 Word POINT 1 When an internal user device s number of usable points setting is changed the following files which were created under the previous setting cannot be used as they are e The sequence program e The SFC program After changing the setting the sequence program and SFC program must be read from the Process CPU to GX Developer and then they must be written back to the Process CPU again 10 4 10 4 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 1 Inputs X 1 Definition a Inputs transmit commands or data to the Process CPU from an external device such as pus
68. scan execution type programs is all added to this Measurement range Main program Sub routine program Measurement range 2 Measuring Scan Time To measure scan time follow the following steps a Display the leading edge of the circuit of which scan time to be measured and set the monitor mode Y20 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q b The scan time measurement range is specified The specified area is highlighted c Choose Online Monitor Scantime measurement to open Scan time Measurement dialog box Scantime measurement MAIN1 Measurement limit ET ar Start step 52 End step fios so Scantime Close Tst time ms Present ms Most ms Least ms d Click on the Start button Scantime measurement MAIN1 Measurement limit SET art Start step End step i Scantime Close 1st time 0 100 ms Present 0 100 ms Most 0 100 ms Least 0 100 ms 3 Precautions a Set the Measurement limit so that the value of Start step is larger than that of End step b The scan time to skip to another program file cannot be measured c If the measurement time is less than 0 100 ms 0 000 ms is displayed d If ameasurement range is specified between the FOR instruction and the NEXT instruction scan time will show the execution time of making a measurement in the measurement range between specified steps 7 46 7
69. short circuit or solder the battery Mishandling of battery can cause overheating or cracks which could result in injury and fires e Switch all phases of the external power supply off when cleaning the module or retightening the terminal or module mounting screws Not doing so could result in electric shock Undertightening of terminal screws can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening of screws can cause damages to the screws and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction Startup and Maintenance precautions A CAUTION e The online operations conducted for the CPU module being operated connecting the peripheral device especially when changing data or operation status shall be conducted after the manual has been carefully read and a sufficient check of safety has been conducted Operation mistakes could cause damage or problems with of the module e Do not disassemble or modify the modules Doing so could cause trouble erroneous operation injury or fire e Use acellular phone or PHS more than 25cm 9 85 inch away from the PLC Not doing so can cause a malfunction e Switch all phases of the external power supply off before mounting or removing the module If you do not switch off the external power supply it will cause failure or malfunction of the module Note that online module change can be made when the QnPHCPU is used Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can
70. they are executed one by one in ascending order of the program in the PLC parameters 3 END processing END processing is performed when all initial execution type programs are completed and the scan execution type program is then executed from the next scan Power supply ON STOP to RUN i T a ar D Initial execution type program A y Initial execution Fa y Executed by program type program B ca setting order l Initial execution type program n i 4 END processing 5 l Scan execution I type program E 4 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 Initial scan time a This is the execution time period for initial execution type programs If multiple initial execution type programs are executed it is the execution time period in which all those programs are executed When an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program is executed while an initial execution type program is running the execution time of the interrupt program fixed scan execution type program will be added to the initial execution type program b The Process CPU measures the initial scan time and stores the result in special registers SD522 SD523 1 The initial scan time can be checked by monitoring the SD522 and SD523 special registers sp522 s0523 fee 2 es less than 1 ms initial scan time unit ws gt Stores the initial scan t
71. v 3630 4 p33 Re z 5 ea x 7 6455 z X 7 J6 6 7 X M If the start X and Y are not input the PLC assigns them automatically It is not possible to check correctly when there is a slot of the unsetting on the way r Standard settingf Base model name Power model name Extention cable Base mode Auto C Detail 8 fixation 12 fixation Jsettings should be set as same when Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Read PLC data using multiple PLC HAW error a time PLC Control PLC operation i mode PLC No 2 PLC No 3 PLC Empty KIKIKI 4 PLC No 1 PLC No 1 v PLC No 1 PLC No 1 y PLC No 1 PLC No 1 7 PLC No 1 PLC No 1 PLC No 1 PLC No 1 PLC No 1 PLC No 1 End Cancel Jsettings should be set as same when using multiple PLC O Allocation Window Select Detailed Settings to display the detailed setting window Confirm the control PLC settings 19 8 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 2 Setup of parameters other than the multiple PLC system settings Set parameters written onto the hard disk or floppy disk Se End 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q MEMO 19 10 19 10 APP APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDIX APPENDIX 1 Special Relay List APP 1 Special relays SM are internal r
72. 10 26 In order to use interrupt counters at first interrupt counter No setting must be designated at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box 256 points are then allocated for interrupt counters beginning from the first counter No which is designated If C300 is designated as the first interrupt counter No numbers C300 to C555 will be allocated for interrupt counters C300 10 C301 11 C302 12 Interrupt counter 256 points C555 1255 er iain Values corresponding to the interrupt counter No In order to use an interrupt counter an interruption permitted status must be established by E1 instruction at the main routine program 10 26 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 4 Precautions a One interrupt pointer is insufficient to execute interrupt counter and interrupt program operation Moreover an interrupt program cannot be executed by an interrupt counter setting designated at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box b If the processing items shown below are in progress when an interruption occurs the counting operation will be delayed until processing of these items is completed The count processing starts after the execution of programs is completed Even if the same interruption occurs again while processing of these items is in process only one interruption will be counted e During execution of sequence program instructions e During int
73. 10 Timing chart showing response of Output Y when Input X turns ON 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 8 Numeric Values which Can Be Used in Sequence Programs Numeric and alphabetic data are expressed by 0 OFF and 1 ON numerals in the Process CPU This expression form is called binary code BIN The hexadecimal HEX expression form in which BIN data are expressed in 4 bit units and the BCD binary coded decimal expression form are applicable to the Process CPU Real numbers may also be used See Section 4 8 4 The numeric expressions by BIN HEX BCD and Decimal DEC notations are shown in Table 4 1 below Table 4 1 BIN HEX BCD and Decimal Numeric Expressions BCD DEC Decimal HEX H decimal BIN Bi Binary Coded Decimal 9 o0 IZ nmo owk oO 01111 4444 1111 0111 1444 11113 e 1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 Hide 1111 1111 4444 4444 1111 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 1 External numeric inputs to Process CPU When inputting numeric values to the Process CPU from an external source such as digital switch use BCD binary coded decimal which allows the same setting as decimal form However the Process CPU handles the values as BIN data since the operation is based on BIN form if it uses values set in the BCD form as they are Therefore the Process CPU operates with numeric value
74. 12 2 1 Items to consider when creating multiple programS sssssssesssssessiesrssrsirsinssnsrnsrsrnntnsrnnrnsrnnrnsrnnnn 12 5 12 2 2 Procedure for writing programs to the Process CPU e ccecceceeceeteeeeceeceeeeeseeseeeeetaeteeeeseeeaees 12 6 TEPER E Sa a sbeesacg she tarabences chbatacd she audg iaeasdag abe caocs sbeeudeg abaandug iogesdeg sbeskoce ibeesoeg abuaaoes heeded dustorg heey 13 1 13 2 Outline of Multiple PLC Systems ceeccecceceeceeseseeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaesaesaecaeeeaeeaecaecaeseaeeaesaeseseaeeeseeneaeeaees 13 3 13 3 Differences with Single CPU Systems cccceecceceeceeseeeeceeceeeeaeeeesaeeeseaesaesaeseeeeaesaesaeseeseaeeaeeeeaeeaees 13 5 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS 14 1to 14 18 14 1 System Configurations r a a aA eta E ATA 14 1 14 2 Precautions For Multiple PLC System Configuration c ccscceceeseeceeeeeeeceeeeeeseeeaeseeesaeeaeseeeeeeateaes 14 4 14 2 1 CPU module mounting positions cece ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaecaeseeeeaeeaesaeseseaesaesaeseeseaseaeeaeeeetaee 14 4 14 2 2 Precautions when using Q series I O modules and intelligent function MOUIE SAT A Aa A AE AAR AAA EA AAEE ARER EAEE TAIR ARAR i AAA AAE LARRIA 14 7 14 2 3 Modules that have mounting reStriCtiONS ce eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeseatenes 14 8 14 2 4 Compatible GX Developers and GX Configurators ssssssesessssssesrsersrernsrsrnsrsrnnrnsrsnnsnsnnnns
75. 2 If only one program is executed it is processed under the scan execution type program condition without designation by the program in the PLC parameters 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 1 2 Sub routine programs 1 Definition of sub routine program a Asub routine program begins from a pointer P _ and ends at a RET instruction b A sub routine program is executed only when called by a CALL instruction e g CALL P FCALL P from the main routine program c Sub routine program application 1 The overall step count can be reduced by using a sub routine program as a program which is executed several times in one scan 2 The step count of a constantly executed program can be reduced by using a sub routine program as a program which is executed only when a given condition is satisfied 2 Sub routine program management Sub routine programs are created after the main routine program after FEND instruction and the combination of main and sub routine programs can be managed as one program a When created after the main routine program e A sub routine program is created between the main routine program s FEND and END instructions e Because there are no restrictions on the order in which sub routine programs are created it is not necessary to set the pointers in ascending order when creating multiple sub routine programs e Either a local pointer or a common pointer can be used
76. 2 24 3 5 54 2 7 7 3 10 aa E Input reading timing Timer accuracy 1 scan 1 scan time timer time limit setting to 1 scan time 10 22 10 22 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q c The timer response accuracy from when reading input X until when outputing it is 2 scan time timer time limit setting Precautions for using timers The following are a few precautions regarding timer use a A given timer cannot be designated by OUT T12 more than once in a single scan This designation results in measurement since the timer current value is updated at execution of each OUT Tit instruction OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT D Ti Teg T END Ti Ts Sequence L I L program gt Current value is updated 1 Scan I b When a timer for example T1 coil is ON the OUT T1 instruction cannot be skipped using a CJ instruction and so forth If the OUT T instruction is skipped the timer current value will not be updated c Timers cannot be used in interrupt programs and fixed scan execution programs d Ifthe timer set value is 0 the contact turnes ON when the OUT Ti instruction is executed e Ifthe set value changes to a value which is higher than the current value following a timer time out the time out status will remain in effect and timer operation will not be performed f Ifa timer is used at a low speed execution type program the current value will be added to the low speed scan time wh
77. 2 Memory Capacity Model Name Memory Capacity Max Number of Files Stored Q12PHCPU 124 k steps 507904 bytes 124 files Q25PHCPU 252 k steps 1032192 bytes 252 files REMARK In computing a memory capacity 1 step is equal to 4 bytes PROCE PU FILE 6 OCESS CPU S MELSEC Q 6 4 About the Standard RAM 1 What is the standard RAM a The standard RAM is used when using file registers or local devices without a memory card being mounted on the Process CPU b The standard ROM must be formatted by using GX Developer when using the Process CPU for the first time Refer to the GX Developer manual for details on the formatting method c Data can be written into the standard RAM by using the online function Write to PLC 2 Stored Data A standard RAM holds two files file register file and local device file Any other files cannot be written into a standard RAM 3 Format a Formatting To format a standard RAM choose Online Format PLC memory and then select Standard RAM in the Target memory list box See Section 6 2 for the PLC Memory Format dialog box b Memory capacity after formatted Table 6 3 shows the memory capacity of a formatted standard RAM Table 6 3 Memory Capacity Number of Files Stored CPU Type Number of Files Stored Ele feger Q12PHCPU 128 k words 256 kbytes Q25PHCPU 128 k words 256 kbytes e er 4 Precautions When setting file registers and local devices in the standard RA
78. 200 and that of slot No 4 to 70 at the I O assignment tab screen of GX Developer Qn H Parameter x PLC name Puc system Puc file Puc RAS Device Program Boot file SFC 1 0 assignment m 1 0 Assignment A st V Te __Modeinome T1 Pone T stafa Switch setina mje ae ejo Sn Gea 5 200 is designated as the head I O number Detailed setting 70 is designated as the head 1 0 number When the head I O number If the start X and Y are not input the PLC assigns them automatically is not designated the I O It is not possible to check correctly when there is a slot of the unsetting on the way number following the 3rd slot Standard setting will be assigned fa Base mode Auto Increase Increase2 Increase3 8 fixation Increased aati lacras 12 fixation Settings should be set as same when Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Read PLC data using multiple PLC Acknowledge xY assignment Multiple PLC settings Default Check End Cancel c I O number assignment after the I O assignment with GX Developer Q38B 0O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 v o 2 cS 2 2 K 2 K cS 3 3 3 53 ko ne ne ne ne me mo me me me fo fo O G e O e e e O 3 3 E E E E E E gt gt 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 O 5 5 5 gt a O O O O g 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
79. 21 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding 7 C d Number Name Meaning Explanation Tg ACPU A ing DoT T Error number that h forms error r SD50 Error reset performs error reset Stores error number that performs error reset O Rem All corresponding bits go ON when battery voltage drops e Subsequently these remain ON even after battery voltage has been returned to normal B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Bit pattern gt CPU error Battery low _ indicating where L gt Memory card A alarm Nie latch battery voltage drop gt Memory card A error occurred gt Memory card B alarm gt Memory card B error When High Performance model QCPU is used this flag is always OFF because memory card B is used as standard memory Bit pattern Same configuration as SD51 above indicating where e Subsequently goes OFF when battery voltage is restored to SD52 Battery low batterv volt ge drol normal New y 9 P When QCPU is used this flag is always OFF because memory card B is used as standard memory e Every time the input voltage falls to or below 85 AC power 65 DC power of the rating during calculation of the CPU module the value is incremented by 1 and stored in BIN S Error D9005 O Rem code Blown fuse Number of module Value stored here is the lowest station 1 O number of the module eDe0 with blown fuse with the blown fuse S Error Paved VO module I O module O Rem
80. 4 File register designation method 10 49 1 Block switching format MELSEC Q The block switching format designates the number of file register points in 32k point RO to R32767 units If multiple blocks are used switch to the block No to be used in the RSET instruction for further file register settings Settings are designated in the RO to R32767 range for each block RSET K1 MOV DO RO RSET K2 MOV DO RO 2 Serial number access format H H H H RO designation for block 1 RO designation for block 2 RO Block 0 R32767 R0 Block 1 R32767 RO Block 2 KAINININ ININ ININ INNIN YN Memory card This format is used for designating file register beyond 32k points by device name Multiple blocks of file registers can be used as a continuous file register H mov bo zrs2768 H k H mov bo zress36 ZRO Block 0 ZR32767 id gt ZR32768 Block 1 ZR65535 ZR65536 Block 2 KRADDRADAMAYrnwwws Memory card 10 49 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 7 5 Precautions in using file registers 1 Using file register Nos not registered or outside the registered range a When file register files are not registered in the Process CPU no error occurs even if reading writing to file registers Reading data from a file register results in the following e Undefined data is stored in the standar
81. 5 to 8 LED display priority ranking Priorities 9 to 10 lock Clock data jenptaes year month Clock data lock Clock data Clock data minute second Clock data Clock data day of week APP 25 Special Register List Continued e Set when the device test mode is executed on GX Developer to the error number setting priorities The setting areas for priorities are as follows B8 B7 operation stop including parameter settings errors will be indicated B15 Bi2B11 B4B3 BO SD207 Priority 4 Priority 3 Priority 2 Priority 1 SD208 Priority 8 i Priority 7 Priority 6 1 Priority 5 SD209 Priority 105 Priority 9 Default Value SD207 H4321 SD208 H8765 SD207 HOO0A9 e No display is made if 0 is set However even if 0 has been set information concerning CPU by the LEDs without conditions See Section 7 9 5 REMARK for the priority order e The year last two digits and month are stored as BCD code at SD210 as shown below B15 to Bi2B11 to B8 B7 B4 B3 so Example to T i 1 i H9307 The day and hour are stored as BCD code at SD211 as shown below B15 to B12B11 t so Example to T 1 1 1 e The minutes and seconds after the hour are stored as BCD code at SD212 as shown below to B12B11 to B8 B7 31st 10 a m H3110 so Example Stores
82. 512 bytes If a file is transferred from a memory card to a program memory during a boot run the size of available memory is changed after the file was transferred Table 6 7 List of File Size Function Estimated File Size in bytes Default 564 increased by the parameter setting For Reference Boot setting to 70 18 x Number of files Parameter i ae With the MELSECNET H setting to maximum 4096 units increased With Ethernet setting to maximum 922 units increased With CC LINK setting to maximum 251 units increased Sequence program 136 4 X Number of steps 74 Total of comment data size of each device Comment data size of a device 10 10250 x a 40 x b a quotient of Number of device points 256 e b remainder of Number of device points 256 Device init 66 44 x n 2 x Total number of device points specified in the device initial value setting evice ini e n specified number of device initial values File register 2 X Number of file register points 362 20 2 X Number of word device points Number of bit device pints 8 xX Number Sampling trace data of traces 12 x Device range 1 Failure history data 72 54 X Number of failures stored SFC trace data Maximum 48 k in 1 k units 70 6 Type of specified device 2 x total number of M and V points 16 D points 18 x Total points of T ST and C 16 X number of programs 1 e Symbols M V D T ST an
83. Abnormal M9226 SM1226 Reverse loop error OFF Normal Depends on the error condition of the reverse loop line ON Abnormal OPE hot Being executed Depends on whether or not the master station is executing M9227 SM1227 Loop test status ON Forward or reverse loop P a forward or a reverse loop test test execution underway Local station OFF RUNO STEP RUN Depends on whether or not a local station is in STOP or M9232 Meee operation status Saus PAUSE mode p ON STOP or PAUSE status i APP 15 Depends on presence or absence of the link card hardware error Judged by the CPU APP 15 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Details Conversion Modification SM1233 error detect poo status Local station remote I O OFF No communications Depends on the results of initial communication between a SM1236 station initial ON Communications local or remote I O station and the master station communications underway Parameter communication etc status Local station error detect status Local station remote I O station parameter OFF No errors Depends on whether or not a local station has detected an ON Error detection error in another station OFF No errors Depends on whether or not a local or a remote I O station ON Error detection has detected any link parameter error in the master station OFF Normal Depends on the error condition o
84. All I O modules can be used on a multiple PLC system c Use function version B intelligent function modules on the multiple PLC system Function version A intelligent function modules can be used if set up as control PLC by the PLC No 1 Mounting position of CPU module see Section 14 2 1 Process CPUs can be mounted on the CPU slot from the right hand side of the power unit sequentially The Motion CPUs are mounted together on the slot to the right of the Process CPUs The PC CPU module is installed on the extreme right side in the multiple PLC system The total number of Process CPU Motion CPU and PC CPU module must be up to four Multiple PLC system parameters see Section 14 2 6 In comparison with independent CPU systems there are more PLC parameter items on a multiple PLC system Of the PC parameters that have been added to the multiple PLC system the parameters that must be set are listed below e Number of CPUs Sets the number of mounted Process CPUs Motion CPUs and PC CPU module that are in use e Control PLC settings Sets which Process CPU Motion CPU and PC CPU module controls while modules Sameness check see Section 14 2 6 A setting exists to indicate that the Process CPU Motion CPU PC CPU module used are the same in the number of CPUs control PLC settings and other multiple PLC system parameters The Process CPU Motion CPU PC CPU module run a check sameness check to ascertain that the multiple
85. B3 BO CPU switch status e The following bit patterns are used to store the s on the CPU B15 B12B11 B8 B7 gt 4 gt 4 gt 4 Vacant B8 through BC correspond to SW1 through SW5 of system setting switch 1 0 OFF 1 ON BD through BF are vacant atuses of the LEDs BAT ALARM following format B15 BOOT Vacant Vacant MODE Bit patterns for MODE 0 OFF 1 Green 2 Orange The operating status of the remote I O module is stored in the B4 B3 lt 4 1 Remote I O module operating status The CPU module operating status is stored as indicated in the following figure B1 5 B1 2B1 1 B8 B7 Always 2 STOP B4 B3 Operating status of CPU STOP PAUSE cause riority is earliest first RUN STEP RUN STOP PAUSE Switch Remote contact Remote operation from the GX Developer or Serial Communication 3 Internal program instruction 4 Errors w OWN 0 MELSEC Q Set by When set n S Status change S Every END processing D9015 format change APP 24 APPENDICES aie 0 Test not yet executed 1 During X device test 2 During Y device test 3 During X Y device test Device test execution type Priorities 1 to 4 When error is generated the LED display flicker is made according Priorities
86. D D D MITSUBISHI F F F F ra a le 5 Slot Basic Base Unit 245mm 9 65inch i depth 98mm 3 86inch k 8 Slot Basic Base Unit 328mm 12 92inch Al 12 Slot Basic Base Unit 439mm 17 30inch 11 Connection of up to seven extension base units a The Process CPU can connect to seven extension base units eight base units including the main and accept up to 64 modules b The overall distance of the extension cables is up to 13 2m to ensure high degree of extension base unit arrangement 12 Memory extension by memory card The Process CPU is provided with a memory card installation connector to which a memory card of 32 Mbyte max can be connected 32 Mbyte is available when a ATA card is used When a memory card of large capacity is installed a large capacity of file can be controlled comments to all data devices can be set up and the programs in the past can be stored in the memory as they are in the form of the corrected histories If a memory card is not installed a program can be stored onto the standard ROM built in the CPU module and 128k points of the file registers can be handled by the standard RAM 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 13 Data can be written automatically to standard ROM You need not use GX Developer to write parameters programs on a memory card to the standard ROM of the Process CPU When the standard ROM is used to perform ROM operation you can load a memory card into the Process CPU and write parameters
87. Developers While a remote operation is being performed by one GX Developer another remote operation cannot be performed by another GX Developer After a remote operation that is being performed by one GX Developer is cancelled a new remote operation can be performed by another GX Developer For example a remote PAUSE operation is being performed by one GX Developer the PAUSE status will remain active even if a remote STOP remote RUN operation is attempted by another GX Developer When a remote RUN operation is performed by the GX Developer that is performing a remote PAUSE operation and then that remote operation is cancelled a new remote operation can be performed by another GX Developer 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 7 Selecting the Response Speed of the Q Series Module I O Response Time 7 7 1 Selecting the response time of the input module 1 Selecting the response time of the input module The input response time of a Q Series input module can be set to a desired response time 1 ms 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms or 70 ms The input module reads external inputs at the specified response time The default value of an input response time is 10 ms ON External input a ON OFF Input module S R Input response time T 2 Setting the Input Response Time At the I O Assignment tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box specify the desired input response time Select Input in the Type column of a slot for which to specify the
88. EERE a e ATA card 2 Standard ROM 4 Memory Capacity and Formatting The following table shows the size of a memory of the Process CPU and whether to format a memory fo Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Whether to Format Standard RAM 256 kbyte tees 8 te _ 496 kbyte 252 k steps 1008 kbyte o o O Standard ROM ROM 496 ag6 kbyte si 1008 kbyte x2 Required SRAM Q2MEM 1MBS 1 Mbyte Use the GX Devel se the eveloper or a card Q2MEM 2MBS 2 Mbyte k personal computer Memory Q2MEM 2MBF 2 Mbyte Flash card Not required card Q2MEM 4MBF 4 Mbyte Q2MEM 8MBA 8 Mbyte Required ATA card Q2MEM 16MBA 16 Mbyte Use the GX Developer or a Q2MEM 32MBA 32 Mbyte personal computer 1 If the memory is in the initial status or it is unstable due to low voltage of the battery Q6BAT formatting automatically starts upon power on or resetting of the PLC However format with GX Developer before starting operation x2 The standard ROM is used in ROM formation of the program memory and therefore formatting is unnecessary for it 6 PROCESS CPU FILES MELSEC Q 6 2 Program Memory 1 What is the Program Memory a The Process CPU s program memory is an internal RAM that stores programs executed by the Process CPU b The data storage in the program memory is backed up by Process CPU s built in batteries Q6BAT c Before using the Process CPU for the first time the program memory must be formatted by GX Developer For
89. FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 12 Sampling Trace Function 1 The SRAM card Q2MEM 1MBS Q2MEM 2MBS is required to store the trace data and trace results After mounting the SRAM card to the Process CPU execute sampling trace 2 Sampling trace is not executed if the Flash card Q2MEM 2MBF Q2MEM 4MBF or ATA card Q2MEM 8MBA Q2MEM 16MBA Q2MEM 32MBA is installed because the cards cannot store the trace data and trace results 1 What is Sampling Trace Function a This function samples the device continuously on the Process CPU at specified timings b The changed contents of the device that program uses during debugging can be checked at the specified timing The sampling trace function reads device contents if trigger conditions are satisfied c The sampling trace samples the contents of the specified device at a set interval sampling cycle and stores the trace results at the sampling trace file in the memory card d The sampling trace file stores the trace condition data and trace execution data necessary to perform the sampling trace When trace is started by using GX Developer the trace is performed as many times as specified The sampling trace area is 60 kbyte The number of traces can be obtained by dividing 60 kbyte by the number of bytes specified as a device The experssion is Number of Bit Devices 8 2 x Number of Word Devices x1 Round up result of number of Bit Devices 8 in the expression
90. GX Developer QCPU1 indicates the PLC No and 1 on the I O module and intelligent function module indicates that their control PLC is the PLC No 1 13 3 13 3 13 OUTLINE OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS 13 4 MELSEC Q 2 Multiple PLC system setup It is necessary to set up the Number of mounted CPU modules and the Control PLC with PLC parameters in all CPU modules onto which main base units are mounted in order to control a multiple PLC system see Chapter 9 3 Multiple PLC system access range a b It is possible for a multiple PLC system s control PLC to perform the I O refresh procedure on control modules and write in the buffer memory of intelligent function modules in the same way as a single CPU system It is possible to access non control modules in the following ways e Refresh the input for I O modules and intelligent function modules the PLC parameter multiple PLC setup is necessary e Read the intelligent function module s buffer memory e Download the output data for the output module the I O combination module and the intelligent function modules the PLC parameter multiple PLC setup is necessary However it is not possible to access non control modules in the following ways e Outputting data to the output module and intelligent function module e Writing data into the intelligent function module s buffer memory CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 QnPHCPU Input module Input module Q 2 D b D
91. I Use special relay special register from SM SD1000 Default Check End Cancel 3 Precaution If an output Y is forcefully turned ON with the Process CPU in the STOP status it will not remain in the ON status even if the STOP status is switched to the RUN status The output status is effected as set for Output mode at STOP to RUN at the PLC System tab screen 7 FUNCTION 7 5 Clock Function MELSEC Q 1 What is Clock Function a b Clock function reads the clock data inside the Process CPU with a sequence program and uses the data for clock management Also the time data is used for time maintenance for the Process CPU system functions such as those for failure history The clock operations are maintained using the battery Q6BAT even when the PLC power is off or when a momentary power failure for longer than the permitted time occurs Clock Data The following table lists the time data that are used for the Process CPU clock element Contents 1 to 12 0 to 23 24 hours 0 to 59 0 to 59 Year Month Day Minute Second Sunday Maw 2 oe Day of the week Thursday Friday Saturday 2 Writing Reading Time Data To From Clock Element a The following two methods can be used to write to the time data clock element 1 Method to write from GX Developer The time data is written to the clock element by displaying Online gt Set time
92. Interrupt program example Interrupt program execution Program execution Interrupt program for 10 activated Main routine program End of main FEND routine program Interrupt program gt 10 interrupt program Interrupt program gt 129 interrupt program Pa Fig 4 3 Interrupt Program Execution b When an interrupt factor occurs the interrupt program with the interrupt pointer number corresponding to that factor is executed However interrupt program execution varies according to the condition at that time 1 If two or more interrupts occur at the same time The interrupt programs are executed starting with the one corresponding to an interrupt pointer number I of the highest priority 2 The remaining interrupt programs remain on stand by until processing of the higher priority interrupt program is completed If the same interrupt factor as that being executed occurs before the interrupt program is processed the interrupt factor is stored in the memory and after the interrupt program has been processed the same interrupt program is executed again 2 When an instruction is being executed Interruptions are prohibited during execution of instructions If an interrupt factor occurs during execution of an instruction the interrupt program will be executed after processing of the instruction is completed 4 7 4 7 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC
93. K1X0 J10 K4B0 2 Designation range Link direct device designations are allowed for all the link devices in network modules Device outside the range specified by the network refresh parameters can also be designated a Writing 1 Writing is executed within that part of the link device range set as the send range in the common parameters of the network parameters that is outside the range specified as the refresh range in the network refresh parameters __ Process CPU _ _ Network module _ BO LB 0 Link range Refresh range j send range Writing range 10 35 10 35 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 2 Although writing is also allowed in the refresh range portion of the link device range specified by refresh parameters the link module s link device data will be rewritten when a refresh operation occurs Therefore when writing by link direct device the same data should also be written to the Process CPU related devices designated by refresh parameter Refresh parameter settings Network No 1 Process CPU W0 to W3F lt gt Network module LWO to LW3F Sequence program MOV K100 W1 _j 100 is written to network module LW1 when a refresh occurs MOV W1 J1 W1 jH 100 is written to network module LW1 when the MOV instruction is executed Writing timing QCPU Network module instruction execution wo j Wi Ww MOV K100 W1 Writ
94. No gt Instruction name gt I O No designation instruction For details on intelligent function module instructions refer to the corresponding manual for the intelligent function module to be used 10 59 10 59 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 11 5 Macro instruction argument device VD 1 Definition Macro instruction argument devices are used with ladders registered as macros When a VD setting is designated for a ladder registered as a macro conversion to the designated device is performed when the macro instruction is executed 2 Designating macro instruction argument devices Specify the devices transferred from sequence programs to macro registration ladders as macro instruction argument devices among the devices used in the ladders registered as macro with GX Developer 1 Designate devices that correspond to the macro argument devices used in the macro registration ladders in ascending order when using macro instructions in a sequence program Sequence program Ladder registered as a macro registration name MAX M MAX DO D1 RO gt vDo vDi MOV vpo vp2 Transfer to VD2 4K Transfer to VD1 Transfer to VDO lt vDo vD1 vov vD1 vp2 Name of ladder registered as a macro Actual sequence program executed at CPU gt Do p1 mov bo roH H lt Do pi mov n RO 1 1 With the macro instruction argument device VDO to VD9 can be used in one ladder registe
95. SFC program is valid For details on the use of SFC block devices refer to the QOPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC 10 11 2 SFC transition device TR This device is used for checking if a forced transition is designated for a specified transition condition in a specified SFC program block For details regarding the use of SFC transition devices refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC 10 11 3 Network No designation device J 1 Definition The network No designation device is used to designate the network No in data link instructions 2 Designating network No designation device The network No designation device is designated in the data link instruction as shown below H uP READ Jn H gt Network No designation device n network No gt Instruction name gt Network No designation instruction For details on data link instructions refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual 10 58 10 58 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 11 4 I O No designation device U 1 Definition I O No designation devices are used with instructions dedicated to intelligent function module to designate I O numbers 2 Designating the I O No designation device I O No designation devices are designated with the intelligent function module instructions as shown below 1GP READ Un 2 gt I O No designation device n I O
96. Send range for each PLC PLC side device PLE PLC share G Dev startir Point Start End Start End Not Noz No 3 No 4 The applicable device of head device is B M Y D W R ZR The unit of points that send range for each PLC is word JSettings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Check End Cancel l Open project Setting up transferred projects e Select the project into which existing multiple PLC settings and I O allocations are to be transferred e Click on Open zj cence Project drive fi a z ES Drive Path A JANMELSEC Project name E Cancel m 19 7 19 7 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM 1 Diversion of multiple PLC parameter x It is executed multiple PLC parameter utilization and all followina parameters will be overwritten 1 0 Assignment Setting I40 Assingment Standard setting Multiple PLC Setting Execute the multiple PLC parameter utilization Cancel Noof PLE p Onine module change IT Enable online module change with another PLC NoofPLC 4 z When the online module change is enabled with another PLC 1 0 status outside the group cannot be taken IT All station stop by stop error of PLC2 I Al station stop by stop error of PLC3 p Operating mode Out of group input output settings J Error operation mode at the stop of PLC M The input condit
97. Set OFF Keyboard input RKEY notregistered Goes ON at registration of keyboard input registration flag ON Keyboard input OFF if keyboard input is not registered registered S Status change After step trace OFF Not after trigger trigger ON Is after first trigger sc Instruction execution APP 9 APP 9 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 9 A to Q QnA conversion correspondences Special relays SM1000 to SM1255 are the relays which correspond to ACPU special relays M9000 to M9255 after A to Q QnA conversion All of these special relays are controlled by the system so that users cannot turn them ON OFF in the program If users want to turn these relays ON OFF the program should be modified to use QCPU QnACPU special relays For SM1084 and SM1200 through SM1255 however if a user can turn ON OFF some of special relays M9084 and M9200 through M9255 before conversion the user can also turn ON OFF the corresponding relays among SM1084 and SM1200 through SM1255 after the conversion For details on the ACPU special relays see the user s manuals for the individual CPUs and MELSECNET or MELSECNET B Data Link System Reference Manuals The processing time may be longer when converted special relays are used with QCPU Uncheck A series CPU compatibility setting within the PC system setting in GPPW parameters when converted special relays are not used The following are additional explanations about the Special Relay fo
98. The standard ROM is used for the ROM operation of the Process CPU b Programs stored in the standard ROM can be used after being read boosted to the program memory in accordance with the setting made at the Boot file tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box c The standard ROM does not need formatting d Writing into standard ROMs is performed with the GX Developer s on line PLC Writing flash ROM of Create Program Memory ROM see Section 6 6 1 It is also possible to write in a standard ROM from the memory card with Automatic writing in the standard ROM without using GX Developer POINTS 1 Before writing data to a standard ROM all previous data stored in the standard ROM are erased Therefore all data stored in a standard ROM must be read out and copied into the program memory at first There read through and modify it as necessary Then write the modified data back into a standard ROM at atime Please note that an error may occur if data stored in the standard ROM is used in a sequence program with data being written in the standard ROM For details on the formatting procedure by GX Developer refer to GX Developer manuals Programs are stored in the standard ROM in 1 k step units 2 Data Storage A standard ROM stores data such as parameters and programs See Section 6 1 for the data to store in the standard ROM 3 Memory Capacity Table 6 2 shows the memory capacity of standard ROMs Table 6
99. This function is used to confirm the status of the Process CPU and errors 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q e Module s detailed information This function is used to confirm the detailed information for selected modules Refer to the instruction manual for details on the relevant intelligent function module and intelligent function modules f Base information Enables the Overall Information and Base Information to be confirmed 1 Overall information Enables the number of base units in use and the number of modules mounted on the base units to be confirmed 2 Base information Enables the base name the number of slots the base type and the number of modules mounted onto the base for the selected base unit main base unit additional base units 1 to 7 to be confirmed g Product Information List Enables the individual information for mounted CPU modules I O modules and intelligent function modules to be confirmed type series model number head I O control PLC serial No function version Serial No Function version Product Information List TE stot Type series model name Points 1 0 no master PLC serial no ver l Q12PHCPU Intelli Q l pt 0000 Output Q 32pt 0010 CSV file creating Close 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 19 LED Display The Process CPU has an LED to indicate the Process CPU operation status on the front of the Process CPU The display details of each LED are described below
100. UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE 6 1 Base Unit Specification Table 6 2 Extension Cable Specification Table 6 3 The Names of The Parts of The Base Unit 6 4 Setting the Extension Base Unit 6 5 O Number Allocation 6 6 Guideline for Use of Extension Base Units Q5 L B 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY 7 1 Memory Card Specifications 7 2 Battery Specifications For CPU Module and SRAM Card 7 3 Handling the Memory Card 7 4 The Names of The Parts of The Memory Card 7 5 Memory Card Loading Unloading Procedures 7 6 Installation of Battery for CPU Module and Memory Card 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 8 1 Requirements for conformance to EMC Directive 8 1 1 Standards applicable to the EMC Directive 8 1 2 Installation instructions for EMC Directive 8 1 3 Cables 8 1 4 Power supply module 8 1 5 Others 8 2 Requirement to Conform to the Low Voltage Directive 8 2 1 Standard applied for MELSEC Q series PLC 8 2 2 MELSEC Q series PLC selection 8 2 3 Power supply 8 2 4 Control box 8 2 5 Grounding 8 2 6 External wiring 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 9 1 General Safety Requirements 9 2 Calculating Heat Generation by PLC 9 3 Module Installation 9 3 1 Precaution on installation 9 3 2 Instructions for mounting the base unit 9 3 3 Installation and removal of module 9 4 How to set Stage Numbers for the Extension Base Unit 9 5 Connection and Disconnection of Extension Cable 9 6 Wiring 9 6 1 The precautions on the wiring 9 6 2 Connecting to the power
101. When the RUN STOP switch is turned from STOP to RUN without the reset RUN LED flickers When the RUN STOP switch is turned from RUN to STOP to RUN again the Process CPU goes in the RUN status and the When STOP to RUN status becomes effective 4 3 2 I O refresh I O module refresh processing In I O refresh an input X is received from the input module intelligent function module and output Y of the Process CPU is sent to the output module intelligent function module The I O refresh is executed before the sequence program operation starts During constant scan execution the I O refresh is executed after the constant scan delay time has elapsed The I O refresh is executed at each constant scan cycle 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 3 Automatic refresh of the intelligent function module When automatic refresh of intelligent function modules is set communication with the intelligent function modules of the designated data is performed Refer to the manual of the intelligent function modules for details on the automatic refresh setting of intelligent function modules 4 3 4 END processing This is a post processing to return the sequence program execution to step 0 after completing the whole sequence program operation processing once a When a refresh request is made from the network module refresh processing is performed b When the trace point of the sampling tra
102. a This is a function to read the program device and intellignet function module status of the Process CPU by using GX Developer The Process CPU performs the END processing to handle monitor requests from GX Developer The results of Process CPU s END processing are displayed on the GX Developer side b By setting the monitoring conditions with GX Developer it is possible to monitor the Process CPU operation status under the specified conditions It is also possible to maintain the monitoring status under the specified conditions by setting the monitoring stop conditions c The use of local devices for execution of multiple programs makes it possible to monitor local device data 7 9 1 Monitor condition setting 1 Setting monitor execution conditions when monitoring circuits Choose Online gt Monitor gt Monitor condition to open the Monitor Condition dialog box The following shows an example in which to start a monitoring operation at the leading edge of Y70 Monitor condition z Select when monitoring gt F Device wah Hi Device Condition Suspend y setting the contents 4 E _Suspend of the device f Word device Close Select when monitoring gt Step No by setting Step No In case of SFC program It is not effective for SFC chart a When only Step No is specified 1 The monitor data sampled when the status previous to execution of the specified step becomes the spe
103. any of PLC No 1 to No 4 as a control PLC c Q Series interruption modules QI60 do not have a function version but are supported by multiple PLC systems PLCs No 1 to No 4 can be set up as control PLCs d Intelligent function modules of function version A can be used in multiple PLC system by setting PLC No 1 as acontrol PLC However only control PLC can be accessed from serial communication modules and other external modules MELSECNET H serial communication modules and other external modules cannot access non control PLCs The SP UNIT VER ERR error code 2150 occurs if any of PLC No 2 to No 4 has been set as a control PLC and the multiple PLC system will not be a started up 3 Ranges of access to control and non control modules In a multiple PLC system non control modules can be accessed by setting O setting outside of the group at the Multiple PLC settings dialog box in PLC Parameter The following table indicates accessibility to the control and non control modules in the multiple PLC system Accessibility Access target Non control module I O setting outside of the group Control module Disabled Enabled muo o x o O a a a as E eae me L o x o Buffer Read memory COSE T E ee ea O Accessible x Inaccessible The function version of intelligent function modules can be confirmed at the rated name plate of the intelligent function module and with the GX Developer s System monitor pr
104. any time while a sequence program is executed To change the execute type of a program use a PSCAN PLOW PSTOP or POFF instruction PLOW L NPSN scan PSCAN I execution Scan execution y Low L NPSN scan execution I program ype program type program t PSTOP POFF PSCAN Stand by type Fixed scan execution program type program b The following table shows the timing of changing the execute type of a program by using a PSCAN PLOW PSTOP or POFF instruction Executed instruction p SEDAN ai a E Execute type before change No change remains Output is turned OFF Scan execution type scan execution type in the next scan Becomes stand by Bec omesstand oy type B l yP type from the next is ow speed scan after that execution type Stand by t NO Change folains No processin ocr stand by type p 9 Low speed execution Low speed execution type execution is Low speed execution type execution is stopped becomes type execution is stopped and output is No change remains Low speed execution type scan executions from stopped becomes turned OFF in the low speed the next scan stand by type from the next scan Becomes executions Execution from step next scan stand by type from the 0 next scan after that Output is turned OFF in the next scan i Becomes scan Becomes stand by Becomes low speed Fixed scan execution type Becomes stand by execution type type type type from the next scan afte
105. are stored in order at SD64 to SD79 b The anunciator No which was stored at SD64 is stored at SD62 c 1 is added to the SD63 value SET F50 SET F25 SET F2047 Z a an oe a SD62 o gt 50 50 50 SD63 0 gt 1 gt 2 gt 3 SD64 o gt 50 50 50 SD65 o gt 25 25 SD66 o o gt 2047 Up to 16 annunciator SD67 0 0 0 No can be stored SD79 o 0 0 ol 2 Processing at CPU USER LED at High Peformance model QCPU front is ON 3 Anunciator OFF procedure and processing content a Anunciator OFF procedure An anunciator can be switched OFF by the RST F LEDR BKRST and OUT F instructions 1 An anunciator No which has been switched ON by the SET F instruction can be switched OFF by the RST F lt instruction 2 The LEDR instruction is used to switch OFF the anunciator Nos stored at SD62 and SD64 3 The BKRST instruction is used to switch all the anunciator Nos within a specified range 10 13 10 13 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 4 The OUT F instruction can execute ON OFF of the anunciator No by the same instruction However if an anunciator is switched OFF by the OUT F instruction the processing at anunciator OFF item b below is not performed Execute the RST Fi LEDR or BKRST instructions after the anunciator has been switched OFF by the OUT F instruction 1 To switch OFF only the anunciators stored at SD62 and SD64 Fault detection pro
106. as empty slots MELSECNET H and CC Link cannot be loaded Use automatic refresh of device data to use the ON OFF input data for MELSECNET H CC Link and other remote stations in other PLCs b When Do not load input condition outside of group has been set It is not possible to loads ON OFF data from input modules and intelligent function modules being controlled by other PLCs remains at OFF 17 2 17 2 17 COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM S I O MODULES AND INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES MELSEC Q 2 Loading output Y The Out of group input output settings setting in the PLC parameter s multiple PLC settings determines whether output can be loaded from output modules and intelligent function modules being controlled by other PLCs Multiple PLC settings No of PLC Online module changef i T Enable online module change oe i When the ichange is enabled 1 0 status outside the group cannot be taken Dut of group input output settings I The input condition outside the group is taken aai Input outside of group setting O Output condition of group is taken Do not load output outside of group setting Output condition of group is taken Load output outside of group setting Operating mode f Error operation mode at the stop of PLC J All station stop Ey stor ero of PUT T I7 Al station stop by stop eror of PLC2 Refresh settings I All station stop by stop error of PLC3 Cha
107. be changed online and each module has a predetermined changing procedure For details refer to the section of online module change in the Process CPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Disposal Precautions A CAUTION e When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date _ Manual Number Apr 2002 SH NA 080315E A First edition Japanese Manual Version SH 080264 A This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property ights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2002 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi MELSEC Q Series of General Purpose Programmable Controllers Please read this manual carefully so that equipment is used to its optimum CONTENTS SAFETY INSTRUCTION Sinerat Sei nade Siegal Hind Mase and at aaraa elses A 1 PREVI SIONS ioc andicatech sth sican a a she tarts deas bts ote taste beanie cde tee bene te eta A 6 GONTENIS2 savttedten ita daa elit tal ait a eta eae A 7 ManalSst 5 otha Satie eae hea tae ia ihn E act el aa ei Ae A 17 How to Use This Manual eececceesceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeaceeaeeeaeseeesaeseeeseae
108. be executed at the Process CPU This chapter describes the sequence program configuration and execution conditions SFC programs are not described in this manual For details on SFC programs refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC 4 1 Sequence Program 1 Definition of sequence program a Asequence program consists of sequence instructions basic instructions and application instructions etc 7 Sequence instruction X0 Ma K100 4 k lt to 4 TO __ a va i Basic instruction HBN k4x10 Do x41 Application instruction FROM H5 KO D10 K1 H b There are 3 types of sequence program main routine programs sub routine programs and interrupt programs For details on these programs see the following sections of this manual e Main routine programs Section 4 1 1 e Sub routine programs Section 4 1 2 e Interrupt programs Section 4 1 3 File A Main routine program FEND H Sub routine program RET H Interrupt program IRET H END H PO For details on the sequence instructions basic instructions and application instructions refer to the QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 2 Sequence program writing format Programming for sequence programs is enabled using either ladder mode or list mode a Ladder mode The ladder m
109. becomes the automatic refresh area if the number of automatic refresh points is 18 11H points and the area after 812H becomes the user s free area The configuration of the CPU shared memory and the necessity of accessing sequence programs are shown in the illustration below Host PLC Other PLCs CPU shared memory Writing Reading Writing Reading Oft lt to Host PLG operation Disable Disable Disable Enable information area FFA o 200H to System area Disable Disable Disable Disable AGES o o ee we Ng 8001 i l Automatic refresh area Disable Disable Disable Disable to User s free area Enable Disable Disable Enable FFF p x1 Use the S TO instruction to write the free user area of the host PLC from the Process CPU The Motion CPU is not provided with an S TO instruction so that it cannot write in the free user area of the host PLC For the writing method from the PC CPU module to the free user area of the host PLC refer to the manual of the PC CPU module x2 To read from the Process CPU use the FROM instruction or intelligent function module device UD GO Because the Motion CPU is not provided with the FROM instruction or intelligent function module device data cannot be read from the Motion CPU For reading from the PC CPU module refer to the manual of the PC CPU module 16 13 16 13 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q
110. can be converted to scan execution type programs and executed in a sequence program Change the execution type in the Process CPU by using PSCAN PLOW PSTOP and POFF instructions See Section 4 2 3 c The following methods can be used to convert a program which is to be executed 1 Selecting the program to be executed from a single management program e Convert a stand by type program that meets the designated conditions to a scan execution type program by using a constantly executed scan execution type program as the management program Then execute the converted program Scan execution type programs which are not required can be converted to stand by type programs e Execute types of ABC DEF GHI and JKL stand by type programs are converted as shown below Scan execution type program Control program e PSCAN is an instruction that switches the specified ABC program to a scan M1 execution type program i __ pstop 7 e PSTOP is an instruction that switches the specified PSCAN ABC program to a stand by type program Mo ee PSCAN When M0 is on switch the ABC program from a stand by type program to a scan execution type program When M1 is on switch the ABC program from a scan execution type program to a stand by type program l y y Stand by Stand by Stand by Stand by type type type type program program program program
111. condition setting for the monitoring can only be set for one user f The monitoring detailed condition setting can only be set in circuit monitor g When the same device is specified as the monitor condition and monitor stop condition specify ON or OFF h The monitoring conditions will not be established unless the following specified steps commands are executed when Step No has been specified for the monitoring conditions 1 When skipping steps specified with the CJ command the SCJ command and the JMP command 2 When the specified step is the END command the FEND command exists while the program is running and the END command is not executed i Do not reset the Process CPU while monitoring conditions are being registered 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 9 2 Monitoring test for local device 1 Monitoring and Testing Local Devices a Local devices specified at the Device tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box can be monitored or tested by operating from GX Developer This function is useful when debugging a program and monitoring local devices in a program monitored by GX Developer See Section 10 13 1 for local devices b Monitoring the Local Devices The table below shows the status of three programs A B and C being executed on the Process CPU with local devices DO to D99 specified It assumes that these three programs are executed in the order of A B gt C gt END processing g
112. corresponding special registers for further details 16 14 16 14 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM 16 15 2 3 MELSEC Q System area 200H to 7FFH The area used by the CPU module systems OS This is used by the OS when communication dedicated instructions between multiple PLCs are executed Automatic refresh area The area used when the multiple PLC system is automatically refreshed Writing is not enabled with the S TO instruction and reading is not enabled with the FROM instruction or intelligent function module device UL GL User s free area The area for performing communication between CPU modules with the multiple PLC system s S TO instruction FROM instruction and intelligent function module device UD GD The area used after the number of points set for automatic refresh is used An area between 800H and FFn can be used as the user s free area when automatic refresh is not being performed 16 15 17 COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM S I O MODULES AND INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES MELSEC Q 17 COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM S I O MODULES AND INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES 17 1 Range of Control PLC Communications The relationship between control PLCs and control modules I O modules intelligent function modules is the same as with independent CPU systems There is no restriction to control the control module with the control PLC
113. defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the dealer or Mitsubishi Service Company Note that if repairs are required at a site overseas on a detached island or remote place expenses to dispatch an engineer shall be charged for Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled in
114. desired input response time Select Input Select Detailed setting Select I O response time Qn H Parameter x Intelligent functional module detailed setting PLC name PLC system PLC fif PLCRAS Device Program Boot file SFC 1 0 assignment r120 Assignment Switch sefting Detailed setting 16points If the start x and Y are not input the PLC assigns them automatically It is not possible to check correctly when there is a slot of the unsetting on the way Standard setting Base mode i I G Auto a C Detail Increaset Increase2f Increase3 z 8 fixation inamaset 12 fixation Ble Settings should be set as same when Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Read PLC data using multiple PLC Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple PLC setting Default Check End Cancel 3 Reactions a Higher input response time may result in response to inputs being influenced by noise Set the desired input response time by taking into consideration the operating environment of an input module in use b The input response speed setting is valid in the following cases e After the PLC is turned on e When the Process CPU is reset 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 7 2 Selecting the response time of the high speed input module Qn H Parameter PLC r Puc r170 Assignment 1 S
115. details on the formatting procedure by GX Developer refer to GX Developer manuals POINT 1 Before using the Process CPU for the first time the program memory must be formatted by GX Developer For details on the formatting procedure by GX Developer refer to GX Developer manuals 2 Programs are stored in the program memories in 1 k step units 2 Data Storage Data on parameters and programs can be stored in the program memory For the types of data stored in the program memory see Section 6 1 3 Format a Formatting Choose Online Format PLC memory to open the Format PLC memory dialog box Select Program memory Device memory from the Target Memory list box Format PLC memory xi Connection target information Connection interface coma Pee Pic module TargetPLO Network No E Station No Host PLC type a12PH Target memory Program memory Device memory x Format Type Do not create a user setting system area the necessary system area only Create a user setting system area an area which speeds up monitoring from other stations System area fi K steps 6 PROCESS CPU FILES MELSEC Q b Memory capacity after formatting The memory capacity of the program memory after formatting is as follows Table 6 1 Memory capacity after formatting 1 Model Name Max Number of Files Stored Q12PHCPU 124 k steps 507904 bytes 124 files Q25PHCPU 252 k steps 1032192 bytes 252 files g
116. diagnosis error occurred error occurred Common error Common error The common information corresponding with the number of the information information error during diagnostic is stored Individual error Individual error The individual information corresponding with the number of the information information error during diagnostic is stored 1Cu Switch status CPU switch status Stores the CPU module switch status LED status CPU LED status Stores the CPU module s LED bit pattern P i P ion 1FH rey Operation SPUI operatig Stores the CPU module s operation status status status b The host PLC s operation information area is updated when the contents of the corresponding register change However there are times when changes in the corresponding register are relayed by a maximum of 200ms when the Process CPU s scan time is 200ms or less There are times when changes in the corresponding register are delayed by 200ms or more if the Process CPU s scan time exceeds 200ms c The Process CPU of another PLC can use FROM instruction or intelligent function module device to read data from the action data area of the host PLC However because there is a delay in data updating use the read data for monitoring purposes x1 For the Motion CPU 5x to 1CH of the host PLC s operation information area is not used If 5H to 1CH of the host PLC s operation information area is read from the Motion CPU it will be read as 0 x2 Refer to the
117. executed by the Process CPU 2 Edge relay applications Edge relays are used for detecting the leading edge OFF to ON in programs configured using index modification Ladder example SM400 MOV KO Z1 Index register Z1 clear z F FOR K10 H Repetition 10 times designation XxX0Z1 VOZ1 e MOZ1 MOZ1 is turned ON 1 scan at leading edge of X0Z1 M400 INC Z1 jH Increment Index Register Z1 1 NEXT Return to FOR instruction Timing chart ON x0 OFF l f ON When Z1 0 VO OFF ON MO OFF 1 Scan ON X1 OFF ON 1 scan ON at X1 leading edge When Z1 1 V1 OFF ON M1 OFF f 1 Scan 1 1 The ON OFF information for XOZ1 is stored at the VOZ1 edge relay For example the XO ON OFF information is stored at VO and the X1 ON OFF information is stored at V1 10 16 10 16 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 7 Link relays B 1 Definition a A link relay is the Process CPU relay used to refresh the Process CPU from the MELSECNET H network module s link relay LB and to refresh the MELSECNET H network module s link relay LB from the Process CPU data __Process CPU___ MELSECNET H network module Link relay Link relay BO LBO Link refresh Link refresh setting range SS E A a Internal relays or latch relays can be used for data ranges not used by the MELSECNET H network system e Range where no link relay latch is performed
118. execution type program is complete Also the low speed execution is stopped temporarily during a RUN write 1 2 3 4 Scan execution type Scan execution type Scan execution type Scan execution type program step 0 to END program step 0 to END program step 0 to END program step 0 to END Low speed execution Low speed execution Low speed execution Low speed execution type program step type program step type program step type program step 0 to 200 201 to 320 321 to END 0 to 120 med 1 Scan 1 Scan 1 Scan 1 Scan 1 RUN write command of the scan execution type program 2 RUN write execution of the scan execution type program 3 RUN write command of the low speed execution type program 4 RUN write execution of the low speed execution type program d Ifthe write during RUN is executed while the PLOAD PUNLOAD or PSWAP instruction is executed the processing will enter into a stand by status for the write during RUN If the write during RUN is executed while the PLOAD PUNLOAD or PSWAP instruction is executed the execution of the instruction is delayed until the write during RUN is executed 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q e The capacity of a Process CPU s program file is a sum of the capacity of the program created and steps used for the write during RUN The write during RUN is executed when the capacity of a program file is increased If the capacity of a program file becomes larger th
119. expresses 2 This bit expresses 24 0 1101 2 27 22 24 0 5 0 25 0 0625 0 8125 10 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 9 Character String Data 1 Character String Data The Process CPU uses ASCII code data 2 ASCII code character strings ASCII code character strings are shown in the Table below 00H NUL code is used at the end of a character string 1717171717474 4 olololo il lilili ololili lol lolili ofifofifoj1 fo1 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 8 9 A B JC DI E F OO oO OO O O OJ OF 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS This section describes the necessary information on the I O number assignment for the data exchange between Process CPU and I O modules or intelligent function modules 5 1 Relationship Between the Number of Stages and Slots of the Extension Base Unit Process CPU allows the system configuration using eight base units one main base unit and seven extension base units However the number of available slots modules is limited to 64 slots including empty slots An error SP UNIT LAY ERR occurs when a module input output or intelligent function module is installed to the 65th or subsequent slots Be sure to install modules within the range of 64 slots An error does not occur as long as all modules are installed within the r
120. for automatic refresh purposes other devices cannot be set up with the GX Developer Settable devices ister D Link register W File register R ZR e The device in the left column occupies one point for every transmission point e Multiples of 0 or 16 are specified for the first number M e The device in the left column occupies one point for every transmission point 1 CPU devices use the total amount of transmission point devices consecutively from the specified device number to the PLC No 1 to No 4 in the first set range Set a device number so that the amount of transmission point devices can be secured Sixteen times the number of transmission points will be set if a bit device is specified in the CPU device For example If the total number of transmission points for PLC No 1 to No 4 is ten then 160 points will be set between BO and B9F when the BO link relay is specified 16 4 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 2 The CPU devices are set as follows e Itis possible to change the device and set up settings 1 to 4 The same devices can also be specified as long as the device range for settings 1 to 4 are not duplicated Setting 1 In the case of link relays Change screens Setting 18 Send range for each PLC PLC side device RUE PLC share memory G Dev stating BOJ It is possible to change the device Pott Stat End Stat End and set up settings 1
121. gt Transmission data set in DO to D1023 po 0 gt J bO of the PLC No 1 first device DO bO of the PLC No 2 first device for the use of the interlock is set at D1024 for the use of the interlock ON when transmission data setting has is set at ON when operations using been completed the received data have been completed 16 8 16 8 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 16 2 Communication with Multiple PLC Instructions and Intelligent Function Module Devices 1 Communication with multiple PLC instructions S TO instruction FROM instruction and intelligent function module device U_ G_ The Process CPU of a multiple PLC system can use an S TO instruction FROM instruction and intelligent function module device ULAGL to access the CPU shared memory of the CPU module The data written in the CPU shared memory of the host PLC with an S TO instruction can be read by another PLC using an FROM instruction or intelligent function module device U_ G_ Contrary to the automatic refresh function for the CPU shared memory it is possible to read data directly when this instruction is executed An outline of a process where data written in the CPU shared memory of PLC No 1 with an S TO instruction is read by the PLC No 2 using an FROM instruction or intelligent function module device UAG is shown in the figure below PLC No 1 PLC No 2
122. high speed Set the input response time in consideration of the operating environment b The input response speed setting is valid in the following cases e After the PLC is turned on e When the Process CPU is reset 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 8 Setting the Switches of the Intelligent Function Module 1 Setting the Switches of the Intelligent Function Module The switches of the intelligent function module is to set the switches of an Q Series intelligent function module using GX Developer The settings of the switches set by GX Developer is written from Process CPU to each intelligent function module at the leading edge or reset of Process CPU Intelligent function GX Developer CPU module Power supply module 3 Parameter ON CPU m Switch setting of the i Parameter module Reset Switch setting intelligent function module at the I O assignment 2 Setting the Switches of the Intelligent Function Module At the I O assignment tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box specify the desired switch setting Select Intelli in the Type column of a slot for which to set the switches of the intelligent function module im ete Shs Select Intelli Select Switch Setting Qn H Parameter Switch setting for 1 0
123. indicates whether the sampling trace is executed or not A trace from GX Developer starts e SM801 is turned on 3 When a next trigger condition is satisfied SM804 after sampling trace trigger turns on SM804 indicates whether the trigger conditions are satisfied or not A trigger from GX Developer executed e The TRACE instruction is executed e SM803 is turned on 4 After the sampling trace is completed SM805 sampling trace complete is turned on Trigger SM801 SM801 Trigger Trace execution OFF ON execution complete Number of i Number of trace after trace after T j Clear the trace count j i trigger A trigger i i SM800 Sampling trace ready l l SM801 Sampling trace start SM802 Sampling trace executing SM803 Sampling trace trigger SM804 After sampling trace trigger SM805 Sampling trace complete When trace is interrupted from GX Developer the SM800 is also turned off 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q g Trace interrupt 1 When SM801 sampling trace start is turned off during sampling trace the sampling trace is interrupted In the meantime the number of traces is cleared 2 When turning on SM801 again trace is restarted Trigger SM801 SM801 Trigger Trace execution OFF ON execution complete Number of 1 Number of trace after i trace after i trigger _ Clear the trace count i trigger
124. interactive transmission between each CPU modules with a multiple PLC system Automatically refreshing the device data between each CPU modules with multiple PLC system parameter settings Data transfer between other Process CPU and PC CPU module via CPU shared memory using multiple PLC instructions FROM S TO instructions Reading CPU shared memory of Motion CPU from Process CPU with multiple PLC instructions FROM instruction Control instruction from the Process CPU to the Motion CPU with Motion dedicated PLC instructions Writing and reading of the device data from the Process CPU to the Motion CPU PC CPU module with communication dedicated instructions between multiple PLCs Event issuance from Process CPU to PC CPU module using instructions dedicated to multiple PLC communication Processing during resets and errors see Sections 14 2 7 and 14 2 8 The processing performed when resets and errors occur are different for the multiple PLC system s PLC No 1 and the PLC No 2 to PLC No 4 a Process CPU High Performance model QCPU for PLC No 1 can be reset with a multiple PLC system CPU modules for PLC No 2 to No 4 and Motion CPU cannot be reset b Multiple PLC system operations will be suspended when a stop error occurs with the PLC No 1 It is possible to select whether to suspend or continue with multiple PLC system operations when a stop error occurs with PLC Nos 2 to 4 and Motion CPU Clock function An intelligent functio
125. is designated on the following initial setting screen of GX Configurator Initial setting screen Initial setting BE Module information Module model name Q644D Start 170 No 0000 Module type A D Conversion Module Setting item Setting value CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting Enable CH1 Sampling process averaging process setting Sampling CH1 Time number of times specifying Number of times CH1 Average time average number of times setting Setting range Time 2 to 5000 ms Number of times 4 to 62500 times CH2 A D conversion enable disable setting Enable CH2 Sampling process averaging process setting Sampling Details Select input Make text file End setup Cancel The designated initial setting data is stored in the intelligent function module 8 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE MELSEC Q b Auto refresh setting For the auto refresh setting designate the device at Process CPU to store the following data e Digital output of Q64AD e Maximum minimum values of Q64AD e Error code The auto refresh setting of Q64AD is designated on the following auto refresh setting screen of GX Configurator Auto refresh setting screen Auto refresh setting _ fx Module information Module model name Q644D Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type A D Conversion Module Module side Module side Transfer PLC side La
126. is restriction on the order of allocating I O numbers for MELSECNET H remote I O networks CC Link or other networks 5 10 5 10 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 5 6 I O Assignment by GX Developer This section describes the I O assignment using GX Developer 5 6 1 Purpose of I O assignment by GX Developer O assignment by GX Developer is used under the following circumstances 1 Reserving points when converting to module other than 16 point modules You can reserve the number of points in advance so that you do not have to change the I O numbers when the current module will be changed to one with a different number of occupied I O points in the future For example you can assign a 32 point I O module to the slot where a 16 point O module is mounted at present Preventing I O numbers from changing when converting modules You can avoid the change in the I O numbers when an I O module other than 16 point module or intelligent function module is removed due to a malfunction Changing the I O numbers to those used in the program When the designed program s I O numbers are different from the actual system I O numbers each module s I O number of base units can be set to program l O number Setting the input response time of input modules and interrupt modules I O response time To match the input response time of the input modules and interrupt modules to the system select Type at the I O assignment tab screen
127. link special registers serve as a tool for identifying the locations and causes of faults 2 Number of link special register points There are 2048 link special register points from SWO to SW7FF The link special register points are assigned at the rate of 512 points per intelligent function module such as a MELSECNET H network module By default the following points are assigned for link registers as shown below swo SW1FF Sw200 SW3FF SW400 SW5FF Link special register For the 1st network module For the 2nd network module For the 3rd network module SW600 SW7FF For the 4th network module For details on link special registers used in the QCPU refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 10 30 512 points 512 points 4 512 points 512 points 2048 points 10 30 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 3 Internal System Devices Internal system devices are used for system operations The allocations and sizes of internal system devices are fixed and cannot be changed by the user 10 3 1 Function devices FX FY FD 1 Definition a Function devices are used in sub routine programs with arguments to permit data transfers between the sub routine program with argument and the CALL source for that sub routine pare EXAMpPIG SSP re ree Gta poet eee Orie gk Pe ge E AR E aga ppp ay Pre Paes 7 If FXO and FD1 are used at the sub routine progra
128. link special relays are switched ON and OFF in accordance with various problems which may occur during a data link they serve as a tool for identifying data link problems 2 Number of link special relay points There are a total of 2048 link special relay points between SBO and SB7FF Link special relays are assigned at a rate of 512 points per each intelligent function module such as the MELSECNET H Network Module Link special relays are assigned as shown below SBO For 1st network module 512 points SB1FF SB200 5 For 2nd network module 512 points SBSFF 2048 points SB400 5 For 3rd network module 512 points SB5FF SB600 For 4th network module 512 points SB7FF For details on link special relays used at the QCPU refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 10 2 9 Step relays S A step relay is an SFC program device For details regarding procedures for using step relays refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC Because the step relay is a device exclusively for the SFC program it cannot be used as an internal relay in the sequence program If used in this manner a SFC error will occur and system operation will be stopped system down 10 18 10 18 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 10 Timers T Timers are of up timing with the time measurement beginning when the coil switches ON and ending time out when the current value ex
129. lt n ms Conditions n number of program files 11 3 Factors Responsible for Shortened Scan Time The length of scan time can be shorted by making changes to the PLC Parameter setting as follows e A PLC Compatibility with A Series CPU 1 A PLC Compatibility with A Series CPU When Use special relay special register after SM1000 SD1000 is set in the PLC system settings of the PLC parameter the scan time can be reduced by the value in the following table by setting to Do not use special relay special register after SM1000 SD1000 In this case the A series compatible special relays special registers SM1000 SD1000 to SM1299 SD1999 must be replaced with the Q series dedicated special relays special registers SM0 SDO to SM999 SD999 CPU Type Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 11 4 11 4 12 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAMS TO PROCESS CPU MELSEC Q 12 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAMS TO PROCESS CPU This chapter describes the procedure for writing programs created at the GX Developer to the Process CPU 12 1 Writing Procedure for 1 Program This section describes the procedure for writing one program to the Process CPU and executing it 12 1 1 Items to consider when creating one program In order to create a program the program size number of device points used and the program file name etc must be set in advance 1 12 1 Program size considerations Check that CPU module s program capacity is adequate for storing the program
130. memory card Table 6 4 Memory Capacity Memory Card Type Number of Files Stored Q2MEM 1MBS 1011 5 kbyte 256 files Q2MEM 2MBS 2034 kbyte 288 files Q2MEM 2MBF 2035 kbyte 288 files Q2MEM 4MBF 4079 kbyte 288 files Q2MEM 8MBA 7940 kbyte 512 files Q2MEM 16MBA 15932 kbyte 512 files Q2MEM 32MBA 31854 kbyte 512 files c Precautions For a formatted memory card a memory card information area is automatically created on the memory card This means that available space could be decreased by the size of the newly created memory card information area 6 PROCESS CPU FILES MELSEC Q 6 6 Writing Data to the Standard ROM or the Flash Card 6 6 1 Writing Data to the standard ROM or to the Flash card using GX Developer The write to PLC function in the GX Developer Online menu does not allow the user to write files into a standard ROM or on a Flash card For writing files to a standard ROM or to a Flash card by operating from GX Developer GX Developer Online menu provides two functions Write the program memory to ROM and Write to PLC Flash ROM 1 Write the program memory to ROM a The Write the program memory to ROM function allows a batch of files stored in a program memory to be written to a standard ROM or a Flash card This function is used to debug the programs stored in the program memory When the Write a memory to ROM function is executed all files stored in the standard ROM or Flash card are er
131. module service interval time will be measured Set the I O number of the peripheral device connected to the RS 232 or USB interface of the CPU module to FFFFu Stores the service interval time from the module specified in SD550 when SM551 is turned on SD551 1ms units range 0 to 65535 SD551 to ar f SD552 100 us units range 0 to 900 stored at SD552 Module service interval time intervals of 100 y s Example When module service interval time is 123 4ms SD551 123 SD552 400 Module service interval time measured module Program example When reading the module service interval time of the intelligent function module of X Y160 Read start signal H160 SD550 Sets I O number 160 hexadecimal to SD550 SM551 Starts module service interval time read D551 D551 Stores module service interval time into D551 D552 To read the service interval time when access is made from GX Developer of the other station on the network set the I O number of the network module 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q x The module service interval indicates the time between a transient request such as monitor test program read write The access interval in cyclic communication from the network module is not stored 8 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE MELSEC Q 8 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE 1 Description of intelligent function modules Process CPU allows the use of the Q Series compatible intelligen
132. not set but high speed monitoring cannot be performed The system area is in the same area as the program memory so the area of the stored program decreases when the system area is set c Once the user defined system area is allocated a single PLC can be accessed from 16 stations 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 13 2 Multiple user RUN write function 1 What is Multiple User RUN Write Function a Multiple users can write to one file or different files during RUN b To enable multiple users to write to a single file at the same time during RUN operation specify the desired pointer for the write during RUN in advance and then select Relative step No by pointer so that its radio button is checked 2 Operation Procedure The multiple user RUN write operation is performed in the following procedures a Select Tool from Option menu and set After conversion writing behavior and Step No specification used in writing Program common Each program Whole data TEL r Edit object shift forward setting r After conversion writing behavior Continuous ladder block Write during BUN while PLC is runnir Cancel Shift the program forward Write if PLC STOP 1 1 ladder block Don t write to PLC Don t shift the program forward Comment input r Step No specification used in writing I Continues during command write Absolute step No default le 2 Double coil check setup L
133. notice Printed in Japan on recycled paper
134. o a D10 o a 5 CPU gt D6 NUL on D1 1 Ce on D1 2 y p D13 NUL x NUL indicates 00H character string END 1 11 1 11 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q b Data processing instructions such as table processing instructions etc enable high speed processing of large amounts of data X0 FINSP DO RO K2 FIFO table FIFO table Insertion Insertion Insertion position RO 4 lenses designation R1 10 Instruction for data insertion at table DO is re 15 R3 20 R4 30 4 Easy shared use of sub routine programs a Acommon pointer can be used to call the same sub routine program from all sequence programs being executed Program A 7 7 E 3 E Common pointer Subroutine program P1000 call a A SM400 MO 0 gt P1000 MOV K4x0 RO Always z ON Mo MOV K4X20 RO Program B 7 RET M10 i P1000 call 0 CALLP P1000 b The use of sub routine call instructions with arguments simplifies the creation of sub routine programs which are called several times Argument designation Sub touting progrant Destination data MO a ee PO call SM400 Mo source data o H car Po wo k4xo Ro Pot H MOV FDO FD2 ee Argument from FD2 ae gt Argument to FD1 MO gt Argument to FDO Mov FD1 FD2 Subroutine program designation Argument des
135. of Process CPU are listed below Online module change This function is used to change the Q series analog or I O module online Auto tuning is designed to make the initial setting of the PID constants Auto tuning function Auto tuning can be used with a relatively slow response system e g temperature control using the S PID or S 2PID instruction Constantscan Ss This function executes the program in a set time interval regardless of the program scan time Section 7 2 Latch function This function maintains the device data when performing the reset operation during power off Section 7 3 Output status selection function for transition from STOP status to RUN status This function selects the output Y status output before STOP output after the calculation A Section 7 4 execution when the CPU module is set from STOP status to RUN status Clock function This function executes the CPU module internal clock Section 7 5 Remote operation This function operates the CPU module from a remote place Section 7 6 Remote RUN STOP This function stops and starts operating the CPU module Section 7 6 1 Remote PAUSE This function stops the CPU module operation while retaining the output Y of the CPU module Section 7 6 2 RemoteRESET fhis function resets the CPU module when the CPU module is ina STOP status Section 7 6 3 This function clears the latch data of the CPU module when the CPU module is in a STOP status Section 7 6 4 Input response time sel
136. operations are performed in combination with the remote RUN STOP e When the Process CPU is at a position out of reach e When externally performing latch clear of the Process CPU inside a control panel Remote Latch Clear Method The remote latch clear can only be performed from GX Developer or by using serial communication module To perform the remote latch clear follow the following steps a Use the remote STOP to bring the Process CPU to STOP status b Use the Latch Clear to bring the Process CPU to the Latch Clear status 1 The GX Developer operations are performed by on line remote operation 2 The serial communication module and Ethernet interface module are controlled by commands complying with the MC protocol For details of the MC protocol refer to the following manual Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual c To return the Process CPU to RUN status after the remote latch clear perform a remote RUN operation Precautions a Either remote latch clear or latch clear by RESET L CLR switch cannot be performed when the Process CPU is in RUN status b The latch range for the device set at the Device tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box includes a range that makes latch clear RESET L CLR switch valid or invalid Remote latch clear operation is reset in the range of latch clear valid setting c Devices that are not latched are cleared when the remote latch clear is perfo
137. programs on the memory card to the standard ROM Hence you need not carry GX Developer personal computer to rewrite the parameters programs 14 External I O can be turned ON OFF forcibly If the Process CPU is in the RUN mode you can operate GX Developer to turn external inputs outputs ON OFF forcibly independently of the program execution status You need not put the Process CPU in the STOP mode to perform wiring operation tests by forced ON OFF of outputs 15 Remote password can be set When access to an Ethernet module or serial communication module is made externally whether access to the Process CPU can be made or not can be selected with a remote password 16 Remote I O network of MELSECNET H can be configured You can load the remote master station of the MELSECNET H to configure an MELSECNET H remote I O system In addition to the remote password there are the following protection facilities for the Process CPU Protection of the whole CPU module by making system settings of the Process CPU Protection of the memory card by setting the write protect switch of the memory card File by file protection using password 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 2 Programs 1 Program management by memory card a Programs created with GX Developer can be stored in the Process CPU s program memory standard ROM or memory card Process CPU Program memory Parameter Eso Saeki So ooh Program Memory c
138. registers the data used for a program in device or intelligent function module buffer memories without using a data setting program The use of device initial values provides a shortcut to specify device data ina program without using a device data setting program initial program Data setting by initial processing program SM402 z Power supply ON MOV H100 DO H STOP RESET to RUN ee Device memory Mov H2020 D1 J J Device initial Power supply ON STOP RESET to RUN value Y Device memory b In order to use the device initial values the device initial data must be created with GX Developer in advance and this data must be stored as a device initial value file in the Process CPU s program memory standard RAM or memory card At power ON or on switching from STOP to RUN the Process CPU writes the data from the device initial value file to the specified device or intelligent function module buffer memory Program memory Standard ROM GX Developer Memory card j initi wage ge l a ae Device initial value writing Device initial value writing Designated setting Device initial Power supply ON device Sis ae value file STOP RESET to RUN I c 4 Device initial Intelligent value data i i x K fa setting i i RHEA I 10 69 10 69 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q c Device initial values can be used by the following devic
139. s extension Q68B 8 slot ied base unit continue from the last slot number of iS slots oceupied the 1st stage s extension base unit N ant an a pr A a 16 17 Intelligent function module oo oo oo oo oo Input module Input module Intelligent function module N Intelligent function module Output module Output module Output module IN OUT 16 16 16 16 16 points points points points points points points points gt X110 X120 130 150 170 Y190 Y1A0 Y1BO N ee N ee N Power supply module X11F X12F 14F 16F 18F Y19F Y1AF Y1BF The above example shows the case where the intelligent function module has 32 O points The number of I O points may vary depending on the intelligent function module Refer to the manual of the intelligent function module being used and check the number of the I O points before assigning the I O numbers 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 5 5 2 Remote station I O number It is possible to allocate Process CPU device input X and output Y to remote station I O modules and intelligent function modules and control the modules in the MELSECNET H remote network the CC Link and other remote I O systems 212 aq gt Ig 2j 3 e l Q S S aja 2 a 2 ESIR a o ojl fla G G Rake ojo o A A Allocation of QCPU input X and output Y possible
140. sampling trace they will not be recognized as trigger conditions oO 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 13 Debug Function with Multiple Users 1 What is Debug Function with Multiple Users a This function performs debugging from multiple GX Developer connected to Process CPU or Serial communication module at the same time b If debugging tasks are classified by process or by function this function is used to perform debugging of different files from multiple GX Developer at once 2 Function Description The debug function combination for multiple users are as follows Functions to be executed Monitor Execution time measurement Sampling trace Can be performed at the same time However the detailed condition can only be set from one GX Developer In this case the detailed condition setting cannot be performed from another GX Developer a ae e ee Wit dang IN x o x x Ca ee ee ae a a Co a a x Can only be performed from one GX Developer This function cannot be performed by the GX Developer while it is being executed by another GX Developer 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 13 1 Multiple user monitoring function 1 What is Multiple User Monitoring Function a The multiple user monitoring operation can be performed by operating from multiple GX Developers connected to the Process CPU or the Serial communications module b Multiple users can monitor at the same time By setting a station
141. saved protected and reset 1 Index register processing at switching between scan execution type programs and low speed execution type programs a When switching from a scan execution type program to a low speed execution type program occurs the scan execution type program s index register data is saved and the low speed execution type program s index register data is restored b When switching from a low speed execution program to a scan execution type program occurs the low speed execution type program s index register data is saved and the scan execution type program s index register data is restored Switch Switch Switch f i Low speed i Low speed ling ing iing A Executed program i Scan execution execution Scan execution execution itype program type programs type program type program Z0 3 Index register value For scan execution j f Z0 0 ZO 1 Z0 1 ZO 1 Z0 1 Z0 6 Z0 6 Index register type programs i storage area For low speed i i j Q J i execution type Z0 0 Z0 07 Z0 0 Z0 3 Z0 3 Z0 3 Z0 3 program 1 For low speed execution type program Z0 is changed to 3 2 For scan execution type program Z0 is changed to 6 2 Exchanges of index register data Word devices should be used for exchanges of index register data between scan execution type programs and low speed execution type pro
142. scan delays for an excessive duration 3 Interrupt is enabled while an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program is executed If constant scan time runs out when an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program is executed constant scan cannot be finished When an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program is used constant scan time could be shifted by the execution time of an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program Refer to QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions for the command processing time 7 FUNCTION 7 3 Latch Functions MELSEC Q 1 What is Latch Functions a The values of each Process CPU device are set back to the default bit device OFF and word device 0 when e The PLC power is turned on e The reset operation is performed e There is a momentary power failure for more than the permissible amount of time Latch function maintains the device information when the above conditions occur The availability of latches does not affect the operation performed by a program The latch can be used to continue control by maintaining the production quantity defect count and address even when there is a momentary power failure for more than the permissible amount of time The following devices can use the latch function The default latch range is only the latch relay 1 Latch relay L 2 Link relay B 3 Annunciator F 4 Edge relay V
143. scan setting Constant scan 0 END 0 Sequence program j 3 5ms h 0 5ms 3 5ms s 4ms 5 3ms 4ms 0 5ms gt t Scan where the constant scan is not normal Fig 7 2 Operation when the Scan Time is longer than the Constant Scan If the time is longer than the WDT set time the Process CPU detects a WDT error and stops the program execution 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q c The sequence program processing stops during the wait time from the last END processing execution until the next scan starts 1 If a low speed execution type program is executed it will be interrupted for 0 5 ms a constant scan time setting 2 Ifan interrupt factor occurs after the END processing is performed the interrupt program or fixed scan execution type program is executed d Constant Scan Time Accuracy This section describes the accuracy of a constant scan time setting 1 The remaining portion wait time of a constant scan time setting is 0 01 ms when the following programs are not executed e low speed execution type program e interrupt program e fixed scan execution type program 2 Wait time is 0 5 ms when a low speed execution type program is used If the maximum processing time for one instruction in a low speed execution type program is 0 5 ms the remaining portion of constant scan time is the same as described in 1 If the maximum processing time exceeds 0 5 ms constant
144. system PLC file PLC RAS Device 1 Program name This column is used to specify a program name file name of the program to be executed by Process CPU 2 Execute type This column is used to specify the execute type of the program defined in the Program name column See Section b 3 Fixed scan This column is used to specify time intervals at which to an execution type program The Fixed Scan setting range is determined by the units of time intervals as follows e In the unit ms 0 5 to 999 5 e In the unit s 1 to 60 4 In units This column is used to specify the units ms s of fixed scan intervals 4 11 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 5 File Use Setting Sets whether to use the data file register initial device value comment local device set at the PLC file tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box per program The data is set for each program By default the option Use PLC file setting is selected If the option Not used is selected the File Use setting is made as listed below in the table Setting item Processing when the option Not used is selected File registers can not be used in the program The device initial value is not set when the program file name and the device initial value is the same Comment file used in a command Local devices are not hidden or restored at the time of program Local device conversion 6 I O Refresh Setting
145. the error codes 4000H to 4FFFH APPENDIX 2 External Dimensions Diagram APPENDIX 2 1 CPU module APPENDIX 2 2 Power supply module APPENDIX 2 3 Main base unit APPENDIX 2 4 Extension base unit APPENDIX 3 Comparison between Process CPU and High Performance model QCPU APPENDIX 3 1 Function comparison INDEX Manuals The following manuals are also related to this product In necessary order them by quoting the details in the tables below Related Manuals Model Code Process CPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection eee This manual provides the specifications of the CPU modules power supply modules base units 13JR55 extension cables memory cards and others Sold separately QCPU Q Mode QnA CPU Programming Manual Common Instructions ahs 080039 This manual describes how to use the sequence instructions basic instructions and application 13JF58 instructions Sold separately QCPU Q Mode QnA CPU Programming Manual SFC SH 080041 This manual explains the system configuration performance specifications functions programming 13JF60 debugging error codes and others of MELSAP3 Sold separately QCPU Q Mode QnA CPU Programming Manual MELSAP L SH 080076 This manual describes the programming methods specifications functions and so on that are 13JF61 necessary to create the MELSAP L type SFC programs Sold separately QnPHCPU Programming Manual Process Control Instructions
146. the following file 1 This setting should be selected when a given file register is to be shared by all executed programs 2 Specify the desired parameters in the Corresponding memory File name and Capacity text boxes The Process CPU creates a file register file with the specified parameters If a parameter is not specified in the Capacity test box this may result in the following e If a file register file with the specified filename is stored on the specified drive that file register file is used e If a file register file with the specified filename is not found on the specified drive a PARAMETER ERROR 3002 will occur e When an ATA card is used a memory card ROM cannot be registered with the targeted memory If a memory card is registered with the targeted memory a parameter error 3000 will occur when a file register file is written to the Process CPU 2 File Register Setting Use the device memory screen to specify a filename of a file register file a Device Label RO z Display 16bit integer z pec z RO Ra2767 al Device name 0 i 2 3 4 5 6 4 Ro EJ G a elololololololololololololololle elololololololololololololololo elololololololololololololololo elololololololololololololololo elololololololololololololololo elololololololololololololololo elololololololololololololololo a Se
147. the same point for all the PLC Refresh setting for PLC No 2 Change screens etting Change screens SCN for each PLC PLC side device PLC PLC fare memo G Dev starting WO pinn Kea Eat Sat Ee _ No1 16 0802 oti WOW Nog 16 0802 0811 ice 16 6 ice e When the PLC No 1 and PLC No 2 devices have been set up with different devices e When the PLC No 1 and PLC No 2 devices have been set up with the same device 16 6 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM Other PLC s shared memory PLC No 2 3 MELSEC Q An outline of the operations when the automatic refresh function is divided into four ranges Setting 1 Link relay B Setting 2 Link register W Setting 3 Data register D Setting 4 Internal relay M and then performed is shown in the illustration below PLC No 1 Device Reading performed Setting 1 with the PLC No 1 BO ONE END process to transmission data No 1 A Maximum PLC No 2 transmission data No 1 PLC No 2 transmission data No 2 PLC No 2 reception data No 1 PLC No 3 reception data No 1 2 k words PLC No 2 transmission data No 3 PLC No 2 transmission data No 4 PLC No 4 reception data No 1 PLC No 1 PLC No 3 transmission data No 2 PLC No 3 transmission data No 1 PLC No 2 reception data No 2
148. the sub routine program e The function register I O condition is automatically determined by the Process CPU If the sub routine program data is the source data the data is designated as sub routine input data If the sub routine program data is the destination data the data is designated as sub routine output data e 1 point occupies 4 words The number of words used depends on an instruction in a sub routine program A one word instruction requires 1 word J CALLP PO oo Po J MOV RO ro Ne eee eee E The data is stored in one point DO A two words instruction requires 2 words i CALLP PO oH Po 1 DMOV RO rot a ee The data is stored in two points DO and D1 The destination of 32 bit multiplication division operation requires 4 words Ho PO ca ro D RO R10 roo t 5 The data is stored in four points DO to D3 e Valid devices cannot be used in a sub routine program that contains arguments If devices assigned for function registers are used values of the function registers will not correctly be returned to a calling program T CALLP Pono H Po H D RO R10 FDO MOV KO D3 Since the points DO to D3 are used for FDO D3 can not be used for the sub routine program e Process CPU s word data devices can be used 1 For a procedure for using function devices refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 10 32 10 32 10 DEVICE
149. the year two digits and he day of the week in SD213 in the BCD code format as shown below B15 to B1i2B11 to B8 B7 to B4 B3 35 min 48 sec after the hour H3548 80 Example to T 1 fi Friday H0005 Higher digits of year 0 to 99 Day of week July 1993 Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Set by When set S U Request S U Request MELSEC Q Corresponding ACPU DTT Corresponding CPU H b D9038 O Era format Era D9025 D9026 O Rem D9027 l APP 25 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued A Set by Corresponding Corresponding Name Meaning Explanation When set ACPU CPU DIT SD220 e LED display ASCII data 16 characters stored here B15 to B8 B7 to BO D221 D220 15th character from the right 16th character from the right D221 13th character from the right 14th character from the right SD223 LED display Display indicator SD222 11th character from the right 12th character from the right S When SD223 9th character from the right 10th character from the right SD224 7th character from the right 8th character from the right SD225 5th character from the right 6th character from the right SD226 SD226 3rd character from the right 4th character from the right Number SD224 data data changed
150. time will be longer To execute the Write to PLC Flash ROM function set the length of GX Developer s time check to 60 seconds or longer Shorter time check may cause a time out on the GX Developer side To execute the Write to PLC Flash ROM function via the CC Link network by operating from GX Developer at a local station set the length of CC Link s CPU monitoring time SWOA to 60 seconds or longer The default is 90 seconds Use the default value when making the setting 6 PROCESS CPU FILES d f MELSEC Q When the Write to PLC Flash ROM function is executed all files stored in the standard ROM or on the Flash card are erased before a batch of files specified by GX Developer are written No files can be added to the standard ROM or Flash card To add new files to old files read all the old files from Process CPU and write them again into the Process CPU The Write to PLC Flash ROM function can be executed when the Process CPU is in RUN status However for the following cases execute the Write to PLC Flash ROM function after the Process CPU enters into STOP status 1 The file registers of the Flash card is used in a sequence program 2 The file registers are used in a sequence program by setting the file register to set not to use in the PLC parameter If the Write to PLC Flash ROM function is executed when the Process CPU is in RUN status an error may occur and the Process CPU may stop ru
151. us 1 30 us 3 CC Link automatic refresh a The amount of time required for performing the refresh process between Process CPU and CC Link master local modules Refer to the following manual for details on the automatic refresh time for CC Link e QJ61BT11 CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual c The amount of time required for the automatic refresh process will be prolonged only by the following amount of time when requests for refreshing are issued by other CC Link modules at the same time on a multiple PLC system Prolonged time transmitted received word point lt N5 X number of other PLCs ps The amount of data transmitted received is the following transferal data e Link refresh data Res eS SW Refer to the following table for N5 CPU type Systems with only Systems that include a main base unit additional base units Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 0 54 us 1 30 us 18 3 18 3 19 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM This Chapter explains the standard procedures for starting up the multiple PLC system 19 1 Flow chart for Starting Up the Multiple PLC System Clarification of function sharing in multiple PLC system Y Purpose of each device and allocation Y Selection of module to be used i Installation of module as GX Developer startup as See Multiple PLC setting
152. when automatic write to standard ROM is completed and the Process CPU will assume a suspension error status 6 Switch off the power supply to the PLC 7 Remove the memory card and then set the parameter valid drive to the standard ROM with the Process CPU s dip switches as follows e Standard ROM SW2 ON SW3 ON c The parameters and programs will be booted from the standard ROM to the program memory to enable actual operations when the PLC is switched on 6 PROCESS CPU FILES MELSEC Q 2 Precautions This section indicates the precautions for performing Automatic write to standard ROM a If the file to be booted from the memory card shares the same name as a file in the program memory the memory card data will be overwritten Also if the file to be booted from the memory card does not share the same name as a file in the program memory it will be added to the program memory The FILE SET ERROR Error code 2401 will occur at this time if the capacity of the program memory is exceeded It is possible to select whether to perform the boot after the program memory has been cleared or perform the boot without clearing the program memory when booting from the memory card to the program memory Performing the boot after the program memory has been cleared when Automatic write to standard ROM prevents the program memory from overflowing during the boot c The Auto Download all Data from Memory card to St
153. z a Output module Intelligent function module Input module Intelligent function module rm Output module j i Possible to read with the QCPU2 Possible to read with the QnNPHCPU1 4 GX Developer access range a It is possible to write parameter programs and perform monitoring and tests in Process CPUs connected to personal computers To access Process CPUs that are not connected to personal computers specify the Process CPU to be accessed connection destination specification with the GX Developer It is possible for the GX Developer to access the Process CPU regardless of the control modules and non control modules By connecting a single Process CPU to a personal computer it is possible to perform monitoring and tests on all modules being controlled by the multiple PLC system s Process CPU in the same way as with a single CPU system Other station Process CPUs on the same MELSECNET H Ethernet or other network can also be accessed It is possible for all Process CPUs on a multiple PLC system to be accessed from a GX Developer that is connected to other stations on the same network 13 4 13 OUTLINE OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS MELSEC Q 13 3 Differences with Single CPU Systems 13 5 The differences between single CPU systems and multiple PLC systems are explained below 1 Function versions see Sections 14 2 1 to 14 2 5 a Process CPUs are supported by multiple PLC systems b
154. 0 38 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 6 Index Registers Z 1 Definition a Index registers are used in the sequence program for indirect setting index qualification designations An index register point is used for index modification XO _____ move K5 ZO SM400 BCD DOZO K4Y30 Index registers consist of 16 bits per point b There are 16 index registers Z0 Z15 c Index registers which consist of 16 bits per point read and write data in 16bit units d If the index registers are used for 32 bit instructions the data is stored in registers Zn and Zn 1 The lower 16 bits of data are stored in the index register No Zn designated in the sequence program and the upper 16 bits of data are stored in the designated index register No 1 For example if register Z2 is designated in the DMOV instruction the lower 16 bits are stored in Z2 and the upper 16 bits are stored at Z3 iconos DO zH Processing object Z2 Z3 Z3 Z2 Upper 16 bits _Lower 16 bits it For index modification using the index register refer to the following manual QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common instructions 10 39 10 39 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 6 1 Switching between scan execution type programs and low speed execution type programs When switching from a scan execution type programs or low speed execution type program to another program type the index register Z0 to Z15 data is
155. 0 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 10 Interrupt Pointers l 1 Definition a Interrupt pointers are used as labels at the beginning of interrupt programs Interrupt pointer interrupt program label I lt Interrupt program IRET b A total of 256 interrupt points 10 to 1255 can be used total for all programs being executed 2 Interrupt pointer No amp interrupt factor a As shown below there are four types of interrupt factor e QI60 A1S161 factor Interrupt input from the QI60 A1SI61 interruption module e Internal time factor Fixed scan interruption by Process CPU s internal timer e Error interruption Interruption by an error that does not stop sequence program operation e Intelligent function Interruption by an intelligent function module module interrupt 1 x1 To use the intelligent function module interrupt the intelligent function module setting interrupt points setting is required at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box For the interrupts from the intelligent function module see Section 8 2 1 10 56 10 56 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q b A list of interrupt pointer Nos and interrupt factors is given in Table 10 5 below Table 10 5 List of Interrupt Pointer Nos and Interrupt Factors 2nd point UNIT VERIFY ERR FUSE BREAK OFF SP UNIT ERROR OPERATION ERROR 135 SFCP OPE ERROR QI60 interru
156. 1 16 3 1 Control commands from the Process CPU to the Motion CPU eececeseseeeeeteeteeteeeeeeeeees 16 11 16 3 2 Reading and writing device data eee ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceeaeesaeeseeeseeseaeseeseeseeeseneseeeeneetaaes 16 12 16 4 6PU Shared MEMO adnan e a ave See ee ein Bae 16 13 17 COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM S I O MODULES AND INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES 17 1to17 5 17 1 Range of Control PLC Communications ccccecceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeceeeeaeeaesaeseeeeaesaesaeseeeeaeeaeeaeeentaees 17 1 17 2 Range of Non control PLC Communications ccccccseceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseaeeaesaeseeeeaeeaesaeseeeeaeeaeseseeeeees 17 1 18 PROCESSING TIME FOR MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM PROCESS CPUs 18 1 to 18 3 18 1 Concept behind CPU Scanning Time eccecceeccecceceeseeeceeceeeeaeeaecaeceeseaesaeceeseeeaesaesaeeeeseaeeaesaeeaeeaees 18 1 18 2 Factor to Prolong the Scan Time ececccecceceeseeeeeeeceeeeseeeceeeeeeeaeeaecaeeeeeeaesaesaeeeaeeaeeaeseeeeaseaeseeseeseaeeaees 18 2 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM 19 1 to 19 10 19 1 Flow chart for Starting Up the Multiple PLC System sceceeesseseseseseeeseseseeseseseeeeeeseseeneesseatenseeaeseseeeeeeasaens 19 1 19 2 Setting Up the Multiple PLC System Parameters Multiple PLC Settings Control PLC Settings 19 3 19 2 1 System CONPIQUIATION ccceecceceeeteeee cee ceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaecaecaeseaeeaecaeseeseaesaesaeseeseaesaesaese
157. 10 F151 F210 LEDR WOW WOW WOON 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 17 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 8 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 25 99 99 99 99 99 15 15 15 15 15 70 70 70 70 65 65 65 0 38 38 0 o 110 0 0 0 APP 42 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 8 Fuse blown module e Corresponding Correspondin Number Nam Meaning Explanation ACPU aii 9 Do TT D1300 The numbers of output modules whose fuses have blown are D1301 input as a bit pattern in units of 16 points D1302 If the module numbers are set by parameter the parameter set D1303 numbers are stored D1304 Bit pattern in units e Also detects blown fuse condition at remote station output of 16 points modules D1305 15 1413 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 D1306 indicating the 1 1 modules whose sp1300 9 vool O vw 2 0 O O O S Error fuses have blown 1 1 0 No blown fuse eee Ladd ANA AANA New 1 Blown fuse 0 0 ie ololololo present ang so J New to New TEN Indicates a blown fuse Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new one This flag is cleared by error resetting operation refer to 11 3 Bit pattern in units The module number in units of 16 points whose external power of 16 points supply has been disconnected is input as a bit pattern indicating the If the module numbers are set by par
158. 114 have step Trace started Set when sampling trace of all specified blocks is SM1180 sampling trace i Trace completed completed Reset when sampling trace is started completion flag Active step Trace not being executed sampling trace Trace execution under execution flag way Selects sampling trace execution enable disable Active step ON Sampling trace execution is enabled SM1182 sampling trace Trace disable su pend OFF Sampling trace execution is disabled Set when sampling trace is being executed Reset when sampling trace is completed or suspended ae Trace enable i i 3 permission If turned off during sampling trace execution trace is suspended Selects the operation output when block stop is executed ON Retains the ON OFF status of the coil being used SM1196 Operation output OFF Coil output OFF by using operation output of the step being at block stop Coil output ON executed at block stop OFF All coil outputs are turned off Operation output by the SET instruction is retained regardless of the ON OFF status of M9196 1 0 numbers SM9197 SM1198 to be displayed M1197 X Y gt 3 Switch between OFF OFF 0 to 7FO Switches I O numbers in the fuse blow module storage blown fuse and registers SD1100 to SD1107 and I O module verify error VO verification OFF oe to FFO storage registers SD1116 to SD1123 according to the error display XY combination of ON OFF of the SM1197 a
159. 17 2 Range of Non control PLC Communications 17 1 It is possible for non control PLCs to read the contents of the intelligent function module s buffer memory It is also possible to load non control module input X ON OFF data and another PLC module output Y ON OFF data with the PLC parameters Input modules controlled by other PLCs can be used as interlocks for the host PLC and the output status to external equipment being controlled by other PLCs can be confirmed However it is not possible for non control PLCs to output ON OFF data to output modules or intelligent function modules or write in the buffer memory of intelligent function modules 17 1 17 COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM S I O MODULES AND INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES MELSEC Q 1 Loading input X from input modules and intelligent function modules The Out of group input output settings setting in the PLC parameter s multiple PLC settings determines whether input can be loaded from input modules and intelligent function modules being controlled by other PLCs Multiple PLC settings No of PLEC No of PLC j4 v Online module change T Enable online module change When the online module exchange is enabled 1 0 status outside the group cannot be taken Input outside of group setting O Input condition of group outside is taken Do not load input condition outside of group setting Ef Input condition of group outside is t
160. 20 Assignment Slot Type Model name Paints Stat 4 Semen PLCNo1l v X 3E00 1 PLC PLC No 2 x 3E10 2 PLC PLCNo3 v X 3E20 Detailed setting 3 PLC PLC Empty v x 3E30 4 3 3 v v 5 4 4 v v 6 _ 5 5 X X 7_j6 6 x v Ifthe start X and Y are not input the PLC assigns them automatically It is not possible to check correctly when there is a slot of the unsetting on the way Standard setting r Base mode gt 8 fixation 12 fixation w settings should be set as same when Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Read PLC data PLC using multiple Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple PLC settings Default Check End Cancel 3 A PARAMETER ERROR error code 3010 occurs to all mounted CPU modules in the following cases e The number of mounted CPU modules exceeds the number set with the CPU count setting No CPU module is installed in slots set for PLC No 1 to No 4 14 11 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q b Operation mode setting optional This is set to continue operation of other PLCs where a stopping error has not occurred when an error occurs at any of PLCs No 2 to No 4 The operation mode for the PLC No 1 cannot be changed all PLCs will suspend operations when a stop error is triggered for the PLC No 1 See Section 14 2 8 for further details c I O settings outside of the group optional This is set w
161. 28H ine gt cm H END Interrupt pointer gt This does not have to be created in order x See Section 10 10 for details on interrupt pointers 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONDITIONS CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION MELSEC Q 4 2 5 Fixed scan execution type program 1 Definition of fixed scan execution type program a b This program is executed at specified intervals Without describing an interrupt point and IRET instruction a fixed scan execution can be performed for each file The type of execution is set to Fixed Scan at the Program tab screen in the PLC parameter dialog box 2 Execution of fixed scan execution type program a Interrupt factor Fixed scan execution type program execution Link refresh Fixed scan execution type programs are executed at specified cyclic time intervals When multiple fixed scan execution type programs have reached there simultaneously they are executed in the ascending order set at the Program tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box Set the periodic interval at the Program setting tab screen in PLC Parameter dialog box The setting range varies with the set unit e When the unit is ms 0 5 to 999 5ms e When the unit is s 1 to 60s When the specified times of fixed scan execution type programs and interrupt programs 128 to 131 have come simultaneously the priority of execution is given to the interrupt pr
162. 3 BCD Binary coded decimal 006 4 47 BIN Binary code 4 45 BL SFC block device 10 58 BOOt RUIN AEE A E EAE 6 16 C GC GOUNTER ETLE ATEA iastestaess 10 24 Catalog PLC MeMOT ccscceseeseeseeteeees 6 17 Character String ccccccccscceseeseesesseeteeeseees 4 50 Glock fUnGtion 22 2ieee3h eos Gace eee 7 9 PreGiSlOM ne r E aee teeta Eaa 7 11 COMMON pointer sssi 10 54 Concept of I O assignment ceeee 5 8 Concept of I O assignment using GX Developer cecceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 12 Constant SCAN ccccceeceeseeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeees 7 2 Gonstans Na Ace eta 10 61 Gounter CG vei ivescctv sect nesdieen tie diindes 10 24 Count ProceSSing ceceseeeeeeeeeees 10 24 Maximum counting speed cee 10 25 D D Data register cceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 10 28 Data register D c cceeseeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeees 10 28 Data stored on the memory card 6 4 Decimal constants K ce ceeseeeeeeeeees 10 61 Device initial ValU cceeceeeseeeeesneeees 10 69 D vice Steat erar reena hoarier 10 1 Direct ACCESS input 10 6 Direct ACCESS output 10 9 Direct MOE yasaini 4 41 Drive Num Den eiectus ieri hiveeeesh ete eerccteveeect 6 5 Index 1 E F G H Duby EE E EE A E 10 25 DX Direct access input s es 10 6 DY Direct access OUtpUt eee 10 9 E Real nUmbers ece
163. 3 27 20 19 08 E E Device memory Remote operation Device data Clear PLC memory Format PLC memory Arrange PLC memo Create title Total free space E ace volume a File name 1 The file name consists of the file name max 8 characters and the extension 3 characters A file name of any file written from the GX Developer into the Process CPU will be displaced in uppercase characters on screen When naming a file by using a sequence program type a file name in uppercase characters An extension which corresponds to the file type designated when the file was written in the Process CPU by GX Developer is automatically appended to the file name 2 The following Windows reserved words cannot be used for a file name e COM1 to COM9 e LPT1 to LPT9 e AUX e CON e PRN e NUL e CLOCK b Date amp time The date amp time when the file was written from GX Developer to the Process CPU is indicated The set date and time indicate the GX Developer side date and time c Size The file size when written from GX Developer to the Process CPU is indicated in byte units To view the latest Process CPU data click on the Update button Files are stored in the Process CPU program file and standard ROM in 4 byte units 1 step and in the memory card in 1 byte units When calculating a file s size at least 64 bytes 136 bytes for programs will be added to all user created files other
164. 47 1024 points CO to C1023 Section 10 2 11 Data register 12288 points DO to D12287 Section 10 2 12 Link register 8192 points WO to W1FFF Section 10 2 13 Link special register 1 2048 points SWO to SW7FF Section 10 2 14 Function input FXO to FX4 Section 10 3 1 Bit devices Word devices Function output FYO to FY4 Section 10 3 1 Special relay 2048 points SMO to SM2047 Unchangeable Section 10 3 2 Function register FDO to FD4 Section 10 3 1 Word devices gt Special register 2048 points SDO to SD2047 Section 10 3 3 8192 points Jn X0 to Jn X1 FFF Bit device Link output 8192 points Jn Y0 to Jn Y1FFF Link direct Link relay 16384 points Jn BO to Jn B3FFF F A A Unchangeable Section 10 4 devices Link special relay 512 points Jn SBO0 to Jn SB1FF Link register 16384 points Jn Wo to Jn W3FFF Word device 7 Link special register 512 points Jn SWO to Jn SW1FF 10 1 10 1 10 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q Default Values Parameter Class Type Device Name Designated Pipierence yR Number of Points Range Used Section Setting Range Un GO to i Buffer register 65536 points Un G65535 2 Unchangeable Section 10 5 Index Index register 16 points Z0 to Z15 Unchangeable Section 10 6 0 to 1018 k points fe So eros O l O 1k ins ieee Nesting Nesting 5 points Noton14 Unchangeable_ Section 10 8 4096 points PO to P4095 Section 10 9 y x Unchangeable Interrupt pointer 256 points 10 to 1255 S
165. 64 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 15 1 Interrupt due to error occurrence The Process CPU can execute the interrupt program of the interrupt pointer that is set as the interrupt object when an error occurs Only when the error set to continue at the PLC RAS tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box occurs the Process CPU executes the interrupt program corresponding to the error When the error set to stop there occurs the interrupt program 132 for Stop all errors is executed Interrupt pointer Corresponding error message 132 Stop all errors oe 133 Empty i 134 UNIT VERIFY ERR FUSE BREAK OFF SP UNIT ERROR 135 OPERATION ERROR SFCP OPE ERROR Errors that occur when the system can continue SFCP EXE ERROR the drive mode where or continue is selected from 136 ICM OPE ERROR continues stops FILE OPE ERROR 137 EXTEND INS ERR 138 PRG TIME OVER CHK instruction Annunciator detect 140 to 147 Empty 1 The interrupt pointers 132 to 139 is at an execution disable mode when the power is started or Process CPU is reset When using 132 to 139 use the IMASK instruction and El instruction to enable execution 139 2 The 132 interrupt program is not executed upon the following serious errors e MAIN CPU DOWN e END NOT EXECUTE e RAM ERROR e OPE CIRCUIT ERR 7 15 2 LED display when error occurs When an error occurs the LED located on the front of the Process
166. 68B oO sd Lape 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 5 3 Base Unit Assignment Base Mode There are Auto and Detail modes to assign the number of modules can be mounted in the main and extension base units of Process CPU 1 Auto mode In Auto mode the slot numbers are assigned to the main and extension base units according to the number of slots than can be occupied The I O numbers are assigned according to the modules which can be mounted to the current base unit a For 3 slot base unit 3 slots are occupied Q33B type main base unit 01 2 Ly Five slots are not occupied Q63B type extension base unit 3 4 5 Te 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 _ Five slots are not occupied ype extension base unit 6 7 8 Power supply Bs Five slots are not occupied b For 5 slot base unit 5 slots are occupied Q35B type main base unit 01234 Power supply CPU module Ly Three slots are not occupied Q65B type extension base unit Power supply Ly Three slots are not occupied Q65B type extension base unit 10 11 12 13 14 Power supply as Three slots are not occupied 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q c For 8 slot base unit 8 slots are occupied Q38B type main base unit 01234567 Power supply CPU module
167. Ambient Temperature C Accuracy Day difference S 3 18 to 5 25 TYP 2 12 Pt 3 93 to 5 25 TYP 1 9 i o oo O 14 69 to 3 53 TYP 3 67 5 Comparison of Clock Data To compare Process CPU s clock data with a sequence program use the DATERD instruction to read the clock data The year data is read out in 4 digits It can be compared as it is by using a compare instruction 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 6 Remote Operation The Process CPU provides the RUN STOP switches for switching between the STOP status and the RUN status The RESET L CLR switch also provides the Reset and Latch Clear functions The Process CPU can allow control of the Process CPU operation status by external operations GX Developer function intelligent function module and remote contact The following four options are available for remote operations e Remote RUN STOP e Remote PAUSE e Remote RESET e Remote LATCH CLEAR The serial communication module is used as the example to describe the intelligent function module 7 6 1 Remote RUN STOP 1 What is Remote RUN STOP a The remote RUN STOP performs RUN STOP of the Process CPU externally with the CPU module RUN STOP switch at RUN b Using remote RUN STOP for the following remote operations are useful 1 When the Process CPU is at a position out of reach 2 When performing RUN STOP of the control board Process CPU externally c Calculations during Remote RUN STOP The program calc
168. Binary Coded Decimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Carry aliy O N 2 BCD numeric expression Process CPU registers data registers link registers etc consist of 16 bits Therefore the numeric values expressed in BCD notation can be stored in each register within 0 to 9999 range 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 8 4 Real numbers floating decimal point data 1 Real numbers Real numbers are single precision floating decimal point data 2 Internal expression of floating decimal point data The Process CPU s internal expression of received real number data is explained below Real number data is expressed as shown below using 2 word devices 1 Mantissa x 2 characteristic The bit configuration used for internal expression of floating decimal point data is shown and explained below b31 b30 b23 b22 b16 b15 bO N A i J b23 to b30 bO to b22 Characteristic Mantissa b31 Mantissa code e Mantissa code The mantissa code is expressed at b31 as follows 0 Positive 1 Negative e Characteristic The n of 2n is expressed in various ways at b23 to b30 depending on the b23 to b30 BIN value b23 to b30 FFH FEH FDH 81H 80H 7FH 7EH 02H 01H OOH Non Non n numeric 127 126 2 1 0 1 125 126 numeric e Mantissa For a binary value of 1 XXXXXxX the XXXXXX portion of the value is expressed at bO to b22 23 bits
169. C SYSTEM 16 10 MELSEC Q 2 Precautions a The following values are set in the CPU module s first I O number with the FROM instruction the S TO instruction and instructions that use UD GO PLC No PLC No 1 PLC No 2 PLCNo 3_ PLCNo4 Value set in the first VO number b Do not perform writing as reading in the system area or automatic refresh area for the CPU shared memory see Section 16 4 c An error will not occur when CPUs accessed with the FROM instruction the S TO instruction and instructions that use UL GO are reset However access execution flag SM390 will remain OFF when instruction execution has been completed d Establish an interlock to prevent simultaneous access during interactive data communication with the FROM instruction the S TO instruction and instructions that use UD GO There are cases where old data and new data will be mixed together if simultaneous access is carried out e The instruction that uses the S TO instruction UD GO cannot be used to write data to the CPU shared memory of other PLCs SP UNIT ERROR error code 2115 occurs if data is written to the CPU shared memory of other PLCs with the instruction that uses UD GO SP UNIT ERROR error code 2117 occurs if data is written to the CPU shared memory of other PLCs with the instruction that uses the S TO instruction f SP UNIT ERROR error code 2114 also occurs if data is written into the CPU shared memory of
170. C boxes are performed at GX Developer side and those shown in L boxes are performed at the Process CPU side Start the GX Developer Refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual Mode selection screen is displayed Change the number of device points Seg P Ses See Section 10 1 2 Change the number of device points at the device setting item in the PLC parameter Create the program which is tobe executed inthe CPU module 12 6 12 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAMS TO PROCESS CPU MELSEC Q Use the device initialvalue cal See Section 10 13 2 Right click on the device memory and select Add to specify device initial value data Y Right click on a device initial value and select Add to specify a device initial value range Select the device memory to be used in the device memory registration setting of the device initial value and click on Use device memory In the PLC file setting in the PLC parameter designate the name of file to be used for the designated device initial values Designate local devices ago T See Section 10 13 1 In the device setting item in the PLC parameter designate the name of the local device range In the PLC file setting item in the PLC parameter designate the name of the local device file Use the common A 6 Yet T See Section 10 9 2 pointers In the PLC system setting item in the
171. C program in a binary value extension file er SFC banister Stores 0 if an empty area of 16K bytes or smaller 9 which cannot be expansion file register No 1 is used or if SM320 is OFF Stores code numbers of errors occurred in the SFC program in BIN code 0 No error Error code 80 SFC program parameter error generated by SFC 81 SFC code error program 82 Number of steps of simultaneous execution exceeded 83 Block start error SFC program D90 D90 error number gt lt aE a 84 SFC program operation error Stores the block number in which an error occurred in Blocknumber the SFC program in BIN code D9051 SD1051 Error block where error prog e P In the case of error 83 the starting block number is occurred stored Transition condition Stores the transfer condition number in which error 84 D9053 D1053 Error transition number where error occurred in the SFC program in BIN code occurred Stored 0 when errors 80 81 82 and 83 occurred Error sequence D9054 D1054 q number where error and operation output in which error 84 occurred in the step i occurred SFC program in BIN code Stores the step number when status latch is executed Stores the step number in a binary value if status latch is executed in a main sequence program Stores the block number and the step number if status D9055 D1055 D812 Status latch Status latch step latch is executed in a SFC program Block No Step No BIN BIN
172. CPU turns on flickers See Section 7 19 for the details on the LED operation 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 15 3 Error cancellation Process CPU error cancel operation can be performed only for error that can continue the Process CPU operation 1 Error cancellation a Procedures for error cancellation The error cancel is performed as follows 1 Resolve the cause of error 2 Store the error code of the error to be canceled in the special register SD50 3 Switch special relay SM50 from OFF to ON 4 The error is canceled b Status after error cancellation When the CPU module is recovered by canceling the error the special relay special register and LED affected by the error are set to the status before the error occurred When the same error occurs after canceling the error it is logged again in the failure history c Cancellation of annunciator For the cancellation of the annunciator detected multiple times only the first detected F is canceled When error cancellation is performed by storing the code of the error to cancel is stored in SD50 the lower 2 digits of the code number is ignored Example When 2100 and 2111 occur in the error code and error code 2100 is canceled error code 2111 is canceled as well 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 16 Failure History The Process CPU can store the failure history results detected from the self diagnosis function and the time in the memory The detection tim
173. Can be applied to the MELSECNET H remote I O modules For details on the following items see these manuals e Networks For Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network e For Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network e SFC QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC APP 17 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List 1 Diagnostic Information Porrespaneing Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU Si 9 pL TL e Ee fret a oom ae errors error code e Contents identical to latest fault history information change Year last two digits and month that SDO data was updated is stored as BCD 2 digit code B15 to B8 B7 to BO Example Year 0 to 99 Month 1 to 12 October 1995 H9510 The day and hour that SDO was updated is stored as BCD 2 digit lock time for ecm tol See i hoa Example diagnosis error B15 to B8 B7 to BO New occ rrencg STS Day 1 t031 Hour 0 to 23 10 p m on 25th occurrence H2510 The minute and second that SDO data was updated is stored as BCD 2 digit code BI5 to B8 B7 to Bo Example Minutes 0 to 59 Seconds 0 to 59 35 min 48 sec past the hour H3548 e Category codes which help indicate what type of information is being stored in the common information areas SD5 through SD15 and the individual information areas SD16 through SD26 are stored here B15 to B8 B7 to BO Individu
174. D23 SD24 SD25 SD26 Program error location Number Meaning SD16 SD17 File name Error SD18 ASCII code 8 characters indivi SD19 Eror one individual SD20 Extension 2EH S Error New O Rem information information SD21 ASCII code 3 characters SD22 Pattern SD23 Block No SD24 Step No transition No SD25 Sequence step No L SD26 Sequence step No H x Contents of pattern data 1514 to 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number 0 0 to 0 O k __SFC block designation present Not used 1 absent 0 SFC step designation present 1 absent 0 SFC transition designation present 1 absent 0 Parameter number Annunciator Intelligent function number CHK module parameter instruction error malfunction for QCPU only number Number Meaning Number Meaning Number Meaning SD16 Parameter No 6 SD16 No SD16 Parameter No 6 SD17 SD17 SD17 Error code for intelligent SD18 SD18 function module 5D19 5D19 SD18 D20 D20 SD19 SD21 5D21 D20 5D22 Vacant 5D22 Vacant Sai SD23 SD23 SD22 Vacant 024 024 D23 SD25 5D25 SD24 5D26 5D26 5D25 D26 6 For details of the parameter numbers refer to the user s manual of the CPU used n n n n n n n n n n n g g g g g g g iw iw iw iw N N N N N N N o oa A wo N i o N o APP 21 APP
175. Defaut Check End Cancel d Write the device initial value data and parameter settings to the Process CPU 10 70 10 70 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 3 Precautions for the use of device initial values a In cases where both device initial value data and latch range data are overlapped the device initial value data takes priority Therefore the latch range data is rewritten by device initial value data at power ON b Device initial values cannot be used in areas where no setting is made for switching from STOP to RUN for data that is changed by a program at power ON Create a program to specify a device by using the MOV instruction in the main routine program Use the TO instruction to write data to the buffer memory of the intelligent function module For details on the setting procedures for the device initial value range device initial value data items and for writing the device initial values to the Process CPU refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual 10 71 10 71 11 PROCESS CPU PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 11 PROCESS CPU PROCESSING TIME This chapter describes how to estimate the length of Process CPU processing time 11 1 Reading Process CPU s Scan Time 11 1 The length of scan time is the total of the following times I O refresh time e Instruction execution time e END processing time I O refresh time a O refresh time is the total time required for refreshing I O data of
176. Designation range The setting ranges for hexadecimal constants are as follows e For word data 16 bits HO to HFFFF HO to H9999 for BCD e For 2 word data 32 bits HO to HFFFFFFFF HO to H99999999 for BCD 10 61 10 61 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 12 3 Real numbers E 1 Definition Real numbers are devices which designate real numbers in the sequence program Real numbers are designated as E settings e g E1 234 x1 _ Emovp E1 234 DO See Section 4 8 4 for details on real numbers Designation range The setting range for real numbers is 1 0X2 to 1 0x2 0 and 1 0x2 to 1 0x2 8 Designation method Real numbers can be designated in sequence programs by a normal expression or an exponential expression e Normal expression The specified value is designated as it is For example 10 2345 becomes E10 2345 e Exponential expression The specified value is multiplied by a x10 exponent For example 1234 becomes E1 234 3 1 1 The 3 in the above example represents a 10 value 1 0 10 12 4 Character string 1 10 62 Definition Character string constants are devices used to designate character strings in sequence programs They are designated by quotation marks e g ABCD1234 Usable characters All ASCII code characters can be used in character strings The QCPU is sensitive to uppercase and lowercase characters Number of desi
177. E PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 2 2 Scan execution type program 1 Definition of scan execution type program a Scan execution type programs are executed once per scan beginning from the scan which follows execution of the initial execution type program b Set the execute type to scan at the Program tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box 2 Executing multiple scan execution type programs When multiple scan execution type programs are used they are executed one by one in ascending order set at the Program tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box 3 END processing The first scan execution type program is executed again when all scan execution type programs are executed and the END processing is completed The END processing network refresh can be performed for each program while several scan execution type programs are executed To do this include a COM instruction at the end of each scan execution type program STOP to RUN Power ON to RUN First scan T Second scan ji Third scan ji Forth scan Initial execution type program H END processing 0 END 0 END 0 END Scan execution type program A 0 END o END 0 Scan execution type program B m e END lo END Scan execution type program C m H Scan time iaa gt 4 Constant scan setting 1 When constant scanning is designated the scan execution type program is executed at each desi
178. EC Q 18 PROCESSING TIME FOR MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM PROCESS CPUS 18 1 Concept behind CPU Scanning Time The concept behind multiple PLC system scanning time is the same as the single CPU system See Section 11 1 for details of the scan time concept This chapter provides explanations on the factors to be added to the scan time calculated as explained in Section 11 1 and the method of calculating processing time when configuring multiple PLC systems 1 I O refresh time Input refresh time is calculated in accordance with the equation explained in Section 11 1 The I O refresh time for the following values only are prolonged when bus access overlaps with other PLCs Prolonged time input points output points 16 XN3 X number of other PLCs ps Use the following values for N3 N3 CPU type Systems with only Systems that include a main base unit additional base units 2 3 18 1 Total value of command execution time Refer to the following manual for details on the processing time of special multiple PLC commands and the processing time for commands that have different processing times with multiple PLC systems QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 18 END process The following tables shows the END processing time CPU type END processing time Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 18 1 18 PROCESSING TIME FOR MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM PROCESS CPUS MELSEC Q 18 2
179. ES ACPU Special Special Register after Conversion Conversion D9091 SD1091 D9094 SD1094 D9100 SD1100 APP 41 Special Register for Modification Register for D9085 SD1085 setting time check value MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Meaning Details CPU Sets the time check time of the data link instructions ZNRD ZNWR for the MELSECNET 10 Setting range 1 s to 65535 s 1 to 65535 Setting unit 1s Default value 10 s If O has been set default 10 sis applied Default value 10s 7 Number of Number of special For details refer to the manual of each microcomputer lt r functions functions modules rogram package KOs over over prog R 9 a rror If diagnosis etale ete ee g Stores the detail code of cause of an instruction error ern detailed error code Stores upper 2 digits of the head I O address of I O modules to be loaded or unloaded during online mode in BIN code N Aea VO N ee for N ePacemen Head I O number for replacement X2F0 H2F Output module numbers in units of 16 points of which fuses have blown are entered in bit pattern Preset output unit numbers when parameter setting has ce performed 14 13 12 11 10 4 2 1 Example Input module PRES E ala Ula 1 o olo Bit pattern in units kvcoj of 16 points SD1101 0 0jojojolo 0 00 indicating the sD1107 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 modules whose fuses have blown ae fuse blow
180. F Not detected Goes ON if error is detected by CHK instruction E S CHK detection A Stays ON subsequently even after normal operation is Instruction ON Detected i restored execution SM90 Corresponds to SD90 SM91 Corresponds to SD91 SM92 _ Startup of f Corresponds to SD92 SM93_ watchdog timer OFF Not sae Corresponds to SD93 Goes ON when warns of SM94__ for step transition watchdog timer reset Corresponds to SD94 step transition watchdog timer is APP ON Started commenced Enabled only A Corresponds to SD95 i watchdog timer Resets watchdog timer when it when SFC started Corresponds to SD96 goes OFF SM97 Program exists Corresponds to SD97 SM98 Corresponds to SD98 SM99 Corresponds to SD99 APP 2 APP 2 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Relay List 2 System information LED off When this relay goes from OFF to ON the LEDs eens ORF EZONE LED off corresponding to the individual bits at SD202 go off SM203 STOP contact STOP status Goes ON at STOP status ay M9042 S Status SM204 PAUSE contact PAUSE status Goes ON at PAUSE status change M9041 PAUSE enable OFF PAUSE disabled e PAUSE status is entered if this relay is ON when the U M9040 coil ON PAUSE enabled remote PAUSE contact goes ON Device test OFF Device test not yet Comes ON when the device test mode is executed on request acceptance status SM210 Clock data set request OFF No error SM211 Clock data error executed
181. F the new anunciator No which is stored at SD64 is stored at SD62 c 1 is subtracted from the SD63 value d Ifthe SD63 value is 0 SM62 is switched OFF SET F50 SET F25 SET F2047 RST F25 AO ORS Gn Oe Ge oO spe2 0 50 50 50 gt 50 SD63 0 1 2 gt 3 2 SD64 0 50 50 50 50 SD65 0 0 25 25 2047 SD66 0 0 0 2047 os 0 SD67 0 0 0 0 a 0 SD79 0 0 0 0 0 Processing by Process CPU If all SD64 to SD79 anunciator Nos are switched OFF the USER LED on the Process CPU front display is switched OFF If an error occurs to continue operation with the higher priority over an anunciator when the anunciator is switched ON eliminate the error by executing an LEDR instruction See Section 7 20 2 for priority In this case executing an LEDR instruction will not switch the anunciator OFF To switch the anunciator OFF you must first eliminate the error before executing the LEDR instruction because the error takes priority over the anunciator 10 15 10 15 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 6 Edge relay V 1 Definition a An edge relay is a device which stores the operation results ON OFF information from the beginning of the ladder block Edge relays can only be used at contacts and cannot be used as coils xo x xo vi Edge relay Stores the X0 X1 and X10 operation results b The same edge relay number cannot be used twice in programs
182. F Relative step No by pointer I Checks for double coils during write r nna I Monitor Scan time extension r Statement insertion method CPU statement r Show don t show character string Macro GPP statement T Common to all programs C None Comment statement note Alias Macro r Ladder monitor of PLS PLF instruction Ladder r for FXGP system 1 Set Write during RUN while PLC is runnning in After conversion writing behavior 2 Select Absolute step No default or Relative step No by pointer in Step No specification used in writing 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q b The specified circuit of the pointer is displayed to write the circuit after conversion during RUN The following is an example of GX Developer A writing during RUN from PO and GX Developer B writing during RUN from P1 The program area surrounded with is the area to be written during RUN Area after PO in the processing 3 program is written during RUN P1 3 X4 X H SET M10 H X5 H END H a Area after P1 in the processing b program is written during RUN XO X2 PO 30 Serial a communication module X3 X4 P1 1 CSET M10 bs END 3 J Personal computer A Personal computer B T D GX Developer GX Developer Precautions Precautions on write during RUN is the same as precautions on write during RUN in the cir
183. FF and 1 ON Decimal notation uses the numerals 0 through 9 When counting beyond 9 a 1 is placed in the 10s column and a 0 is placed in the 1s column to make the number 10 In binary notation the numerals 0 and 1 are used A carry occurs after 1 and the number becomes 10 decimal 2 Table 4 2 gives a comparison between binary and decimal notations Table 4 2 Comparison between Binary and Decimal Notations DEC Decimal BIN Binary Carry Carry Carry 2 Binary numeric expression a Process CPU registers data registers link registers etc consist of 16 bits and a 2 value is allocated to each of the register bits The most significant bit initial bit is used to discriminate between positive and negative 1 When most significant bit is 0 Positive 2 When most significant bit is 1 Negative The numeric expressions for the Process CPUregisters are shown in Fig 4 13 below Most significant bit for positive negative discrimination Bit name gt b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 215 214 213 212 ya 210 29 28 Q7 26 25 a4 23 22 21 20 Hoo tt Decimal value 32768 16384 81924096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Negative value when most significant bit is 1 Fig 4 13 Numeric Expressions for Process CPU Registers b Usable numeric data for Process CPU As shown in Fig 4 13 the numeric expression range is 32768 to 32767 Therefore numeric data within this
184. Factor to Prolong the Scan Time The processing time for multiple PLC systems is prolonged in comparison with single CPU systems when the following functions are used Add the following values to the values calculated in Sections 11 1 and 18 a to acquire the amount of time used by these functions e Multiple PLC system automatic refresh e MELSECNETHH refreshing e CC Link automatic refresh 1 Automatic refresh of CPU shared memory a The amount of time required to perform the refresh function set up with the multiple PLC settings This value is the total amount of time required for writing into the host PLC s CPU shared memory and the amount of time required to read from other PLCs CPU shared memories These values are added when setting up the refresh settings with the PLC parameter multiple PLC settings b The automatic refresh period of the CPU shared memory is calculated in the following equation Automatic refresh time N1 received word points X N2 X number of other PLCs N3 transmitted word points X N4 us The received word points must equal the word points transmitted by other PLCs For example if the host PLC is the PLC No 1 then this value must equal the number of points transmitted for the PLC No 2 to PLC No 4 e Use the following values for N1 to N4 c The amount of time required for the automatic refresh process will be prolonged by the following amount of time when processing
185. H INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE MELSEC Q 8 1 3 Communication using FROM TO instruction 1 FROM TO instruction At the execution of the FROM TO instruction the data stored in the buffer memory of the intelligent function module can be read or data can be written to the buffer memory of the intelligent function module The FROM instruction stores the data read from the buffer memory of the intelligent function module to the designated device The TO instruction writes the data of the designated device to the buffer memory of the intelligent function module 1 For the details of the FROM TO instruction refer to the following manuals QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 2 For the details of the buffer memory of the intelligent function module refer to the manual of the intelligent function module being used 8 1 4 Communication using the intelligent function module device 1 Intelligent function module device The intelligent function module device is the buffer memory of the intelligent function module represented as a device of Process CPU in Process CPU programs It enables reading data stored in the buffer memory of the intelligent function module or enables writing data to the buffer memory of the intelligent function module 2 Difference from the FROM TO instruction The intelligent function module device can be handled as a device of Process CPU enabling the processing of data read from the intelli
186. LC system puc file Puc RAS Device Program Boot file ZFC va assignment m Timer limit setting Low 100 ms 1ms 1000ms Common pointer p 40q speed High foo O 1ms 100 speed up White ra Number of empty slots i fis x Points m RUN PAUSE contacts r System interrupt settings DD os asal Interrupt counter start No 0 768 PAUSE Xx 0 41 FFF Fixed scan interval After 0 4095 Remote reset 128 foco ms 0 5ms 1000ms All jee 129 40 0 ms 0 5ms 1000ms Output mode at STOP to RUN Previous state 130 200 ms 0 5ms 1000ms High speed Recalculate output is 1 scan later 131 10 0 ms 0 5ms 1000ms parr CT r Floating point arithmetic processing r Perform internal arithmetic operations in double precision J High speed execution rm Interrupt program 7 Fixed scan program setting m Intelligent functional module setting r Module synchronization Interrupt pointer setting V Synchronize intelligent module s pulse up Settings should be set as same when _ ane R j using multiple PLC IV Use special relay special register from SM SD1000 Multiple PLC settings Acknowledge XY assignment Default Check End Cancel 1 In the jump instruction jumping to common pointers in other programs is not allowed Common pointers should be used only with sub routine call instructions 10 55 10 55 1
187. M memory capacity is secured in 1024 byte units 6 PROCESS CPU FILES MELSEC Q 6 5 Memory Card 1 Memory card a Amemory card is used to expand the size of an internal memory of the Process CPU b There are three types of memory cards for use in the Process CPU SRAM card Flash card and ATA card POINTS 1 Before the memory card can be used for the first time the memory card must be formatted by GX Developer For details on the formatting procedure by GX Developer refer to the GX Developer manuals 2 Before writing data into a Flash card all previous data stored on the Flash card are erased For this reason to write data into the Flash card you must first read and copy all previous data stored in the Flash card before writing necessary data Please note that an error may occur if data stored in the Flash card is used in a sequence program with data being written on the Flash card 3 Programs are stored in the memory card in 512 byte 128 steps step units 2 Stored Data A memory card holds parameter and program data See Section 6 1 for the types of data stored in a memory card 3 Format a Formatting To format a memory card choose Online Format PLC memory and then select Memory card RAM or Memory card ROM in the Target memory list box See Section 6 2 for the PLC Memory Format dialog box b Memory capacity after formatted Table 6 4 shows the memory capacity of a formatted
188. M card Verify the target memory and the GX Developer s Soe al ee memory to ROM to the standard ROM or Flash card meer a e ROM standard ROM or Flash card Delete PLC data ESE ESE file stored in memory is deleted Format PLC memor Pe ae ie Memory formatting is executed PLC Memory files which are no longer contiguous rrange memor E 4 are re organized to make them contiguous Write during RUN in Write changes made in the ladder mode into the the ladder mode program memory Execution enabled A Execution enabled with some restrictions X Execution disabled 1 The codes A B C D used at the operation enabled disabled item in the above table are explained below Table 6 6 Operation enabled disabled a When write prohibit password is registered in a file B sWhen read write prohibit password is registered in a file co Wha the Process CPU s system protect switch is ON When Process CPU RUN status is in effect 2 Execution is allowed only when the passwords match 6 PROCESS CPU FILES MELSEC Q 6 9 2 File handling precautions 1 Power OFF or reset during program operation a If power is switched OFF during a file operation which will not cause a file shift the memory data will not be lost b If files and data in the memory of the Process CPU is backed up using the battery Q6BAT the program memory data will not be lost when the power is switched OFF during the following file
189. M9012 SM1012 suo Carry flag one ee ee Carry flag used in application instruction Clears the data memory including the latch range other than special relays and special registers in remote run mode from computer etc when SM1016 is on Clears the unlatched data memory other than special Data memory OFF Ignored SM1016 clear flag ON Output claered SM1017 SM1020 Data memory OFF Ignored i relays and registers in remote run mode from computer clear flag ON Output claered etc when SM1017 is on This relay repeats ON OFF at designated scan intervals User timing clock Starts from OFF when the PLC power is turned ON or the CPU module is reset The ON OFF scan intervals are set by the peo em F User timing clock n1 Scan interval of ON mmo es enna n2 Scan interval of OFF e Writes clock data from SD1025 to SD1028 to the clock SM1025 element after the END instruction is executed during the SM1026 request ON Set request present used Sean in which SM1025 has changed from off to on M9027 SM1027 Clock data error OFF No error Switched on by clock data SD1025 to SD1028 error ON Error M9028 SM1028 PEE Clock data set OFF Ignored Clock data is read from SD1025 to SD1028 and month Clock data OFF Ignored i 7 ee displa ON Displa day hour minute and minute are indicated on the CPU O pay Hisp ay front LED display z z z z z z z z z
190. Maximum 2 k words PLC No 3 transmission data No 2 PLC No 3 transmission data No 3 PLC No 3 transmission data No 4 PLC No 3 reception data No 2 PLC No 4 reception data No 2 PLC No 1 transmission PLC No 4 Maximum 2 k words PLC No 4 transmission data No 1 PLC No 4 transmission data No 2 PLC No 4 transmission data No 3 data No 3 PLC No 2 reception data No 3 PLC No 3 reception data No 3 PLC No 4 reception data No 3 PLC No 4 transmission data No 4 PLC No 1 transmission 16 7 data No 4 PLC No 2 reception data No 4 Q PLC No 3 reception data No 4 N PLC No 4 reception data No 4 rY Writing during the END process CPU shared memory PLC No 1 transmission data No 1 PLC No 1 transmission data No 2 Maximum 2 k words PLC No 1 transmission data No 3 PLC No 1 transmission data No 4 User s free area 3 Precautions a Device ranges set for the use of the automatic refresh function cannot be set in local devices If the device ranges set for the use of the automatic refresh function are set in local devices the settings will not be reflected back onto the refresh data Do not set devices for the use of the automatic refresh function in the file register of all programs If devices for the use of the a
191. N OFF at the time of execution of OUT T instruction if the timer is used during the programming in the fixed scan execution type program the current values will be updated only when the fixed scan execution type program is executed and normal measurement will be disabled d When a fixed scan execution type program is executed an interruption must be allowed by an El instruction in the initial execution type program scan execution type program 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS e MELSEC Q When the interrupt program fixed scan execution type program is executed at a measuring time such as the scan time or execution time the values of the interrupt program fix scan execution type program are added to the measured time Thus if the interrupt program fixed scan execution type program is executed the values stored in the following special registers and GX Developer monitor values will become longer than when the interrupt program fixed scan execution type program is not executed 1 Special registers e SD520 SD521 e SD522 SD523 e S D524 SD525 e SD526 SD527 e SD528 SD529 e SD532 SD533 e SD534 SD535 e SD540 SD541 e D542 SD543 e SD544 SD545 e SD546 SD547 e SD548 SD549 e SD551 SD552 Current scan time Initial scan time Minimum scan time Maximum scan time Current scan time for low speed Minimum scan time for low speed Maximum scan time for low speed END p
192. Number of Instruction detected i number z0 ol solso sr to execution 99 99 99 15 15 15 15 70 70 70 70 65 65 65 65 38 38 38 38 a te o o a 0 Number detected o o o oj o o o o o o o ojo Error codes detected by the CHK instruction are stored as BCD CHK number CHK number code Instruction execution Corresponds to SM90 F numbers which go ON at step transition watchdog timer set value and watchdog timer over errors B15 B8 B7 F number for timer set value Enabled only and time over when SFC error setting 1 to 255 sec 1 second units 3 300bps 6 600bps 24 2400bps 48 4800bps 96 9600bps 192 19 2kbps 384 38 4kbps 576 57 6kbps 1152 115 2kbps transmission _ transmission speed setting speed when RS232 GX Developer is used APP 23 APP 23 APPENDICES Special Register List 2 System information re e The switch status of the remote I O module is stored in the following SD200 Status of Status of CPU switch switch Status of CPU i l Operating SD203 status of Ree ee CPU APP 24 format B15 B4 B3 4 1 Remote I O module switch status e The CPU module switch status is stored in the following format B15 B12B11 Always 1 STOP B8 B7 B4
193. O NUMDErS 2 5 anton edn iia nit a a aeaa ace iting nie ll Aas 5 7 5 5 Concept of I O Number ASSIQNMENh ccccceccecceeeeeceeceeeeeeeaecaeeeeeeaecaecaesaeeaesaesaeseeesaesaeseseassaseeseaeeaees 5 8 5 5 1 O numbers of main base unit and extension base unit ecceceeceeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeseeeeeeaees 5 8 5 5 2 Remote station I O NUMDEM cccceccecceseeeeceeeeeeeseeeeceeeeaeeaecaecaeeeaesaesaeseaseaeeaecaeeaseaesaeseeseaseesneseateates 5 10 5 6 I O Assignment by GX Developer ecceccesceecceceeseeseeeeceeeeaeeaeeeeaeeaecaeeaeeeaeeaecaeeaseaeeaesaeeeaseaeeeeseeseaseates 5 11 5 6 1 Purpose of I O assignment by GX Developer ceccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeseeeeaecaeseeseeesaesaeseeseaeeeseseeeeats 5 11 5 6 2 Concept of I O assignment using GX Developer ccecceceeseeeeceeceeeeaeeaeceeeeeeeaesaeseeeaeeaeeaeseeseaeeaes 5 12 5 7 Examples of I O Number Assignment ccccceceeseeeeceeceeeeeeeaecaeeeeeeaecaecaeseaeeaesaesaeseaeeaesaeseeeeaesaeeeseaeeaees 5 15 5 8 Checking the I O Numbers cceceeccecceceeeeeeeceeeeceeaecaeceeeaeeaecaecaeeaesaecaeseaseaeeaecaessaseaesaeeaeeeaesaseaeeeeeeateats 5 18 6 1 About the Process CPU S M Moly ceccescseesecceeeeseeseceeeeseeaeeaeceeeeaeeaecaesaaseaecaesaeeaeeaesaeeeeeaseaesaeeeeeeaeeaes 6 3 6 2 Program MENHS araar evict a rE eee ieee an eel ee eel 6 6 6 3 About the Standard ROM ccccccesceeceeeceseeseeeeceeeeesaecaeceeseaeeae
194. O number with multiple PLC systems However the concept behind the sequence for allocating I O numbers the I O number for each slot and the I O numbers for empty slots is the same for both types of system See Chapter 5 ora I O Numbers for details on the concept behind the sequence for allocating I O numbers the I O numbers for each slot and the I O numbers for empty slots 1 OOH position for I O numbers a The number of slots set with the PLC parameters multiple PLC settings are occupied by the CPU modules on the multiple PLC system b The I O modules and intelligent function modules are mounted from the right of the slots occupied by the CPU modules c I O number of a system without PC CPU module The I O number for the I O modules and intelligent function modules mounted from the right of the slots occupied by the CPU modules is set as OOH and consecutive numbers are then allocated sequentially to the right 1 Example Two modules are mounted 01234567 Q eH gt wn rts D z io a gt I O number 00x 2 Example Three modules are mounted and one empty slot exists 0123456 2 gt gt D gt S gt 2 5 35 8 2 B 6 G 6 5 5 A gt O number 00x d Input output number of a system with PC CPU module The PC CPU module occupies two slots The one on the right side among the two slots is handled as an empty slot 16 empty points are eee ples with defaul
195. OFF to ON When the DC power supply module is used 1 is added AC DOWN Number of times for at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure of within 10ms counter AC DOWN The value is stored in BIN code It is reset when power is switched from OFF to ON When the DC power supply module is used 1 is added at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure of within 1ms The value is stored in BIN code It is reset when power is switched from OFF to ON error number number is stored in BIN code When one of FO to 255 is turned on by or SET Fi the F number which has been detected earliest among the F numbers which have turned on is stored in BIN code SD62 can be cleared by or instruction If another F number has been detected the clearing of SD62 causes the next number to be F number at which stored in SD62 external failure has When one of FO to 255 is turned on by or occurred SET Fi the F number which has been detected earliest among the F numbers which have turned on is stored in BIN code SD62 can be cleared by executing or instruction or moving INDICATOR RESET switch on CPU front to ON position If another F number has been detected the clearing of SD62 causes the nest number to be stored in SD62 When operation error has occurred during execution Step number at of application instruction the step number at which Error step which operation the error has occurred is stored in BIN code error
196. OWN status For example if a stop error occurs in the PLC No 2 and the PLC No 3 is halted as a direct consequence of this there are cases where the PLC No 1 will be halted because of the stop error on PLC No 3 depending on the timing of error detection Halted with an OPERATION ERROR Power supply PLC No 1 PLC No 2 PLC No 3 Halted with stop error detection on PLC No 2 becomes MULTIPLE PLC DOWN There are cases where the system will be halted with stop error detected on the PLC No 3 depending on the timing of error detection becomes MULTIPLE PLC DOWN Owing to this there are cases where a different PLC No to the PLC that initially caused the stop error will be stored in the error data s common information category In this event remove the reason for the error on the PLC that caused the stop error in addition to the MULTIPLE PLC DOWN error when restoring the system In the illustration shown below the cause of the PLC No 2 error that did not cause the MULTIPLE PLC DOWN error is removed PLC diagnostics PLC status PLC operation status Nol PLC operation STOP switch STOP No2 PLC operation STOP switch RUN No3 PLC operation STOP switch STOP Monitor run stop No 7000 4100 t MULTI CPU DOWN OPERATION ERROR 7000 MULTI CPU DOWN p Eror log c Observe the following procedures to restore the system 1 Confirm the cause of the PLC No 1 error with the PLC diagnostic
197. P set request DED I PE D a a a ro oo N ON P I set being requested l set completion completion set completion completion OFF Other than when P I set being requested ON P I set being requested Turned ON once when the P I set has been completed and then turned OFF again Provides P set request after transfer of the other program for example subprogram when main program is being run is complete during run Automatically switched off when P setting is complete APP 12 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued ACPU Special Rela Special Special Relay after Relay for Conversion Modification SM1061 y Sub program 3 P S set request Divided SM1065 SM711 procera execution detection Divided SM1066 SM712 processing request flag Sy A8UPU A8PUJre SM1070 quired search or time SM1081 E Xp SM1091 SM1094 SM251 SM320 e of SFC program swito1 smge1 _ Star stop SFC program SFC program start status Presence absenc SM1103 SM323 e of continuous transition APP 13 Communication request registration area BUSY signal Instruction error flag I O change flag y M9061 M9065 M9066 M9070 M9081 M9084 M9091 M9094 Presence absenc SM1102 M9103 Meaning Other than when P set being requested P set being requested Divided processing not underway During divide
198. PLC name PLC system PLC fle PLC RAS Device Piootem Boat fle SFC 170 assignment Boot option I Clear program memory System area assured steps Ksteps 0 15K step Set the Transfer from to the Standard ROM Auto Download all Data from Memory card to Standard ROM f Boot file setting E Program Transfer from Transfer to MAIN 4 Parameter m Memory card ROM MAINT f2 Sequence MAIN Memory card ROM E Device com f 3 Sequence MAINT Memory card AOM Program memory COMME 4 B Parameter PARAM 6 Device initia Insert Delete Multiple PLC settings Defaut Check End Cancel 2 Store the setup parameters and the programs to be booted in the memory card b Operations with Process CPU Automatic write to standard ROM 1 Switch off the power supply to the PLC 2 Mount the memory card that contains the parameters and programs to be booted onto the Process CPU 3 Set the parameter valid drive to the mounted memory card with the CPU s dip switches as follows e When a SRAM card is mounted SW2 ON SW3 OFF e When a Flash ATA card is mounted SW2 OFF SW3 ON 4 Switch on the power supply to the PLC Boot the file specified with the parameter to the program memory from the memory card Write the contenst of the program memory to the standard ROM when the boot is completed 5 BOOT LED will flicker
199. PLC parameter desig nate the first pointer No 12 7 12 7 12 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAMS TO PROCESS CPU MELSEC Q In the boot file setting item in the PLC parameter designate the file name of parameter and program to be read from the memory card In the program settings in the PLC parameter designate the name of the program to be exe cuted and its execution condition Set the CPU modules RUN j __ ERR LED switches ON STOP switch to the STOP position then switch the power ON Connect the GX Developer to the CPU module In the GX Developer online mode select the program memory and use the PLC memory batch operation to format the program memory In the GX Developer online mode select the memory card RAM then use the PLC memory batch operation to format the memory card In the GX Developer online J When the device initial value is mode select the memory card designated write the device initial RAM and write the parameter value in the designated memory during data and created program the PLC file setting in the PLC parameter Use the CPU modules RESET L CLR switch toexecute a reset a ae CPU module s BOOT _isij If a boot file setting is not made or when LED switches ON writing parameters or programs onto the program memory the BOOT LED does not light up C End
200. PLC s operation information area CPU shared memory Host PLC s operation information area System area System area Reading performed with the PLC No 2 END process Automatic refresh area for writing in the PLC No 2 Automatic refresh area for writing in the PLC No 1 User s free area User s free area Writing performed with the PLC No 2 END process Device memor For use of the PLC No 1 For use of the PLC No 2 Writing performed with the PLC No 1 END process Device memor For use of the PLC No 1 For use of the PLC No 2 Reading performed with the PLC No 1 END process Exchanging data with multiple PLC instructions and instructions that use Intelligent function module device UD c The CPUs on the multiple PLC system write data into the host PLC s CPU shared memory with the use of the S TO instruction FROM instruction The data written to the CPU shared memory of the host PLC with the S TO instruction is read by Process CPU of other PLCs with the use of the FROM instruction and ULAGU Non linked device data also read directly when the command is executed PLC No 1 PLC No 2 CPU shared memory Host PLC s operation information area Automatic refresh area for writing in the PLC No 1 Data written with the S TO instruction Written with the S TO instruction Sequence program S TO instruction execution CPU share
201. PLC system parameters are the same when the PLC power is set at ON the Process CPU is reset and the STOP status is changed to the RUN status The multiple PLC system will not start up if an error is triggered during the sameness check Concept of the I O number see Section 15 1 The right side of the installed CPU module is I O number OOH in the multiple PLC system For this reason the position of I O number 00H varies according to the number of installed CPUs However because each PC CPU module occupies two slots one slot for CPU and one empty slot the I O number deviates by the number of points set to the empty slot Default empty 16 points 13 5 13 OUTLINE OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS 13 6 6 MELSEC Q Interactive transmission with non control PLCs see Chapter 17 a Itis possible to control I O modules and intelligent function modules controlled by the host PLC in the same way as on an single CPU system b Itis not possible to output ON OFF data to modules that are not controlled by the host PLC or write in the buffer memory of intelligent function modules It is possible to read I O data from non control modules with PLC parameter settings It is possible to confirm the status of modules controlled by other PLCs the control status of other PLCs and control the host PLC Interactive transmission between each CPU modules on a multiple PLC system see Chapter 16 It is possible to perform the following
202. Process CPU MITSUBISHI Function Explanation Program Fundamentals carter series Mitsubishi Programmable Logic Controller MELSEG Q e SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS e Always read these instructions before using this equipment When using Mitsubishi equipment thoroughly read this manual and the associated manuals introduced in this manual Also pay careful attention to safety and handle the module properly These SAFETY PRECAUTIONS classify the safety precautions into two categories DANGER and CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions e DANGER resulting in death or severe injury CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage Note that the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user Design Precautions lt DANGER e Install a safety circuit external to the PLC that keeps the entire system safe even when there are problems with the external power supply or the PLC module Otherwise trouble could result from erroneous output or erroneous operation 1 Outside the PLC construct mechanical damage preventing interlock circuits such as emergency st
203. Q 3 Interruption during a network refresh If an interrupt factor occurs during a network refresh operation the network refresh operation is suspended and the interrupt program is executed This means that assurance of blocks in cyclic data at each station cannot be secured by using a device designated as a destination of link refresh operation on the MELSECNET H Network System 3 10ms i 10ms Interrupt factor Interrupt program execution Network refresh execution Network refresh operation is suspended and the interrupt program is executed Fig 4 4 Interruption during Network Refresh Operation 4 Interruption during END processing If an interrupt factor occurs during an END processing waiting period when constant scan is performed the interrupt program corresponding to the factor will be executed c See Section 10 6 2 for details on index register processing when switching to an interrupt program from a scan execution type program or low speed execution type program 4 High speed execution of an interrupt program and overhead time By default Process CPU performs the following process when executing an interrupt program e To hide and restore an index register See section 10 6 2 e To hide and restore the file name of a file register in use The above listed processes are not performed if Execute at a High Speed is selected at the PLC System tab screen in the PLC Paramet
204. S MELSEC Q d The execute type of program is switched at END processing The program execute type does not change while the program is being executed If different execute type is specified for a same program in a same scan the last specified execute type becomes effective END processing END processing Execution program gt GHI ABC GHI GHI DEF name GHI T e E PSTOP ABC execution Switches DEF to the scan PSCAN DEF execution execution type and ABC to the stand by type program respectively END processing 1 The GHI and DEF programs are executed in the order as set at the Program tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 3 Precautions for creating stand by type programs a Because current value is updated and contact ON OFF is switched when the OUT T instruction is executed timers cannot be used in stand by type programs b Gathering sub routine programs in a single program 1 Create the sub routine programs in order beginning from step 0 of the stand by type program An END instruction is required at the end of the sub routine program 2 Because there are no restrictions on the order of creating sub routine programs the pointer numbers need not be assigned in ascending order when creating multiple sub routine programs 3 Use common pointers Sub routine programs with co
205. S MELSEC Q 10 3 2 Special relays SM 1 Definition A special relay is used to store Process CPU status data 2 Special relay classifications Special relays are classified according to their applications as shown below a For fault diagnosis SMO to SM199 b System information SM200 to SM399 c System clock system counter SM400 to SM499 d Scan information SM500 to SM599 e Memory card information SM600 to SM699 f Instruction related SM700 to SM799 g For debugging SM800 to SM899 h Latch area SM900 to SM999 i For A PLC SM1000 to SM1299 1 For details on special relays which can be used by the Process CPU refer to Appendix 1 2 x This takes effect only after you have turned on the Use special relay special register form SM1000 SD1000 check box in the Compatibility with A PLC section at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box 10 33 10 33 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 3 3 Special registers SD 1 Definition A special register is used to store Process CPU status data diagnosis and system information 2 Special register classifications Special registers are classified according to their applications as shown below a For fault diagnosis SDO to SD199 b System information SD200 to SD399 c System clock system counter SD400 to SD499 d Scan information SD500 to SD599 e Memory card information SD600 to SD699 f Instruction relate
206. SD1004 SD1005 D9008 SD1008 D9009 SD1009 D9010 SD1010 APP 37 MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Meaning Details CPU If O modules of which data are different from data entered are detected when the power is turned on the first I O number of the lowest number unit among the detected units is stored in hexadecimal Storing VO module method is the same as that of SD1000 To monitor verification error the number by peripheral devices perform monitor module number operation given in hexadecimal Cleared when all contents of SD1116 to SD1123 are reset to 0 O module verify check is executed also to the modules of remote I O terminals Error status of the MINI S3 link detected on loaded AJ71 Placa is stored B15 B8 B7 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 VO module verification error Stores setting status made at A MINI link errors parameters Bits which correspond to faulty Bits which correspond to the signals of AJ71PT32 S3 are turned on AJ71PT32 S3 shown below are modules 1to 8 E turned on HA signals are turned on e Hardware error X0 X20 e MINI S3 link error datection X6 X26 e MINI S3 link communication error X7 X27 When the AC power supply module is used 1 is added at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure of within 20ms The value is stored in BIN code It is reset when power is switched from
207. SD643 Sixth character Fifth character S Initial SD644 Eighth character Seventh character SD645 First character of extension 2EH i Second character of SD646 Third character of extension extension capacity capacity word units Saal block number block number ca bon ee Gover caries See cl drive number the QCDSET instruction pam soes Stores the comment file name with extension selected at the parameters or by the QCDSET struction in ASCII code SD652 to B8 to SD651 Second character First character SD653 Comment file Comment file SD652 Fourth character Third character S Status N i i ew spes4 name name SD653 Sixth character Fifth character change SD654 Eighth character Seventh character SD655 SD655 First character of extension 2Ex Desb SD656 Third character of extension second charactor of Stores the drive number where the boot designation file QBT is S Initial O being stored SD661 Boot Stores the file name of the boot designation file QBT operation B15 to B8 B7 to BO SD662 designation Fil SD661 Second character First character SD663 y 9 ye hame o SD662 Fourth character Third character file boot SD663 Sixth character Fifth character S Initial New SD664 designation SD664 Eighth character Seventh character file SD665 First character of extension 2EH oe SD666 Third character of exten
208. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 14 2 Precautions For Multiple PLC System Configuration 14 2 1 CPU module mounting positions 1 CPU module mounting positions a Upto four modules of Process CPU and High Performance model QCPU can be mounted in the CPU slots starting from the slot on the right side of power supply module closely and the neighboring slots up to slot 2 There must be no empty slot between CPU modules Mount the Motion CPU or PC CPU module in the following way e Mount the Motion CPU on the right side of the Process CPU and High Performance model QCPU e Mount only one PC CPU module at the right end of CPU modules No CPU module can be mounted on the right side of the PC CPU module Table 14 2 Installation positions of CPU modules Number of CPUs Mounting positions of CPU modules Power supply Power supply Power supply Motion CPU Power supply Motion CPU Power supply Power supply Motion CPU Power supply Motion CPU 1 Power supply PC CPU module Power supply Motion CPU PC CPU module Motion CPU Power supply QCPU Motion CPU Motion CPU 14 4 14 4 Power supply QCPU Power supply QCPU x1 The PC CPU module occupies two slots Note The QCPU indicates the Process CPU or High Performance model QCPU 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q Number of CPUs Mounting positions of CPU modules QCPU Motio
209. TI CPU DOWN error code 7000 Goes OFF when reset of the PLC No 3 is canceled Comes ON when the PLC No 3 is resetting including the case where the PLC is removed from the base The other PLCs result in MULTI CPU DOWN error code 7000 e Goes OFF when reset of the PLC No 4 is canceled Comes ON when the PLC No 4 is resetting including the case where the PLC is removed from the base The other PLCs result in MULTI CPU DOWN error code 7000 Goes OFF when the PLC No 1 is norma continuation error e Comes ON when the PLC No 1 is during a stop error Goes OFF when the PLC No 2 is normal including a continuation error Comes ON when the PLC No 2 is during a stop error Goes OFF when the PLC No 3 is normal including a continuation error Comes ON when the PLC No 3 is during a stop error No 4 CPU error Goes OFF when the PLC No 4 is normal including a flag 4 during stop continuation error error Comes ON when the PLC No 4 is during a stop error Max loaded I O OFF Ignored When this relay goes from OFF to ON maximum loaded peer ON Read VO number is read to SD250 F Now SRE Effective for the batch refresh All stations OFF Refresh arrival station U Every Sa refresh command ON Refresh all stations END New also effective for the low speed cyclic APP 3 APP 3 No 2 CPU reset flag PLC No 2 reset cancel PLC No 2 resetting No 3 CPU reset flag
210. This is used to confirm the execution status of the interrupt program 2 Using the Interrupt Program Monitor List Choose Online Monitor Interrupt program monitor list The Interrupt Program Monitor List dialog box appears on screen The following shows an execution example of the interrupt program monitor list Interrupt program monitor list Cut in pointer Common comment 2512 100ms 6280 40ms 12560 20ms 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a Execute count The number of times the interrupt program was executed is displayed This function starts counting the number when Process CPU is in RUN status When the number reaches 65536 times it is reset to 0 b Common Comment This indicates device comments created on interrupt points 10 to 1255 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 11 3 Scan time measurement 1 What is Scan Time Measurement a This function displays the set program interval processing time b To specify a scan time measurement range follow either of the following two steps e Make the setting on the Ladder monitor window e Make the setting on the Scan Time Measurement dialog box c The time for the subroutines and interrupt program can be measured as well d The time includes the time required for processing sub routines when the sub routine CALL command is within the range of scan time measurement The amount of time required for executing interruption programs and fixed
211. W Section 7 3 No setting S 1 range is designated for each device of M V T ST C Section 10 13 1 No setting Program name execution type fixed scan for fixed scan Section 4 2 execution file use setting I O refresh setting Do not clear the program memory Do not clear the program memory during boot i Section 6 6 2 during boot Clear the program memory during boot Type data name and source drive No setting The destination drive is automatically set in the program Section 6 6 memory Do not execute automatic refresh to Do not execute automatic refresh to the standard ROM Section 6 6 2 the standard ROM Do not execute automatic refresh to the standard ROM a po P the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC 9 PARAMETER LIST MELSEC Q Table 9 1 Parameter List continued I O assignment Designates the state of installation of each module of the system Designates the type of the installed module Designates the model of the installed module Memorandum for users who do not use the CPU module Designates the model of the used main base unit and extension base unit Memorandum for users who do not use the CPU module Designates the model of the power supply module installed to the Standard main and extension base units Memorandum for users who do setting not use the CPU module Designates the model of the extension cable Memorandum for users who do not use the CPU module Designates
212. acter string S T ar n a a ttle Aes ie Aiea en aa a 10 62 10 13 Convenient Uses for Devices 2 ce cecceeeecceceeceeeeeeeceeeeaeeaecaeceeeaeeaecaecaesaeeaecaeeaeeeaeeaesaeseseaeeaneeeeateaees 10 63 10 13 1 Global devices and local devices ce ceeceeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaesaeceeeeaesaesaeeeseaesaesaeseeeeaneaeeaeeeetanes 10 63 10 13 2 Device initial VAIUCS eee ee eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeesaeeseesaeesaeesaeesaeeseeesaeeseeeseeseeeseateeeteneeeeeeaaes 10 69 11 PROCESS CPU PROCESSING TIME 11 1to11 4 11 1 Reading Process CPU s Scan Time ceccecceceeseceeceeeeseeseeaeceeeeaeeaecaeceeeeaesaesaesaeeeaeeaesaeseeeeaeeaeeneaeeaees 11 1 11 2 Factors Responsible for Extended Scan Time cccceccceceeceeseeeeceeceeeeeeeaecaeseeeeaesaesaeseesaesaeseeseaneaees 11 2 11 3 Factors Responsible for Shortened Scan Time cccccscccsecseseeeceesseeecseeeeeseseeseescaescaeseeseaeseaeseaeeaes 11 4 12 1 Writing Procedure for 1 Prograin eeecseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeaeseeeecaeeeaeeeaeseaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaseaeeseeseaeeeateeas 12 1 12 1 1 Items to consider when Creating one PrOQraMM eceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeseeeeeeeseeteeteeeseeeteeeteeeeeeeteees 12 1 12 1 2 Procedure for writing programs to the Process CPU ecceececeeceeteeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeteaeeeeeeeeseneeates 12 2 12 2 Procedure for Multiple Programs cceccccceesceesececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeneeseeeeeeseeeeeeeneeesenseeeeeeetses 12 5
213. ae aa als ale it 10 1 10 2 Internal User Devices ienien bel aataasl end lvieesa Maen elarntlandielsiaeatei aS eeuisliedaanulaaia 10 3 TOLEDU XA eevee he a eet et ea et et lech uit ales ates 10 5 TO 2 Outputs Vitae evan ni a inlet oe i ale elie atlas A thas le AE eee 10 8 10 2 3 Internal relays M menre iniri ieee EE EN EEE EEEN AN A EAE dvs E 10 10 10 2 4 Latch relays L E A E 10 11 10 25 AMUMC ALOIS FF sssecesccesecesdeese bes ee ced tossed dhe Gd ested ee i R 10 12 10 26 Edge relay V ee e a eter al et eat tet ba dl ea adh i eel a ed eas 10 16 10 227 Link relays B is2c 5ice cc szdea cigs R RRR 10 17 10 2 8 Link special relays SB irimia aeeai weedeat eats 10 18 10 2 9 Step relays S reri Taps des shah asta Tae cuas Susana datsacestudenat suonucesheasiuet sugeuaes tasacent caatasetapstansivieuspeteeetanuentiee 10 18 10 210 Fimersi 1 4 28 ti ee ee i es ee ee ea hn ee en ee 10 19 10 2 4 1 Counters C is eae eed ei eo teeta Odin denne ih tea ia neers 10 24 19212 Data registers D d a AAA AR AEEA AAA AA AA ATAA 10 28 10 2 13 Link registers W E A E E E E E A E N E A E E 10 29 10 2 14 Link special registers SW cecceceeceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeaecaeceeeeaeeaecaesaeseaesaesaeseseaesaesaeseeseateseeseaeeaees 10 30 10 3 Internal System Devices eceesceecesesseseseeesseseseseeseseseseesssesesecesseseseseeseseseaeeusaeseseeteasassesseeaeseaeeeeasaeseetensaeseasees 10 31 10 3 1 Function devices FX FY FD aniraa ada
214. aeeaeeeeeeaesaeseseeeeaeeas 4 37 4 6 Data Clear Processing siini a a a aa whiaeaG laa a aaa a aa daa aaa aaah 4 38 4 7 VO Processing and RESPONSE Arrr aa araa aaraa aara a raaa a Aaaa AAAA PAETA DEAA 4 39 APN PROTOS rmo a a a a a a a a 4 39 Are Drt TO Eanna a ae ee E A ae en es a 4 42 4 8 Numeric Values which Can Be Used in Sequence Programs cceccecceseeteeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeaeeesaeeeeeeaeeaes 4 44 4 8 1 BIN Binary Code 0 i len tee een end et sain ede even nied eve envied 4 46 4 8 2 HEX HEXaCeCIMAI 0 eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeas 4 47 4 8 3 BCD Binary Coded Decimal cccceccesceeeeeceeseeseeeeeeeeeaeeaecaeceeeeaecaecaeeeaeeaesaesaeseaesaesaeseeeeaesaseeseateaes 4 48 4 8 4 Real numbers floating decimal point data ec eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesas 4 49 4 9 Character String Data ecceeceeccecceseeseeeeceeeeeeeaeceeceeeaeeaeceeeeaeeaesaecaeesaeeaecaesaeseaecaeseeseaseaesaeseeseaseaeseeeeaseaeeas 4 51 5 1 Relationship Between the Number of Stages and Slots of the Extension Base Uniit c eeeeee 5 1 5 2 Installing Extension Base Units and Setting the Number of Stages c eceeseseeeeeeseeeeteseeeeeeeeeaees 5 2 5 3 Base Unit Assignment Base Mode o ecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeseaeeeaeenaeenaeeeaeeaeeeateeas 5 3 5 4 Whatare I
215. aken Load input condition outside of group setting Operating mode Enor operation mode at the stop of PLC I Allistetion stop byistop aoii REE ul 7 F All station stop by stop error of PLC2 _ Refresh settings TZ Al station stop by stop eror of PLC3 Change screens Setting gt F7 Al station stop by stop error of PLC4 Serd ais for each PLE PLC ae deve share memory G Dev starting Point Start End Start End a No 2 a No3 q No 4 0j The applicable device of head device is B M Y D W RZR The unit of points that send range for each PLC is word Settings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Check __End__ _ Cancel a When Load input condition outside of group has been set 1 Loads ON OFF data from the input and intelligent function modules being controlled by the other PLCs by performing input refresh before a sequence program calculation starts 2 Input X loading is performed for the modules mounted onto the following additional base unit slots I O allocation type Mounted module Input module Pp O Intelligent function module ooo a O None Input module Pc Input Output module Loads OFF data 17 Intelli Intelligent function module NN 3 Itis possible to load ON OFF data from input modules and intelligent function modules with direct access input 4 Remote station input such
216. al Fooi SD304 Sr OL PONT Stores the number of points currently set for SW devices ed for SW Reserves the designated time for communication processing with GX Developer or other units Time The greater the value is designated the shorter the response time for reserved for Time reserved for communication with other devices GX Developer serial D315 communicati communication communication units becomes Stores the number of points currently set for Y devices A 5 rocessin on processing The scan time becomes longer by the designated time Setting range P 9 processing 1 to 100 ms If the designated value is out of the range above it is assumed to no setting APP 27 APP 27 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Set by Corresponding Corresponding Number Name Meaning Explanation When set ACPU CPU No of l of modules Indicates the number of modules installed on Ethernet installed Ethernet I O No of the 1st module installed N k e Ethernet network No of the 1st module installed Gro i e Ethernet group No of the 1st module installed Ethernet i Station F f Initial information No e Ethernet station No of the 1st module installed Empty The Ethernet IP address of the 1st module is stored in buffer memory The Ethernet error code of the 1st module is read with the ERRORRD instruction Inform
217. al information Common information O Rem category codes category codes The common information category codes store the following codes 0 No error Unit module No PLC No Base No File name Drive name Time value set Program error location Switch cause for Q4AR only information information x For a multiple PLC system the module number or PLC New categories category code number is stored depending on the error that occurred Refer to the corresponding error code for which number has been stored PLC No 1 1 PLC No 2 2 PLC No 3 3 PLC No 4 4 The individual information category codes store the following codes 0 No error 1 Open 2 File name Drive name 3 Time value actually measured 4 Program error location 5 Parameter number 6 Annunciator number 7 Check instruction malfunction number APP 18 APP 18 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Set by Corresponding g Corresponding Explanation CPU Common information corresponding to the error codes SD0 is stored here The following four types of information are stored here Slot No Number Meaning SD5 Slot No PLC No Base No 1 2 SD6 VO No Not used for base No SD7 SD8 SD9 SD10 SD11 Vacant SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 1 For a multiple PLC system the slot number or PLC number is stored depending on the error that occurred Slot 0 in the multiple PLC syste
218. al pointer points Local pointers can be divided among all the programs stored in the program memory The local pointer No ranges from PO to the highest No of the local pointer in use The Process CPU s OS computes the number of points used Even if only P99 is used in a program for example the number of points used will be counted as 100 between PO and P99 Therefore when local pointers are used at several programs the pointer settings should begin from PO If the total number of pointers total for all programs exceeds 4096 points a pointer configuration error error code 4020 occurs occupied points is 100 points is 1 __ pine PXAMples oo 0 Ss Ses eas Seg aoe ee ee SS eS eee ERS See PESTS SA SSeS CEES SRS SEES If the local pointer points are used as follows the total is 600 points Program A Program B Program C PO to P99 used in P100 to P199 used Only P299 is used I program in program in program PO to P99 occupy PO to P199 occupy 200 points PO to P299 occupy 300 points Total of 600 100 points points used lf PO to P99 are used If PO is used the the number of number of occupied 10 9 2 Common pointers 1 Definition a Common pointers are used to call sub routine programs from all programs being executed in the Process CPU Program A Program C oat P204 H p204 CALL Po RET FEND Program B Fa
219. alue is not updated in the following OUT C instruction statuses OFF ON to ON ON to OFF Ladder example ooe Current value update timing END OUT CO END OUT CO END OUT CO Sequence I l L program i i i ON X0 OFF i ON CO coil OFF Eoo i Fea Current value update Current value update 10 24 10 24 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q c Multiple counters can be used within a single scan to achieve the maximum counting speed In such cases the direct access input DX 2 method should be used for the counter input signals 1 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT END C Ci Ci END Cc Ci Sequence _ l E e a gt OUT C execution intervals 3 Resetting the counter a Counter current values are not cleared even if the OUT C instruction switches OFF Use the RST C_ instruction to clear the counter s current value and switch the contact OFF b The count value is cleared and the contact is switched OFF at execution of when the RST C i instruction Ladder example XO ec RT co Counter reset timing END RST CO END RST CO END RST CO Sequence program i i i ON xo o Execution RSTCO OFF instruction t t Count value cleared amp contact OFF Count value cleared amp contact OFF 4 Maximum counting speed The counter can count only when the input condition ON OFF time is longer than the execution interval of the corresponding OUT C lt 2 instru
220. am MAIN2 Write protect 3 Program MAINT Write protect esan Program MAINS write protect MAINS Tite protect Batch Settings Each item is described below a Target memory Specifies the memory storing the file whose password is to be registered or changed b Data type eects Displays the type of a file stored in the target memory c Data name uu eee Displays a filename of a file stored in the target memory d Registration eee Displays an asterisks that indicates a password protected file e Password Defines or changes a password f Registration Condition 1 Write Protect Write operation is restricted by a password Reading is not allowed 2 Read Write protect Read Write operation is restricted by a password 3 lear Password is cleared Sets password currently registered in Password POINT 1 Password protected files are limited to program files device comment files and device initial value files Other files cannot be password protected 2 The password registered to a file can not read out from the file If the password can not be remembered file operation other than following can not be performed e Program memory Memory card Format PLC memory e Standard ROM Write to PLC Flash ROM Take notes of the password registered and keep it on hand 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 17 2 Remote passwords The remote password func
221. ameter the parameter set modules whose __ numbers are used External external power 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 power supply supply has been SD1350 0 jo o 1 ojojoj1jojo disconnected odiis disconnected sD1351 1 o lololofl flo olo lo 0 External power supply disconnected 1 External power supply is not disconnected ies Indicates a blown fuse AE n voJon For future expansion 1 0 0 0 0 OJO 0 0 APP 43 APP 43 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continue 9 I O module verification Qorresp nding Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU Si 9 beLT LI D1400 e When the power is turned on the module numbers of the I O D1401 modules whose information differs from the registered I O module D1402 information are set in this register in units of 16 points D1403 Bit pattern in If the O numbers are set by parameter the parameter set D1404 units of 16 points numbers are stored D9120 indicating the Also detects I O module information baa D1405 TOT modules with 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 D1406 verification errors D9116 0 o ze D1407 verification 0 No VO i 5 S Error D9123 O Rem i D9117 0 verification WANN DN1ID D D W n NIN gg n
222. amming by GX Developer the program size the total of the file header size and the number of created program steps is displayed as the number of steps as shown below During programming the size of the program created is displayed Number of steps used display 2 MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project LD Edit mode MAIN 35 Step SS Project Edit Find Replace Convert View Online Diagnostics Tools Window Help osm S heln ARA s s ee Bla Program o Of Ed al ap MIS gt e 3 FS sF5 F6 sF6 F F8 4te ue 4 ye t l Fok sF sFO aF7 aFO aF5 caF5 cofl0 F10 aF al fe al2 Plz ze ec e lil O 6 PROCESS CPU FILES PRECAUTIONS 1 The program capacity displayed during programming with GX Developer is the sum of file header and executed program capacities and does not include the capacity of steps secured for write during RUN 2 Since a file is stored on the program memory in 1k step units the program capacity displayed during programming with GX Developer may differ from the capacity of the program file on the Process CPU MELSEC Q Example The capacity of a program whose executed program part has 491 steps is displayed on GX Developer as shown below File header is fixed at 34 steps File header 34 steps Executed program 491 steps Display on GX Developer 34 steps 491 steps 525 steps Status of File on GX Developer However when
223. an execution type program s 1 3 D Pa i l ims ms 1 Low speed execution type program A F 5 ae Low speed execution type program Bi m l 1 1 i m osm ig 5 ons A senine ms 2ms 0 5ms oms 1 5ms xO Constant scan wait time Low speed Low speed Low speed scan time scan time scan time ak gt r l 13ms 8 5ms i 8 5ms Low speed Low speed Low speed END processing END processing END processing i execution execution execution 2 Low speed program execution time setting The low speed execution type program is operated under the following conditions as shown below e Low speed program execution time 3ms e Total scan execution type program time 4ms to 5ms e Execution time of low speed execution type program A ims e Execution time of low speed execution type program B 3ms e END processing low speed END processing Oms 0 ms is used to simplify the illustration END END END END END processing processing processing ee processing 0 4 11 5 18 5 25 5 33 5 ms pE of fe tf fsa eee a Sf ape fe fee fa sf Sf Bs cae ft sp ele Se apes ils Peele kraha daa acl alee ole Treat fered ale ley eal yl Selene ala gsi ali E a as sles pele lie aes 4ms 4 5ms 4ms 4ms 5ms Scan execution type program m mH vs ims ims ws Low speed execution type program A H z i Ge ims 1ms 2ms 3ms Low speed execution type program B k H H H Low speed scan time L
224. an what it was before steps can be assigned for the write during RUN This means that the write during RUN can be executed only when enough space is available in a user memory area If steps are assigned again while the write during RUN is executed scan time could be extended for a value shown below in the table Controls are interrupted for a value shown below in the table Step for Write During RUN CPU Type If Not Changed If Assigned Again QnPHCPU f Process CPU does not work correctly if the following instructions are written during RUN write 1 Trailing edge instruction If the execution conditions of the following trailing edge instructions are not arranged upon completion of writing the trailing edge instruction is executed e LDF e ANDF e ORF e MEF e PLF 2 Leading edge instruction If the execution conditions for leading edge instructions PLS instruction and OP instruction are arranged upon completion of writing leading edge instruction is not executed The leading edge instruction is executed when the execution conditions are OFF then ON 3 SCJ instruction If the execution conditions of the SCJ instruction are arranged upon completion of writing a jump to the designated pointer occurs even in a scan cycle 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 10 2 Writing a batch of files during RUN 1 File Write During RUN function a The file write during RUN function is used to write a batch of files to the Process CPU as sh
225. and intelligent functional module PLC name PLC system PLC fj PLCRAS Device Program Boot fle SFC 1 0 assignmeyt Input format SERRE r 1 0 Assignment Slot T I ree Ponte z Slot Type Model name Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 y PLC _ PLc Hees aT ee Z intelli X points 2 Ta 2 ien Detailed setting 3 aa ral 3 fat 2 z Z MEZ MEZ z 5 faea Sa zi gt Cia 6 J55 z 7 66 E z z g en If the start X and Y are not input the PLC assigns them automatically 9 J8 8 It is not possible to check corectly when there is a slot of the unsetting on the way 10 M 11 yal Standard setting 2 men Base model name Power model name Extemsion cable Points Base mode apaa G Auto 14 33 EEF 15 aa z Increase x Increase X Increase4 X 12 fixati LJSettings should be set as same when D f multiple PLC ter Read PLC dat j using multiple PLC SESH SUE ET SEE Designate the contents of the Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple PLC settings Defaut _ Check End Cancel intelligent function module switch 3 Precautions a For details on the switch setting for an intelligent function module refer to the manual of the intelligent function module in use b The switch setting of the intelligent function module is valid in the following cases e After the PLC is turned on e When the Process CPU is reset 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 9 Monitoring Function 1 What is Monitoring Function
226. and slot 2 is left empty However the empty slot must be on the right side of CPU modules Mounting is allowed Mounting is not allowed CPU 0 1 2 CPU 0 1 2 2 2 2 z S g o g O a O 3 w a 5 D o 3 a a 14 5 14 5 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q To add a Process CPU High Performance model QCPU or Motion CPU to a system where the PC CPU module is used shift the PC CPU module to the right because no CPU module is allowed on the right side of the PC CPU module 2 CPU module PLC numbers a PLC numbers are allocated for identifying the CPU modules mounted on the main base unit in the multiple PLC system The PLC No 1 is allocated to the CPU slot and the PLC No 2 No 3 and No 4 are allocated to the right of the PLC No 1 CPU slot PLC No 1 Slot PLC No 2 Slot PLC No 3 Slot PLC No 4 Power supply These PLC numbers are used for the following purposes of e To access the Process CPU and High Performance model QCPU when the GX Developer personal computer is not connected in the multiple PLC system e To set up control PLCs with the I O Assignment in the multiple PLC system b The Process CPU and High Performance model QCPU stores the host number in the special register SD395 It is recommended to build a program for checking the host number using the Process CPU and High Performance model QCPU This will enable easy verification when Process CPU and High Per
227. andard RAM renra A 6 9 Standard RAM memory capacity 0 0 6 9 Standard ROM ccccscccsesseeseeeseesneeseeees 6 8 Step relay S rainn eninin i ink 10 18 Sub routine program s esseseseeseseeersreersreeese 4 4 SW Special link register ceceeeeeee 10 30 Switch setting of intelligent function module 7 21 System PrOtect eraa 7 65 T DEAK ini p I E beeteset deen beets 10 19 ME T hoa o a RE 10 19 ACCUIACY oai a orbs hh 10 22 PrOCOSSING Hi ni ti agin aaa a 10 22 TR SFC transition device 00 0 eee 10 58 U U I O No designation device 10 59 U 12 G i Intelligent function module device 10 38 Usar MEY as o a 6 3 V V Edge telaren a 10 16 VD Macro instruction argument device 10 60 W W Link register eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteees 10 29 Watchdog timer eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeens 7 57 WDT Watchdog timer ee eeeeeeeeteeneeeee 7 57 Write during RUN 00 7 35 7 37 7 55 Writing to the time data 0 0 eee eee eeeeeeeee 7 9 X X INPUt cee eae eee eee 10 5 Y Y QUT a aeaes wae hat ohh Qin A 10 8 Z Z Index FEGISLEL eeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeteeeteeeteeeteees 10 39 ZR Serial number access format of file register PAE E ieee eaeedtindipahieeety 10 49 Index 3 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before starting use 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or
228. andard ROM setting at the Boot file tab screen is valid only when the Process CPU parameter valid drive is to Memory Cara The Auto Download all Data from Memory card to Standard ROM setting at the Boot file tab screen is disabled if the parameter valid drive is set to Program Memory or Standard ROM 6 PROCESS CPU FILES MELSEC Q 6 7 Executing Standard ROM Memory Card Programs Boot Run 1 Executing Process CPU programs a b The Process CPU executes programs stored in the program memory The Process CPU does not perform operation of programs stored in the standard ROM or memory cards To execute programs stored in the standard ROM and memory card designate file names to be booted read to program memory at the Boot file tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box Programs with file names designated there are booted from the standard ROM memory card to program memory and executed when the power is turned ON or the Process CPU is reset Preparation for Boot Run Perform the following steps in preparation for boot run a b Create a program using GX Developer Create a program used for the boot run Select a boot file using GX Developer Select a boot file at the Boot file tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box Qn H Parameter x PLC name PLC system PLC fle PLC RAS Device Program Boot file SFC 1 0 assignment r Boot option I Clear program memo
229. ange of 64 slots even if the total number of slots of the main and extension base units results in 65 slots or more e g When 6 12 slot base units are installed 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 lt SlotNo gt l 2 Setting of extension Aa Q312B stage 5 8 See Section 5 2 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 m i 00O O oo w 5 Q612B Ko z 0O 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 0o a 2 B a 5 Q612B oo oo 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 oo oo Q Q coke 2 Q612B eke D leke oo te 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 00O 0o Q eke 5 ag 4 2 Q612B oo z oo ep5 60 61 62 63 OKs oO zi zB oo 5 od S Q612B oo _ oo J Y Mountable module Unmountable module Mounting module will result in error 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 5 2 Installing Extension Base Units and Setting the Number of Stages There are two types of extension base units Q5__ B Q6__B for mounting of Q Series modules 1 Setting order of the stage numbers for extension base units Extension base units require the setting of the extension stage numbers 1 to 7 using the stage No setting connector Assign the extensio
230. ard Standard ROM 1 RAM Parameter Parameter ee ale OSE 5 Progam File register File register _ only read process is enabled ROM Standard RAM 2 i wresteeles File register Program 32k word File register When Flash card is used only read process is enabled x1 The standard ROM is used when parameters and programs are written to ROM x2 The standard RAM is used when access to the file register need to speed up b The Process CPU processes programs stored in the program memory Process CPU Program memory Execution of program Parameter in program memory Program 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q Programs stored in the standard ROM memory card are executed after they are booted to read to the Process CPU program memory Programs to be booted to the Process CPU are designated on the PLC Parameter dialog box and the parameter drive is designated by a DIP switch setting at the Process CPU Process CPU _ Program memory Parameter Program Execution of program booted from the standard ROM or memory card to the program memory Boot Standard ROM Parameter Parameter Memory card Program Program 2 Program construction Programs are stored in a file format in the program memory standard ROM or memory card Multiple programs can therefore be stored in the program memory standard ROM or memory card by using different file names Multiple
231. are set and controlled by the GX Developer There is no restriction in the number of modules when the parameters are set by the special purpose instructions for the CC Link For details on the CC Link System Master Local Unit that can set parameters with the special purpose instructions refer to the manual for the CC Link Master Local module c A graphic operation terminal can be used only for the GOT900 series Basic OS matching Q mode and communication driver must be installed The GOT800 series A77GOT and A64GOT cannot be used 2 Software package You can use GX Developer Version 7 10L or later to create the programs of the Process CPU Do not use GX Developer Version 7 09K or earlier 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 2 3 Confirming the Serial Number and Function Version The CPU module serial No can be confirmed on the rated plate and GX Developer s system monitor 1 Confirming the serial No on the rated plate aa MITSUBISHI Serial No First five digits MODEL e Function version SERIAL 040120000000000 C LISTED 80M1 IND CONT EQ MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN 2 Confirming the serial No on the system monitor list of product information The CPU module serial No and function version can be confirmed with the list of product information on the GX Developer system monitor Serial Nos and function versions of the intelligent function modu
232. as a user s memo Points Used with Process CPU To change the number of I O points of each slot select it from the followings 0 0 point e 16 16 points e 32 32 points e 48 48 points e 64 64 points e 128 128 points e 256 256 points e 512 512 points e 1024 1024 points If the number of I O points is not designated for a slot the one of the actually mounted module is used Start XY Used with Process CPU 1 When the I O number of each slot is changed you should designate the head I O number according to the change If Start XY is not designated for a slot the I O number continuing from the last number of the currently designated slot is assigned 2 Avoid the I O number designation of each slot from overlapping the I O numbers assigned by Process CPU An error SP UNIT LAY ERR occurs when the I O numbers overlap 2 Slot status after I O assignment When the I O number is assigned to a slot the assigned I O number takes priority regardless of the actual installation of a module a If the designated number of I O points is lower than that of the actually mounted I O module some I O points of the mounted module are not used For example if a slot where a 32 point input module is mounted is designated for a 16 point input module the latter 16 points of the 32 point input module are disabled If the designated number of I O points is higher than that of the actually mounted I O module the p
233. ased before a batch of files stored in a program memory are written No files can be added to the standard ROM or Flash card The memory capacity of a standard ROM or Flash card is the same as that of a program memory A memory of a larger size than the memory capacity of a program memory cannot be used To execute the Write the program memory to ROM function set the length of GX developer s time check to 60 seconds or longer Shorter time check may cause a time out on the GX Developer side To execute the Write the program memory to ROM function via the CC Link network by operating from a GX Developer at a local station set the length of CC Link s CPU monitoring time SWOA to 60 seconds or longer The default is 90 seconds Use the default value when making the setting 2 Write to PLC Flash ROM a b The Write to PLC Flash ROM function is used to write a batch of files specified by GX Developer to a standard ROM or Flash card The Write to PLC Flash ROM function can fill all available space in a standard ROM or Flash card If a program that contains a small number of steps is written to a Flash card it will take long to fill the Flash card with programs When a RS 232 interface is mounted at Q2MEM 4MBF a baud rate of 115 2k bps takes about 14 minutes To write data to a Flash card increase a baud rate or use a USB interface If the Write to PLC Flash ROM function is executed from a local station communication
234. ated in the PLC parameter mode 12 For details regarding Process CPU DIP switches refer to the Process CPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection When writing programs and parameters to the Process CPU program memory the steps indicated by asterisks below are not required Procedural steps shown in C boxes are performed at the GX Developer and those shown in I boxes are performed in the Process CPU Start the GX Developer Refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual Mode selection screen is displayed Change the number of device See Section 10 1 2 points Change the number of device points at the device setting item in the PLC parameter Create the program whichis tobe executed in the CPU module l 12 2 12 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAMS TO PROCESS CPU 12 3 Use the device initial value Right click on the device memory and select Add to specify device initial value data Right click on a device initial value and select Add to spe cify a device initial value range Select the device memory to be used in the device memory registration setting of the device initial value and click on Use device memory In the PLC file setting in the PLC parameter designate the name of file to be used for the designated device initial values In the boot file setting item in the PLC parameter designate the file na
235. ation forced ON OFF x Device Set forced ON Cancel it 4 n e g Set forced OFF 5 wo Device ON OFF No Device ON OFF al 17 2 18 3 19 4 20 5 21 6 22 X 23 2 lt 8 24 9 25 10 26 FL 27 12 28 13 29 14 30 15 31 16 32 NX 3 gt Update status Clear all Close 6 b Descriptions of the fields to set up are provided below Name of setup field Function description Enter the I O number for which enforced 1 Device ON OFF is to be set or for which enforced ON OFF is to be cancelled i Displays the registration status of 2 Registration status displayed area registered enforced input and output Displays the registration status loaded from CPU module Performed enforced ON OFF registration Enforced ON OFF registration for specified devices Cancels the enforced ON OFF for registered devices Load registration status Registration cancellation Cancels all registered enforced I O Bulk registration cancellation i registrations 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 10 Writing in Program during Process CPU RUN When the Process CPU is in the RUN status you can write programs or files in any of the following steps e Writing data in the circuit mode during RUN e Writing data by using pointers during RUN see Section 7 13 2 e Writing a batch of files during RUN 7 10 1 Writing data in the circuit mo
236. ation from 2nd x i ormatio Configuration is identical to that for the first module module Information from 3rd A Tandi x R Configuration is identical to that for the first module S Initial module Information from Configuration is identical to that for the first module Ath nodule Configuration is identic i In a multiple PLC system configuration the PLC number of the Multiple PLC number host CPU is stored S Initial PLC No 1 1 PLC No 2 2 PLC No 3 3 PLC No 4 4 Multiple PLC number Soso SD342 SD343 SD344 SD345 to SD346 SD347 SD348 to SD354 SD355 to SD361 SD362 to SD368 SD395 APP 28 APP 28 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 3 System clocks counters Set b Gorresponding Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation When M ACPU pei 9 DTT Following programmable controller CPU module RUN 1 is Number of counts in wing prog s l S Status added each second 1 second units e Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to 32768 to 0 2n second clock e Stores value n of 2n second clock Default is 30 units Setting can be made between 1 and 32767 Sp415 2nms clock Srmeiolock units e Stores value n of 2nms clock Default is 30 setting Setting can be made between 1 and 32767 Sean Number of Gount ia e This counter increases by 1 for each scan of the scan execution D420 kantor achisoan type program after RUN of the CPU module gt x e Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to 32768 to 0 proces
237. atus at and after the next scan This operation is the same as performed when the POFF instruction is executed e Executing After stop output stop for the low speed execution type suspends the execution of the low speed execution type and turns off the output at the next scan The program is put in the standby status at and after the next scan This operation is the same as performed when the POFF instruction is executed e Executing After stop output stop for the standby program stops the program after one scan OFF is executed as scan execution For this reason Execute count is also increased by 1 e Execute count is also increased by 1 if an error occurs in the RET IRET instruction during execution of one scan OFF in the standby program At this time the execution type is scan execution POINT Depending on the instruction the output may not turn OFF if After stop output stop is executed For details refer to the section of the POFF instruction in the following manual QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 4 Precaution The scan time of a constant scan execution type program being executed is not displayed on screen but a dash is displayed in the Scan Time column 7 43 7 43 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 11 2 Interrupt program monitor list 1 What is Interrupt Program Monitor List a This function displays execution count of the interrupt program l0 to 1255 b
238. ay s sc sssacei eects erred dl ees ete Mere ete ee eed elias 7 75 492 Priority SUING sities shies Aa AAE A RA a A eee teed eid detect eee aah 7 77 7 20 Module Service Interval Time Reading cecccseeecceeceseeseeeeceeeeeeeaecaeseeseeesaesaesaeseaeaesaeseaeeaesaeseeeeaeeaees 7 79 8 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE 8 1 to 8 7 8 1 Communication Between Process CPU and Intelligent Function Modules cceeeteeeeeeeeeeeees 8 1 8 1 1 Initial setting and automatic refresh setting using GX Configurator ecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 8 2 8 1 2 Communication using device initial VAlUC cececceeceseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeaeseeseeesaesaeseeseaeeaneeeeeaees 8 3 8 1 3 Communication using FROM TO instruction c cecceeesecceceeeeeceeceeeeaeeaeceeeeeesaesaesaeeeaesaesaeseeseateaes 8 4 8 1 4 Communication using the intelligent function module AeVICE eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 8 4 8 1 5 Communication using the instructions dedicated for intelligent function modules 0 8 5 8 2 Request from Intelligent Function Module to Process CPU o oo ee eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeteseeeeteeeesteaneaeeees 8 6 8 2 1 Interrupt from the intelligent function module eee eeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeseeseeeteeeseeeseeeteeteeetaaes 8 6 9 PARAMETER LIST 9 1 to 9 10 10 DEVICES 10 1 to 10 71 TOM DEVICE HIST 4 ava tee hth ads OA tad tai a a a tas athe t
239. b screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box All parameter defaults are set at Yes a Battery check b Fuse blown check c I O unit comparison Self Diagnosis List Diagnosis description Diagnostic timing Hardware failure Handling error Parameter error When the END instruction is executed x1 Fuse blown default stop FUSE BRAKE OFF Default Yes 2 I O interrupt error 1 0 INT ERROR e When an interrupt occurs i e When the power is turned on when reset UNIT DOWN ate Inteligent RECHT module enor SP UN Q e When the FROM TO instruction is executed e When the power is turned on when reset CONTROL BUS ERROR e When the END instruction is executed e When the FROM TO instruction is executed Battery low BATTERY ERROR e Always Default Yes 3 1 0 module verification Default When the END instruction is executed i NIT VERIFY ERROR Stop Default Yes Intelligent function module e When the power is turned on when reset paean pame emun minis When switched from STOP to RUN intelligent program execution ee SP UNIT ERROR e When the FROM TO instruction is executed Default Stop on function moduleversion SP UNIT VER ERR e When the power is turned on when reset No parameter MISSING PARA e When the power is turned on when reset Boot error BOOT ERROR When the power is turned on when reset Memory cate operation orror ICM OPE ERROR When the memory card is installed removed Default
240. be cleared by operating latch clear with the RESET L CLR switch and remote latch clear 2 Invalid latch clear key Sets the latch range that can not be cleared even by operating latch clear with the RESET L CLR switch or operating remote latch clear from GX Developer The devices in which RESET L CLR switch is set to invalid can only be cleared by an instruction or GX Developer 1 Instruction to clear method Reset with the RST instruction or send 0 with the MOV FMOV instruction 2 GX Developer clear method Clear all device memory in the online PLC memory clear including latch Refer to the GX Developer operating manual for details of the GX Developer operation methods POINT To clear file registers or local devices use the RST instruction to perform a reset operation or use the MOV FMOV instruction to transmit 0 Refer to following manual for the MOV FMOV instruction QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common instructions 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 7 O Processing and Response Lag In the direct mode the batch communication with I O modules is performed before sequence program operation starts By creating a sequence program with direct access I O I O processing can be performed in a direct mode to communicate with I O module at execution of each instruction in the sequence program For details on direct access I O see Section 10 2 1 and 10 2 2 respe
241. ber when individual devices from extension file register are directly accessed Priorities 1 to 4 Priorities 5 to 7 e Designate the device number for the extension file register for direct read and write in 2 words at SD1036 and SD1037 in BIN data Use consecutive numbers beginning with RO of block No 1 to designate device numbers Exetension file register Block No 1 area Block No 2 area D1036 SD1037 Device No BIN data illuminate or flicker to indicate errors with error code numbers e Configuration of the priority setting areas is as shown below B15 to B12B11 to Priority 4 Priority 3 B8 B7__ to Priority 2 B4B3 to Priority 1 BO SD207 SD208 e For details refer to the applicable CPUs User s Manual and the ACPU Programming manual Fundamentals I 1 Priority 7 Priority 6 Priority 5 APP 39 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued ACPU Special Special Special Register after Register for Meaning Details Conversion Conversion Modification e Turned on off with a peripheral device SD1044 For sampling Step or time during At scanning 0 trace sampling trace At time Time 10 msec unit Stores the value in BIN code D9049 SD1049 7 44 50 1 Corresponding CPU Stores the block number of the expansion file register which is used as the work area for the execution of a Block number of Work area for ae SF
242. ber of memory cards to be installed is one sheet The memory card must be selected from SRAM Flash and ATA according to the application and capacity With commercial memory cards the Operation is not assured x2 The Q series power supply module is not required for the Q5UB type extension base unit 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 2 Configuration of peripheral devices et MITSUBISHI D Process CPU USB cable 1 Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU To be procured yourself RS 232 cable QC30R2 Memory card 1 Q2MEM 1MBS Q2MEM 2MBS Q2MEM 2MBF Q2MEM 4MBF Q2MEM 8MBA Q2MEM 16MBA Q2MEM 32MBA A Lo AED LS ET E I ILII E SS 6 REE EES SS A Z F LS Personal Computer GX Developer Version 7 10L or later PC card adapter Q2MEM ADP x1 For writing into memory card on GX Developer and USB cable refer to the operating manual of the GX Developer 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 3 Outline of system configuration Main base unit Q312B Power supply module t 0123 45 67 8 9 1011 lt Slot No 00 20 40 60 80 AO CO E0 100 120 140 160 cable SLSISPSFSESTS SAS SPS TS 1F 3F 5F 7F 9F BF DF FF H1F 13FH Se 7F Extension base unit Q612B J 5 pply module The figure shows the configuration 1415 16 17 18 19 20 3 1co1Eo
243. bove device range and device data settings wil be written to the PLC as initial values ake of of _oj__oj__oj__oj __oj _o Please execute Device memory diversion if the device initial range setting is changed R160 o o o 9 o o o o r Setting method Device memory registration diversion Device memory for DUES TEA registration diversion mune No of points Start v Register to device memory Start End Cancel c Atthe PLC file tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box designate the name of the file where the device initial value data is to be stored PLC file screen Qn H Parameter PLC name PLC system PLE Tie PLCRAS Device Program Boot fle SFC 1 0 assignment File register Initial Device value Notused Not used Use the same file name as the program Use the same file name as the program Corresponding X Corresponding memory Use the following file Use the following file Corresponding bd Corresponding he memory memory File name File name Capacity K 1K 1018K points Comment file used in a command File for local device Notused Notused Use the same file name as the program Use the following file Corresponding Corresponding x _ memory memory C Use the following file a File name Conesponding memory File name Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple PLC setings
244. caeceeeeaecaecaeseaeeaecaesaeseaesaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeeeaeeats 6 8 6 4 About the Standard RAM 2isccs cesses id cea devote de iiaeneieei deters ngetdeddeus aebaigaceedd ene idaaten e iaaiiai 6 9 BS Memor Cardair aa aa araea aeaa aAA aN vides fue bade ube E eea AEE oN aAA cade aTa EAE aeaaea eNA RE aCA hese tse 6 10 6 6 Writing Data to the Standard ROM or the Flash Card cccccccecceseeseeeeeeeceseeeeeeceeseeesaesaeseeeeaeeaesaeseeeeaes 6 11 6 6 1 Writing Data to the standard ROM or to the Flash card using GX Developer s ssesesseeseseeeee 6 11 6 6 2 Automatic write to standard ROM Auto Download all Data from Memory card to standard ROM e cescceceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeateas 6 13 6 7 Executing Standard ROM Memory Card Programs Boot Run cecceseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeateeseeeeeeaees 6 16 6 8 Program File Configuration oo eee eceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseesaeeeeeecaesaesaeeeeeecaesasseseesaesaesaseeseesaesaseaseeneseesaesaneasess 6 19 6 9 GX Developer File Operation and File Handling Precautions cccccscccseeseeeseceteseeseseseaeeseesseeesaeeaas 6 21 O19F1 ISO POP ALON aea sda shects denndte sdasbichs deeedds sashaetsteieels datastageeede tabecteacds 6 21 6 9 2 File handling precautions cicada A E A EE TE OTE 6 22 DSS RIO SE tks vial A AA A A AAAA O AART 6 23 RUNCORN LIS ha is cee eee A E E AE T A A ee eee 7 1 722 Constant SCAN fs itis hie ila wi kalba mika dadidadlhawihad Naha nl hacen 7 2 73 Lat
245. can 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS 4 2 Program Execute Type MELSEC Q Programs executed by Process CPU can be stored in the Process CPU s program memory standard ROM or memory card Programs can be stored in the standard ROM or memory card as a single program but also as multiple programs by splitting them into separate programs for each control function This permits the programming procedure to be split up among several program designers who can design separate programs for each operation and can store them in the standard ROM or memory card When multiple programs are executed by Process CPU program name file name and execute type settings of the programs must be designated Control by one program Control by separating into multiple programs Program A Control contents A Program B Control contents B 1 l l l l l l Y Program n Control contents n Store by separating the code according to control contents 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 1 Execute Type Setting a To execute several programs specify a Program name and Execute type of each program at the Program tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box Process CPU will execute the selected programs in the order of specified Execute Type setting Qn H Parameter PLC name PLC
246. cant ram error location Meaning Error E common rror common File name information SD7 a information ASCII code 8 characters Extension 2EH ASCII code 3 characters Pattern 4 Block No Step No transition No Sequence step No L Sequence step No H x4 Contents of pattern data 1514 to 4321 0 le Bit number olo to o lof x L _SFC block designation present Not used 1 absent 0 SFC step designation present 1 absent 0 SFC transition designation present 1 absent 0 APP 20 APP 20 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding n Corresponding Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU CPU DoC IT Individual information corresponding to error codes SD0 is stored here File name Drive name Example Number Meaning ABCDERGH IJK SD16 Drive B15 to B8 B7 to BO SD17 cele 41H A SD18 File name 44H D 43H C SD19 ASCII code 8 characters 46H F 45H E SD20 48H H 47H G SD21 Extension 2EH 49H I 2EH SD22 ASCII code 3 characters 4BH K 4AH J SD23 SD24 Vacant SD25 SD26 Time value actutally measured Number Meaning SD16 Time 1 us units 0 to 999 us SD17 Time 1 ms units 0 to 65535 ms SD18 SD19 SD20 SD21 SD22 Vacant S
247. ce data is stored e Failure history data is stored The use of file registers allows the write read of data at 1017 k points in a Sequence program 2 The Flash card allows only the read through a sequence program The Flash card is useful when data written by the Process CPU is read through a sequence program but no change is made to the data The use of file registers allows a sequence program to read a maximum of 1018 k points of data written by the Process CPU 3 The ATA card is used for PLC user data general purpose data Access to PLC user data stored on the ATA card can be made in CSV format binary format by using a file access instruction e g FWRITE in a sequence program 6 PROCESS CPU FILES MELSEC Q 2 Types of Data Stored in the Process CPU Memory or on the Memory Card The table below shows the type of data stored in a standard RAM standard ROM or on a memory card Process CPU Memory r Card ROM Built In Card RAM Data Name Sears St anda rd Si nd a Remarks MECE Parameter es 1 data drive module al Program pe pe pepe per poem OT fo fs fo eet ae E SS SH C ff O Doe oe AEAN A Debugdas lt taal e a A x a a ee ee E Needed Stored X Not stored REMARK 1 Boot the program memory to execute a program 2 Data can be written by operating from the GX Developer Device comments cannot be used in an instruction of a sequence program x3 The read from a sequence program requ
248. ce is set at every scan after END instruction execution the set device status is stored in the sampling trace area POINT 1 When the constant scan function See Section 7 2 is set END processing time result is stored until wnen END processing is completed or the next scan starts 2 When executing the low speed execution type program the low speed END processing starts after the all low speed execution type programs are completed See Section 4 2 3 for details on the low speed execution type program and low speed END processing 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 RUN STOP PAUSE Operation Processing The Process CPU has three types of operation status RUN STOP and PAUSE status The Process CPU operation processing is explained below 1 RUN Status Operation Processing a RUN status indicate that the sequence program operation is performed from step 0 to END FEND instruction to step 0 repeatedly b When entering the RUN status the output status saved at STOP status is output by setting Previous status as Output mode at STOP to RUN at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box c It usually takes 1 to 3 seconds to prepare for staring the sequence program operation since STOP status is switched to RUN status though it might be longer depending on the system 2 STOP Status Operation Processing a STOP status indicates that the sequence prog
249. ce range used for local devices Pi oram Specifies a program name and execution conditions to write 9 several programs onto the CPU module Boot option a whether the program memory is cleared or not during Designates the boot operation program file type data name and destination drive Designates whether automatic refresh to the standard ROM is made or not Designates the SFC program start mode starting conditions and 7000H Boot file setting Boot file setting Automatic write to standard ROM SFC program start 80024 mode SFC Starting conditions 8003H Output mode when the output mode in a block stop for SFC program use the block is stopped 8005H 9 PARAMETER LIST MELSEC Q Default Value Setting Range Eoo o aa O Checked Checked Not checked Section 7 15 No setting 0 5 to 2000 ms 0 5 ms units Section 7 2 No setting 1 to 2000 ms Section 4 2 3 Record in PLC RAM Record in PLC RAM Record in the following history file Section 7 16 X 8 k points Y 8 k points S 8 k points SB 2k points and SW 2 k points are fixed Including the above points 3 7 k words a total range of 29 k Section 10 1 words is available Section 10 2 e For one device Max 32 k points e Total number for the bit devices Max 64 k points No setting Only 1 range is designated for each device of B F V T ST Section 7 3 C D W Only 1 range is designated for each device of L B F V T No setting ST C D
250. ceeds the set value The current value matches the set value when a time out occurs There are two types of timers a low high speed that allows the current value to return to 0 when a timer coil switches OFF and a retentive timer that retains the current value even when a timer coil switches OFF Timers j Timers Low speed timers High speed timers __ Retentive timers r Low speed retentive timers High speed retentive timers With a timer setting instruction format a device is assigned for a low speed timer or high speed timer The OUT TO instruction is used to assign a device for a low speed timer The OUTH TO instruction is used to assign a device for a high speed timer With a timer setting instruction format a device is assigned for a low speed retentive timer or high speed retentive timer The OUT TO instruction is used to assign a device for a low speed retentive timer The OUTH TO instruction is used to assign a device for a high speed retentive timer 1 Definition a Low speed timers are valid only while the coil is ON b The time measurement begins when the timer s coil switches ON and the contact switches ON when a time out occurs When the timer s coil switches OFF the current value becomes 0 and the contact switches OFF Ladder example f 2 Ss XO K10 When X0 switches ON the TO coil switches ON and the lt To contact switches ON 1 second later The low speed timer E measures tim
251. ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 62 Edge relay V 2 cectivdadieetinleid wired 10 16 END procCeSSing cscceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 4 34 Enforced ON OFF sccceeeseteeeeereeteeees 7 31 Enforced ON OFF for external I O 04 1 4 Execute type weit ieee 4 10 Execution time measurement 7 39 Execution time of the low speed execution type progra M a etietceeet Dearest we Diet ih ae 4 19 EXt NSiON ceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 6 2 6 4 F ANNUNCiatOr aoon 10 12 Failure MSTO ena caries 7 64 FD Function register 10 31 File r QiStel ecceeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 43 ACCESS Method 10 44 Designation Method eeeeeeeeeeeeteees 10 49 REISTE eranan ies viet es ecct deers 10 45 FIG SIZO 8235 ptacs ates edustiet aa 6 17 Fixed scan execution type program 4 31 Plas MCA iaec ss AA tactic edi 6 11 Floating decimal point data eee 4 48 Function device FX FY FD 10 31 FUNCTION version 13 5 14 4 FX FUNCtION INPUT rerperr 10 31 FY Function Output siirrossa 10 31 Global device ceeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeeeeneeees 10 63 GX Configurator s s s 8 2 14 10 GX Developer 0 cecceseeceeceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeaes A 18 H Hexadecimal constants e eeeeee 10 61 HEX Hexadecimal eee eee 4 46 Hexadecimal constants H seeeeeeee 10 61 High speed retentive timer ST 005 10 21 Index 1 High speed timer T ese
252. ceeseaesaesaeseeseaesaseeseaseaesaeseeseaseaees 7 47 7 13 Debug Function with Multiple USCIS cece toann E EE A EEE A 7 56 7 13 1 Multiple user monitoring FUNCTION eee eee cece eeeeteeeteeeeeeeteeeteeeteeesaeeeaeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeeseateeeseeeeaaes 7 57 7 13 2 Multiple user RUN write function 0 eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeeeeseeetaeetaeesaeeseeeseeesaeeseeeseeeseaeseeneenteneeaaes 7 58 7 14 Watch Dog Timer WDT aranana aira a a AA EAEE A E ATAT E AARTE 7 60 7215 Selt DidQMnOSiS PUO O e Mes cote a edie es ad a ee as ets ats ahs 2 7 62 7 15 1 Interrupt due to Crror OCCO errre khieu ennnen ETANTE AAR AENEAN AAEN EN ANANE AREEN ANNEN 7 65 7 15 2 LED display When rror OCCUIS cceecceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeteeesenseneneaees 7 65 715 3 Error caucellation cnar aniseed aan ei etd eed et dl eet el ee etl 7 66 FAG AF NUTS HISTO si ci tec ais eae Danse auek a Dada pack Picea Daa AA bas casee Sheets bans cask thoes escent ea tetas Meee eee 7 67 FAL ASYSteM Protects airan uv aia vans nian ian ave vis vi ds eee ava eave AA ve a at 7 68 fl fA Password registration f vai iia ch ole holden ala a al a 7 68 Te Remote passwd oc cvs hess vob arsvbeeds ciel Ae caeh naps Aad ash op abi aka al Adnan th nn Abe haan 7 70 7 18 Monitoring Process CPU System Status from GX Developer System Monitor n 7 73 T19 LED Display n sage A ta Aiea tl ae ite i ae Gene oa ene ae ee at ae ae eee 7 75 FAG LED displ
253. cess CPU operation at the time of error detection a When an error is detected from the self diagnosis there are two types of modes that the Process CPU operation can change to 1 Process CPU calculation stop mode The calculation is stopped on detecting an error and all outputs of modules are set to OFF if the outputs for the modules have been set to Clear Default at the Error time output mode section in the I O assignment tab screen within the PLC Parameter dialog box And output Y is held However the outputs of the modules are held if they have been set to Hold there The output Y is also held 2 Process CPU calculation continue mode When an error is detected the program Instruction area where the error occurred is skipped and the rest of the program is executed b The calculation continue stop can be set at the PLC RAS tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box if the following error occur All parameter defaults are set at Stop Computation error Expanded Command error Fuse blown I O module comparison error Intelligent module program execution error Memory card access error Memory card operation error For example when the I O module verification error is set to continues the calculations are continued in the I O address before the error occurred SOS OS 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 4 Error check selection The following error checking can be set to yes no at the PLC RAS ta
254. cess modules mounted onto additional base units Reducing the time required for multiple PLC system processing The following methods are available for reducing the amount of time required for multiple PLC system processing Combine modules with many access points such as MELSECNET H and CC LINK refresh etc together into a main base unit Set modules with many access points such as MELSECNET H and CC LINK refresh etc as control module on a single CPU module and ensure that simultaneous access does not occur Reduce the number of MELSECNET H and CC LINK refresh access points Reduce the number of automatic refresh points between CPU modules It is possible to reduce scan time by changing the following PLC parameter settings e A Series CPU compatibility setting See Section 18 3 for details 14 17 14 17 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 14 2 9 Precautions for making online module change Take the following precautions when making the online module change of modules used with the Process CPU in a multiple PLC system Refer to the following manual for details of the online module change e Process CPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 1 Modules that can be changed online The modules controlled by the Process CPU can be changed online The modules controlled by the High Performance model QCPU Motion CPU and PC CPU module cannot be changed online 2 CPU module ver
255. cial register cceceseeeeeeees 10 34 SD520 SD521 Scan time present value 4 18 D522 SD523 Initial scan time 4 4 16 D524 SD525 Scan time Maximum value 4 18 D526 SD527 Scan time Minimum value 4 18 SD528 SD529 Low speed scan time Present value wees E heey anneal ew een avid 4 24 SD530 SD531 Low speed scan time Initial value shislusiei iden Sidi TT 4 24 SD532 SD533 Low speed scan time Minimum value detain et iaiivt a iadietiee a And samira ld 4 24 SD534 SD535 Low speed scan time Maximum VANUG i esiets case E E TT 4 24 Self diagnosis function ceceeeeeteeeee 7 59 SEQUENCE PFOQrAM ceeeeeeeeceeteeteeteeeeeeees 4 1 Seral Nosare AN 1 1 Setting range in the internal user device 10 3 Setting the number of stages ceeeee 5 2 SFC block device BL eeceeeeeees 10 58 SFC transition device TR 10 58 Single precision floating decimal point data 4 48 Size File Capacity c ccccceceeceseseeeteeees 6 2 SM Special relay e ccecceceeseeeeeeeeeeeees 10 33 Special link register SW seeeeeeees 10 30 Special link relay SB ceeeeeeeeeeeeee 10 18 Special register SD ccceseeeeeeeeee 10 34 Special relay SM esseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 10 33 SRAM Cal saata teen R 6 10 Index 3 ST Retentive timer OUT ST 2 10 21 Stand by type program ecceceseeeeeeeeeees 4 25 St
256. cified 2 The specification method for the execution status is indicated below a When changing from non execution status to executing status lt P gt b When changing from executing status to non execution status lt F gt c Always when executing only lt ON gt d Always when not executing only lt OFF gt e Always regardless of status lt Always gt When Step No 0 is specified set the condition to Always 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q If a step between the AND OR blocks is specified as a monitor condition monitor data is sampled when the status previous to execution of the specified step is specified by the LD instruction The monitor timing depends on the step specified as a monitor condition The following shows examples of monitoring when the 2nd step is ON Step No 2 lt ON gt 1 When the 2nd step is connected by the AND instruction As shown below the monitor execution condition is established when both X0 and X1 are ON Circuit mode List mode es 2nd step 0 LD x2 20 1 AND if 2 AND 3 OUT 2 When the 2nd step is connected between the AND ON blocks As shown below the monitor execution condition is established when X1 is ON Whether X0 is ON or OFF it does not affect the monitor execution condition 2nd step Oe ne x 1 LD X1 XO Xi X2 2 AND X2 Y20 3 OR X3 X3 4 ANB 5 OUT Y20 3 If the beginning of a ladder block not at Step 0 is specified in Step No as a d
257. column For the device numbers for which a special register for modification is specified modify it to the special register for QCPU QnACPU For the device numbers for which is specified special register after conversion can be used Device numbers for which x is specified do not function for QCPU QnACPU Special Register List ACPU Special Special Corr spondihg Special Register after Register for Name Meaning Details CPU Conversion Conversion Modification e When fuse blown modules are detected the lowest number of detected units is stored in hexadecimal Example When fuses of Y50 to 6F output modules have blown 50 is stored in hexadecimal To monitor the Number of i A 5 k D9000 SD1000 Fuse blown module with n mber by peripheral devices perform monitor operation blown fuse given in hexadecimal Cleared when all contents of SD1100 to SD1107 are reset to 0 e Fuse blow check is executed also to the output modules of remote I O stations e Stores the module numbers corresponding to setting switch numbers or base slot numbers when fuse blow occurred V O module for A0J2 Extension base unit Settin Base unit g Stored data Stored data switch slot No Number of Fuse blown module with blown fuse 3 O D9001 SD1001 APP 36 APP 36 APPENDICES ACPU Special Special Special Register after Register for Conversion Conversion Modification D9002 D9004 D9005 SD1002
258. communication communication with another station using MELSECNET H and communication with a remote station over the CC Link can be made even in the STOP or PAUSE status 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 5 Operation Processing during Momentary Power Failure The Process CPU detects a momentary power failure when the input power voltage supplied to the power supply module is lower than the regulated ranges When the Process CPU detects a momentary power failure the following operation processing is performed 1 When momentary power failure occurs for a period shorter than the permitted power failure time a The output is maintained when the momentary power failure occurs and file name of the file accessed and error history are logged Then the system interrupts the operation processing The timer clock continues b When there is an SFC continue specification a system saving processing is performed c When a momentary power failure ends the operation processing is resumed d Even if the operation is interrupted due to momentary power failure the watchdog timer WDT measurement continues For example if the GX Developer PLC parameter mode WDT setting is set at 200 ms when a momentary failure of 15 ms occurs at scan time 190 ms the watch dog timer error is set Momentary power failure occurrence Power recovery END oie END ites QCPU interrupts the operation Fig 4 6 O
259. control PLC setting and other parameter settings Creation of sequence programs y PLC power ON Y Connection of PC and CPU module PLC No 1 Parameter and program writing eed Ce PLC No 1 QCPU resetting 1 19 1 scececececececeseees Clarify the control and functions executed by each CPU scvccececeeseceeeeee TO USE automatic refresh of PLC share memory reserve continuous refresh points For automatic refresh of PLC share memory see section 16 1 scvececececcececeeee Select the modules for realizing the functions executed in the multiple PLC system seccccccccccccceoees Stall the selected module to the main base unit and expansion base units ccvcccccceccccoceees Start the GX Developer Version 6 or later For the starting method refer to the GX Developer operating manual scececececececeseses Create parameters and sequence programs for PLC No 1 to No 4 For multiple PLC settings and control PLC settings see sections 16 1 and 19 2 For automatic refresh of device data see section 16 1 scccccccccccccscceee Select STOP at the RUN STOP switch of the QCPU and turn off the RESET L CLR switch and turn on the PLC eeeeseeseesess000000 Connect the PC from which GX Developer has been started and the QCPU with the QCPU of the PLC No 1 using RS 232 cable or USB cable scvcscescsccccsesees Write parameters and sequence programs to the PLC No 1 For PLC No 2 to No 4 select and
260. creased 12 fixation Increase5 A A cae a Base model name Designate the model name of the installed base unit with 16 or less characters Process CPU does not use the designated model name It is used as a user s memo or for parameter printing b Power model name Designate the model name of the installed power supply module with 16 or less characters Process CPU does not use the designated model name It is used as a user s memo or for parameter printing c Increase cable name Designate the model name of the extension cable being used with 16 or less characters Process CPU does not use the designated model name It is used as a user s memo or for parameter printing d Points Used with Process CPU Select the number of points for the slot of the base unit being used from the followings 2 2 slots 3 3 slots e 5 5 slots 8 8 slots e 10 10 slots e 12 12 slots e 8 fixation 12 fixation Used with Process CPU Select either option to designate the number of slots for all base units to the same number 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 5 4 What are I O Numbers I O numbers are used in sequence programs for importing ON OFF data to Process CPU from outsides and outputting ON OFF data from Process CPU to outsides Input X is used for the importing of ON OFF data to Process CPU Output Y is used for outputting ON OFF data from Process CPU I O numbers are expr
261. ction The maximum counting speed is calculated by the following expression Maximum counting _ N 1 imnes n Duty 2 speed Cmax t00 T T Execution interval of the OUT C13 instruction 1 1 See Section 10 2 1 for details on direct access inputs 2 2 The duty is the count input signal s ON OFF time ratio expressed as a percentage value Ti A gt o When T12 T2 n T1472 x 100 When T1 lt T2 n 2 x 100 T1 T2 Ti T2 cr F i Count input signal OFF 10 25 10 25 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q Interrupt counters 1 Definition Interrupt counters are devices which count the number of interrupt factor occurrences 2 Count processing a b The interrupt counter s current value is updated when an interruption occurs It is not necessary to create a program which includes an interrupt counter function Interrupt counter operation requires more than the simple designation of a set value To use the interrupt counter for control purposes comparison instructions lt etc must also be used to enable comparisons with the set value with an internal relay M etc being switched ON or OFF according to the comparison result The figure below shows a sample program in which MO is switched ON after 10 interrupt inputs are performed In this example C300 is the interrupt counter No corresponding to 10 H K10 c300 H mo gt 3 Setting the interrupt counter a b
262. ctions CALL ECALL A total of 4096 pointers can be used total for all programs being executed 2 Pointer applications a Pointers are used in jump instructions CJ SCJ JMP to designate jump destinations and labels jump destination beginning b Pointers are used in sub routine CALL instructions CALL CALLP to designate the CALL destination and label sub routine beginning 3 Pointer types There are 2 pointer types local pointers Section 10 9 1 which are used independently in programs and common pointers Section 10 9 1 which are used to call sub routine programs from all programs executed in the CPU 10 9 1 Local pointers 1 Definition a Local pointers are pointers which can be used independently in program jump instructions and sub routine call instructions Local pointers cannot be used from other program jump instructions and sub routine CALL instructions Use an ECALL instruction to call a sub routine subprogram in a program file that contains local pointers b The same pointer No can be used in each of the programs Program A Program B ca ra Same pointer is en a Feno H Feno H gt gt rer H rer H eno H o H For further information on jump instructions and sub routine call instructions see the QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 10 53 10 53 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 2 Number of loc
263. ctively 4 7 1 Refresh mode 1 Definition of refresh mode With the refresh mode batch communication with the I O modules is performed before the sequence program operation starts a Batch reading of the input module ON OFF information is executed in the Process CPU s internal input device memory when sequence program operation starts This ON OFF data in the input device memory is then used for processing when a sequence program is executed b The processing result of the output Y sequence program is output to the Process CPU s internal output device memory and batch output of the ON OFF data in output device memory to the output module is executed when sequence program operation starts Process CPU Remote input Network refresh area module CPU operation processing area 3 At input ty GX Developer refresh Input ae input area module memory 1 1 At input Area for refresh Ucommunication with input module At output For device refresh Output VA gt memory 2 module OSS output Y Network module e Input refresh Input information is read in a batch 1 from the input module before sequence program operation starts and is stored in the input X device memory by an OR operation in the peripheral device input area e Output refresh Data in the output Y device memory is output in a batch 2 to the output module before sequence program operation starts e When an input contact instruction
264. cuit mode in Section 7 10 1 For further information see Section 7 10 1 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 14 Watch dog Timer WDT 1 What is Watch dog Timer WDT a The watch dog timer is an internal sequence timer to detect Process CPU hardware and sequence program error b When the watch dog timer expires a watch dog timer error occurs The Process CPU responds to the watch dog timer error as follows 1 The Process CPU turns off all outputs 2 The front mounted RUN LED turned off and the ERR LED starts flickering 3 SM1 turns ON and the error code is stored in SDO c The default value of the watch dog timer is 200 ms The setting range is 10 to 2000 ms in 10ms units 2 Watch dog Timer Setting and Reset a The watch dog timer setting can be changed at the PLC RAS tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box b Process CPU resets the watch dog timer during the END processing 1 When the END FEND instruction is executed within the set value of the watch dog timer in the sequence program and the Process CPU is operating correctly the watch dog timer does not time out 2 When the scan time of a sequence program is extended due to the Process CPU hardware error or execution of interrupt program fixed scan execution type program and END FEND instruction cannot be executed within the set watch dog timer value the watch dog timer times out 3 Precautions a An error of 0 to 10 ms occurs in the measuremen
265. cution type program time 4ms to 5ms e Execution time of low speed execution type program A ims e Execution time of low speed execution type program B 3ms e END processing Oms 0 ms is used to simplify the illustration END END END END END processing processing processing processing processing 0 4 11 5 16 5 23 5 29 5 ms Eide l z p ee Fee e A a ae a a a e ome eed ea beh akz heule ee ei a A e e a eel p 4ms 4 5ms 4ms 4ms_ 5ms Scan execution type program I l ims ims is Low speed execution type program A H H i 2ms ims 2ms ims se Low speed execution type program B m i Low speed scan time Low speed scan time l 12 5ms 12ms ht gt a Low speed END Low speed END processing execution processing execution I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Li l l l l Li l Li l Li l Li l Li l Li l l l l l l l l l l l processing execution processing execution I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Li l l l l l l l l I l l l l l Li l l l l l l l l l l l 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 Precautions for creating Low speed execution type programs a See Section 10 6 1 for details on index register processing when switching from a scan execution type program to a low speed executio
266. d For further information on error codes see the Process CPU Users Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection SM202 eee When turned from OFF to ON the LED corresponding to each bit in the SD202 is turned off SD202 e This specifies the LED to turn off Only USER LED and BOOT LED can be turned off t BOOT LED USER LED 1 means turn off and 0 means leave on in the setting The setting to turn off each LED is as follows All in hexadecimal e When turning off both LEDs SD202 110H e When turning off only the BOOT LED SD202 100H e When turning off only the USER LED SD202 10x 3 Method to not display the ERR LED USER LED and BAT LED The ERR LED USER LED and BAT LED have the same priorities explained in Section 7 19 2 When an error number for an LED is deleted from this priority the LED will not turn on even if an error with that error number occurs See POINT in Section 7 19 2 for the setting method 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 19 2 Priority setting When multiple factors that can be displayed occur the display is performed with the following conditions 1 A stop error is displayed without condition 2 An operation continue error is displayed according to the priority factor number set as the default The priority can be changed Set with special registers SD207 to SD209 3 When errors with the same priority level occur the error detected first is displayed
267. d OFF File not accessed ON File being accessed OFF Error detection performed ON Error detection not performed OFF Instruction not executed ON Instruction execution OFF Keyboard input reception enabled ON Keyboard input reception disabled OFF Instruction not executed ON Instruction execution OFF Performs link refresh processing during ON No link refresh performed OFF Local device disabled ON Local device enabled OFF Local device disabled ON Local device enabled Explanation Carry flag used in application instruction Outputs up to NUL 00h ASCII code when SM701 is OFF Outputs ASCII code of 16 characters when SM701 is ON Search method OFF Search next e Designates method to be used by search instruction U New ON 2 part search e Data must be arranged for 2 part search e The sort instruction is used to designate whether data should be sorted in ascending order or in descending order Goes ON when all data conditions have been met for the BKCMP instruction e Remains as originally set when OFF e CHK priorities updated when ON ON when EIl instruction is being executed Switches ON for only one scan when COMRD or PRC instruction is completed e Switches ON while a file is being accessed by the S FWRITE S FREAD COMRD PRC or LEDC instruction e Turned ON when OPERATION ERROR is suppressed for BIN or DBIN instruction ON when PKEY instruction i
268. d SD700 to SD799 g For debugging SD800 to SD899 h Latch area SD900 to SD999 i For A PLC D1000 to SD1299 j _Fuse blown module D1300 to SD1399 k Check of I O modules D1400 to SD1499 1 For details on special relays which can be used by the Process CPU refer to Appendix 2 2 This takes effect only after you have turned on the Use special relay special register form SM1000 SD1000 check box in the Compatibility with A PLC section at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box 10 34 10 34 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 4 Link Direct Devices Jt t 1 Definition a At END processing of sequence program a data refresh data transfer is performed between the Process CPU and the MELSECNET H network modules Link direct devices are used to directly access the link devices in the MELSECNET H network modules b Designation method e Link direct devices are designated by network No and device No Designation method JUi Ci Device No Input ee x0 Output eee YO r Link relay BO Link register Wo Link special relay SBO Link special register SW0 Network No 1 to 239 e For link register 10 W10 of network No 2 the designation would be J2 W 10 Network modules at network No 2 wf MOVP K100 wh W10 e For a bit device X Y B SB digit designation is necessary Designation example J1
269. d The monitoring operation is stopped when the current value of the specified word device becomes the specified value A current value can be expressed in decimal digits hexadecimal digits 16 bit integral numbers 32 bit integral numbers or real numbers 2 When Bit Device is specified The monitoring operation is stopped when the execution status of the specified bit device becomes the specified value Either the leading edge or the fall can be specified for execution condition 3 Precautions a When monitoring after setting the monitor condition the file displayed on GX Developer is monitored Match the file to be monitored by executing the New PLC Read and file name on GX Developer b When monitoring the file register which is not specified 0 is displayed c Perform the monitoring by matching the device allocation of the Process CPU and GX Developer d When monitoring the buffer memory of the intelligent function module the scan time takes longer as well as when executing the FROM TO instruction e Multiple users can perform monitoring at the same time When multiple users are performing monitoring at the same time take note of the following e High speed monitoring can be performed by increasing 1k step in the system area for other station s monitor file when formatting of program memory Up to 15 stations can be set as the station monitor file but the program space will be reduced e The detailed
270. d C stand for the following devices M internal relay Local device V edge relay D data register T timer ST relative timer C counter 1 Round down the fractional portions of bit devices 8 total number of M and V points 16 and total number of T ST and C points 16 Device comment 6 PROCESS CPU FILES MELSEC Q An example for calculating the amount of memory capacity required when writing the parameters and sequence programs in the program memory is shown below 1 Writing file Program capacity 2 PARAM QPA parameter MAIN QPG sequence program 5000 steps 20000 bytes SUB QPG sequence program 11500 steps 46000 bytes 2 Indicates the program capacity displayed with GX Developer total number of file headers and created program steps See Section 6 8 2 Writing conditions a Parameter Default setting 564 bytes b Secured writing steps during RUN Default setting 500 steps 2000 bytes 3 File memory capacity calculations Papatasen __t__ aun toate 24 576 bytes 6 k steps MAIN QPG Total Ss 22 000 Secured fee eee steps during RUN 2 000 Total OE 48 000 File memory capacity total 77 824 bytes 19 k steps x3 A program memory capacity in 4096 byte 1 k step units is secured Sequence program capacity 46 000 49 152 bytes 12 k steps SUB QPG 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 FUNCTION Function of Process CPU module is as follows 7 1 Function List Functions
271. d RAM e 0H is stored in a memory card b Writing reading file register Nos outside the registered range points No error occurs even if reading writing occurs to these file registers Reading data from a file register results in the following e Undefined data is stored in the standard RAM e OH is stored in a memory card 2 File register capacity check a Perform a file register capacity check in the sequence program so that reading writing from to the file register is performed within the size number of points set in the Process CPU A file register capacity check should be executed at step 0 of programs in which file registers are used e After switching to another file register file using the QDRSET instruction execute a file register capacity check e When using the RSET instruction to switch blocks confirm that the switching destination block has a capacity of 1k points or more before executing the RSET instruction File register capacity gt 32k points X switching block No 1k points b The available file register capacity can be checked in the file register capacity storage register SD 647 1 The file register capacity is stored in SD647 in 1k point units The less than 1k points surplus portion of a file register capacity is not stored In order to ensure an accurate range of use check be sure to designate the file register setting in 1k point 1024 points units x1 If a file register f
272. d aaraa aada aeaa ara adi baara kankaat 10 31 1 0 3 2 Special relays SM as suction ard a aid ions REAA RE oe See ANAREN 10 33 10 33 Special registers SD 2t cA anki Ae a ina ceo etna 10 34 10 4 Link Direct Devices NLS secscicaciesFisacnsacventadetsendadaiventudniventadatbentninlnentuintbentedntbentadatbentalataentacateeatalaleeatelateentadaie 10 35 10 5 Intelligent Function Module Devices UC I GUS oo eseeseceseseesesecesesseseseeeeseseseeeeseseaeseseeaeaeateneesaeaeeeseeeeaseeeneeeaeaeens 10 38 10 6 Index Registers Z arua ETOT AO T de teen pee 10 39 10 6 1 Switching between scan execution type programs and low speed execution type programs 10 40 10 6 2 Switching between scan low speed execution type programs and interrupt fixed SCAN EXECUTION type programis panasea iA 10 41 A 10 A 10 TOT Fie Registers F ctaen arch ceed eee aerate Gerad eee aera ees eA ei eee 10 43 10 7 1 File register Capacity cesio A AAA iain niin diediaaniaddy 10 44 10 7 2 Differences in memory card access method by Memory Card type eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteees 10 44 10 7 3 Registering the file registers 2 2 0 ceceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaneeeeeeeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaneeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeees 10 45 10 7 4 File register designation method cescescesceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeseeeaeeeaeeeneeaneeaeeeeeeeneeeeseseeeaees 10 49 10 7 5 Precautions in using file registers ee ee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeesaeeeeeseeesaeeeeeesee
273. d memory Host PLC s operation information area System area Read with FROM instruction or U Sequence program FROM command execution 16 1 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 16 1 Automatic Refresh of CPU Shared Memory 1 Automatic refresh of CPU shared memory a PLC No 1 Automatic refresh of the CPU shared memory is a function of automatic data transfer between CPU PLCs in END processing of the CPU As the device memory data of other PLCs is automatically read when the automatic refresh function is used is possible for the host PLC to use the device data of other PLCs Data is transmitted between the following parties during automatic refresh of CPU shared memory e Between Process CPU and Process CPU e Between Process CPU and Motion CPU e Between Motion CPU and Motion CPU e Between Process CPU and PC CPU module e Between Motion CPU and PC CPU module An outline of operations when the PLC No 1 performs automatic refresh on the 32 points between BO and B1F and when the PLC No 2 performs automatic refresh on the 32 points between B20 and B3F PLC No 2 CPU shared memory Host PLC s operation information area CPU shared memory Host PLC s operation information area System area System area Automatic refresh area for writing in the No 1 machine User s free area 1 Writing performed with the PLC No 1 END proce
274. d on the PLC or reset the CPU module After the procedure the settings given in steps 1 and 2 become valid 6 PROCESS CPU FILES MELSEC Q 6 8 Program File Configuration 1 Program File Configuration a Program files consist of a file header an execution program and allocate memory allocated for Write during RUN Program file configuration 34 steps File header default Execution program The area is allocated in 1k steps Write during RUN Memory allocated for js steps b As shown below the size of a program stored in the Process CPU includes all the above components 1 File header The file name file size and file creation data etc are stored in this area The file header size is fixed to 34 to 35 steps 136 to 140 bytes Default 34 steps 2 Execution program The created program is stored in this area 1 step is 4 bytes 3 Memory allocated for Write during RUN This area is used when write during RUN that write during RUN increases the number of steps is executed from GX Developer Default value is set to 500 steps 2000 bytes The number of memory allocated for Write during RUN can be changed using the online write to PLC program The number of memory allocated for Write during RUN can be redefined if the number of memory allocated is not sufficient for write during RUN See Section 7 10 1 2 The size of the program displayed by GX Developer During progr
275. d processing Batch processing Divided processing Read time not shortened Read time shortened Empty spaces in communication request registration area No empty spaces in communication request registration area Error check executed No error check No error Error Replacement No replacement SFC programs not used SFC programs used SFC programs stop SFC programs start Initial Start Continue Continuous transition not effective Continuous transition effective Details Provides P set request after transfer of the other program for example subprogram when main program is being run is complete during run Automatically switched off when P setting is complete e Turned on when canvas screen transfer to AD57 S1 AD58 is done by divided processing and turned off at completion of divided processing Turned on when canvas screen transfer to AD57 S1 AD58 is done by divided processing e Turned ON to shorten the search time in the A8UPU A8PUJ In this case the scan time is extended by 10 The ASUPU A8PUJ cannot be used in the QCPU QnACPU special relays e Indication of communication enable disable to remote terminal modules connected to the AJ71PT32 S3 A2C or A52G e It is set whether the error checks below are performed or not when the END instruction is processed to set the END instruction processing time e Check for breakage of fuse
276. de during RUN 1 Writing data in the circuit mode during RUN Status a Writing data in the circuit mode during RUN is a function to write a program during the Process CPU RUN status b The program can be changed without stopping the process in Process CPU program by performing writing data in the circuit mode during RUN status c Writing program during RUN can be performed from a GX Developer connected to another station in the network amp L MELSECNET H i Change by GX Developer and write in Process CPU at the conversion Personal computer GX Developer 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Precautions Take a note of the following when writing during RUN a The memory that can be written during RUN is only program memory 1 If the write during RUN is performed while booting a program from a memory card RAM the program to be booted will be changed While booting it takes some time until the write during RUN is completely executed 2 Ifthe write during RUN is performed while booting a program from the standard ROM or memory card ROM the program to be booted will not be changed Before turning off the PLC or resetting the Process CPU write the program memory into the standard ROM or memory card ROM b Amaximum of 512 steps can be written at once during RUN c When a low speed execution type program is being executed the RUN write is started once the low speed
277. doing so could result in noise that would cause erroneous operation e When controlling items like lamp load heater or solenoid valve using an output module large current approximately ten times greater than that present in normal circumstances may flow when the output is turned OFF to ON Take measures such as replacing the module with one having sufficient rated current Installation Precautions A CAUTION e Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications contained in Process CPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Using this PLC in an environment outside the range of the general specifications could result in electric shock fire erroneous operation and damage to or deterioration of the product e Hold down the module loading lever at the module bottom and securely insert the module fixing latch into the fixing hole in the base unit Incorrect loading of the module can cause a malfunction failure or drop When using the PLC in the environment of much vibration tighten the module with a screw Tighten the screw in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to damage to the screw or module e When installing more cables be sure that the base unit and the module connectors are installed correctly After installation check them for looseness Poor connections could ca
278. e 7000 error occurs for the CPU modules for PLC No 2 to No 4 and Motion CPUS and the multiple PLC system will be halted when a stop error occurs at the PLC No 1 See point on the next page for details b Observe the following procedures to restore the system 1 Confirm the cause of the PLC No 1 error with the PLC diagnosis function 2 Remove the cause of the error 3 Either reset the PLC No 1 or restart the power to the PLC All PLCs on the entire multiple PLC system will be reset and the system restored when the PLC No 1 is reset or the power to the PLC is restarted 2 When astop error occurs at the PLC No other than No 1 Whether the entire system is halted or not is determined by the multiple PLC setting s Operating Mode setting when a stop error occurs in the CPU modules for PLC No 2 to No 4 The default setting is for all PLCs to be stopped with a stop error When you do not want to stop all PLCs at occurrence of a stop error in any of the CPU modules click the check box that corresponds to the PLC No whose error will not stop all PLCs Arrow D No of PLC Online module changef Enable online module change No of PLC EE When the online module exchange is enabled 1 0 status outside the group cannot be taken D Dperating mode 0 ration mode at the stop c F The Fa Allstetion ston by stop ever of PLC F The TZ Al station
279. e 10 3 below Table 10 3 Differences Between Refresh Outputs amp Direct Access Outputs Processing speed Q12PHCPU o0ssus 068 us Main base unit 4 li eee a OUT Y DY Q25PHCPU K Extension base unit 4 e a in the sequence base unit installed at base extension base unit extension base unit Outputs used at MELSECNET H network Usable Unusable system or CC Link system x1 See Section 4 7 1 for details on the refresh mode 10 9 10 9 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 3 Internal relays M 1 Definition a Internal relays are auxiliary relays which cannot be latched by the programmable controller s internal latch memory backup All internal relays are switched OFF at the following times e When power is switched from OFF to ON e When reset occurs e When latch clear operation is executed b There are no restrictions on the number of contacts N O contacts N C contacts used in the program provided the program capacity is not exceded No restrictions on the quantity used MO switches ON at X0 OFF to ON SET MO H The internal relay M0 ON can only be used for internal Process CPU processing and cannot be output externally Y20 gt MO ON OFF information is output from the output module to an external destination M100 gt M2047 Figure 10 5 Internal Relay 2 Procedure for external outputs Outputs Y are used to output sequence program operation results to an external de
280. e Process CPU will enter operation status set at the RUN STOP switch 1 With the RUN STOP switch in the STOP position the Process CPU enters into the STOP status 2 With the RUN STOP switch in the RUN position the Process CPU enters into the RUN status d Take care that Remote RESET does not reset Process CPU if an error occurs in the Process CPU due to noise If Remote RESET does not reset use the RESET L CLR switch to reset or turn the PLC off POINT 1 If Remote RESET is executed when the Process CPU is stopped due to an error the Process CPU enters the operation status set at the RUN STOP switch after it is reset 2 Even if Remote reset is set as Allow at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box the remote process of the GX Developer is completed However the Process CPU is not reset since the reset process is not performed in it If the status of the Process CPU does not change though a reset process is performed from GX Developer check if the Remote reset is set as Allow at the PLC System tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box 7 FUNCTION 7 6 4 Remote latch clear MELSEC Q 1 What is Remote Latch Clear a The remote latch clear resets the device data latched to the Process CPU using the GX Developer etc when the Process CPU is in STOP status b Remote latch clear is useful when the Process CPU is in the following areas In these cases the
281. e in 100 ms units Time chart XO TO coil TO contact OFF f y 2 Measurement units a The default time measurement units setting for low speed timers is 100 ms b The time measurement units setting can be designated in 1 ms units within a 1 ms to 1000 ms range This setting is designated at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box 10 19 10 19 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 1 Definition a High speed timers are valid only while the coil is ON A high speed timer is marked with a symbol H b The time measurement begins when the timer s coil switches ON and the contact switches ON when the time elapses When the timer s coil switches OFF the current value becomes 0 and the contact switches OFF PACS ean s High speed timer display XO H ae When X0 switches ON the T200 coil switches ON and T200 the contact switches ON 2 second later The high speed timer measures time in 10 ms units Time chart XO T200 coil T200 contact OFF y 2 Measurement units a The default time measurement units setting for high speed timers is 10 ms b The time measurement units setting can be designated in 0 1ms units within a 0 1 ms to 100 ms range This setting is designated at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box 10 20 10 20 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 1 Definition a b c d Retentive timers m
282. e multiple PLC system the system configuration the I O numbers communications between CPU modules and communications between I O modules and intelligent function modules Generic Terms and Abbreviations The following abbreviations and general names for Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU are used in the manual Generic Term Abbreviation Description High Performance model QCPU General name for Q02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU modules Process CPU General name for Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU QnCPU General name for QO2CPU QnHCPU General name for Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU QnPHCPU General name for Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU Q Series Abbreviation for Mitsubishi MELSEC Q Series Programmable Logic Controller AnS Series Abbreviation for small types of Mitsubishi MELSEC A Series Programmable Logic Controller GX Developer General product name for SWnD5C GPPW E SWnD5C GPPW A E SWnD5C GPPW V E SWnD5C GPPW VA E For QnPHCPU version 7 10L or later can be used Main base unit General name for Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B type main base unit with Q Series power supply module I O module intelligent function module attachable Q6_B General name for Q63B Q65B Q68B and Q612B type extension base unit with Q Series power supply module I O module intelligent function module attachable Extension base unit General name for Q5B and Q6__B Base unit General na
283. e nee a ee of interrupt x2 Execution of the i i i INCP DO nterubtproaram 1 Interrupt cd errupt progra program 2 Pye IRET END e a Read write of the local devi 3 Local devices used by a a EE Local devices used by the file name ABC the file name DEF For details on SM777 see Appendix 1 10 67 10 67 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 2 Cautions e If SM777 is ON the local device data is read before the interrupt fixed scan execution type program is executed and the local device data is saved after the execution of the IRET instruction Accordingly scan time increases when an interrupt fixed scan execution type program is executed once with the setting of SM777 ON See Section 10 13 1 e ON OFF setting of SM777 is enabled in CPU module units Setting in file unit is not enabled e If the ON OFF setting of SM777 is changed while a sequence program is executed the control is made according to the information after change g Clearing the Local Device Data The local device data is cleared in the following cases where 1 The PLC is powered on or the CPU module is reset 2 The CPU module enters into the RUN status from the STOP status The local device data cannot be cleared by operating from the GX Developer To clear the local device data follow the above listed steps 1 and 2 10 68 10 68 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 13 2 Device initial values 1 Definition a Using device initial value
284. e oni ert e The lowest I O number of the module where the I O module SD61 verification _ verification error verification number took place S Error D9002 error number module number i S SD62 Annuneiator jAnnunciator The first annunciator number to be detected is stored here Instruction D9009 number number A execution S SD63 ane of Number of Stores the number of annunciators searched Instruction D9124 annunciators annunciators execution APP 22 APP 22 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding n Number Name Meaning Explanation Recast ACPU ee bo TT SD64 When F goes ON due to OUT F or SET FJ the F numbers which go progressively ON from SD64 through SD79 are registered SD65 F numbers turned OFF by RST F are deleted from SD64 to SD79 and are shifted to the data register following the data register where SD66 the deleted F numbers had been stored Execution of the instruction shifts the contents of SD64 to SD79 up by one This can also be done by using the INDICATOR RESET switch on the front of the Q3A Q4ACPU After 16 annunciators have been detected detection of the 17th will not be stored from SD64 through SD79 SET SET SET RST SET SET SET SET SET SET SET F50 F25 F99 F25 F15 F70 F65 F38 F110F151F210LEDR ch A bh A A hh ee Oe eee i Numb Annunciator 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 number i 3 4 5 6 71 8 9 8 Number of i detection
285. e remote I O station of MELSECNET H For the i nstruction dedicated for intelligent function modules and the completion device refer to the manual of the intelligent function module being used 8 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE MELSEC Q 8 2 Request from Intelligent Function Module to Process CPU 8 2 1 Interrupt from the intelligent function module 1 Interrupt from the intelligent function module Process CPU executes an interrupt program 150 to 1255 by the interrupt request from the intelligent function module For example the serial communication module processes the data reception by an interrupt program when the following data communication functions are executed e Data reception during the communication with no handshaking protocol e Data reception during the communication with bi directional protocol Processing data reception with an interrupt program improves the data reception speed of Process CPU The objective serial communication module data transmission Serial communication F Occurrence of reception module j Main program LH l E Main program 4 i PLC CPU Interrupt program execution 00 2 Setting an interrupt from the intelligent function module To execute an interrupt program by the interrupt of the intelligent function module it is necessary to designate the Intelligent function module setting Interrupt pointer setting at the PLC system tab screen in the
286. e uses the Process CPU internal clock so make sure to set the correct time when using the Process CPU for the first time 1 Storage Area a The latest 16 failures are stored in the latched Process CPU failure history storage memory b When storing more than 16 the history can be stored in the memory card file using PLC RAS setting in the PLC Parameter box c When the history count set in the parameter and that stored in the memory card are different after the following operation is performed the contents of the memory card history file is cleared then the 16 failure data in the Process CPU failure history storage memory is trandferred to the history file 1 When the history count in the parameter history file is changed in the middle of operation 2 When a memory card which has a different history count from that set in the parameter is mounted d The storage area in the failure history file is as follows File in the set memory card Amount that can be stored _ Max 100 can be changed x1 When the number of storage exceed the amount that can be stored the oldest history is overwritten with the latest history Even if the failure history file set in the parameter does not exist in the memory card the error will not occur in the Process CPU The Process CPU stores the failure to the failure history storage file 2 Failure History Clearing Method The failure history storage memory failure h
287. easure the coil ON time The measurement begins when the timer coil switches ON and the contact switches ON when a time out coil OFF occurs Even when the timer coil is OFF the current value and the contact ON OFF status are saved When the coil is switched ON again the time measurement resumes from the current value which was saved There are 2 retentive timer types low speed retentive timer and high speed retentive timer The RST T instruction is used to clear reset the current value and switch the contact OFF Ladder example XO K200 a i X0 ON time is measured as 20 seconds when the timer STO Corel measures time in 100 ms units xi p Retentive timer display i E RST STO When X1 switches ON the STO contact is reset and the current value is cleared Time chart ON X0 OFF ON TO coil OFF k 15s 5s TO present value OXI to 150 4 X51 to 200 Xo Present value is saved when coil switches ON TO contact OFF f f Contact remains ON when coil switches Instruction execution RST STO instruction Y ON x1 OFF 2 Measurement units a The measurement units settings for retentive timers are the same as those for low speed timers and high speed timers e Low speed retentive timer Same as low speed timer e High speed retentive timer Same as high speed timer In order to use retentive timers a retentive timer number of points used setting must be designat
288. ection 10 10 Bit devi SFC block 320 points BLO to BL319 Section 10 11 1 it devices SFC transition device 512 points TRO to TR511 Section 10 11 2 F Unchangeable 7 Network No 256 points J1 to J255 Section 10 11 3 VO No O UO to UFF Section 10 11 4 Decimal constants K 2147483648 to K2147483647 Section 10 12 1 Hexadecimal constants HO to HEFFFFFFF Section 10 12 2 Constants Real number constants E 1 17549 38 to E 3 40282 38 Section 10 12 3 h Character string ABC and 123 Section 10 12 4 constants REMARK 1 For the timer retentive timer and counter bit devices are used for the contact and the coil and the word device is used for the present value x2 The actual number of usable points varies according to the intelligent special function module For details regarding the buffer memory s number of points refer to the Intelligent Special Function Module Manual x3 Inputs outputs step relays link special relays link special registers remain at their default values which cannot be changed 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 Internal User Devices Internal user devices can be used for various user applications The number of usable points setting is designated in advance default value for internal user devices However this setting can be changed at the Device tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box Device setting screen Qn H Parameter PLC name PLC system PLC file PLC RA
289. ection for input The response time of the input module compatible with Q Series can be selected from 1 ms 5 ms module compatible with Q Series 10 ms 20 ms and 70 ms with this function Default 10 ms Input response time selection for high speed input module compatible with Q Series Input response time selection for Section 7 7 1 The response time of the high speed input module compatible with Q Series can be selected from Section 7 7 2 0 1 ms 0 2 ms 0 4 ms 0 6 ms and 1 ms with this function Default 0 2 ms The response time of the interrupt module compatible with Q Series can be selected from 0 1 ms interrupt module compatible with Q Section 7 7 3 ey p 0 2 ms 0 4 ms 0 6 ms and 1 ms with this function Default 0 2 ms Switch setting of intelligent function Use this function for various settings of the intelligent function module Refer to each intelligent Section 7 8 module compatible with Q Series function module for the details of the setting aaa is This function monitors the status of programs and devices on the CPU module by operating from Monitoring function Section 7 9 Set monitor conditions his function monitors using a fine timing of the CPU module Section 7 9 1 Monitor test local Devices his function monitors and or tests the local devices of the designated program using the GX Developer Section 7 9 2 Turn ON OFF external I O his function forcibly turns the external I O of the CPU module on or off from t
290. ective serial communication module Serial communication module rset the channel b15 to use by control vy data 63 0 2 Channel _ ee 4 Channel ae ee EES Ennn 2 b A completion device should be designated for the instruction dedicated for intelligent function modules The designated completion device turns ON for one scan when the execution of the instruction dedicated for intelligent function modules is completed When the completion device turns ON another instruction dedicated for intelligent function modules can be executed to the same intelligent function module To use two or more instructions dedicated for intelligent function modules to one intelligent function module be sure to execute the next instruction dedicated for intelligent function modules after the completion device turns ON 2 Note a b If the instruction dedicated for intelligent function modules are executed and Process CPU is switched from RUN to STOP before the completion device turns ON the completion device turns ON one scan later when Process CPU is switched to RUN next time The instruction dedicated for intelligent function modules can be executed to the intelligent function modules of the main base unit and extension base unit The instruction dedicated for intelligent function modules cannot be executed to the intelligent function module installed to th
291. ed 1 At the Operation section select one of the following e Start trace The trace is started Starts to count the trace count e Stop trace The trace is interrupted The total trace count and trace count after trigger are cleared When restarting trace select Start trace again e Execute trigger Starts to count the trace count after trigger The trace is complete when the trace count reaches the specified trace count after trigger e Regist trace Registers trace data when a program is executed 2 Inthe Trace data Conditions Results storing dest section specify a file name of a file in which to store trace data and trace conditions Trace results are also stored in a selected file with a specified file name 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 Atthe Trace Condition section select one of the following e Execute by overwriting the conditions on PLC side Overwrites trace condition to the existing trace file e Execute by following conditions written on PLC side Executes the program with the conditions in the trace file specified in Trace Data Condition Results storing dest e Read the trace results form the Process CPU and display the data 1 Read from PLC reads the trace result from the Process CPU 2 The read trace results appears in Trace results display Sampling trace is executed only once When re executing execute the TRACE instruction and reset the sampling trace 3 Precautions a SRAM card is re
292. ed at the Device tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box 10 21 10 21 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q Timer Processing and accurac a When an OUT T instruction is executed the following is processed timer coil ON OFF current value update and contact ON OFF processing Timer current value update and contact ON OFF processing are not performed at END processing Ladder example Fo __a Processing at execution of OUT TO instruction END OUT TO END Sequence l program gt Processing content Coil ON OFF Current value update Contact ON OFF b When the OUT T instruction is executed the current value is added to the scan time measured at the END instruction If the timer coil is OFF when the OUT Ti instruction is executed the current value is not updated Ladder example Xo H K8 a we Current value update timing OUT TO OUT TO OUT TO OUT TO OUT TO OUT TO END END END END END END processing processing processing processing processing processing Measured value D N er ee a a at END instruction 2 3 2 3 2 3 Program l 1 l 1 1 1 oe at E ae oe O XO external input orf eo fy i TE VEE ON 1 i kenst A i ATN QCPU sxo OFF Loa Lo og Lo o ON _ _ ER el TO coil ORF ti pd Sy a ag a aG m e a TO contact OFF S eee iome 1 2 1 2 38 11211 2 3 1 2 4 2 3 __ measurement F N I T I A I I l i TO current value 0 2
293. ed by the self diagnosis function occurs b Remote RESET can reset the Process CPU remotely when an error occurs for which the Process CPU cannot be operated directly Remote RESET can be executed only in STOP status When the Process CPU is in RUN status use Remote STOP to arrange the STOP status 2 Remote RESET Method The remote RESET can only be performed from GX Developer or by operating serial communication module To perform the remote RESET follow the following steps a Atthe PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box check the Allow check box at the Remote reset section and then write parameters to the Process CPU Qn H Parameter PLC name PLC system puc file Puc RAS Device Program Boot file SFC o assignment Timer limit setting Low 100 ms 1ms 1000ms Common pointer P After 0 4095 speed High 10 0 0 1 ms 101 speed me malons Number of empty slots f16 Points Allow the RUN PAUSE contacts Remote reset 5 System interrupt settings RUN X ealan Interrupt counter start No 0 768 PAUSE Xx lt 0 lt 1 FFF Fixed scan interval r Remote reset 128 100 0 ms 0 5ms 1000ms v Alioni F iow 129 40 0 ms 0 5ms 1000ms Output mode at STOP to RUN Previous state 130 20 0 ms 0 5ms 1000ms High speed C Recalculate output is 1 scan later 131 M00 ms 0 5ms 1000ms interrupt setting Floating poin
294. ed to maintain the output Y on even if the Process CPU is changed to STOP status in such areas as process control The output Y is turned off upon a stopping error To retain the output even upon a stopping error use I O allocation of PC parameters to set output retention 2 Method with Remote PAUSE There are two ways to use remote PAUSE a Method with remote PAUSE Contact The remote PUASE contact is set at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box of GX Developer The device can be set in the range of input XO to 1FFF 1 The PAUSE status contact SM204 is turned on when the END processing is executed for the scan with both remote PAUSE contact and PAUSE permission flag SM206 on 2 When the remote PAUSE contact is off or SM206 is turned off the PAUSE status is canceled and the sequence program calculation is performed again from step 0 Remote PAUSE contact SM206 ON ON when PAUSE condition met RUN PAUSE status PAUSE status Fig 7 6 PAUSE Time Chart with Remote PAUSE Contact 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q b Method with GX Developer Serial Communication Module etc The remote PAUSE operation can be performed from the GX Developer or by using serial communication module The GX Developer operation is performed by on line remote operation The serial communication module and Ethernet interface module are controlled by commands complyi
295. ed to perform clear by user program APP 41 APPENDICES ACPU Special Special Register after Conversion Conversion D1124 D1125 D1126 APP 42 Special Register for Modification MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Annunciator detection quantity Annunciator detection number Meaning Annunciator detection quantity Annunciator detection number Corresponding Details CPU When one of FO to 255 FO to 2047 for AuA and AnU is turned on by 1 is added to the contents of SD63 When or instruction is executed 1 is subtracted from the contents of SD63 Quantity which has been turned on by SET F is stored into SD63 in BIN code The value of SD63 is maximum 8 When one of FO to 255 FO to 2047 for AuA and AnU is turned on by SET F F number which has turned on is entered into SD64 to SD71 in due order in BIN code F number which has been turned off by RST F is erased from SD64 to SD71 and the contents of data registers succeeding the data register where the erased F number was stored are shifted to the preceding data registers e By executing LEDR instruction the contents of SD64 to SD71 are shifted upward by one When there are 8 annunciator detections the 9th one is not stored into SD64 to SD71 even if detected SET SET SET RST SET SET SET SETSET SET SET F50 F25 F99 F25 F15 F70 F65 F38 F1
296. ediately before This information will be overwritten when the intelligent function module access instruction is executed again e This flag is used by the user in a program as the completion bit SFC device clear OFF Clear device ON Preserves device Output during end step execution Operation mode for low speed OFF Asynchronous mode execution type ON Synchronous mode program S Status change When ON access to the intelligent function module is completed APP 5 APP 5 APPENDICES 3 System clocks counters Set by Special Relay List MELSEC Q Corresponding ACPU PIE Applicable CPU ee S SM400 Always ON ae e Normally is ON Every END M9036 processing ON i sei gis e T ane ergen ON OFF4 ON for 1 scan M402 only after RUN After RUN OFF Shs for 1 scan only Low speed execution type program ON for 1 scan only after RUN Low speed execution type program After RUN OFF for 1 scan only 1 scan ON 4 gt OFF 1 scan ON OF Pe e 0 01 second clock 0 05 sec 0 1sec 0 2 second clock O 1sec 0 5 3 ms a SM420 User timing clock No 0 User timing clock No 1 User timing clock SM423 User timing clock No 3 User timing clock User timing clock User timing clock User timing clock User timing clock User timing clock APP 6 0 005 sec 0 005 sec n n n lt lt lt iS iS iS 3 a BR
297. eeeeeeeeeeaeeaeseeseeeeaesaeeaeeeeeaees 7 24 LEMON FONCIONE aren nET AE EONA TETEA EETA ER REETA ve EAT ween SOM ive sweet neerett ive ery 7 25 7 9 1 Monitor condition SetiNg arearen eeri arenai AEAEE AEAEE Ere PEA EE AEREE KE EEEE EPLENE PENA ENN 7 25 7 9 2 Monitoring test for local device o oo eee eeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeesaeesaeesaeeeeesaeeseeeseeseeseeseeeeseeseeeteeeeaaes 7 29 7 9 3 Enforced ON OFF for external VO eceeccecceceeeeeeceeeeeeeseceeceeeeeesaecaeseeeeaesaesaeseeesaesaeseeseaseaeseeseseaeeaees 7 31 7 10 Writing in Program during Process CPU RUN c cecceceeseseeceeeeeeeseceeceeeeeeeaesaeseeeeeesaesaeseeeeaetaseeseaseaees 7 35 7 10 1 Writing data in the circuit mode during RUN ee eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeseeeseeseeeseaeseeeteeeeeatenes 7 35 7 10 2 Writing a batch of files during RUN sassen i AREARE EATR 7 38 7 11 Execution Time Measurement eecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseaeecaeseeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaseaeeeasenatenas 7 40 7 11 1 Program Monitor list ce eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeseeeeeeeseeesaeesaeesaeeseeeseeesaeeseeseeseeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeaes 7 40 7 11 2 Interrupt program monitor list 0 ee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeesaeesaeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeseeseeeseeeeeeeeaes 7 44 7 11 3 Scan time MEASUPEMENM nenret aaaea anenai a aan ea aene aaar Taaka aan aaeeei Saena 7 45 7 12 Sampling Trace Function ccccecccseecceeceeeeseceeceeeeeeeaecaeceeeeaeeaecaeseeeaesae
298. eeeeseeseeeeeeneeees 10 20 J K L Interrupt pointer 10 56 I O No designation device Un 0 10 59 Index register Z ceeeesceeseeseeseeeteeeteeeteees 10 39 Initial execution monitor time eee 4 16 Initial execution type program s es 4 15 Initial SCAN Men reenedanicnnnudaa a 4 16 Input response TIME eee eee eee eeteeeeeeeaeeeee 7 21 Intelligent function module device U lt 2 G 7 10 38 Internal relay M 10 10 Internal system device seee 10 31 Internal user device sseeeseeeeesesee 10 3 Interrupt MOUIE iosian i 5 11 Interrupt pointer I sseseseeseeseeresesersnenn 10 56 Interrupt program sssssseesssisersersrrerrsrrsrrses 4 6 J Network designation device 0 10 58 Jti B ci Link relay aeee 10 35 Jt SB Link special relay 06 10 35 J 1 SW ii Link special register 10 35 J ti W C3 Link register eee 10 35 C2 X c LINK input s es 10 35 J ii Y ci LINK output seses 10 35 K Decimal constants ce 10 61 L Latch relay eeceeccsscescceeceeseeeeeteeeteeetes 10 11 Latch functia 7 5 Latch relay L eeeecseeeseeeseeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 10 11 LED CiSplay eea a REAA 7 74 Link direct device 10 35 Link register W cceeeeeeesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 29 Link relay B soninn 10 17 List of Interrupt factors 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 57 App 55 Local COVICE ee ceecceecceeeceeeceeeeeeee
299. een a Startup program button Clicking the startup program button displays the following dialog box 1 gt Program name Sam PLE1 2 Startup mode Scan execution C Low speed execution Fixed scan execution 1 Program name Only the program that is set at the Program tab screen in PLC Parameter dialog box can be selected It is not allowed to enter a program name freely 2 Startup mode A stand by type program for Scan execution Low speed execution or Fixed scan execution can be set Startup mode defaults to the value that was set by choosing PLC Parameter lt Program gt ms or s can be selected as the unit 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q b Stop program button Clicking the stop program button displays the following dialog box Stop program x 1 Program name SAMPLE1 7 BTA Close 2 _______ Stop mode After stop output stop The output of the OUT instruction is turned off POFF instruction corresponding After stop output hold The output is maintained PSTOP instruction corresponding 1 Program name Only the program that is set at the lt Program gt tab in the PLC Parameter dialog box can be selected It is not allowed to enter a program name freely 2 Stop mode e Executing After stop output stop for the scan execution type turns off the output non execution processing at the next scan The program is put in the standby st
300. egister points are assigned by the registered monitor CPU Type Processing Time Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU b The table below shows the processing time required when monitoring conditions are specified Processing Time When steps are When devices in match are in match Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU CPU Type Local devices Local devices require additional processing time Add the processing time of local devices to the total processing time CPU Type Standard RAM Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 0 39 0 17 xn ms SRAM Card Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 0 39 0 95 xn ms Conditions Local devices 1k points n number of program files Execution of multiple programs Execution of multiple programs requires overhead time of each program being executed Add overhead time to the total processing time CPU Type Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Conditions n Number of program files Installation Removal of a memory card Installation removal of a memory card requires additional processing time If a memory card is installed or removed add 1 scan time to the total processing time ProcessingTime Time CPU Type Memory Card Memory Card Inserted Removed Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 11 3 11 PROCESS CPU PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 8 File register File register requires additional processing time Add the processing time of file registers to the total processing time CPU Type Standard RAM Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU SRAM Card Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 0 40 0 1
301. elapsed e Starts from OFF when the PLC power is turned ON or the CPU module is reset x 1 minute clock indicates the name of the special relay M9034 of the ACPU ie e CPU module is reset APP 11 APP 11 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Name Meaning Details Relay Conversion Modification M9036 SM1036 Always ON Used as dummy contacts of initialization and application OFF instruction in sequence program ON e SM1038 and SM1037 are turned on and off without M9037 SM1037 Always OFF OFF regard to position of key switch on CPU front SM1038 and SM1039 are under the same condition as RUN ON for 1 scan ON status except when the key switch is at STOP position M9038 SM1038 only after RUN Sree scan and turned off and on Switched off if the key switch is in STOP position SM1038 is on for one scan only and RUN flag After On SM1039 is off for one scan only if the key switch is not in M9039 SM1039 RUN OFF for 1 OFF scan only PAUSE enable OFF PAUSE disabled e When remote pause contact has turned on and SM204 is USE OFF PAUSE not in effect on PAUSE mode is set and SM206 is turned on M9041 SM1041 SM204 TE PAUSE in effect M9042 SM1042 SM203 STOP status OFF STOP not in effect Switched on when the RUN key switch is in STOP contact ON STOP in effect position 1 scan STOP position
302. elays whose applications are fixed in the PLC For this reason they cannot be used by sequence programs in the same way as the normal internal relays However they can be turned ON or OFF as needed in order to control the CPU module and remote I O modules The headings in the table that follows have the following meanings e Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user and if it is set by the system when setting is performed lt Set by gt S Set by system U Set by user in sequence program or test operation at a GX Developer S U Set by both system and user lt When set gt indicated only if setting is done by system Each END Set during each END processing Initial Set only during initial processing when power supply is turned ON or when going from STOP to RUN Status change Set only when there is a change in status Error Set when error is generated Instruction execution Set when instruction is executed Request Set only when there is a user request through SM etc e Indicates special relay M9 _ _ _ corresponding to the ACPU Change and notation when there has been a change in contents Items indicated as New have been newly added for Process CPU e Indicates the corresponding CPU type name Rem Can be applied to Process CPU and MELSECNET H remote I O modules Can be applied to Process CPU Remote Can be applied to the MELSECNET H remote I O modules Set by When set Corresp
303. electing the response time of the high speed input module Select Changing the response time of the high speed input module means to amend the input response speed for high speed input modules QX40 S1 that support the Q Series to 0 1 ms 0 2 ms 0 4 ms 0 6 ms and 1 ms Input from external devices is accepted at the input response speed set for the high speed input module The default setting for the input response time is 0 2 ms ON External input er ON High speed OFF 1 input module Input response time Setting the Input Response Time Input response time is set at the I O assigment tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box Select Hi input among the slot types for which the input response time is to be set Hi input Select Detailed setting Select I O response time Intelligent functional module detailed setting HAW error time PLC 1 0 resppnse Control PLC operation time lia Error time Hi input 16points If the start X and Y are not input the PLC assigns them automatically It is not possible to check correctly when there is a slot of the unsetting on the way m Standard setting Base model name 13412 12 14 13 13 r Base mode Auto atalalafalalafalalalapatalafa Extention cable Points Power model 15 14 14
304. en the OUT T instruction is executed See Section 4 3 2 for details on the low speed scan time g If two timers are used the ON OFF ladders should be created as shown below TO K10 T1 1 second measurement following TO ON T1 K10 TO 1 second measurement when T1 ON TO lt MO ON OFF repeated every 1 second 10 23 10 23 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 11 Counters C Counters are up timing types with the contact being switched ON when the count value equals the set value count out condition There are two counter types counters which count the number of input condition start ups leading edges in sequence programs and counters which count the number of interrupt factor occurrences 1 Definition A counter is a device which counts the number of input condition leading edges in sequence programs 2 Count processing a When and OUT C instruction is executed the following counter processing occurs coil ON OFF current value update count value 1 and contact ON OFF Counter current value update and contact ON OFF processing are not performed at END processing Ladder example XO K10 clio Processing at OUT CO Instruction X0 OFF to ON END OUT CO END Sequence _ program Processing content Coil ON OFF Current value update Contact ON OFF b The current value update count value 1 is performed at the leading edge OFF to ON of the OUT C amp 1 instruction The current v
305. en to and read from by special relays SM210 to SM213 and special registers SD210 to SD213 See Appendix 1 for details on special relay See Appendix 2 for details on special registers 2 The figure below shows the clock data stored in D10 to D16 D10 2002 4 digits in AD D11 1 Month D12 15 Date D13 11 Hour See Section 7 5 1 D14 35 Minute D15 24 Second D16 2 Day of the week 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 Precautions a The clock data is not set prior to shipment The clock data is used in Process CPU system and intelligent function module for failure history and other functions Be sure to set the accurate time when operating the Process CPU for the first time b Even when a part of the time data correcting all data must be written to the clock element again c The data to be written to the clock element is checked in the range described in 1 b of Section 7 5 For this reason if improbable clock data in the range described in 1 b of Section 7 5 is written to the clock element correct clock operation is unavailable Example ee Writing to clock element CPU module operation status When DATEWAR instruction is executed OPERATION ERROR Error code 4100 February 30 Executed When SM210 is on SM211 is on 32 of month 13 Not executed Error is not detected 4 Accuracy of Clock Data The accuracy of the clock function differs with the ambient temperature as shown below
306. er dialog box This will make it possible to shorten the duration of overhead time required for execution of an interrupt program OVERHEAD TIME us PU TYPE ere High speed execution is not selected High speed execution is selected Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU REMARK 1 For details on the IMASK and El instructions refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions To execute interrupt programs l0 through 131 and 148 through 1255 use an El instruction to enter the interrupt programs into an interrupt enabled status x2 See Section 10 10 for details on the priority ranking of interrupt programs 3 For assurance of station unit blocks in cyclic data see the MELECNET H Network System Reference Manual 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 5 Program creation restrictions a A device which is switched ON by a PLS instruction in an interrupt program will remain ON until that interrupt program is executed again X0 XO PLS PLS MO END 0 IO JIRET END 0 END 0 IO IRET END 0 ON oan b iON Y A Switched OFF by PLS M0 instruction Switched ON by PLS M0 instruction at XO leading edge OFF to ON b ADI status interruption prohibited is established during execution of an interrupt program Do not execute El DI instructions in the interrupt program c Timers cannot be used in interrupt programs As timers are used at OUT T _ instruction
307. er plus 1 of the modules loaded are stored as BIN values END N f ae of modules dicates the number of modules installed on MELSECNET 10 H O No e MELSECNET 10 H I O number of first module installed N k e MELSECNET 10 H network number of first module installed Group j e MELSECNET 10 H group number of first module installed number eal MELSECNET 10 H station number of first module installed In the case of standby stations the module number of the standby station is stored 1 to 4 D255 MELSECNE SD259 T 10 H information S Initial New O n n n 0 W wn n n n g g g g g g g g N N N N N N N ho Q oa ol a oa a ENS A e foe N o gt A A amp Information from 2nd module fo e Configuration is identical to that for the 2nd module NIN OO NO N DID als Information from 3rd module fo Configuration is identical to that for the 3rd module SD269 Information from 4th module e Configuration is identical to that for the 4th module APP 26 APP 26 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding r Set b Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation Nn a ACPU pee ing be TT When Xn0 of the installed CC Link goes ON the bit corresponding to the station switches ON When either Xn1 or XnF of the installed CC Link switch OFF the bit corresponding to the station switches ON Switches ON when the CPU cannot communicate w
308. errupt program execution e During execution of a fixed scan execution type program c The maximum counting speed of the interrupt timer is determined by the longest processing time of the items shown below e Instruction with the longest processing time among the instructions used in the program e Interrupt program processing time e The processing time of a fixed scan execution type program d The use of too many interrupt counters will increase the sequence program processing time and may cause a WDT ERROR If this occurs reduce the number of interrupt counters or the counting speed for the input pulse signal e The interrupt counter s count value can be reset by using the RST Cc instruction in the sequence program prior to the FEND instruction f The interrupt counter s count value can be read out by using the sequence program MOV instruction 10 27 10 27 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 12 Data registers D 1 Definition a Data registers are memory devices which store numeric data 32768 to 32767 or 0000H to FFFFH b Data registers which consist of 16 bits per point read and write data in 16 bit units b15 i c Ifthe data registers are used for 32 bit instructions the data will be stored in registers Dn and Dn 1 The lower 16 bits of data are stored at the data register No Dn designated in the sequence program and the higher 16 bits of data are stored in the designated register No 1
309. ers 128 to 131 can PENS nterrupt pointer oints is fixed mee L1 be set with parameters 0 5 to 1000ms 0 5 ms unit P Default 128 100ms 129 40ms 130 20ms_ 131 10ms Function registerFD Device having a direct access to link device MELSECNET 10 H use only Specified form JOO XOO JOO YOO JOO wWoo JOO BOO JOO Swog JOO sBoo i Device having a direct access to the buffer memory of the intelligent Intelligent function module device ie function module Specified form JOO GOO LO to 8191 default Latch range can be set for B F V T ST C D and W Set parameter values Number of device points Link direct device Latch power interrupt hold on range RUN and PAUSE contacts can be set from among X0 to 1FFF to specify Remote RUN PAUSE contact respectively Year month day hour minute second day of the week leap year automatic distinction Clock function Accuracy 3 18 to 5 25s TYP 2 12s d at 0 C Accuracy 3 93 to 5 25s TYP 1 90s d at 25 C Accuracy 14 69 to 3 53s TYP 3 67s d at 55 C Allowable momentary power failure period Varies according to the type of power supply module 5VDC internal current consumption 0 64A Weight 0 20kg 98mm 3 86inch External dimensions 27 4mm 1 08inch Lop 89 3mm 3 52inch 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS Sequence programs and SFC programs can
310. es 1 Timer present value T 7 Link special register SW 2 Retentive timer present value ST 8 File register RO to R32767 3 Counter present value C 9 Intelligent function module device 4 Data register D ULR GT3 5 Special register SD 10 Link direct device J 3 WW 3 6 Link register W JO SWL 2 Procedure for using device initial values a Designate the device initial value range settings in the device mode in the Device initial value setting screen b Designate the device initial value data settings in the device mode screen Device initialization range setting screen Device mode screen Device Label D0 Display iSi integer z bec z Ro ns2767 4 J roint Start End Comment a Ti Device name 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7_ character string F3 2 RO a o 0 a o o 0 0 s Si 3 RB 0 0 0 o o 0l 0 0 a R16 0 o 0 o o 0 0 o 5 R24 o o 0 o o o 0 0 R32 o o 0 o o o 0 0 R40 o o 0 0 o o 0 o 2 R48 o o 0 o o o 0 0 8 R56 a of of o a oof o 2 R64 o al ol o a a ol o 10 R72 0 0 0 oO 0 0 o 0 ai R80 o 0 0 0 o 0 0 o 12 R88 o o 0 o o 0 0 13 R96 0 o 0 0 0 o 0 0 14 R104 a o ol o a al o o 15 R112 o o 0 o o o 0 0 16 ap R120 0 o 0 o o o 0 0 R128 o 0 0 o 0 o 0 o R136 0 0 0 0 a Q 0 o Raa oA o o oA o o o o The a
311. es for which the input response time is to be set Select Interrupt Select Detailed settings Select Input response time Q Paramete x Intelligent functional module detailed setting me PLC system PLC fie PLCRAS Device Proaram Bootfile SFC 1 0 assignment Eror ime HW ser aes Model name output time PLC Meg wa I ee operation tije i m 170 Assignment mode Slot Type Model name Points Start Switch setti PLC be 0 PLC PLC X x deadar a Interrupt X 1 10 0 Interrupt v 16points 2 e1 X X Detailed setting zl 3 42 2 pal z 4 13 3 z 5 J44 Ba z 6 5 5 7 v Z z7 J6C 6 z Re If the start X and Y are not input the PLC assigns them automatically It is not possible to check correctly when there is a slot of the unsetting on the way Standard setting Fl Base model name Power modelname Extention cable Points p Base mode Auto C Detail a _Stxation Jsettings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Cancel 12 fixation Koras settings should be set as same when Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Read PLC data using multiple PLC Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple PLC setting Default Check End Cancel 3 Precautions a The system will be adversely affected by noise etc when the input response time is set to
312. eseesaeseeseaeeaees 19 3 19 2 2 Creating NEW SYSLCIMS cccecceccesesseeeeceeeeseeseceeceeeeaeeaecaessaeeaecaecaeeseeeaesaecaesaseaecaeseeseaseaesaeseeseaeeaes 19 4 19 2 3 Using existing preset multiple PLC settings and I O allocations c cecceesseseeeteeseeeteeeseeeees 19 7 APPENDICES App 1 to App 46 APPENDIX 1 Special Relay List isci cn5i 0 tel dete eee ee adeeb App 1 APPENDIX 2 Special Register Listini nania aaa iaaa aaa aa aariaa aiaia App 17 APPENDIX 3 List of Interrupt Pointer Nos and Interrupt Factors ceececeseeteeeeeeeeeeteteeeteeeeeteeetaeeneeneaes App 45 INDEX Index 1 to Index 3 Related mana nero eden d alee eels Process CPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection CONTENTS 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Features 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM 2 1 System Configuration 2 2 Precaution on System Configuration 2 3 Comfirming Serial Number and Function Version 3 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE 4 1 Performance Specification 4 2 Part Names and Settings 4 3 Switch Operation After Writing in Program 4 4 Latch Clear Operation 4 5 Executing automatic Write to standard ROM 4 6 Online module change 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5 1 Specification 5 1 1 Power supply module specifications 5 1 2 Selecting the power supply module 5 1 3 Precaution when connecting the uninterruptive power supply 5 2 Names of Parts and Settings 6 BASE
313. essed as hexadecimal When using 16 point I O modules I O numbers are consecutively assigned to the slots having 0 to F 16 points as follows The module mounted in the base unit assigns the following e For the input module X is assigned at the beginning of the I O number e For the output module Y is assigned at the beginning of the I O number For the case of input module For the case of output module Y 0 4 Power CPU 01410 supply module S module x20 X 0 O FIX 0 1 FIX 0 2 Fl Y 0 3 HY 0 4 H 16 input 16 input 16 input 16 output 16 output points points points points points 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 5 5 Concept of I O Number Assignment 5 5 1 I O numbers of main base unit and extension base unit Process CPU assigns I O numbers at power on or reset according to the following items As a result Process CPU can be controlled without performing I O assignment using GX Developer To assign I O numbers follow the items below 1 Number of slots of base units The numbers of slots of the main and extension base units are set according to the Base mode setting For Base mode see Section 5 3 a In Auto mode the number of slots is determined as the available number of modules mounted to each base unit
314. etailed condition monitor data is collected when the execution status of the instruction immediately before execution becomes the specified status If Step No 2 lt ON gt is specified in the following ladder monitor data is collected when OUT Y10 turns ON XO i 740 x OLD X0 1 OUT Y10 0 X1 2 Yit 2LD X1 3 OUT Y11 b When only Device is specified Word Device or Bit Device can be specified 1 When Word Device is selected The monitor data is sampled is when the current value of the specified word device becomes the specified value Type a current value in decimal digits or hexadecimal digits 2 When Bit Device is specified The monitor data is sampled is when the execution status of the specified bit device becomes the specified value Either the leading edge or the fall can be specified for execution condition c When Step No and Device is selected The monitor data is sampled when the status previous to execution of the specified status or the status current value of the specified bit device word device is specified 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q When Step No 100 lt P gt Word Device D1 K5 is specified as the detailed condition in the following circuit a monitor execution condition is established at the leading edge of the 100th step where D1 5 XO MO 100th step Y20 INC D1 The monitor interval of GX Developer depends on the processing speed of GX Developer
315. f a local or remote I O ON Abnormal station Local station SM1237 remote I O SM1238 station error Local station remote I O OFF Normal Depends on the error condition of the forward and reverse station forward or JON Abnormal loop lines of a local or a remote I O station reverse loop error OFF Online SM1240 ON Offline station to Depends on whether the local station is online or offline or stationtest or self is in station to station test or self loopback test mode loopback test SM1241 Forward loopiline br Normal Depends on the error condition of the forward loop line error ON Abnormal M9242 SM1242 Reverse loop ine OFE Normal Depends on the error condition of the reverse loop line error ON Abnormal OFF Loopback not being y M9243 SM1243 ENA FA conducted A PA whether or not loopback is occurring at the P ON Loopback implementation i M9246 SM1246 Data not received OFF Reception Depends on whether or not data has been received from ON No reception the master station r OFF Reception Depends on whether or not a tier three station has eerie Em Data not received ON No reception received data from its master station in a three tier system Parameters not OFF Reception Depends on whether or not link parameters have been M9250 SM1250 i received ON No reception received from the master station M9251 SM1251 Link relay OFF Normal Depands on the data link condition at the local station ON Abnormal
316. file registers are to be used b When selecting Use the same file name as the program MELSEC Q 1 This setting should be selected when the file registers having the same file name as the sequence program are to be used 2 Ifthe program is changed the file registers are automatically changed to conform to the new program name There are also cases where it is convenient to use the file registers as local devices which can only be used with the program currently being executed 3 The number of file register to use can be set by writing to PLC online 2S BXAMPIGs 2225S SaaS aS SAE oe SAS ESS eS NSE ia RAS EYEE IRE tie Sain Sea Ee Mine SSI ASS SMES ae When file registers A to C having the same name as the programs A to C are to be used operation is as shown below At program A execution File register A is accessed At program B execution File register B is accessed At program C execution File register C is accessed Program A execution Synchronized G File register A y Program B execution lt Sunchronized Ro File register B I i Program C execution Synchronized no File register C 10 46 10 46 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q POINT File registers dedicated to each program may not be designated with some instructions Refer to the allowable device in the programming manual of each instruction for details c When selecting Use
317. forced ON OFF are shown below 1 Input X and output Y for modules mounted on the base unit 2 1O X Y of Process CPU or I O LX LY of MELSECNET H modules to be refreshed Process CPU 3 I O X Y of Process CPU or I O RX RY of CC Link to be refreshed Process CPU When enforced ON OFF registration is performed for devices outside the above refresh ranges ex empty slots only the Process CPU device memory is set at ON OFF and this is not output externally d Canceling ON OFF registration information 1 ON OFF registration information can be canceled from GX Developer Devices for which enforced ON OFF has been performed will assume the following statuses when ON OFF registered information has been cancelled Enforced ON OEF device ON OFF performed with ON OFF not performed sequence programs with sequence programs Input from modules mounted on Assumes the ON OFF status received from the the base unit module Input of Process CPUs to be refreshed from LX of NET H Input MELSECNET H module MEESE Input of Process CPUs to be Assumes the refreshed ON OFF status from refreshed from RX of CC Link CC Link ee E other than above ee E of the refresh range Assumes the refreshed ON OFF status from Maintains the enforced ON OFF status Outputs the results of the sequence program OFF is output operations Output of Process CPUs to be Outputs the results of the refreshed from LX of sequence program OFF is out
318. formance model QCPUs are not mounted correctly and when programs are written into other PLCs with the GX Developer In the program shown below the annunciator F1 is set to ON when the Process CPU and High Performance model QCPU writing programs is a PLC other than the PLC No 1 SD395 1 The USER LED on the front of the Process CPU and High Performance model QCPU is illuminated when the annunciator F1 is set to ON The number of the annunciator that has been set at ON will also be stored in a special register SD62 fo K1 s0395 _ A eT F1 Set a PLC number used for comparison For the own number confirmation method for the Motion CPU and PC CPU module refer to the manual of the Motion CPU and PC CPU module 14 6 14 6 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 14 2 2 Precautions when using Q Series I O modules and intelligent function modules 1 Compatible I O modules All I O modules QXO QYE are compatible with to multiple PLC system They can be used by setting any of PLC No 1 to No 4 as a control PLC 2 Compatible intelligent function modules a The intelligent function modules compatible with the multiple PLC system are those of function version B or later They can be used by setting any of PLC No 1 to No 4 as a control PLC b Q Series high speed count modules QD62 QD62D QD62E are compatible with by multiple PLC system are those of function version A or later They can be used by setting
319. g ees ed annie E te tes bedey vend ives een ieisly 4 6 4 2 Progam Execute Type ies ranri a A R A R 4 10 4 2 1 Initial EXECUTION type progi a ooer ao nonan EEEE EE EAA EEO EEA 4 15 4 2 2 Scan execution type program cececcecesseeeeceeceeeeseeseceeeeaeeaecaeeaeeeaecaecaessaseaesaesaeseaseaeeeeeaeeaeseeseeseateaes 4 17 4 2 3 Low speed execution type program eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeseatenas 4 19 4 2 4 Stand by type program ccccecceceeseeseeeeceeeeseseeceeceeeeaeeaecaeceeseaesaesaeceeeeaesaesaeseeeaesaesaeseeseaesaeseseeteateaes 4 25 4 2 5 Fixed scan execution type PLOQKAM eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeenaeeeaeeeeeeeateeas 4 31 43 Operation Processing ea aa aa aa aves ives a a T aara aE tess ee aa Ta led aTa EAE 4 34 Foma PYOCSSSING naa a a a a a 4 34 4 3 2 I O refresh I O module refresh ProC SSiNG cceccecceseeeeeeeeeeeeaecaeceeeeeesaesaeseseaesaesaeseeeeaeeaesaeenteats 4 34 4 3 3 Automatic refresh of the intelligent function module 0 0 eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeateeateeas 4 35 43 4 END processing iis iie0s ste Ahad ale acca ii alae aise iia EEE AE EENE ENE TETA 4 35 4 4 RUN STOP PAUSE Operation Processing cc ccscccceeceeseeeeceeceeeeaeeaeceeeeeesaeeeseaeeaesaeeeseaesansaeseeeeaeeaes 4 36 4 5 Operation Processing during Momentary Power Falilure ce cesccccceececeeeeeeeseeeeeee
320. g time of the program being executed b The scan time number of times executed and processing time by item can be displayed for each program 2 Using the Program Monitor List a Choose Online Monitor Program monitor list Program Monitor List dialog box appears on screen b The following shows an example of executing program monitor list b Program monitor list a gt Total scan time Scan execution part detailed scan time IEEE END operation tne Low speed programines a c gt Each program execution status Progam Erecue Scan tinefna Execute cout T MAINT Scan 0 000 MAIN4 Low speed 0 000 pan Sree a Startup program Stop program Close 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q a Total Scan Time The monitor time set in WDT the watch dog timer of PLC RAS tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box and total scan time for each program type are displayed 1 Monitor Time The monitoring time for the scan execution type program initialization program and low speed execution type program are displayed If the scan time exceeds this time the Process CPU displays the watch dog timer error 2 Sum of Scan Time The total time in each item stated in Scan Time Details for Scan Execution are displayed Constant indicates the constant scan waiting time when the setting is made for constant scan b Scan Time Details for Scan Execution The details of t
321. ge number with two or more extension base units Process CPU file management The use of different file and extension names permits multiple files to be stored in the Process CPU Because the Process CPU can also process a given program as one file programs created can be managed individually according to their designer process or function by using different program file names Moreover program execution is allowed for multiple programs stored in the Process CPU See Chapter 4 for details on Process CPU program execution details File written from GX Developer The Process CPU stores files written from GX Developer in the memory program memory standard ROM memory card 6 PROCESS CPU FILES MELSEC Q 4 File details File name file size and writing date which are set when created with GX Developer are added to every file written into Process CPU When monitoring the files by GX Developer the files are displayed as shown below Connecting interface com lt gt pe module PLC Connection Network Mo ff Station No Host PLC type JQ12PH Emory Param Prog Cancel all selections Ds ics daia MAIN fame Close a ia Program MAIN 02 03 29 08 54 16 21 MAINT 02 03 31 10 59 40 21 Related functions MAIN2 02 03 31 10 59 44 21 MAINS 02 03 31 10 59 46 21 Transfer setup Eg Parameter PLC Network Remote password 02 03 29 0E Heep ora EEH Intelligent module 02 0
322. gent function module with one instruction This saves the number of steps in the entire program The processing speed is the total of the instruction execution time and the access time to from the intelligent function modules When reading and processing the data of the intelligent function module frequently in the program use the FROM instruction to read the data at one point in the program and store and process it in a data register instead of using the intelligent function module device every time Otherwise the intelligent function module device accesses the intelligent function module every time the instruction is executed resulting in longer scan time for the program For the intelligent function module device see Section 10 5 8 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE MELSEC Q 8 1 5 Communication using the instructions dedicated for intelligent function modules 1 Description of the instructions dedicated for intelligent function mod a QCPU ules The instructions dedicated for intelligent function modules are the instructions that facilitate programming using the functions of the intelligent function modules For example the OUTPUT instruction which is the instruction dedicated for serial communication modules allows data transmission in user specified message format with no handshaking protocol In this case the communication is possible without considering the buffer memory address of the obj
323. gnated characters Character strings extend from the designated character to the NUL code 004 You can use up to 32 characters for a character string in an instruction such as MOV 10 62 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 13 Convenient Uses for Devices When executing multiple programs in the Process CPU local devices among the internal user devices can be designated to execute each of the programs in an independent manner Moreover the device initial settings allow the data setting for devices and intelligent function modules without using a program 10 13 1 Global devices and local devices A number of programs can be stored and executed in the Process CPU Process CPU devices are classified into global devices shared by all the programs being executed and local devices used independently by each of the programs 1 Global devices a Global devices can be shared by all the programs being executed in the Process CPU Global device data are stored in the Process CPU s device memory and can be used by all programs Process CPU Program A Device memory Mo Internal relay 4 y12 MO ON OFF l Mo ON OFF data Program B Mo Y11 l MO ON OFF data b When executing multiple programs the shared range for all programs and the independent range for each program must be designated in advance Example Internal relay Mo Shared by all pro
324. gnated constant scan time x1 The constant scan function executes the scan type program repeatedly at regular intervals For details on of the constant scan see Section 7 2 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 5 Scan time a The scan time is a total of following the execution time of the scan execution type program and END processing If multiple scan execution type programs are used the scan time is the total time required to execute all the programs When an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program is executed the value added to the interrupt program fixed scan execution type program s execution time will become the scan time b The scan time current value minimum value and maximum value are measured at the Process CPU and the results are stored in special registers SD520 SD521 and SD524 to SD527 1 Therefore the initial scan time can be checked by monitoring the SD520 D521 and SD524 to SD527 special registers Current value D520 SD521 Minimum value SD524 SD525 Maximum value SD526 SD527 gt Stores less than 1 ms initial scan time unit ws gt Stores the initial scan time in 1 ms units If the SD520 value is 3 and the SD521 value is 400 the initial scan time is 3 4 ms 1 The accuracy of the scan time stored at the special registers is 0 1 ms The scan time count will continue even if a watch dog timer reset instructio
325. gram ___ Annunciator ON program Display reset input LEDR H SD62 and SD64 annuciators OFF program To switch OFF all anunciators which are ON Fault detection program ___ Annunciator ON program _ Display reset input BKRSTP FO K10H FO to F9 OFF program For details on the LEDR and BKRST instruction refer to the QOPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions b Processing at anunciator OFF 1 Special register SD62 to SD79 data operation at execution of LEDR instruction a Anunciator No stored at SD64 is deleted and anunciator Nos stored at subsequent registers SD65 to SD79 are moved up to fill the empty space b The anunciator No stored at SD64 is stored at SD62 c 1 is subtracted from the SD63 value d Ifthe SD63 value is 0 SM62 is switched OFF SETF50 SETF25 SETF2047 LEDR spe2 o 50 50 50 gt 25 spe3 ol gt 1 i ae _ 2 sp64 ol gt l 50 50 50 ii 25 sD65 0 25 25 OA 2047 sp e6 o 0 o 2047 A 0 sD67 o 0 0 soz o of of of oO 10 14 10 14 10 DEVICES 2 3 MELSEC Q Special register SD62 to SD79 data operation when an anunciator is switched OFF by the RST F 2 instruction a The anunciator No which was switched OFF is deleted and all subsequent anunciator Nos are moved up to fill the empty space b If the anunciator No stored at SD64 was switched OF
326. grams Used in program A The range of use must be designated for each program Used in program B Used in program C NSE 10 63 10 63 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 2 Local devices a Local devices are used independently by the programs The use of local devices permits programming of multiple independent execution programs without regard to other programs Local devices data can be stored in the standard RAM and the memory card Process CPU If local devices are designated as M7000 or later they can be used independently in each program executing M7000 or later Program A Memory card M7000 For program A ____ R v12 Internal relay M M7000 ON OFF M7000 ON OFF data H PF Program B 7 M7000 Internal relay yay M7000 ON OFF l M7000 ON OFF data Ese een nota Ml b Five device types can be used as local devices internal relays M edge relays V timers T ST counters C and data registers D c Programs used as local devices exchange the local device file data stored in the memory card with the data in the device memory of Process CPU Therefore the scan time is extended by this data exchange time Program A Program B Program C Sequence program Saved Local device Saved Restored Local device Restored Restored Local device For For For program A program A program A F
327. grams 10 40 10 40 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 6 2 Switching between scan low speed execution type programs and interrupt fixed scan execution type programs The PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box provides the option to save protect or restore index register data Z0 to Z15 when switching between a scan execution type program and a low speed execution type program or between an interrupt program and a fixed scan execution type program When not writing date to index registers check by using an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program the High speed execution check box in the Interrupt program Fixed scan program setting section at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box This will switch between programs quickly 1 When the High speed execution check box is OFF a When the scan low speed execution type program is switched to the interrupt fixed scan execution type program the scan low speed execution type program s index register value is first saved and is then transferred to the interrupt fixed scan execution type program b When the interrupt fixed scan execution type program is switched to the scan low speed execution type program the saved index register value is reset i Switch Scan low speed a iInterrupt program Reset Scan low speed Executed program execution type Fixed scan execution gt execution type i program itype
328. h FUNCIONS wicsctccszescresectessneacetasetisrcagceatetuscascecugnea NR PARARE RAA TEARRE ENAA EE TAERA RAAE AREE ENT SPERARE TAA 7 5 7 4 Setting the Output Y Status when Changing from to STOP Status to from RUN Status 7 7 5 GIOCK FUNCHON Ss Avie eek ean Sa eh ae ee an Sis E a Ze 7 9 7 6 Remote Operatii sin aayan aaa Siva aada whet aa ANATA aAa Ia TAA AAA een namie ee 7 12 7 6 4 Remote RUN STOP aeiia a a inl aa ees ia se Les 7 12 7 6 2 Remote PAUSE ccccccccesccecceceeseeeeeeeeeeaecaecaeseaesaecaeceeseaesaecaeseaeeaesaeceeseaeeaesaeseeseaeeaesaeseseaesaeseeseaeeates 7 15 72813 ROMO RESET tiie ag Mie a Moe ahi ete aE i eh a is te a he elie At hace abies eh oe 7 17 FOA Remoten ClO AN a Peaks tuece ka vee och E cae edited hve pect eed cada tus NRE ayes eed ive reest eared eis 7 19 7 6 5 Relationship of the remote operation and Process CPU RUN STOP Switch ccccseeseeeeees 7 20 7 7 Selecting the Response Speed of the Q Series Module I O Response Time 7 21 7 7 1 Selecting the response time of the input module e ee eecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeaetaeseeseateaeeeeeeeeees 7 21 7 7 2 Selecting the response time of the high speed input MOCUIE ceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeaees 7 22 7 7 3 Selecting the response time of the interrupt MOUIE ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaetaeeeeeeaeeaees 7 23 7 8 Setting the Switches of the Intelligent Function Module ccceceeeeeeeeecee
329. h PID loop as follows B15 B1 0 Limit set ee SD774 1 Limit not set Loop16 to Loop2 SD775 Loop32 to Loop18 APP 34 S During New execution O APP 34 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU p 9 Stores the mask patterns masked by the IMASK instruction as follows B15 Bi BO SD781 163 149 148 Mask pattern of IMASK Mask pattern SD782 179 165 164 instruction S During execution APP 35 APP 35 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 7 A to Q QnA conversion correspondences ACPU special registers D9000 to D9255 correspond to the special registers SD1000 to SD1255 after A series to the Q QnA series conversion These special registers are all set by the system and users cannot use them to set program data Users who need to set data with these registers should edit the special registers for the Q QnA However before conversion users could set data at special registers D9200 to D9255 only and after conversion users can also set data at registers 1200 to 1255 For more detailed information concerning the contents of the ACPU special registers see the individual CPU User s Manual and the MELSECNET and MELSECNET B data link system reference manual Supplemental explanation on Special Register for Modification
330. h Scan Collects trace data for every scan END processing b Interval Collects trace data at specified times c Detailed Sets the device and step no The setting method and trace data sampling timing is the same as mentioned in section 7 9 1 when setting the monitor condition The devices that can be set in the detailed condition are as follows e Bit Device X Y M L F SM V B SB T contact ST contact C contact J LAX J LAY J _ B J _ SB BL_ S e Word Device T current value ST current value C current value D SD W SW R Z ZR ULAG J LAW J L ASW The following attributes can be set for the above devices e Bit device number of digits specification e Word device bit number specification 3 Trigger Point setup This sets the point to execute the trigger Select one from the following a At the time of TRACE order The time of execution of TRACE instruction is set as the trigger b At the time of trigger operation The trigger operation from GX Developer device is set as the trigger c Detailed setting The device and step number is set The setting method and trigger execution timing is the same as mentioned in Section 7 9 1 the monitor condition setting 4 Additional trace information The information to be added for every trace is set Multiple items can be selected from the following of none of the items have to be selected a Time Stores the time when the trace was executed b S
331. h button switches selector switches limit switches digital switches Push button switch Selector switch Input X Sequence operation Digital switch b If the input point is the Xn virtual relay inside the Process CPU the program uses the Xn s N O contact or N C contact Virtual relay Programmable controller Input ladder external device Program Figure 10 1 Inputs X c There are no restrictions on the number of Xn N O contacts and N C contacts used in a program provided the program capacity is not exceeded No restrictions on the quantity used Figure 10 2 Input X Used in Program 10 5 10 5 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 2 Reading the inputs a There are 2 types of input refresh inputs and direct access inputs 1 The refresh input executes an operation with ON OFF data The data is read by performing an input refresh before the sequence programs is executed 1 CPU module Input module Acquisition of ON OFF data Input refresh area ON OFF data The refresh input is indicated as Xi in the sequence program For example a 10 input becomes X10 2 The direct access input executes an operation with ON OFF data The data is read from an input module when the instruction is executed 2 CPU module Input module Input refresh area Acquisition of ON OFF data DX104
332. h character 5th character SD741 8th character 7th character SD742 10th character 9th character D743 12th character 11th character SD744 14th character 13th character SD745 16th character 15th character SD746 18th character 17th character SD747 20th character 19th character SD748 22nd character 21st character SD749 24th character 23rd character SD750 26th character 25th character SD751 28th character 27th character SD752 Message Message 30th character 29th character SD753 32nd character 31st character storage storage D754 34th character 33rd character SD755 36th character 35th character SD756 38th character 37th character SD757 40th character 39th character SD758 42nd character 41st character SD759 44th character 48rd character SD760 46th character 45th character SD761 48th character 47th character SD762 50th character 49th character SD763 52nd character 51st character SD764 54th character 53rd character SD765 56th character 55th character SD766 58th character 57th character SD767 60th character 59th character SD768 62nd character 61st character SD769 64th character 63rd character Designate the limit for eac
333. has been executed Input information is read 3 from the input X device memory and a sequence program is executed e When an output contact instruction has been executed Output information is read 4 from the output Y device memory and a sequence program is executed e When an output OUT instruction has been executed The sequence program operation result 5 is stored in the output Y device memory 2 Fig 4 7 I O Information Flow in Refresh Mode 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 1 The peripheral device input area can be switched ON and OFF by the following e Test operation by the GX Developer e A network refresh by the MELSECNET H network system e Writhing from a serial communication module e CC Link automatic refresh 2 The output Y device memory can be switched ON and OFF by the following e Test operation by GX Developer e A network refresh by the MELSECNET H network system e Writhing from a serial communication module e CC Link automatic refresh x3 The remote I O refresh area indicates the area used when automatic refresh setting is made to the input X with MELSECNET H and CC Link Automatic refresh of the remote input refresh area is executed during END processing 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 2 Response lag An output module lags max 2 scans behind an input module See Fig 4 8 Ladder example
334. has occurred Thereafter each time operation error occurs the contents of SD1010 are renewed Annunciator detection APP 37 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued ACPU Special Special i i A Corresponding Special Register after Register for Name Meaning Details aah CPU Conversion Conversion Modification When operation error has occurred during execution of application instruction the step number at which Step number at z D9011 SD1011 Eforeta whieh operation the error has occurred is stored in BIN code Since p es ae coated storage into SD1011 is made when SM1011 changes from off to on the contents of SD1011 cannot be renewed unless SM1011 is cleared by user program ers The I O control mode set is returned in any of the following numbers l ntrol m D9014 SD1014 1O control mode ae ol mode 0 Both input and output in direct mode 1 Input in refresh mode output in direct mode 3 Both input and output in refresh mode e The operation status of CPU as shown below are stored in SD203 B15 to B12B11 to B8B7 to B4 B3 to BO ome po RUN RUN pop Se STOP Operating status Operating status of z PAUSE xl D9015 D1015 SD203 2 Remains the same in ii remote RUN STOP mode Status in program Remote RUN STOP o Except below by parameter setting RUN Po Aw x 1 When the CPU is in RUN mode and SM1040 is off the CPU remains in RUN mode if changed to PAUSE mode Mai
335. hat the scan time is constant in each scan However if the surplus time after the constant scan is less than 0 5 ms low speed execution type programs cannot be executed If using a low speed execution type program set the constant scan time so that the surplus time is 0 5 ms or longer 4 If a low speed program execution time has been designated scan execution type program operation is started ignoring the surplus time after completion of low speed END processing This means that the scan time differs in each scan If a low speed execution type program cannot be processed within constant scan surplus time or within the low speed program execution time program execution is temporarily stopped and the remainder of the program is executed in the next scan 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q Teas niaks 1 Asvnchronous method 77777 TTT TTT Trt rrr sss sss sss sss esses sss ss 1 Constant scan time setting The low speed execution type program is operated under the following conditions as shown below e Constant scan time 8ms e Total scan execution type program time 4ms to 5ms e Execution time of low speed execution type program A ims e Execution time of low speed execution type program B 3ms e END processing low speed END processing Oms 0 ms is used to simplify the illustration END END END END processing processing processing processing Y v 16 24 ms LI T Sc
336. he GX Developer Section 7 9 3 Write during RUN This function writes programs when the CPU module is in the RUN status Section 7 10 M i tortine This function displays the processing time of a program being executed the number of times to Section 7 11 eacure execute execute an interrupt program and the execution time of a program Program list monitor Interrupt program monitor Sampling trace function Multiple user debugging function Watch dog timer Self Diagnosis function Failure history System protect This function prevents the programs from being modified from GX Developer serial Section 7 17 F O x lt 0 lt o e kej 5 communication module or like the GX Developer ee Ethernet modules LED display This function monitors the access interval time time between the access acceptance of the CPU Module service interval time read module and the next access acceptance of the intelligent function module network module or Section 7 20 peripheral device x 1 Refer to Section 4 6 of the Process CPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection x2 Refer to Chapter 13 of the Process CPU Programming Manual Process Control Instructions 7 1 7 1 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 2 Constant Scan 1 What is Constant Scan The scan time differs because the processing time differs depending on whether the instruction which is used in the sequence program is executed or not
337. he GX Developer installed in a Personal computer connected to the Motion CPU is not used to communicate with the Process CPU e You cannot install GX Developer and Motion CPU software package in a single PC e Refer to the manual of the PC CPU module for the connection between the PC CPU module and peripheral modules 14 2 14 2 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q Main base unit Q312B 0123 456 7 8 9 1011 Slot No i 4 i 60 80 ao 3 7F 9F BF Extension base unit Q612B The figure shows the configuration 1 extension J 12131415 16171819 2021 when 32 1 O modules are mounted stages to each slot Extension cable Power supply module 120 140 1 60 1 80 1 AO CON E0 200 220 240 SESISTSTSISESFSIS STS NSF 7F OF BF DFH FF 21F 23F25F27F Power supply module OUT COIN m pad tension base uni Extension base unit Q68B 24 25 26 27 28 ji J 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 2 extension stages K RAO02CORE0B00 320 System configuration PDF2FFB1F 33F Power supply module xtension base uni 3 extension 32 33 34 35 36 ji 5455 stages sAoBCoBEOH00 420 eo 660680 1 BDFBFFW FSF Power supply module Extension base uni Extension base unit 4 extension 40 41 42 43 44 7 exte
338. he ZPUSH ZPOP instruction to save restore the data SM400 lo H PUSH DO Highs ahs stores the SM400 ZPOP D0 The data after DO is stored i E in points ZO to Z15 IRET 10 42 10 42 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 7 File Registers R 1 Definition a File registers are expansion devices for data registers b File register data is stored in files in the standard RAM the memory card 1 The standard RAM has 128k points assigned for file registers File registers can be used at the same processing speed as data registers 2 Use a memory card if 128k or more points are assigned for file registers m vov xo me Standard RAM Memory card File register RO l i R1 100 is written to R2 LR2 i eesi c File registers which consist of 16 bits per point read and write data in 16bit units b15 Fi bo Fis phe de Ae Se Nae ole he a le d Ifthe file registers are used for 32 bit instructions the data will be stored in registers Rn and Rn 1 The lower 16 bits of data are stored in the file register No Rn designated in the sequence program and the upper 16 bits of data are stored in the designated file register No 1 For example if file register R2 is designated in the DMOV instruction the lower 16 bits are stored in R2 and the upper 16 bits are stored in R3 DMOV DO a Two file registers can be used to store numeric data from 2147483648 to 2147483647 or fr
339. he number of points of data transfer Refresh settings in automatic refresh between CPU modules of the multiple PLC system 9 PARAMETER LIST MELSEC Q Default Value Setting Range e PLC CPU No 2 to No 4 PLC No n Empty Designate CPU empty for slots where no CPU module is installed Input output module and intelligent function module Input high speed input output intelligent input output mixture interrupt Section 5 6 No setting e 16 single byte characters 3 0 point 16 points 32 points 48 points 64 points 128 No setting points 256 points 512 points 1024 points No setting OH to FFOH No setting e 16 single byte characters No setting e 16 single byte characters Section 5 3 No setting e 16 single byte characters No setting e 2 3 5 8 10 12 No setting Sar manual of the intelligent function module to Section 7 6 Input I O mixture 10 ms e Input I O mixture 1 ms 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms 70 ms Section 7 7 High speed input 0 2 ms e High speed input 0 1 ms 0 2 ms 0 4 ms 0 6 ms 1 0 ms i PLC No 1 PLC No 2 PLC No 3 No 4 Section 14 2 1 es eee SS nS SS SS SE ON_ NNANNM O l 1 module e 1 to 4 modules Section 14 2 1 Stop all PLCs upon error of PLC No n Stop or do not stop all PLCs upon an error of PLC No n Section 14 2 8 Enable online module change Enable or disable online module change Section 14 2 9 FEA permit Inputs Om outside e Permit or do not permit inputs from outside the grou
340. he scan time are displayed 1 Program The total execution time of the scan execution type program is displayed 2 END operation time The END operation time is displayed 3 Low speed program This indicates the total execution time of a low speed execution type program when making the setting for the execution time of a low speed execution type program or constant scan time 4 Constant waiting The constant scan waiting time is displayed when setting the constant scan time However when the low speed execution type program execution time is set as well this value is 0 000 ms c Each Program Execution Status The execution status of program specified at the Program tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box is displayed 1 Program The program name is displayed in the order set in the parameter 2 Execute The program type set in the parameter is displayed 3 Scan Time The actual scan time current value is displayed At the program stop wait status the scan time is displayed as 0 000 ms 4 Execute count The number of times the program was executed is displayed setting the starting point of when the measurement is started as 0 The number of execution times is displayed up to 65535 times and returns to 0 when the 65536th time measurement is made The ex times remains even when the program is stopped 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 Program can be started and stopped on the program list monitor scr
341. he size of each program the device used and the program file name etc 1 Program size considerations Set the program capacity within the range of the Process CPU program capacity The program capacities of the Process CPU s are shown below Q12PHCPU 124 k steps Q25PHCPU 252 k steps Decide whether the parameters are to be stored in the program memory the standard ROM or the memory card If they are to be stored in the program memory the standard ROM the area available for the program will be the capacity shown above minus the parameter data size Designating a program file name Designate the file name of the program to be stored in the Process CPU This file name is used when writing the program and parameters from GX Developer to the Process CPU and when designating the program to be executed in the Process CPU See Chapter 6 for details regarding file names Designating the program execution conditions In order to execute multiple programs in the Process CPU execution conditions must be designated for each program Execution is impossible for programs without file name and execution condition settings See Section 4 2 for details regarding execution conditions Designating devices a Designate the number of device points used in each program and the number of device points which are shared by all programs See Chapter 10 for details regarding devices which can be used in the Process CPU b Designate w
342. hen comment file is in use S Status New ON File register in use change ON Boot operation in Goes OFF if boot designation switch is OFF change OFF Internal memory SM660 Boot operation execution Goes ON while boot operation is in process S Status progress Goes ON when access is made to area outside the range OFF Within access range of file register R of memory card A ON Outside access range Set within END processing e Reset at user program Memory card A SM672 file register access range flag APP 7 APP 7 APPENDICES 6 Instruction Related Special Relays Meaning OFF Carry OFF Carry flag ON Carry ON Number of output characters selection OFF 16 characters output ON Outputs until NUL OFF Ascending order ON Descending order OFF Non match found Block comparison SN All match CHK instruction priority ranking flag El flag Comment read completion flag File being accessed BIN DBIN instruction error disabling flag PKEY instruction execution in progress flag Keyboard input reception flag for PKEY instruction MSG instruction reception flag Selection of link refresh COM instruction execution Enable disable local device at CALL Enable disable local device in interrupt program SM701 SM702 SM703 SM738 SM775 SM776 APP 8 OFF Conditions priority ON Pattern priority OFF Comment read not completed ON Comment read complete
343. hen the input and output X Y for I O modules and intelligent function modules being controlled by other PLCs is to be downloaded to the host PLC See Section 17 2 for further details d Refresh setting optional This is set up to automatically refresh the device data on the multiple PLC system See Section 16 1 for further details e Control PLC settings optional Sets up the control PLCs for the I O modules and intelligent function modules mounted on the base units on the multiple PLC system indicated by the C arrow All default settings are set for the PLC No 1 Intelligent functional module detailed setting x Error time Slot Type Model name output mode Q PLC PLC No 1 1 PLC PLC No 2 2 PLC PLC No 3 3 PLC PLC E mpty Isettings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Cancel 14 12 14 12 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 3 Multiple PLC setting and I O Assignment checks Checks as shown in table 14 4 will be run to ascertain that all CPU modules have the same settings sameness check when the description column in table 14 3 has been set with the O symbol and the power to the sequence is switched on the Process CPU is reset or the status is changed from STOP to RUN a The multiple PLC system will be started up if all PLCs have the same settings b The operations described
344. hether or not the internal relays edge relays timers counters and data registers of each program are to be designated as local devices See Section 10 13 1 for details regarding local devices c When creating sub routine programs designate whether or not common pointers are to be used See Section 10 9 2 for details regarding common pointers Device initial value setting Designate whether or not the device initial value settings are to be used for the Process CPU devices and intelligent function modules See Section 10 13 2 for details regarding device initial values 12 5 12 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAMS TO PROCESS CPU MELSEC Q 12 2 2 Procedure for writing programs to the Process CPU 12 6 The procedure for writing programs and parameters created by GX Developer to the memory card mounted in the Process CPU memory card interface is shown below In order to write programs and parameters to the Process CPU memory card the memory card must be mounted the valid parameters drive settings must be designated by the Process CPU DIP switches SW 2 SW 3 and the boot settings for the PLC parameters must be designated by GX Developer For details regarding Process CPU DIP switches refer to the Process CPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection When writing programs and parameters to the Process CPU program memory the steps indicated by asterisks below are not required Procedural steps shown in
345. higher 16 bits of data are stored in the designated register No 1 Wn 1 For example if link register W12 is designated in the DMOV instruction the lower 16 bits are stored in W12 and the upper 16 bits are stored in W13 H _ pov ks00000 v H Processing object W12 W13 W13 W12 Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits tes gt In two link register points 2147483648 to 2147483647 or 0H to FFFFFFFFu data can be stored d Data stored by the link register is maintained until another data is save The MELSECNET H network module has 16384 link register points The Process CPU has 8192 link register points When subsequent points after Point 8192 are used for link registers change a number of points setting of link registers at the Device tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box 10 29 10 29 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 2 Using link registers in a network system In order to use link registers in the network system network parameter settings must be made Link registers not set in the network parameter settings can be used as data registers 1 For details on network parameters refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual 10 2 14 Link special registers SW 1 Definition a Link special registers are used to store data on the communication status and errors of an intelligent function b Because the data link information is stored as numeric data the
346. host PLC s CPU shared memory with the S TO instruction 1 15 e When reading data from other PLC s CPU shared memory with the FROM instruction 1 e When reading data from other PLC s CPU shared memory with the intelligent function module device U_ G_ 1 e When specifying the Process CPU to be accessed with the Ethernet module 1 e When specifying the Process CPU to be accessed with the serial communication module 3 1 See Chapter 16 for details on among CPU module x2 Refer to the Ethernet module s manual for details on accessing the Process CPU with the Ethernet module x3 Refer to the serial communication module s manual for details on accessing the Process CPU with the serial communication module 15 2 15 ALLOCATING MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 15 2 Purpose of PLC Parameter I O Allocations with GX Developer I O allocations are performed with GX Developer in the following cases 1 Setting up control PLCs Sets up the CPU module that are to control the multiple PLC system s I O modules and intelligent function modules Q Series I O modules and intelligent function modules can be selected as control PLCs for each slot Q38B 01234567 EARE A e N pm aja jaja elololo a O O O 5 5 a Control PLCs can be Q68B selected for each slot 8 9 101112131415 Power supply Q68B 16171819 Power sup
347. i Comes ON if a an ore oeavned gung sth pre se power interruption of less M9005 SM1005 E one Ae TONN mangaa en Oncoeed gurna tes othe 0 o s than 10ms occurred during use of the DC power supply i module and reset by turning power OFF then ON Comes ON if a momentary power interruption of less than 1ms occurred during use of the DC power supply module and reset by turning power OFF then ON APP 10 APP 10 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Name Meaning Details Relay Conversion Modification OFF Normal e Turned on when battery voltage reduces to less than M9006 SM1006 Battery low specified Turned off when battery voltage becomes ON Battery low normal M9007 SM1007 Battery low latch OFF Normal Turned on when battery voltage reduces to less than O ON Battery low specified Remains on if battery voltage becomes normal M9008 SM1008 Self diagnosis OFF No error Turned on when error is found as a result of self error ON Error diagnosis Annunciator OFF No F number detected Turned on when OUT F of SET F instruction is M9009 SM1009 SM6 ON F number detected executed Switched z when SD1124 data is zeroed 3 Turned on when operation error occurs during execution M9011 SM1011 SM56 Operation error OFF No error Poe ON Error of application instruction Remains on if normal status is restored
348. ication is to be limited and a special quality is not required application shall be possible When considering use in aircraft medical applications railways incineration and fuel devices manned transport devices equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices in which human life or assets could be greatly affected and for which a particularly high reliability is required in terms of safety and control system please consult with Mitsubishi and discuss the required specifications Microsoft Windows Microsoft Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Co Ltd in the United States Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Process CPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals MODEL MODEL CODE QNPHCPU U KI E 13JR56 SH NA 080315E A 0204 MEE a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE 1 8 12 OFFICE TOWER Z 14F HARUMI CHUO KU 104 6212 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without
349. ich intelligent Intelligent anoion function module is used 18 to 223 module factor with parameters Internal timer factor x1 The internal times shown are the default setting times These times can be designated in 0 5 ms units through a 0 5 to 1000 ms range set at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box x2 When an error interruption with 132 error that stops operation occurs the Process CPU is not stopped until 132 processing is completed x3 Execution of error interruptions is prohibited for the interrupt pointer Nos 132 to 139 when the power is turned on and during a Process CPU reset When using interrupt pointer Nos 132 to 139 set the interruption permitted status by using the IMASK instruction x4 To use the intelligent function module interrupt the intelligent function module setting interrupt points setting is required at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box For the interrupts from the intelligent function module see Section 8 2 1 App 45 App 45 APPENDICES MELSEC Q MEMO App 46 App 46 INDEX A Accuracy of initial scan time 4 16 Accuracy Of scan time eee eeeeeeeeeeeeteeee 4 18 Annunciator F 10 12 ASGINCOd6 raaa i 4 51 ATA Card ia ei eiiie ieaanre iiaeaae ianen 6 10 AUO MOd nrnna a es 5 3 Automatic write to standard ROM 6 13 B B Link relay aiaia eiaa raaa 10 17 Base MOdE iniinis aaneren 5
350. ignate a constant scan time setting at the PLC RAS tab screen in the PLC Parameter Setting range 0 5 to 2000 ms setting unit 0 5 ms To secure execution time for low speed execution type programs at each scan designate a low speed program execution time in the PLC RAS tab screen the PLC Parameter Setting range 1 to 2000 ms setting unit 1 ms In order to execute a low speed execution type program set either the constant scan time or low speed program execution time Set the execute type of the low speed program to low speed in the program of the PLC parameters The low speed execution type program is used for programs which do not require execution in each scan for example programs for printer output 2 Executing multiple low speed execution type programs When multiple low speed execution type programs are used they are executed one by one in ascending number order of the program in the PLC parameters 3 Execution time of the Low speed execution type program to be executed per scan If all the low speed execution type program operation is completed within one scan and there is surplus time the processing executed after that depends on the ON OFF status of special register SM330 and the execution condition for low speed execution type programs a 1 Asynchronous method SM330 OFF Method in which low speed execution type program operation is continued in the surplus time Synchronous method
351. ignation RET H M10 100 CALLP PO W10 K4X10 R10 H SE Argument from FD2 Argument to FD1 gt Argument to FDO For details on the argument I O condition see Section 10 3 1 1 12 1 12 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q MEMO 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM This section describes the system configuration of the Process CPU cautions on use of the system and configured equipment 2 1 System Configuration The outline of the equipment configuration configuration with peripheral devices and 2 system configuration in the Process CPU system is described below iz Tiviumeartery Process CPU Battery Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q6BAT rT E Power supply module 1 O module Intelligent function module of the Q Series 1 Equipment configuration Memory card 1 Q2MEM 1MBS Q2MEM 2MBS Q2MEM 2MBF Q2MEM 4MBF Q2MEM 8MBA Q2MEM 16MBA Q2MEM 32MBA Main base unit Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B Extension of the Q Series module lt J HU oooi Extension cable Q50B extension base unit QC05B QC06B QC12B QC30B Q52B Q55B QC50B QC100B Q6LB extension base unit Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B Power supply modu O module Intelligent function module of the Q Series POINTS 1 The num
352. ile is switched to another the file register capacity of the currently selected file register file is stored in SD647 10 50 10 50 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q c Checking the file register capacity 1 Check The file register capacity used for each sequence program 2 Determine if the file register capacity exceeds the number of points used on the basis of the total file register capacity set in SD647 in the sequence program Program example 1 The file register range of use is checked at the beginning of each program Designates 4k points lt SD647 K4 1 Mo Final file register range check Mo lt vo Alarm processing SM400 MO Transfer command ae MOVP K4x20 RO H Writing to file register Program example 2 The file register range of use is checked after executing the QDRSET instruction c TORSE 1 aacp SM400 File register is changed to drive 1 ABCD Final file register range check lt SD647 K4 lt Mo lt Yo MO Transfer command Alarm processing MOVP K4X20 Ro Writing to file register Program example 3 For block switching SM400 lt SD647 k33 1 MO gt Final file register range MO check YO Alarm processing MO Block switching command RSET K1 H Switching to block 1 3 Deleting a File Register To erase unwanted file register files perform the PLC data deletion online 10 51 10 51 10 DEVICES 10 8 Nest
353. ils on the writing of programs during RUN status see Section 7 10 If programs are written in the program memory during RUN status while a boot run is performed from a standard ROM memory card ROM any change made will not be reflected in the programs stored in the standard ROM or the memory card ROM At the Boot file tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box set the maximum number of boot files to the number of files stored in the program memory The number of boot files will be decreased by one in the following cases where A header is specified e A PLC parameter in which a boot file setting is maded is booted If boot operation is made under the following conditions it may take maximum 200 ms for each 1k steps 4kbyte during boot sequence e To boot from an ATA card e To boot from standard ROM with an ATA card mounted 6 PROCESS CPU FILES MELSEC Q f If the program memory is changed when a sequence program is written in the program memory and PLC is turned on or reset boot operation mode may be selected If the BOOT LED is lit on the front panel of the Process CPU the boot operation mode is selected Cancel the boot operation mode with the following procedure 1 Write parameters in which no boot file settings are made into the program memory 2 Using the DIP switch of the CPU module set program memory for the valid drive setting DIP switch setting SW2 OFF SW3 OFF 3 Turn off an
354. ime in 1 ms units If the SD522 value is 3 and the SD523 value is 400 the initial scan time is 3 4 ms x1 The accuracy of the initial scan time stored at the special registers is 0 1 ms The initial scan time count will continue even if a watchdog time reset instruction WDT is executed at the sequence program 5 Initial execution monitor time a The execution period of the initial execution type program can be monitored by this timer The default value is not set When monitoring the execution time of the initial execution type program designate the initial execution monitor time within the range of 10 to 2000 ms range at the PLC RAS tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box Setting unit 10 ms b The low speed execution type program is executed after the execution of the initial execution type program is completed To use the low speed execution type program specify the time that is longer than the sum of the initial scan time and the execution time of the low speed execution type program c When the initial scan time exceeds the set initial execution monitor time WDT ERROR error code 5000 occurs and Process CPU operation is stopped When the initial execution monitor time is designated there will be a 10 ms error in the count value Therefore a monitor time setting t of 10 ms will result in a WDT ERROR when the initial scan time is in the range 10 ms lt t lt 20 ms 4 SEQUENC
355. in 1 ms units e Range from 0 to 65535 e When SM551 is ON stores service interval for module designated by SD550 in 100 us units e Range from 000 to 900 MELSEC Q meet Corresponding D9 Set by When set S First END processing S Every END processing S Every END processing S Every END processing S Request APP 31 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List 5 Memory card Corresponding f Set b Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation When oa ACPU a Ing be_ TT Indicates memory card A model installe B8 B7 B4 B3 Drive 3 0 Does not exist S Initial card A RAM model 1 SRAM and card models 0 Does not exist removal Drive 4 1 SRAM ROM model 2 EPROM 3 FLASH ROM Memory S Initial Drive 1 capacity is stored in 1 kbyte units and card removal S Initial Drive 2 capacity is stored in 1 kbyte units and card removal e The use conditions for memory card A are stored as bit patterns In use when ON The significance of these bit patterns is indicated below Boot operation QBT Not used Parameters QPA CPU fault history QFD Device comments QCD Not used S Status Device initial value QDI Local device QDL change File register R QDR Not used Trace QTS Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Memory card A use conditions Indicates memory ca
356. in advance For details see Section 7 7 Setting the switch of intelligent function modules To set the switch of the intelligent function module select Type at the I O assignment tab screen in advance For details see Section 7 8 Setting outputs during Process CPU error To set the output status retain clear of the output modules and intelligent function modules when the Process CPU stops the operation due to a stop error select Type at the I O assignment tab screen in advance Setting Process CPU operation during a hardware error of intelligent function modules To set the Process CPU operation continue stop during a hardware error of an intelligent function module select Type at the I O assignment tab screen in advance The I O assignment is necessary for setting the response time of the input modules and the switch of intelligent function modules 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 5 6 2 Concept of I O assignment using GX Developer 1 I O assignment for each slot Type module type Points number of I O points and Start head I O number can be designated individually for each slot of the base unit For example to change the number of I O points of the designated slot only the number of I O points can be designated The items other than designated are set to the status where the base unit is installed The I O assignment is conducted at the I O assignment tab screen in the PLC Pa
357. in table 14 4 will be performed when all PLCs do not have the same settings In this event check the multiple PLC settings and I O Assignment and set all PLCs with the same settings To start the multiple PLC system reset the Process CPU for PLC No 1 or turn off and on the PLC power ON gt OFF gt ON For the action after the Process CPU for PLC No 1 is reset see Section 14 2 7 Table 14 4 List of sameness check contents PLC No 1 PLC No 1 to4 When the power to the PLC is switched on e A comparison check will be run on the When PLC No 1 is reset multiple PLC settings and I O Assignments for PLC No 1 e A PARAMETER ERROR error code 3012 will occur in the host PLC if they do not match A comparison check will be run on the multiple PLC settings and I O Assignments for When PLCs in the the PLC in the RUN mode with the lowest number RUN mode exist A PARAMETER ERROR error code 3012 will occur in the host PLC if they do not match No sameness check will be run e When the RUN STOP switch has been changed from STOP to RUN When PLCs in the e When parameters are RUN mode do not written with the GX exist Developer A comparison check will be run on the e A comparison check will be run on the multiple PLC settings and I O multiple PLC settings and I O Assignments for PLC No 2 Assignments for PLC No 1 A PARAMETER ERROR error code A PARAMETER ERROR error code 3012 will occur in the host PLC if they 3012 wil
358. ing N 1 Definition 2 MELSEC Q Nesting devices are used to nest MC or MCR master control instructions when programming operating conditions Designation method with master control The master control instructions are used to open and close the ladders common bus so that switching of ladders may be executed efficiently by the sequence program Nesting devices must be numbered in descending order from NO to N7 of nested relation For details on how to use master control refer to the QOPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions A tr NO nesting control range N1 nesting control range N2 nesting control range t e n meh O B fe 10 52 r Designated in ascending No order gt Executed when condition A is satisfied gt Executed when conditions A and B are satisfied Designated in descending No order gt Executed when condition A B and C are satisfied N1 is reset gt Executed when conditions A and B are satisfied N1 to 2 are reset gt Executed when condition A is satisfied NO to 2 are reset gt Executed regardless of A B C condition statuses 10 52 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 9 Pointers P 1 Definition Pointer devices are used in jump instructions CJ SCJ JUMP or sub routine call instru
359. ing RUN is executed Controls are stopped for some time as specified by a value in the table QnPHCPU When continuous space is available in a program memory When space is available in a program memory When space is available in a memory card except ATA card Please note that scan tame is extended for 1 25 seconds at 30 k step when an ATA card is in use c Please note that no access can be made from an instruction in a sequence program while a batch of files is written with the Process CPU in the RUN status While the file write during RUN is being executed an instruction to make access to a file is not executed d If a program file being executed is written when the Process CPU is in the RUN status the following will not work properly After the write is complete a fall instruction is executed only when its execution condition is OFF e LDF e ANDF e ORF e MEF e PLF 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 11 Execution Time Measurement This is a function to display the processing time of the program being executed This is used to find out the effect of each program s processing time on the total scan time There are three functions to the execution time measurement The details of each function are indicated in sections 7 11 1 to 7 11 3 e Program monitor list e Interrupt program monitor list e Scan time measurement 7 11 1 Program monitor list 1 What is Program Monitor List a This is a function to display the processin
360. ing at MOV W1 J1i wi Writing at instruction execution Writing at refresh operation 3 When data is written to another station s writing range using a link direct device the data which is received from that station will replace the written data b Reading Reading by link direct device is allowed in the entire link device range of network modules Only one network module capable of writing reading link direct devices can be used per network number If two or more network modules are installed at the same network number the network module with the lowest first I O number will be the one that handles writing reading using link direct devices For example if station No 1 and station No 2 network modules are installed in network No 1 as shown in the figure below the station No 2 network module will handle link direct device operations Le C Network No 1 CPU module Network module Network module St t Power supply module 2 ion St z O PO Sa ieee Writing reading using link direct devices not allowed Writing reading using link direct devices allowed 10 36 10 36 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 3 Differences between link direct devices and link refresh The differences between link direct devices and link refresh are shown in Table 10 4 below Table 10 4 Differences Between Link Direct Devices and Link Refresh Link Direct Device Link Refresh Link re
361. ing on the power or when starting with the initial step of block 0 Selects consecutive or step by step transfer of steps of which transfer conditions are established when all of the transfer conditions of consecutive steps are established ON Consecutive transfer is executed OFF One step per one scan is transferred APP 13 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Details Relay Conversion Modification Set when consecutive transfer is not executed with Continuous OFF When transition is consecutive transfer enabled Reset when transfer of one SM1104 SM324 transition completed step is completed suspension flag ON When no transition Consecutive transfer of a step can be prevented by writing an AND condition to corresponding M9104 Step transition watchdog timer start equivalen of D9108 Step transition SM1109 watchdog timer start equivalen of D9109 Step transition SM1110 watchdog timer start equivalen of D9110 aaa ine OFE Watchdog timer reset Turned on when the step transfer monitoring timer is SM1111 9 ON Watchdog timer reset P 9 start equivalen started Turned off when the monitoring timer is reset of D9111 start Step transition SM1112 watchdog timer start equivalen of D9112 Step transition SM1113 watchdog timer start equivalen of D9113 Step transition SM11414 watchdog timer start equivalen of D9
362. ion bit of the block Designation is checked when block starts When continuous transition is effective goes ON when continuous transition is not being executed goes OFF when continuous transition is being executed e Normally ON when continuous transition is not effective When block stops selects active step operation output e When this relay is OFF all coil outputs are set to OFF e When this relay is ON coil outputs are maintained S Instruction execution S Initial U APP 4 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued When Set Selects the device status when the stopped CPU module is run after the sequence program or SFC program has been modified when the SFC program exists Selects the output action of the step being held when a OFF OFF block is ended by executing the end step S Initial ON Preserves When this relay is OFF all coil outputs are set to OFF U e When this relay is ON coil outputs are maintained Select whether low speed execution type programs are executed in asynchronous or synchronous mode e Asynchronous mode Mode where the operations for the low speed execution type program are continued during the excess time e Synchronous mode Mode where the operations for the low speed execution type program are started from the next scan even when there is the excess time Stores the status of the intelligent function module access instruction executed imm
363. ion outside the group is taken IZ Al station stop by stop enoro PLCI I The output condition outside the group is taken r Refresh settings Change screens Setting 1 FA Al station stop by stop error of PLC4 Send range for each PL PLS acetate PLC PLC share memory G Dev starting Da Port Start End Stat End Nad qoza 0800 ___oBFF Dol___ 1023 No2 1024 osoo oeFF D1024 D2047 No3 512 osoo osFF D2048 D2559 Nod sA osoo osr D2560 D3071 MELSEC Q The multiple PLC settings and I O Assignment Setting data are read and written into the specified project when OK is selected Confirming the multiple PLC settings When changing the CPU devices in the Refresh settings enter the device number after it has been changed indicates the item can be changed The applicable device of head device is B M Y D W R ZR The unit of points that send range for each PLC is word Settings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Confirm the I O Assignment and standard settings on the Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Check Cancel f Qn H Parameter x PLC name PLC system PLC fie Joo SFC I O assignment r120 Assignment Slot Type Model name Points Stat J Switch settin 0 PLC PLCNo1 v v g 1 PLC PLCNo2 v v 310 2 PLC PLC No 3 v 3E20 Detailed settin 3 _JPLC PLC E mpty v
364. ires several scans x4 A sequence program allows the read only No data can be written through access from a sequence program x5 A standard RAM hold a single file x6 Data can be written or read with the following instructions e S FREAD allows the batch read from a specified file on a memory card e S FWRITE allows the batch write to a specified file on a memory card The table below shows file names and extensions of data files stored in the Process CPU or on a memory card PARAM QPA Intelligent function module parameter Program 2K 2K 7K QPG IPARAM QPA Debug data Failure history data PLC user data EKER The portions can be named by the user 6 PROCESS CPU FILES MELSEC Q 3 Drive Number a The Process CPU uses drive numbers to control standard RAMs standard ROMs and memory cards GX Developer specifies a selected memory standard RAM standard ROM or memory card to read write parameters and program files from to the Process CPU There is no need to specify the drive number when using the GX Developer b The table below shows the drive numbers used to specify a selected memory program memory standard RAM standard ROM or memory card when using a sequence program The drive number must be used to specify a selected memory when the read write is made through access from a serial communication module Programmemory o Process CPU built in Standard RAM Memory card RAM SRAM card 1 Flash card
365. is 0 1 ms The scan time count will continue even if a watchdog time reset instruction WDT is executed in the sequence program 7 Low speed execution monitor time The execution time of the low speed execution type program can be monitored by this timer The default value is not set When monitoring the execution time of the low speed execution type program designate the low speed execution monitor time in a 10 to 2000 ms range at the PLC RAS tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box Setting unit 10 ms If the execution time of the low speed execution type program exceeds this timer setting a PRG TIME OVER error occurs The low speed execution time measurement occurs at low speed END processing Therefore a PRG TIME OVER error will occur if the low speed execution monitor time t is designated as 100 ms and the measured low speed scan time at low speed END processing exceeds 100 ms 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 2 4 Stand by type program 1 Definition of stand by type program a Stand by type programs are executed only when requested b Stand by type programs are used for the following applications 1 Placing programs in the library Sub routine and interrupt programs are converted to stand by type programs which are managed separately from the main program 2 Changing the program setup Main routing programs registered as stand by type programs can exec
366. is duplicated with the automatic refresh function on other PLCs Prolonged time transmitted received word point lt N5 X number of other PLCs ps Use the following values for N5 N5 Systems with only Systems that include a main base unit additional base units Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 0 54 us CPU type 18 2 18 PROCESSING TIME FOR MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM PROCESS CPUS MELSEC Q 2 MELSECNET H refresh a The amount of time required for performing the refresh process between Process CPU and MELSECNET H network modules Refer to the following manual for details on the refresh time for MELSECNET H Q Corresponding MESLECNET H Network System Refresh Manual b The amount of time required for the automatic refresh process will be prolonged only by the following amount of time when requests for refreshing are issued by other MELSECNET H modules at the same time on a multiple PLC system Prolonged time transmitted received word point lt N5 Xx number of other PLCs us The number of words transmitted received is the total value of the following transferal data LB LX LY SB e Link refresh data peu LW 16 Data transferred to the memory card s file register eC a 16 LB e Transferal between data links tet LW x 2 Refer to the following table for N5 CPU type Systems with only Systems that include a main base unit additional base units Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 0 54
367. ister with the same filename as a program 1 MELSECNET H refresh MELSECNETHH refresh requires additional processing time to refresh data between the Process CPU and the MELSECNET H network module For details on MELSECNETHH refresh time see Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual 2 CC Link automatic refresh CC Link automatic refresh requires additional processing time to refresh data between the Process CPU and the CC Link s master local module When a CC Link master local module is installed extended scan time can be shortened by adjusting a CC Link setting to a system setting For details on CC Link automatic refresh time see the QJ61BT11 Type CC Link System Master Local Module Users Manual 3 Sampling trace time Sampling trace requires additional processing time When sampling trace data is specified to execute the sampling trace function add the sampling trace time to the total processing time The table below shows the length of processing time required when sampling trace data is specified to assign 50 internal relay points for bit devices and 50 data register points for word deices CPU Type Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 11 2 11 PROCESS CPU PROCESSING TIME 11 3 4 MELSEC Q GX Developer Monitoring GX Developer monitoring requires additional processing time Add the GX Developer monitoring time to the total processing time a The table below shows the processing time required when 64 data r
368. istory file are cleared using the failure history clear in the GX Developer PLC diagnosis mode Data stored in both the Process CPU failure history storage memory and failure history file within the memory card can be cleared with a failure history clear 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 17 System Protect The Process CPU has a few protection functions system protect to prevent the program changes by a third party other than the designer from GX Developer function or serial communication module There are the following methods for system protects Valid Item to protect Protect valid file Protection description Method Prohibits all write control Set the Process CPU All of CPU All files instructions to the Process system setting switch CPU SW1 on Memory card Performs drive protect forthe Set write protect switch All files Always module memory card and write protect jon the memory card on Changes the attribute for each Programs i Change the attribute for Fil dul Devi t TERO the file in the P d Al ile module evice comments e file in the Passwor ways E 1 Read Write display prohibit y Device initial values By Registration 2 Write prohibit The control instruction read write display and write mentioned above are as follows Description Process CPU operation instruction by remote operation Remote RUN remote STOP etc Program read write operations Operation related with write processing such as program writes
369. ith the installed CC Link Information Information Information opal CC Link Error detection a atigi a atig r D ane QCPU error status lt te gt lt gt Remote B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 BO 1st module 2nd module 3rd module 4th module Number of points P Stores the number of points currently set for X devices allocated for X er of points or Y allocated er of points SD292 sd pe Stores the number of points currently set for M devices er of points A SD293 sd S Stores the number of points currently set for L devices er of points z SD294 d ee Stores the number of points currently set for B devices er of points SD295 ed pe Stores the number of points currently set for F devices r S Initial er of points SD296 Device ed for SB Stores the number of points currently set for SB devices allocation oF of boils SD297 Same as s ie Stores the number of points currently set for V devices parameter Foil r n SD298 _ contents H a Pa S Stores the number of points currently set for S devices f poin SD299 a aes be Stores the number of points currently set for T device Fooi SD300 etic Stores the number of points currently set for ST devices ed for ST 7 pol D301 dite Stores the number of points currently set for C devices 7 pol SD302 z be oy Stores the number of points currently set for D devices er of points ae SD303 ed sr Stores the number of points currently set for W devices S Initi
370. j Setting item Buffer size Transfer direction Device word count CH1 Digital output value 1 1 gt D11 CH2 Digital output value 1 1 gt D12 CH3 Digital output value 1 1 gt D13 CH4 Digital output value 1 1 gt CH1 Maximum value 1 1 Be CH1 Minimum value 1 1 gt CH2 Maximum value 1 1 gt CH2 Minimum value 1 1 gt CH3 Maximum value 1 1 gt Make text file End setup Cancel The designated auto refresh setting data is stored in the intelligent function parameters of Process CPU For the details of GX Configurator refer to the manual of the intelligent function module being used 8 1 2 Communication using device initial value 1 Device initial value The device initial value is used to designate the initial setting of the intelligent function module without using a program The designated device initial value is written from Process CPU to the intelligent function module when Process CPU is turned ON is reset or is switched from STOP to RUN 2 Designation of the device initial value Using the device memory of GX Developer designate the data of the intelligent function module to be used as the device initial value In the device initial value setting of GX Developer designate the range to be used with the intelligent function module device as the device of the device initial value 1 For the device initial value see Section 10 13 2 2 For the intelligent function module device see Section 10 5 8 COMMUNICATION WIT
371. l memory of Process CPU or a memory card x3 Intelligent represents an intelligent function module x4 Represents the program using the intelligent function module device the FROM TO instruction or the instructions dedicated for intelligent function modules 8 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE MELSEC Q 8 1 1 Initial setting and automatic refresh setting using GX Configurator 1 Initial and automatic refresh settings of intelligent function modules Installing the GX Configurator compatible with the intelligent function module enables the initial setting and automatic refresh setting with GX Developer When the initial setting and automatic refresh setting of the intelligent function module is designated with GX Developer you can write read data without creating the program for the communication with the intelligent function module Moreover you can conduct the initial setting or automatic refresh setting without designating the buffer memory address of the intelligent function module 2 Setting using the GX Configurator This section describes the example to set the initial setting and automatic refresh setting of A D conversion module Q64AD a Initial setting The initial setting of Q64AD offers the following four settings e A D conversion enable disable setting e Sampling process averaging process setting e Time number of times specifying e Average time average number of times setting The initial setting of Q64AD
372. l occur in the host PLC if they do not match do not match STOP RUN is not allowed as a MULTIPLE PLC DOWN error code 7000 error will occur in the host PLC When a stop error occurs at PLC No 1 After multiple PLC system parameters unavailable with the Motion CPU are changed for the Process CPU High Performance model QCPU or PC CPU module in a multiple PLC system including a Motion CPU be sure to reset the Process CPU or High Performance model QCPU for PLC No 1 or turn off and on the PLC Otherwise the Process CPU High Performance model QCPU or PC CPU module checks consistency with multiple PLC system parameters of the Motion CPU causing a PARAMETER ERROR error code 3012 14 13 14 13 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 14 2 6 Resetting the multiple PLC system It is possible to reset the entire multiple PLC system by resetting the PLC No 1 The CPU modules for PLC No 2 to No 4 I O modules and intelligent function modules will be reset when the PLC No 1 is reset If a stop error occurs for any of the PLCs on the multiple PLC system either reset the PLC No 1 or restart the sequencer power supply ON gt OFF gt ON after the problem has been recovered Recovery is not allowed by resetting the CPU modules for PLC No 2 to No 4 for which stop errors have occurred 1 2 a Q 6j 234567 gt a Q Co Power supply PLC No 2 PLC No 3 PLC No 4 i 5 zZ O a Reset is no
373. l200l220l240l260l280 when 32 1 O modules are loaded to each slot 1DF 1FF 21F 23F 25F 27F 29F Extension base unit Q68B Extension base unit Q68B Ond extension Power supply module Power supply module g stage J 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 320 340 360 380 8A0f3C0 3E0 eo 5A0 5CO SE0 600 620 640 660 680 System configuration S S g S 33F 35F 37F 39F 3BF 3DF 3FF P _ 5BF 5DF 5FF 61F 63F 65F 67F 69F Extension base unit Q68B Extension base unit Q68B aid extension Power supply module Sih extension 7 Power supply module stag 32 33 34 35 36 37 stage 54 55 58 59 60 6A0 780 SISTSISISISISIS 6BF 6DF 6FF 75F 77F 79F sion base unit Q65B 4ih extension 7th extension Power supply module stag stage 62 63 Prohibit en caren When module is installed an error occurs Maximum number of i Seven Extension Stages Extension Stages Maximum number of I O modules to be 64 modules installed Maximum number of Main base unit Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B 1 Extension bases unit of up to seven stages can be used 2 Do not use extension cable longer than an overall extension length of 13 2m 43 31ft
374. lElgE EBREHE D gt aala aeee Dolce ec al ala2 Pl 0 6 6 O ao US gt OUT Yn gt Equivalent to internal relay 10 8 10 8 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 3 Output method a There are 2 types of output refresh outputs and direct access outputs 1 The refresh output gives out the ON OFF data to an output module by performing an output refresh before the sequence program is executed 1 CPU module Output module Output refresh area ON OFF data output ol 1H eY 10 The refresh output is indicated as Yt in the sequence program For example a 10 output becomes Y10 2 The direct access output gives out the ON OFF data to an output module when the instruction is executed CPU module Output module Output refresh area ON OFF data output roe The direct access output is indicated as DY program For example a 10 output becomes DY10 b Differences between refresh output and direct access output The direct access output accesses an output module directly when an instruction is executed which realizes shorter external output time However it processes an instruction slower compared with the refresh output The direct access output is used only for outputting to the output module or the intelligent function module special function module mounted on the base unit or extension base unit The refresh and direct output differences are shown in Tabl
375. lay Ji j K4B0 or later BO or later Program 3 R 4 Link register Ji j WO or later WO or later notation M Link special relay Jc i K4SB0 or later SBO or later method Link special register Ji i SWO or later SWO or later Number of steps 1 step All network module link Refresh parameter Network module access range devices designated range Access data guarantee range Word units 16 bits REMARK 1 For details on the MELSECNET H network system refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual 2 For details on network parameters common parameters and network refresh parameters refer to the following manuals e Detailed information Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual e Setting procedures GX Developer Operating Manual Windows Version 10 37 10 37 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 5 Intelligent Function Module Devices U G 2 1 Definition a The intelligent function module devices allow the Process CPU to directly access the buffer memories of intelligent function modules which are mounted on at the main base unit and extension base units b Intelligent function module devices are designated by the intelligent function module special function module I O No and the buffer memory address Designation method U TI GEI Butter memory address setting range 0 to16383 decimal 1 Intelligent function module special function module I O No Setting If the I O No i
376. le and CPU module can also be confirmed Serial number Function version Product Information List a moder name Points r o wo contro seria wo ver Q12PHCPU C QU7LLP21 25 32pt 0000 020810000000000 None None None None CSV file creating 3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION MELSEC Q 3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION The table below shows the performance specifications of the CPU module Performance Specifications era en Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Control method Repetitive operation of stored program Direct I O is possible by 1 O control method Refresh mode direct I O specification DXO DYD Programming language Relay symbol language logic symbolic language MELSAP3 SFC MELSAP L Function block Processing speed Moxo Ps Sequence instruction mov Dobi otozss 415 Total number of instructions ecen pa L excluding intelligent function module dedicated instructions a Constant scan ms Set parameter values to Function for setting the scan timer to fixed 0 5 to 2000 configurable in increments of 0 5 ms P settings specify x Program 2 Program memory 124k step 252k step capacity Drive 0 Memory card RAM For memory capacity Drive 1 Capacity of loading memory cards 2Mbyte max see Section 7 1 Memory card ROM Installed memory card capacity For memory capacity Drive 2 Flash card 4 Mbyte max ATA card 32 Mbyte max see Section 7 1 Standard RAM Drive 3 256kbyte
377. ll other parameters 19 2 1 System configuration The following shows an example procedures for setting up the multiple PLC system parameters GX Developer gt lo a oa e e leo 2 2 Q amp I dcl of s 3 S3 5 53 2 ol log oloo a l l ee 2 2 191 19 19 9 EJE ESEJE 2 jaja jalal S5 5 lies 5 5 2 Z8 2j S5 Tol S 5 js au 2 s z lE o o zi zi oOo Zz Zz a 2 N pas D fo A No 2 intelligent function module No 3 input module No 3 output module No 4 input module No 4 output module 19 3 19 3 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 19 2 2 Creating new systems GX Developer started up Refer to GX Developer operating manual PC parameter window on the Refer to GX Developer operating manual GX Developer opened Qn H Parameter x Select Multiple PLC Settings to display the multiple PLC T Sail aro Cae setup window Lae Comment Setting the number of CPUs required item No of PLC Onine madide change 7 e Sets the number of CPU modules to be No of PLC Ga re oD e e E niei mounted onto the main base unit with the __LO status outside the group cannot be taken Operating mode f Enor operation mode at the stop of PLE TT T WM Al station stop b By ston enone Ric In Theo F Al station stop by stop error of PLC2 Refresh
378. lt lt Sampling trace ready SM800 SM801 Sampling trace start SM802 Sampling trace executing SM803 Sampling trace trigger SM804 After sampling trace trigger SM805 Sampling trace complete When trace is interrupted from GX Developer the SM800 is also turned off 7 FUNCTION 2 Operation Procedure The sampling trace operation is performed in the following procedures Each operation is performed on the Sampling trace dialog box within the online mode trace menu a Trace Device Setting Set the device to perform sampling trace at the Trace data tab screen in the Sampling trace dialog box Sampling trace Execute and status Trace data Conditions Device specification Bit device Device Connect Coil Connect Coil Bit Device Maximum of 50 bit devices can be set as follows X DX Y DY M L F SM V B SB e T contact T coil ST contact ST coil e C contact C coil oJ ahs ek Word device X J Y J B J_ SB BLL S Word Device Maximum of 50 word devices can be set as follows MELSEC Q Close Read file Write file Delete file Read from PLC Write to PLC Trace result EWE H e T current value ST current value C current value D SD W SW R Z ZR eU G J W J SW 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q b Setting
379. m and if MO and DO are designated by the sub routine CALL instruction the MO ON OFF data is transferred to FXO and the DO data is transferred to FD1 Sub routine program CALL source Sub routine program XO FXO CALL PO Mo DO Po H vov FD1 RO b Because the function devices used for each sub routine program CALL source can be set the same sub routine program can be used without regard to other sub routine CALL sources 2 Types of function devices There are 3 function device types function input devices FX function output devices FY and function register devices FD a Function input devices FX e These devices are used to designate inputs of ON OFF data to a sub routine program In the sub routine program these devices are used for reading and processing bit data designated by sub routine with argument CALL instruction All the QCPU bit data designation devices can be used b Function output devices FY e These devices are used to designate outputs of sub routine program operation results ON OFF data to the sub routine program CALL source e The operation results are stored at the device designated by using sub routine programs with arguments All bit data designation devices except Process CPU inputs X DX can be used 10 31 10 31 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q c Function registers FD e Function registers are used to designate data transfers between the sub routine CALL source and
380. m is the one on the slot on the right of the rightmost CPU module Refer to the corresponding error code for which number has Error been stored Error common common information PLC No 1 1 PLC No 2 2 PLC No 3 3 PLC No 4 4 information If a fuse blown or I O verify error occurred in the module loaded in the MELSECNET H remote O station the network number is stored into the upper 8 bits and the station number into the lower 8 bits Use the I O No to check the module where the fuse blown or I O verify error occurred File name Drive name Example Number Meaning ABCDEFGH IJK SD5 Drive B15 to B8 B7 to BO SD6 42H B 41H A SD7 File name 44H D 43H C SD8 ASCII code 8 characters 46H F 45H E SD9 48H H 47H G SD10 Extension 3 2EH 49H I 2EH SD11 ASCII code 3 characters 4BH K 4AH J SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 Vacant 3 Refer to REMARK 1 Extensions are shown below SDI0 Spi Higher8 bits Lowers bits Higher8 bits Extension name File type po STH THT 4o Deviceinitialvalue Pp STH TASH QDR Fileregister o po STH THM QDS Simulationdata 44H 51H 44H 4CH QDL Local device Trouble history data APP 19 APP 19 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Set by Corresponding Corresponding CPU Meaning Time 1 us units 0 to 999 us Time 1 ms units 0 to 65535 ms Va
381. me for main base unit and extension base unit SRAM card General name for Q2MEM 1MBS and Q2MEM 2MBS types SRAM card Flash card General name for Q2MEM 2MBF and Q2MEM 4MBF types Flash card ATA card General name for Q2MEM 8MBA Q2MEM 16MBA and Q2MEM 32MBA types ATA card Memory card General name for SRAM card Flash card and ATA card Power supply module Battery General name for Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Q62P Q63P and Q64P type power supply module General name for battery for Q6BAT type CPU module and Q2MEM BAT type SRAM card Extension cable General name for QCO5B QCO6B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B type extension cable Q5_B Control PLC General name for Q52B and Q55B that accept the Q Series I O and intelligent function modules Process CPU High Performance model QCPU motion CPU that controls any of the I O and intelligent function modules mounted on the main or extension base unit For example when the module mounted on slot 3 is controlled by the PLC No 2 the PLC No 2 is the control PLC of the module on slot 3 Non controlled module Non group module I O or intelligent function module other than the controlled module For example when the module mounted on slot 3 is controlled by the PLC No 2 the module on slot 3 is the non controlled module of the PLC Nos 1 3 and 4 Controlled module I O or intelligent function module controlled by the control PLC For example when the module mounted
382. me of parameter and program to be read from the standard ROM In the program settings in the PLC parameter designate the name of the program to be executed and its execution condition STOP key to the STOP position then switch the power ON Connect the GX Developer to the CPU module In PLC memory format in the GX Developer online mode select Program memory device memory and press Execute format the program memory Set the CPU modules RUN See Section 10 13 2 ERR LED switches ON MELSEC Q 12 3 12 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAMS TO PROCESS CPU MELSEC Q 2 In Write to PLC Flash ROM in the GX Developer online mode select Standard ROM and write the parameter data and crated program Use the CPU modules RESET L CLR switch to execute a reset CPU module s BOOT If a boot file setting is not made LED switches ON or when writing parameters or programs onto the program memory the BOOT LED does not light up 12 4 12 4 12 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAMS TO PROCESS CPU MELSEC Q 12 2 Procedure for Multiple Programs This section describes the procedure for writing multiple programs split up according to function process designer to the Process CPU and executing them 12 2 1 Items to consider when creating multiple programs 12 5 To create multiple programs it is necessary to set in advance t
383. mer is set with parameters Low speed timer 1 to 1000ms 1ms unit default 100ms High speed timer 0 1 to 100ms 0 1ms unit default 10ms Default 0 point for low high speed retentive timer Switchover between the low high speed retentive timer is set by A instructions Number of use points Retentive timer ST The measurement unit of the low high speed retentive timer is set is set with parameters with parameters Low speed retentive timer 1 to 1000ms 1ms unit default 100ms High speed retentive timer 0 1 to 100ms 0 1ms unit default 10ms Normal counter default 1024 points CO to 1023 Counter C e Interrupt counter maximum 256 points default 0 point set with parameters Data register D Default 12288 points DO to 12287 Link register W Default 8192 points WO to 1FFF Annunciator F Default 2048 points FO to 2047 Edge relay V Default 2048 points VO to 2047 When a standard RAM is used The number of points of up to 131072 points can be used by block conversion in increments of 32768 points RO to 32767 e When a SRAM card 1Mbyte is used The number of points of up to 517120 points can be used by block conversion in increments of 32768 points RO to 32767 e When a SRAM card 2Mbyte is used The number of points of up to 1041408 points can be used by block conversion in increments of 32768 points RO to 32767 When a Flash card 2Mbyte is used The number of points of up to 1041408 poin
384. mmon pointers can be called from all programs executed by Process CPU If local pointers are used the stand by type program s sub routine programs will not be executed Program A Process CPU Program memory Standard ROM Memory card Main routine program Write Program A Common pointer Program B Stand by type program Yio gt H RET lt Y11 RET lt Y12 RET Program B Write el A ae END Use a common pointer x This does not have to be created in order 4 See section 10 13 1 for execution of a sub routine program that contains local devices x See Section 10 9 for details on common pointers and local pointers 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q c Gathering interrupt programs in a single program 1 Create the interrupt programs in order beginning from step 0 of the stand by type program An END instruction is required at the end of the interrupt program 2 Because there are no restrictions on the order of creating interrupt programs the pointer numbers need not be assigned in ascending order when creating multiple interrupt programs Program A Process CPU Program memory Standard Main routine ROM Memory card Papen Write Program A Program B Stand by type program Program B lot lt yi0 gt H RET H Interrupt lt program seH Hiri YH c ARET H
385. mode 1 Definition of direct mode In the direct mode the communication with the I O modules is performed when executing sequence program instructions With Process CPU direct mode I O processing can be performed by using direct access inputs DX and direct access outputs DY For details on direct I O see Section 10 2 1 and 10 2 2 respectively Process CPU Remote input refresh area CPU operation processing area 3 2 GX Developer Input X H device memory Output module memory e When an input contact instruction has been executed OR operation is executed for the input module s input information 1 and peripheral device input area s input information 2 and the result is stored in the input X device memory Then this data is then used as input information 3 at sequence program execution e When an output contact instruction has been executed Output information 4 is read from the output Y device memory and a sequence program is executed e When an output OUT instruction has been executed The sequence program s operation result 5 is output to the output module and is stored in the output Y device memory Fig 4 9 I O Information Flow in Direct Mode 1 The GX Developer input area can be turned ON and OFF by the following e Test operation by GX Developer e Writing from a serial communication module 2 The output Y device memory can be turned ON and OFF b
386. monitor file high speed monitoring can be performed It is not necessary to set host station monitor file 2 Operation Procedure a For multi user monitoring operation create a user defined system file in the following steps 1 Choose Online Format PLC Memory to open the Format PLC Memory dialog box 2 Select program memory from the Target Memory list box 3 Atthe Format Type section select Create a user setting system area so that its radio button is checked 4 Specify the desired k steps in the System Area text box b The follwing figure illustrates an example in which 1k step is specified in the System Area text box Format PLC memory x Connection target information Connection interface com lt gt g module Taget PLCE Network No p Station No Host PLC type ar2PH Target memory Program memory Device memory x r Format Type Do not create a user setting system area the necessary system area only Create a user setting system area an area which speeds up monitoring from other stations System area fi K steps 1 A maximum of 15k steps can be set in 1 k step modules as a system area Only 1 k step can correspond to one station monitor file Therefore a maximum of 15 station monitor files can be set 3 Precautions a The detailed condition setting of the monitor can only be set from one area b Monitoring can be performed even if a station monitor file is
387. n 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 1 1 Main routine program 1 Definition of main routine program a Amain routine program begins from step 0 and ends at the END FEND instruction 1 b Inthe main routine program the instructions are executed from step 0 to the END FEND 1 If only one program is executed the program is operated from step 0 again after the END FEND instruction is executed and the END instruction is processed Step 0 F Program execution Main routine program Returns to step 0 when only one sage sas ict seetenceesee a program is being executed END FEND END FEND END processing 2 If multiple programs are being executed each of them will be operated according to the designated execution conditions after the END FEND instruction is processed 2 Execution conditions for main routine programs 2 If multiple programs are being executed the following five types of execution conditions can be designated by the program in the PLC parameters according to the application e Initial execution program See Section 4 2 1 e Scan execution type program See Section 4 2 2 e Low speed execution type program See Section 4 2 3 e Stand by type program See Section 4 2 4 e Fixed scan execution type program See Section 4 2 5 1 For details on the END FEND instruction refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions
388. n WDT is executed at the sequence program 6 WDT Watch dog timer This is the timer which monitors the scan time and its default setting is 200 ms This WDT setting can be designated within the range of 10 to 2000 ms range at the PLC RAS tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box Setting units 10 ms When using the low speed execution type program set the WDT greater than the scan time plus the execution time of the low speed execution type program If the scan time execution time for scan execution type program low speed execution type program exceeds the WDT setting value a WDT ERROR error code 5000 occurs and Process CPU operation is stopped The WDT measurement error is 10 ms Therefore a WDT setting t of 10 ms will result in a WDT ERROR if the scan time is in the following range 10 ms lt t lt 20 ms Use the GX Developer s Program Monitor List to check the execution time of a program being executed See Section 7 11 1 for details on the GX Developer s Program Monitor List 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 2 3 Low speed execution type program 1 Definition of low speed execution type program Low speed execution type programs are executed only during constant scanning surplus time or during the period designated for low speed program execution time a b c 1 3 For a constant scan time with enhanced control accuracy des
389. n CPU Motion CPU Motion CPU rm Power supply QCPU Power supply Motion CPU a 2 mei wn pas o z 6 A N Power supply Motion CPU Motion CPU PC CPU module 1 1 The PC CPU module occupies two slots Note The QCPU indicates the Process CPU or High Performance model QCPU b Motion CPUs are mounted together on the slot to the right of the Process CPU or High Performance model QCPU Process CPU and High Performance model QCPUs cannot be mounted to the right of Motion CPUs Mounting is allowed Mounting is not allowed CPU 0 1 2 CPU 0 1 2 gt D D gt gt ajla a fai amp a 2 o O O 2 O a O c c a c 5 2 2 2 5 g 2 a a c Mount the PC CPU module at the right end in the multiple PLC system No CPU module can be mounted on the right side of the PC CPU module CPU 0 1 2 8 Power supply Motion CPU d An empty slot is secured for future addition of a CPU module The number of CPUs including empty slots are set with the No of PLC setting and the type is set in the CPU empty setting from the slot immediately to the right of the number of CPUs set at the I O Assignment tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box For example when four CPUs have been set with the multiple PLC setting and two Process CPUs and one Motion CPU have been mounted the Process CPUs are mounted in the CPU slot and slot 0 the Motion CPU is mounted in slot 1
390. n electric shock or erroneous operation e When wiring in the PLC be sure that it is done correctly by checking the product s rated voltage and the terminal layout Connecting a power supply that is different from the rating or incorrectly wiring the product could result in fire or damage e External connections shall be crimped or pressure welded with the specified tools or correctly soldered Imperfect connections could result in short circuit fires or erroneous operation e Tighten the terminal screws with the specified torque If the terminal screws are loose it could result in short circuits fire or erroneous operation Tightening the terminal screws too far may cause damages to the screws and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction e Be sure there are no foreign substances such as sawdust or wiring debris inside the module Such debris could cause fires damage or erroneous operation e The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter such as wire offcuts from entering the module during wiring Do not peel this label during wiring Before starting system operation be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation Startup and Maintenance precautions lt gt DANGER e Do not touch the terminals while power is on Doing so could cause shock or erroneous operation e Correctly connect the battery Also do not charge disassemble heat place in fire
391. n execution type program e To execute at the same scan time at every scan use the constant scan function For details of the constant scan function see section 7 2 7 61 7 61 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 15 Self Diagnosis Function 1 What is Self Diagnosis Function a The self diagnosis is a function performed by the Process CPU itself to diagnose whether there is an error in the Process CPU b The self diagnosis function is used to prevent the Process CPU erroneous operation as well as preventive maintenance The self diagnosis processing detects and displays the error when an error occurs at the Process CPU power on or during Process CPU RUN mode It also stops Process CPU calculations 2 Processing for Error Detection a When the Process CPU detects an error it turns on ERR LEDs When an error is detected special relays SMO SM1 are turned ON and an error code of the error is stored in the special register SDO When multiple errors are detected error codes of the latest errors are stored in the special register SDO For error detection use special relays and special registers in programs so that these devices can interlock with sequencers and mechanical systems b The Process CPU stores 16 latest error codes See Section 7 16 The failure history can be checked in the GX Developer function PLC diagnostics mode The failure history can be stored even when the power is shut off using the battery backup 3 Pro
392. n module with which the error code and time of occurrence is stored in the buffer memory when an error is triggered is available time data read from the Process CPU The PLC No 1 time data will be stored as the time that the error occurred regardless of whether the module concerned is a control PLC or a non control PLC 13 6 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM This chapter explains the system configuration of multiple PLC systems and the precautions for multiple PLC system configuration 14 1 System Configuration This section explains the equipment configuration of multiple PLC systems the connections with peripheral device and an output of the system s configuration 1 Equipment configuration of multiple PLC system MITSUBISHI MELSEC Process CPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU High performance model CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Motion CPU Q172CPU Q172CPUN Q173CPU Q173CPUN PC CPU module Memory card 1 Q2MEM 1MBS Q2MEM 2MBS Q2MEM 2MBF Q2MEM 4MBF 14 Q2MEM 8MBA Q2MEM 16MBA Q2MEM 32MBA Power supply module I O module Intelligent function module of the Q Series Motion only module Main base unit Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B Extension of Q Series modules
393. n program ROM Main program RAM Subprogram 1 RAM Subprogram 2 RAM Subprogram 3 RAM Subprogram 1 D9016 SD1016 Program ROM e Indicates which Sequence program is run presently number Subprogram 2 One value of 0 to B is stored in BIN code ROM Subprogram 3 ROM Main program E PROM Subprogram 1 E PROM Subprogram 2 E PROM Subprogram 3 E PROM If scan time is smaller than the content of SD520 the D9017 SD1017 SD520 Sean time Minimum Scari time value is newly stored at cachi END Namely the 10 ms units minimum value of scan time is stored into SD520 in BIN code n tim n time i red in BIN h END an D9018 SD1018 SD524 Sean time Scan ti G Scan time is stored i code at eac and 10 ms units always rewritten APP 38 APP 38 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued ACPU Special Conversion Special Register after Conversion Special Register for Modification Corresponding CPU SD1019 D1020 D1021 SD1028 SD526 1 second counter Clock data Clock data D SD213 D9019 D9020 D9021 D9022 D9025 D9026 D9027 D9028 Clock data Clock data Maximum scan time 10 ms units Constant scan time User sets in 10 ms units Scan time 1 ms units Count in units of Ims Clock data year month Clock data day hour Clock data minute second Clock data day of week If scan time is large
394. n stage numbers starting from 1 to 7 to the extension base units in the connected order starting from the one connected to the main base unit 2 Cautions for assigning extension stage numbers to extension base units a Assign consecutive numbers to extension stages If you assign stage numbers to base units in Auto mode and assign some stage numbers to no modules 0 is assigned to the skipped stage as the number of slots Consequently the number of empty slots does not increase The skipped stage is also assigned with 0 of I O point b It is impossible to set and use the same extension stage number with two or more extension base units 5 c You cannot use the system if two or more connector pins are inserted to the stage setting connector On the contrary you cannot use the system if no connector pin is inserted to the stage setting connector 01234567 gt To g 5 Setting of extension 318 ans Q38B i i stage 3 gt Main base unit ate J Stage setting connector 8 9 101112131415 gt cel a oo 5 38 5 Q68B oo oo amp PE 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 aA 2 6 Extension base unit for mounting module oo a Q68B L corresponding to the Q Series 38 L Q5 _ B Q6L_ B is connected to xo i the main base unit or Q5 _ B Q6 _B 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 oo gt oo 3 Q gt or 2 Q
395. n type program b See Section 10 6 2 for details on index register processing when an interrupt program a fixed scan execution type program is executed during execution of low speed execution type program c The low speed program execution time should be set so that sum of the scan time low speed program execution time sum is less than the WDT setting value d The COM instruction can not be used in low speed execution type programs e Low speed execution type programs can also be executed with scans that execute the initial execution type programs Establish an interlock with SM402 and SM403 for the circuit that validates the low speed execution type program s operation after the scan execution type program has been executed f When the constant scan time and low speed program execution time have been set PRO TIME OVER error code 5010 will occur if surplus time of constant scan lt low speed program execution time 5 Low speed END processing The low speed END processing is performed when all the low speed execution type programs are executed The following processing is performed for the low speed END processing e Low speed program special relay special register setting e Low speed execution type program write during RUN e Low speed scan time measurement e Low speed execution type program watch dog timer reset When the low speed END processing is completed the low speed execution type program is executed f
396. nd SM1198 SM1198 on on X 1800 to 1FFO Data recovery of e Recovers the setting data stored in the CPU at restart SM1199 nihe sam M OFF Data recovery disabled when sampling trace status latch is executed ping ON Data recovery enabled e SM1199 should be ON to execute again Unnecessary trace status latch SA d f when writing the data again from peripheral devices APP 14 APP 14 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Meaning Details Relay Conversion Modification Depends on whether or not the ZNRD word device ZNRD instruction LRDP instruction OFF Not accepted read instruction has been received SM1200 for ACPU i e Used in the program as an interlock for the ZNRD ON Accepted reception for instruction master station Use the RST instruction to reset ZNRD instruction siio LRDP instruction OFF Not completed ON End completion for master station e Use the RST instruction to reset ZNWR instruction Depends on whether or not the ZNWR word device LWTP instruction write instruction has been received SM1202 a ACPU OFF Notaccepted ee in the program as an interlock for the ZNWR i ON Accepted 3 reception for instruction master station Use the RST instruction to reset ZNWR instruction Depends on whether or not the ZNWR word device LWTP instruction OFF Not completed wri
397. nding iL Corresponding X memory memory C Use the folowing fie a Conespending _ Filename memory File name Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple PLC tings Defaut Check Ena Cancel Use the following files is selected Not used or Use the same file name as the program is selected File register setting E Creating new device memory screen Device Label RO Z Display ieit integer z pec z Ro Ra2767 2 3 4 a at Device name o 1 s 6 7 character string 3 RO RS R16 R24 R32 R40 Ras R56 R64 R72 R80 Rae R36 R104 R112 R120 Writing of file register i j watone a Online write to PLC screen Connecting interface EOMT lt gt PLE module PLC Connection New No Fi StationNo Host PLCtype Qi2PH SS Target memory Memory card FiAM z_e f Fie selection Device data Program Common Local Param Piog _ Select all Cancel all selections Close Pe Oran Password setup Oman Related functions J MAIN2 I MAN3 Transfer setup EHE Device comment COMMENT Eae EHE Parameter O PLC Network Remote password Remote operation EVES Fie register Gas ASST i SA Pe Format PLC memory Wile rene Arrange PLC memory Range specification ZR 0 KA Create tile a Total free space ates eel oye
398. ng with the MC protocol For details of the MC protocol refer to the following manual Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual 1 When the END processing is performed for the scan where the remote PAUSE command was accepted the PAUSE status contact SM204 is turned on When the scan after the PAUSE status contact is turned on is executed to the END process it enters the PAUSE status and stops the calculations 2 When the remote RUN command is received the sequence program calculations are performed again from step 0 Remote PAUSE command Remote RUN command SM204 RUN PAUSE ON ON when PAUSE condition met status PAUSE status Fig 7 7 PAUSE Time Chart with GX Developer 3 Precaution To set the output Y ON OFF status when change to the PAUSE status perform an interlock with the PAUSE status contact SM204 M20 X000 Si ca lt Yo71 4 SM204 lt Y072 4 Y70 ON OFF is determined with the k Y070 gt ONOFF of the M20 in the PAUSE status Turns off at PAUSE status Turns on at PAUSE status 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 6 3 Remote RESET 1 What is Remote RESET a The remote RESET resets the Process CPU externally when the Process CPU is at STOP status Even if the Process CPU RUN STOP switch is at RUN the reset can be performed when the Process CPU is stopped and an error that can be detect
399. nge screens Setting 1 gt I All station stop by stop error of PLC4 Send range for each PLC PLC side device PLC PLC share memory G starting Point Start End Start End No 1 0l No 2 0j No 3 oj No 4 0 The applicable device of head device is B M Y D W R ZR The unit of points that send range for each PLC is word Settings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Diversion of multiple PLC paremeter Check End Cancel_ a When Load output condition outside of group has been set 1 Loads to the host PLC s output Y the ON OFF data that is output to the output and intelligent function modules by the other PLCs by performing output refresh before a sequence program calculation starts 2 Output Y loading is performed for the modules mounted onto the following additional base unit slots I O allocation type Mounted module Output module Intelligent function module a None Input module PN Output Output module Pp l Intelli Intelligent function module Sa 3 Itis possible to load output ON OFF data being controlled by other PLCs with direct access output Remote station output such as empty slots MELSECNET H and CC Link cannot be loaded Use automatic refresh of CPU shared memory and send the ON OFF output data for remote stations to use the ON OFF output data for MELSECNET H CC Link and other remote stations in other PLCs
400. nloading program from program memory e PSWAP Load Unload For details on the PLOAD PUNLAOD and PSWAP instructions refer to the QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions Even if a program file is changed while the Process CPU is in RUN status the settings specified at the Program tab screen the PLC Parameter dialog box will remain unchanged When the Process CPU is in STOP status the settings made at the Program tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box must be adjusted to any changes addition change or deletion of program names made when the Process CPU was in RUN status If no adjustment is made at the Program tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box an error may occur when the Process CPU enters into RUN status from STOP status 4 Precautions for Executing Programs in the Standard ROM Memory Card a For boot run store parameters PLC parameters of the boot file setting in a standard RAM or memory card If parameters are stored in a program memory and a parameter valid drive is set to Program Memory the boot file setting made in the PLC Parameter dialog box is ignored As a result a boot run is not performed when power is turned on or when the PLC is reset If programs are written in the program memory during RUN status while a boot run is performed from a memory card RAM any change made will be reflected in the programs stored on the memory card RAM For deta
401. nning While the Write to PLC Flash ROM function is executed the read write cannot be made from other modules This may cause a time out on the side of other modules POINT When the Process CPU is expanded to STOP status and Write to PLC Flash ROM is being performed do not set it in RUN status RUN cannot be performed normally during Write to PLC Flash ROM Perform RUN after Write to PLC Flash ROM is completed 6 PROCESS CPU FILES MELSEC Q 6 6 2 Automatic write to standard ROM Auto Download all Data from Memory card to Standard ROM Automatic write to standard ROM function writes the parameters and sequence programs stored on the memory card into the Process CPU s standard ROM without using GX Developer The writing of parameters and sequence programs into the memory card is performed by GX Developer Version 7 10L or later With this function the parameters and sequence programs are booted from the memory card to the program memory and the booted parameters and sequence programs are then written from the program memory into the standard ROM as shown below Process CPU Memory card Parameters Parameters Boot e Sequence e Sequence programs programs Standard ROM e Parameters e Sequence programs wating Automatic write to standard ROM is used to change the Process CPU programs that perform ROM operations with the standard ROM Overwriting in the standa
402. nns 14 9 14 2 5 Parameters that enable the use of multiple PLC SyStemMS c csecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaees 14 10 14 2 6 Resetting the multiple PLC system 00 cceececceceeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeaeenecaecaeeeaesaesaeseeeeeeeaesaeeeeeeaeeaee 14 14 14 2 7 Processing when CPU module Stop errors OCCUF cecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaesaeseeeeaeeaeeaeeeeeeaetaee 14 15 14 2 8 Reducing the time required for multiple PLC system proceSSing e ceseeeeeeteeteeteeeeteeeees 14 17 14 2 9 Precautions for making online module CHANGE eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeenas 14 18 15 1 Concept behind Allocating I O Numbers ccsccecceceeseeeeceeceeeeeeeaecaeseeseaesaecaeseeeeaeeaesaeseeseaesaeeeeaeeaees 15 1 15 1 1 I O modules and intelligent function module I O NUMbELS csecceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaes 15 1 15 1 2 W O number of CPU module o0 eceeecececceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaecaeeaeeaecaecaeeaeeaeeaesaeeeeeeaeeaeseeeeaeeaeeeseaeeaee 15 2 15 2 Purpose of PLC Parameter I O Assignments with GX Developer ccecceseeeeeeeeeteeeesereeeeeeeaes 15 3 16 1 Automatic Refresh of CPU Shared Memory cccecceseseeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaecaecaeseeeeaesaesaeseeseaeeaeeaeseeeees 16 2 16 2 Communication with Multiple PLC Instructions and Intelligent Function Module Devices 16 9 16 3 Interactive Communications between The Process CPU and Motion CPU eects 16 1
403. nsion J 616263 stages stages M4A0K4COKEO 500 520 SISISISIS BFAD FAFF S1 FSS 760 780 SS Prohibit Prohibit Power supply module Power supply module IN ES OUT JIN COUT When module is installed an error occurs Number of CPU CPU1 PLC No 1 CPU2 PLC No 2 CPU3 PLC No 3 CPU4 PLC No 4 Maximum number 7 extension stages of extension stages Module count setting for 1 2 3 Maximum number ihe multiple PLC setting 64 modules 63 modules 62 modules 4096 Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B Q52B Q55B Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B QC05B QC06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B 1 A maximum of 7 extension base units can be used 2 Do not use extension cable longer than 13 2 m 43 28 feet 3 When using an extension cable it should not be connected to or allowed to come close to the main circuit high voltage and large current 4 When setting the number of extension stages set the number in ascending order to avoid setting the same number repeatedly 5 Connect an extension cable between the OUT connector of an extension base unit and the IN connector of another extension base unit 6 An error may occur if more than 66 main base extension base units are mounted 7 Refer to section 14 2 1 for mounting motion CPUs 8 For the O number of multiple PLC systems other than above see Section 15 1 1 14 3 14 3 14
404. ode is based on the relay control sequence ladder Programming expressions are similar to the relay control sequence ladder e Relay symbolic language programming occurs in ladder block units A ladder block is the smallest unit of sequence program operation with the ladder beginning from the left bus and ending at the right bus Left bus a contact b contact Coil output Right bus Ladder blocks x XO to X5 _ Indicate inputs Y20 to Y24 Indicate outputs Fig 4 1 Ladder Block b List mode The list mode uses dedicated instructions instead of the contact symbols coil symbols etc used in the ladder mode Contact a contact b and coil instructions are as follows acontact LD AND OR e b contact LDI ANI ORI CONS E EES OUT 3 Program operation In sequence program the instructions are executed in order beginning from step 0 and ending at the END FEND With ladder mode the instructions in a ladder block are executed in order beginning from left bus to the right bus When one ladder block is completed the next downward ladder block will be executed Ladder mode List mode Left to right LD oe AND 2 7 8 9 LD mmm a Executed in ped order beginning OR from step 0 to AND the END instruction OONDOBRWN O 10 CEND O Number 1 to 11 indicate the operating order of the sequence program Step No Fig 4 2 Sequence Program Operatio
405. oduct information list window see Section 2 3 e See Section 14 2 4 for details on restrictions on the number that can be used with intelligent function modules 14 7 14 7 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 14 2 3 Modules that have mounting restrictions The following table indicates restrictions on the number of modules that can be mounted in multiple PLC systems Ensure that the number of modules mounted is within these ranges Ce A a Product Model mounted per system mounted per PLC e QJ71LP21 e QJ71BR11 Maximum of four PLC to PLC Maximum of four PLC to PLC e QU71LP21 25 networks and remote I O networks and remote I O e QU71LP21G networks networks e QJ71LP21GE e QU71E71 e QJ71E71 B2 Maximum of four Maximum of four e QJ71E71 100 Interruption modules e QI60 Maximum of four Only one x A maximum of 4 modules per PLC 16 modules per system can be controlled if the network parameters for CC Link are set and controlled by GX Developer There is no restriction in the number of modules when the parameters are set by the instructions dedicated to the CC Link Q series MELSECNET H network modules Q series Ethernet interface modules 14 8 14 8 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 14 2 4 Compatible GX Developers and GX Configurators 1 Compatible GX Developers GX Developer Version 7 10L or later are compatible with on multiple PLC systems GX Developer Version 7 09K o
406. of milliseconds designated by SD415 Starts from OFF when the PLC power is turned ON or the CPU module is reset Note that the ON OFF status changes when the designated time has elapsed during the execution of the program e This relay repeats ON OFF at designated scan intervals e Starts from OFF when the PLC power is turned ON or the CPU module is reset The ON OFF scan intervals are set by the DUTY instruction H mU n1 Scan interval of ON n2 Scan interval of OFF nf n2 SM420 H For low speed execution type programs of SM420 to SM424 S Every END processing S Every END M9037 M9038 processing S Every END M9039 processing S Every END New processing S Every END New processing S Status New change M9030 S Status M3031 change M9032 M9033 S Status M9034 format change change S Status New change M9020 S Every END processing S Every END processing New APP 6 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Relay List 4 Scan information e 2e Low speed i exection type OFF Sanpa ornot Goes ON when low speed execution type program is rogram executed EVS VEND progra ON Execution under way ust processing execution flag e Reads the module service interval designated by SD550 to SD551 and SD552 when this relay switches from OFF to ON Reads module OFF Ignored service interval ON Read 5 Memory cards alles cae
407. of points for PLC No 3 and PLC No 4 is 0 16 3 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM 16 4 Change screens Setting 1 MELSEC Q 4 The CPU shared memory occupied with automatic refresh refreshing becomes the total of setting 1 to setting 4 The first and last addresses of the CPU shared memory being used will be displayed in hexadecimals when the number of transmission points are set The PLC for which the transmission points have been set in setting 1 and setting 2 will become the last address of the setting 2 CPU shared memory Up until 811H is used for PLC No 1 and PLC No 2 and up until 821H is used for the PLC No 4 in the illustration shown below The PLCs that transmits only setting 1 will become the last address of the setting 1 CPU shared memory PLC No 3 is up to the setting 1 address in the illustration shown below Refresh settings Change screens Setting 1 7 Send range for each PLC PLC side device PLC PLC share memory G Dev starting PLC No 1 transmission range Stat End 3E j 0800 OSOF wO WOF 0800 080F i SS gt SS Last CPU device No4 32 0800 b Uu _ Y tL Last address of each CPU shared memory PLC share memory 5 The same number of transmission points must be set for all PLCs on the multiple PLC system A PARAMETER ERROR occurs if the number of transmission points for one PLC is different CPU devices The following devices can be used
408. ogram operation results to an external destination Internal relays M should be used when a latch memory backup is not required See Section 10 2 3 for details on internal relays 10 11 10 11 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 5 Anunciators F 1 Definition a Anunciators are internal relays used for fault detection programs created by the user b When anunciators switch ON a special relay SM62 switches ON and the Nos and quantity of the anunciators which switched ON are stored at the special registers SD62 to SD79 e Special relay SM62 Switches ON if even one anunciator switches ON e Special register ceeeeeeee SD62 No of first anunciator which switched ON is stored here SDZ The number quantity of anunciators which are ON is stored here SD64 to SD79 Anunciator Nos are stored in the order in which they switched ON The same anunciator No is stored at SD62 and SD64 The anurciator No stored at SD62 is also registered in the fault history area c Using annunciators for a fault detection program an equipment fault or fault presence absence annunciator number can be checked by monitoring the special register SD62 to SD79 when the special relay SM62 switches ON z S EXIME er ee a nn ne a a ee gs ns 1 The program which outputs the No of the ON annunciator F5 is shown below Fault detection program r 1 1 1
409. ograms Execution during network refreshing When the execution conditions of fixed scan execution type programs are established during the network refreshing the network refresh is suspended and interrupt programs are executed Therefore even if the block assurance of cyclic data for each station is made in the MELSECNET H network system the above operation will not be assured when a device set to be refreshed is used in the interrupt programs 1 10ms sl 10ms aon ie y execution Link refresh operation is suspended and the interrupt program is executed Fig 4 5 Execution of Fixed Scan Execution Type Programs during Network Refreshing 1 Refer to the following manual on the block assurace of cyclic data for each station Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual 4 31 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS Fixed scan execution xo MELSEC Q e Execution during END processing When the execution condition of fixed scan execution type programs are established during the wait time of END instruction while the constant scan is executed the fixed scan execution type programs are executed f Perform the processing of the index register when the program is switched from the scan execution type program to the fixed scan execution type program by seeing Section 10 6 2 Setting of fixed scan execution type program for high speed executi
410. ograms in the same way that normal registers are used However data can be written as needed in order to control the CPU modules and remote I O modules Data stored in the special registers are stored as BIN values if no special designation has been made to the contrary The headings in the table that follows have the following meanings e Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user and if it is set by the system when setting is performed lt Set by gt S Set by system U Set by user Sequence programs or test operations from GX Developer S U Set by both system and user lt When set gt Indicated only for registers set by system Each END Set during each END processing Initial Set only during initial processing when power supply is turned ON or when going from STOP to RUN Status change Set only when there is a change in status Error Set when error occurs Instruction execution Set when instruction is executed Request Set only when there is a user request through SM etc Indicates corresponding special register in ACPU D9 _ _ _ Change and notation when there has been a change in contents e Items indicated as New have been newly added for Process CPU e Indicates the corresponding CPU type name Rem Can be applied to Process CPU and MELSECNET H remote I O modules Set by When set Corresponding ACPU mo HOLI Corresponding CPU Can be applied to all types of CPU Remote
411. oints exceeding the points of the actually mounted module are set as dummies 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q c Be sure to set the same module type for the mounted module and the I O assignment If the module type of the I O assignment is different from that of the actually mounted module the module may not work normally For the intelligent function module make sure that the numbers of I O points are the same Actually installed module O assignment Input module Output Empt Output module Input Empt Input module output module Intelligent Error SP UNIT LAY ERR Empty Empty Intelligent function module Input output Error SP UNIT LAY ERR Empty slot Intelligent d Be sure to assign the I O numbers so that the last I O number is within the range of FFF or less An error SP UNIT LAY ERR occurs when the last I O number exceeds FFFH System monitor of GX Developer shows kx ag an I O address 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 5 7 Examples of I O Number Assignment This section shows the examples of the I O number assignment using GX Developer 1 When changing the number of points of an empty slot from 16 to 32 points Reserve 32 points to the empty slot slot No 3 so that the I O numbers do not change when a 32 point input module is mounted in the future The empty slot for slot No 12 is not changed from 16 points 1 a System configuration and I O number assignment before the I O a
412. om OH to FFFFFFFFH Processing object R2 R3 R3 R2 Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bts ias lt e Thecontent of the file register is retained even when the power is turned off or reset It is not initialized even if latch clear is performed Use a sequence program to initialize the file register when the power is turned off or reset For example to clear the RO to R2047 file registers upon power on of the PLC write 0 using an FMOV instruction 10 43 10 43 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 7 1 File register capacity 1 Using the Standard RAM A maximum of 128 k file register points can be stored in the standard RAM The standard RAM holds file registers and local devices When local devices are not used all 128 k points can be assigned for file registers 2 Using the SRAM Card The size of a file can be expanded at the rate of 32 k words per block up to 32 blocks 1017 k words The number of expandable blocks depends on the size of programs or device comments stored on a memory card 3 Using the Flash Card The size of a file can be expanded at the rate of 32 k words per block up to 32 blocks 1018 k words The number of expandable blocks depends on the size of programs or device comments stored on a memory card For details regarding the Process CPU memory cards see Section 6 1 10 7 2 Differences in memory card access method by memory card type File registers are stored in three types of memories standa
413. on SM776 see Appendix 1 10 66 10 66 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q f Using local devices when executing an interrupt fixed scan execution type program It is possible to use local devices in the file where an interrupt fixed scan execution type program is stored when executing an interrupt fixed scan execution type program The local devices can be set available unavailable by special relay SM777 ON OFF setting 1 Switching over local devices by setting ON OFF for a special relay SM777 Executes operation with the local devices in the file which was executed before the execution of the interrupt fixed scan execution Executes operation with the local devices in the file where the interrupt fixed scan execution type program is stored Operation at SM777 OFF File name DEF File name ABC Standby program XO DECPL D1 0 HH Occurrence X2 R enone en o 7 of interrupt NCP DO Execution of the i Interrupt i ii interrupt program i i program RET END aa Read write of the Local devices used by local devices Local devices used by the file name ABC the file name DEF Operation at SM777 ON File name DEF File name ABC Standby program XO DECP D1 0 HF Occurrence 7 o
414. on and overhead time When fixed scan execution type programs are executed the processing below is performed e Save and return of index resister e Save and return of file name of file resister in use If High Speed Execution is selected from the interrupt program fixed scan execution type program at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box the processing above will not be performed As a result the overhead time for the fixed scan execution type programs can be reduced CPU TYPE OVERHEAD TIME us High speed execution is not selected High speed execution is selected Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 4 Cautions on programming a If a device is turned ON in a fixed scan execution type program by a PLS instruction it is kept ON until the same type of the fixed scan execution type program is executed again XO type program execution H PLS MO H PLS MO END 0 0 JENDENDo END O O END END 0 ON X0 mo OFF z Switched OFF by PLS M0 instruction Switched ON by PLS M0 instruction at XO leading edge OFF to ON b During the execution of a fixed scan execution type program interruption is prohibited DI Therefore do not execute EI DI instructions during the programming of the fixed scan execution type program c During the programming of a fixed scan execution type program a timer cannot be used Because the timer updates the current values and turns O
415. on slot 3 is controlled by the PLC No 2 the module on slot 3 is the controlled module of the PLC No 2 CPU numbers Numbers assigned to differentiate between the Process CPU High Performance model QCPU and motion CPU mounted in a multi PLC system The CPU on the CPU slot is the PLC No 1 the one on slot 0 is the PLC No 2 the one on slot 1 is the PLC No 3 and the one on slot 2 is the PLC No 4 Single PLC system System mounted with the Process CPU on the CPU slot to exercise control PC CPU module MELSEC Q Series corresponding PC CPU module Non control PLCs Process CPU High Performance model QCPUs and or Motion CPUs other than the control PLC For example when the module mounted on slot 3 is controlled by the PLC No 2 the CPU Nos 1 3 and 4 are the non control PLCs of the module on slot 3 Multiple PLC system System mounted with up to four Process CPU High Performance model QCPU Motion CPU and PC CPU module on the main base unit to exercise control 1 OVERVIEW 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q This User s Manual describes the hardware specifications and handling methods of the Process CPU The Manual also describes those items related to the specifications of the power supply module main base unit extension base unit extension cable memory card and battery The Process CPU is a process control compatible CPU module Based on the High Performance model QCPU the Process CPU has the follo
416. onding ACPU mgo For details on the following items refer to the following e Networks For Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network e For Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network e SFC QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC APP 1 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Relay List 1 Diagnostic Information eee ON if diagnosis results show error occurrence Includes when an annunciator is ON and when an error is detected with CHK instruction e Stays ON subsequently even if normal operations restored Comes ON when an error occurs as a result of self diagnosis Stays ON subsequently even if normal operations restored OFF No error Diagnostic errors ON Error OFF No self diagnosis errors ON Self diagnosis Self diagnosis S Error error OFF No error common Error common information When SMO is ON ON if there is error common information ON Error common information information OFF No error common Error individual information When SMO is ON ON if there is error individual information ON Error common information information SM50 Error reset OFF gt ON Error reset Conducts error reset operation r e See section 11 3 for further information ON if battery voltage at CPU module or memory card drops below rated value Stays ON subsequently even after normal operation is restored e Synchronous with BAT
417. onfigured By mounting the remote master station of the MELSECNET H you can configure the multiplex remote I O system of the MELSECNET H 1 For details of the added instructions and auto tuning function refer to the QnPHCPU Programming Manual Process Control Instructions 2 For details of online module change refer to Section 4 6 of this manual 3 Use the Process CPU of GX Developer Version 7 10L or later 1 OVERVIEW 6 MELSEC Q Controllable multiple I O points All Process CPUs support 4096 points X Y0 to FFF as the number of actual I O points capable of getting access to the I O module installed on the base unit They also support 8192 points max X YO to 1FFF as the number of I O devices which can be used in the remote I O stations such as MELSECNET H remote I O NET and CC Link data link Lineup according to program capacity The optimum CPU module for the program capacity to be used can be selected Q12PHCPU 124k step Q25PHCPU 252k step Realised high speed processing Depending on the type of the sequencer high speed processing has been realized Example when LD instruction is used Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 0 0384 us In addition an access to the intelligent function module or an increase in speed of the link refresh of the network have been realized by the connection system System bus connection of the newly developed base unit Access to the intelligent function module 20s word approx 7 times
418. op protective circuits positioning upper and lower limits switches and interlocking forward reverse operations 2 When the PLC detects the following problems it will stop calculation and turn off all output in the case of a In the case of b it will stop calculation and hold or turn off all output according to the parameter setting a The power supply module has over current protection equipment and over voltage protection equipment b The PLC CPUs self diagnosis functions such as the watch dog timer error detect problems In addition all output will be turned on when there are problems that the PLC CPU cannot detect such as in the I O controller Build a fail safe circuit exterior to the PLC that will make sure the equipment operates safely at such times Refer to LOADING AND INSTALLATION in Process CPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection for example fail safe circuits 3 Output could be left on or off when there is trouble in the output module relay or transistor So build an external monitoring circuit that will monitor any single outputs that could cause serious trouble Design Precautions lt gt DANGER e When overcurrent which exceeds the rating or caused by short circuited load flows in the output module for a long time it may cause smoke or fire To prevent this configure an external safety circuit such as fuse e Build a circuit that turns on the external power supply when
419. operations which cause a file shift File size change e PLC memory arrangement e New file creation e Writing a program file during the RUN status e Writing a program in excess of memory allocated for Write during RUN e Reading a file with the PLOAD instruction Files stored in the memory card will not be lost unless the memory card is removed from the Process CPU while the power is OFF If the above operations are done the half processed data will be stored in the Process CPU internal memory and will be restored when power is switched ON again A battery backup is required in order to save internal memory data for this reason 2 Simultaneous access of a single file from multiple GX Developers The Process CPU permits access to a single file from a single GX Developer When access to the same file is made from multiple GX Developers the file is accessible only when the current processing is completed by the GX Developer prior to the next processing For details on the PLOAD instruction refer to the QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 6 PROCESS CPU FILES MELSEC Q 6 9 3 File size The file size differs with the types of files used When a program memory standard RAM standard ROM and memory card are used calculate the size of a file by referring to the table 6 7 shown below Space for file storage is available as shown below e Program memory standard ROM 4096 bytes 1 k steps e Memory card
420. or For For program B program B program B yy For H For i For program C program C program C The local device may not be designated with some instructions Refer to the allowable device in the programming manual of each instruction for details See Section 10 1 2 item 2 for details on the number of words for local devices 10 64 10 64 10 DEVICES Sequence program 10 65 Local device For program A For program B For MELSEC Q d Local device designation MO Local device 1 Program A In order to use the above devices as local devices the usable local device range must be designated at the Device tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box Note that the range designated for local devices applies to all programs and cannot be changed for individual programs For example if the local device range is designated as MO to M100 this range will be used for local devices in all programs Program B Program C This range becomes the local device range for all programs 1 al 2 3 Program A Restored program C e faa Local device When local device settings are designated the drive and file name where the local device data is to be stored must be designated at the PLC file tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box To write data from the GX Developer onto the Process CPU specify whe
421. or enforced ON and OFF g Sequence program operations take precedence when used with an output Y contact h The enforced ON OFF and cancelled status including those that are not set up can be confirmed with GX Developer Confirmation is also allowed with the MODE judgment LED when at least one device is registered the MODE LED will flicker i Itis possible to register enforced ON OFF for external I O in the same CPU module from multiple GX Developers connected to the network However when enforced ON OFF is registered in the same device from multiple GX Developers it will assume the most recent registered ON OFF status Owing to this there are cases when the GX Developer executed first will display different ON OFF information to the CPU module ON OFF information When performing enforced ON OFF from multiple GX Developers ensure that the most up to date information is set with the Load Registration Status switch before executing the enforced ON OFF procedure 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Operation procedure The operation procedure is explained below a Register enforced ON OFF for the specified device Online Debug Enforced I O Registration Cancellation It is possible to perform enforced ON or enforced OFF for a specified device by selecting Enforced ON Registration or Enforced OFF Registration after the device has been specified on the Enforced I O Registration Cancellation setup screen Registr
422. ork If no designation has been made concerning active or S Initial New standby active is assumed For refresh from link to CPU B W etc indicate whether ON Does not read to read from the link module For refresh from CPU to link B W etc designate ON Does not write whether to write to the link module OFF Operative network ON Standby network Goes ON for standby network If no designation has been made concerning active or S Initial New standby active is assumed OFF Reads For refresh from link to CPU B W etc indicate whether U New ON Does not read to read from the link module For refresh from CPU to link B W etc designate OFF Writes ON Does not write OFF Operative network ON Standby network whether to write to the link module e Goes ON for standby network If no designation has been made concerning active or S Initial New standby active is assumed For refresh from link to CPU B W etc indicate whether ON Does not read to read from the link module For refresh from CPU to link B W etc designate ON Does not write whether to write to the link module OFF Normal ON Error OFF SFC program absent ON SFC program present OFF SFC program stop ON SFC program start OFF Initial start ON Restart OFF Continuous transition not effective ON Continuous transition effective OFF When transition is executed ON When no
423. ossible to set the refresh function to divide ON OFF data into bit devices with Setting 1 and other data into word devices with Setting 2 The transmission range for each CPU is set in units of two CPU shared memory points two words Becomes 2 points when specifying the word device with the CPU device and 32 points when specifying the bit device PLC data for which the point is set at 0 with the range of transmission for each CPU will not be refreshed As the bit device becomes 16 points at one point of the CPU shared memory when refreshing is performed with 32 points between BO and B1F on the PLC No 1 and with 32 points between B20 and B3F on the PLC No 2 the number of transmission points is two for the PLC No 1 and two for the PLC No 2 The number of transmission points is a maximum of 2 k points 2 k words with a total of four ranges for each CPU module making a total of 8 k points 8 k words for all CPUs Ch Settin 1 lt 2 k points 2 k words 7 99 Sereens l per CPU Send range for each PLC PLC side device 8k points 8 k words F PLC share memory G for all CPUs Point N Sit End Stn end _ The CPU shared memory 7 Setting is in units of Noi 2 os 0801 PLC share memory 2 points 2 words Noz 21 os00 0801 is set in two points and the No3 4t i 0800 0803 bit device becomes 32 points Noa N ald 0800 801 Ba when bit device is specified Sse on the CPU device 16 3 Not refreshed as the number
424. ow KETS le PLC settings x A Online module changef Enable online module change Operating mode Whe n the online module exchange is enabled e gror ESR Error operation mode at the le Fa Allstetion stop by tput v Ga AET Refresh settings F Al station stop by stop enor of PLC3 Change screens Seting ea aon ee enara r EEEE Send range for each PLC PLC side device PLC FLC share memory G Dev starting Pont Start End Start End Nat o No 2 v No 3 0 Nod o The applicable device of head device is B M Y DW A ZR The unit of points that send range for each PLC is word L JSettings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Check End Cancel 2 Ensure that the CPU count set for the multiple PLC system is the same as the number of CPUs actually mounted When an empty slot is secured for the purpose of mounting additional CPU modules in the future set PLC Empty at the I O assignment tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box For example when setting 4 as No of PLC in the Multiple PLC settings screen and securing one of them for future use set slot 3 to PLC Empty indicated with the B arrow PLC name PLC system PLC file PLCRAS Device Program Boot fle SFC O assignment B 1
425. ow speed scan time Low speed scan time P 12 5ms 8ms 8ms 1 i i Low speed END Low speed END Low speed END processing execution processing execution processing execution 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q a a 2 Svnchronous method 7777777777 ttre sss s sss s sss sss ses 1 Constant scan time setting The low speed execution type program is operated under the following conditions as shown below e Constant scan time 8ms e Total scan execution type program time 4ms to 5ms e Execution time of low speed execution type program A ims e Execution time of low speed execution type program B 3ms e END processing low speed END processing Oms 0 ms is used to simplify the illustration END END END END processing processing processing processing 0 8 i 16 24 32 ms Leite py tee ey tp ete te pe pt tp S E S E O oE i a a a i on a 4ms 4 5ms 4ms 4ms 5ms Scan execution type program l ms A Low speed execution type program A H l l l ee 0 5ms 2 5ms 0 5ms Low speed execution type program B H H H l i e ts Gat an Constant scan wait time H n H m l l Low speed scan time Low speed scan time m gt 13ms i 15 5ms i Low speed END Low speed END 2 Low speed program execution time setting The low speed execution type program is operated under the following conditions as shown below e Low speed program execution time 3ms e Total scan exe
426. own below in the table M N Process CPU Built in Memory Card RAM Memory Card ROM emory Name y Program Memory Standard RAM Standard ROM SRAM Card Flash Card ATA Card Co ee x Intelligent function X s x x x X module parameter Program o x x x x Program ae aa eee Pe oe eo Devicecomment o x x a x a Deviceinitialvaue x x J x x x File register Local device Debug data Failure history data PLC user data x x Program file A The file write during RUN allows writing three types of files e Program program memory SRAM card ATA card t XXIX x x x x Writable data x Unwritable data A Writable data if access is not being made in sequence program Personal computer GX Developer e Device comment program memory SRAM card ATA card e File register standard RAM SRAM card Any other files cannot be written while the Process CPU is in the RUN status 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Precautions The precautions for file write during RUN are as follows a The file write during RUN can be executed when any of the following conditions is met A SFC program does not allow writing a batch of files during the RUN status 1 Program memory e When continuous space is available e When space is available 2 Memory card e When space is available b Please note that scan time could be extended as shown below in the table if the file write dur
427. p Section 17 2 Do not permit outputs to outside group e Permit or do not permit outputs to outside the group Section 17 2 Setting range of each CPU 0 to 2048 points in 2 point intervals module Max 4k points 4096 points system e Device on CPU side B M Y D R ZR Devices equivalent to the number of No setting points set for the transmission range Section 16 1 from the designated device number are occupied e 16 points are occupied with B M and Y for each point of transmission range 1 point is occupied with D W R and ZR for each point of transmission range 9 PARAMETER LIST MELSEC Q Table 9 1 Parameter List continued Network parameter here parameters for MELSECNET H Ethernet and CC No of boards in module 5000H Valid module during other Designates network parameters for MELSECNET H SNM2 a To Staton inherent parameter SNM Ethernet setting 1 Starting I O No Network No Initial settings Designates network parameters for Ethernet Open settings Routing information g No of boards in module CO00H Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote register RWr oye Special relay SB Special register SW Start I O No All ene count Retry count s count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No _ Stand by master station No ee Remote device station initial setting Designates network parameters for CC Link 9 PARAMETER LIST MELSEC Q
428. parameter mode PLC RAS setting Off Normal Flicker When an error that stops the operation is detected When automatic write to standard ROM is complete normally BOOT LED also flickers The detection status for the CHK instruction or annunciator F status is indicated On When an error is detected with the CHK instruction or when the annunciator is turned on Off Normal Flicker _ When the latch clear is executed Indicates the CPU module and memory card SRAM card battery status On When a battery error is detected due to low battery voltage Off Normal Indicates the execution status of the boot operation On When the execution is complete Off When not executed Fricker When automatic write to standard ROM is complete normally 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Method to turn off the LED The LED that is on can be turned off by the following operation Except for the reset operation ERR Executing the LEDR instruction after resolving the cause of ae eee er oe error After the cause of error is resolved cancel the error by operating the special relay SM50 and special register SD50 Only for the operation continue errors ea ED special register SD202 O Valid x Invalid x1 Special relay and special register contents SM50 uu When switch from OFF to ON the error is canceled for the error code stored in the SD50 SD50 The error code for the error to be canceled is store
429. peration Processing When Momentary Power Failure Occurs 2 When a power failure occurs for a period longer than the permitted power failure time The Process CPU starts initially PLC power is turned on The same operation processing as that after the following operation occurs e Power ON e Resetting using RESET L CLR switch e Remote setting using GX Developer 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS 4 6 Data Clear Processing MELSEC Q 1 Data clear The Process CPU clears all data except for the following when a reset operation is performed with RESET L CLR switch or power ON to OFF to ON a b O o aT NNN ee S Program memory data except for when clear program memory is set at boot specification Data in the memory card Device data with latch specification latch clear valid Device data with latch specification latch clear invalid File register data Failure history data when special register SD storage Data in c is cleared by operating latch clear with the RESET L CLR switch or operating remote latch clear from GX Developer See Section 7 6 4 for details on the remote latch clear 2 Device latch specification a b Specify the device latch latch range setting for each device at the Device tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box There are two types of latch range settings 1 Valid latch clear key Sets the latch range that can
430. ply Q68B 24 25 26 27 Power supply 15 3 15 3 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM 16 1 It is possible to perform the following interactive transmission between each CPU modules with a multiple PLC system Automatically refreshing the device data between each CPU modules with multiple PLC system parameter settings Data transfer between other Process CPU and PC CPU module via CPU shared memory using multiple PLC instructions Also data reading of Process CPU from CPU shared memory of Motion CPU using multiple PLC instructions Control command from the Process CPU to the Motion CPU with Motion dedicated PLC instructions Writing and reading of the device data from the Process CPU to the other CPU modules with communication dedicated instructions between multiple PLCs Also event issuance from Process CPU to PC CPU module using instructions dedicated to multiple PLC communication Automatic refresh of device data Automatic refresh of the CPU shared memory is a function of automatic data transfer between CPU modules in END processing of the CPU As the device memory data of other PLCs is automatically read when the automatic refresh function is used is possible for the host PLC to use the device data of other PLCs PLC No 1 PLC No 2 CPU shared memory Host
431. ponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual Step 0 ON Remote STOP command GX Developer Serial communication module Remote RUN command CPU module RUN STOP status STOP status Fig 7 5 Remote RUN STOP Time Chart using GX Developer serial communication module etc 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 Precautions a Take note of the following because STOP has priority in Process CPU 1 The Process CPU enters the STOP status when remote STOP is performed from remote RUN contact GX Developer or by using serial communication module 2 To set the Process CPU to RUN status from STOP status again perform the remote RUN from the external factor remote RUN contact GX Developer serial communication module etc from which the remote STOP was performed The RUN STOP status is described below e RUN Status Status in which the calculations are repeatedly executed from step 0 to the END FEND instruction in the sequence program e STOP Status Status in which the sequence program calculations are stopped and the output Y is all OFF 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 6 2 Remote PAUSE 1 What is Remote PAUSE a The remote PAUSE performs PAUSE of the Process CPU externally with the CPU module RUN STOP switch at RUN position The PAUSE function stops the Process CPU calculations while maintaining the ON OFF status of all output Y b This can be us
432. program program i Transf Index register value Z0 1 ered Z0 1 to Z0 3 Z0 1 Saved Reset Index register storage area For scan low speed Z0 1 execution type program x For interrupt program Z0 is changed to 3 Word devices should be used to transfer index register data from an interrupt or fixed scan execution type program to a scan or low speed execution type program 10 41 10 41 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 2 When the High speed execution check box is checked a If ascan execution type program low speed execution type program is switched to an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program index register data will not be saved restored b If data is written to index registers by using an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program the values of index registers used for an scan low speed execution type program will be corrupted i Switch i Scan low speed ing Interrupt program Reset Scan low speed execution type program Executed program execution type i Fixed scan execution gt execution type program i itype program i iprogram i Transf Transf Index register value zo 1 Sred 1 79 1 to zo 3 ered gt 79 3 Index register storage area i For scan low speed Z0 0 Z0 0 Z0 0 Z0 0 Z0 0 x For interrupt program Z0 is changed to 3 c Before writing data to index registers by using an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program use t
433. program writing is enabled by using different file names File name ABC File name ABC File name DEF Device Parameter Program Program aramete ogra Sommens ogra GX Process Developer Writing from GX Developer to Process CPU CPU Therefore the program creation can be split among several designers so that they control and manage the programs by process or function Only the relevant programs should be modified or debugged when the specifications are changed a Example of program creation split among several designers Process CPU Program memory Standard ROM Memory card Designer A gt Program A eee Programs A to C Designer B gt Program B are executed in ee TEE sequence 1 Yy Designer C Program C x1 See Section 4 2 for details on the execution sequence 1 OVERVIEW b Example of programs split by process 1 Split by process Process CPU Program memory Standard ROM Memory card Ship in y Program A Manufacturing Assembly Y Program B Y Ship out Y Program D Program C c Example of programs split by function Split by function x1 Programs split by process can be further split by function Initial processing Main processing Process CPU Program memory Communication processing Error proces
434. pt Error factor 3 SFCP ECE ERROR module factor EX POWER OFF 10th point ICM OPE ERROR FILE OPE ERROR CHK instruction execution 0 15th point Anunciator detection 16th point Empty Specifies which intelligent Dee Intelligent eels function module is used 18 to 223 module factor with parameters Internal timer factor ki 131 x1 The internal times shown are the default setting times These times can be designated in 0 5 ms units through a 0 5 to 1000 ms range set at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box x2 When an error interruption with 132 error that stops operation occurs the Process CPU is not stopped until 132 processing is completed x3 Execution of error interruptions is prohibited for the interrupt pointer Nos 132 to 139 when the power is turned on and during a Process CPU reset When using interrupt pointer Nos 132 to 139 set the interruption permitted status by using the IMASK instruction 4 To use the intelligent function module interrupt the intelligent function module setting interrupt points setting is required at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box For the interrupts from the intelligent function module see Section 8 2 1 10 57 10 57 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 11 Other Devices 10 11 1 SFC block device BL This device is used for checking if the block designated by the
435. put MELSECNET H module operations Outputs the results of the sequence program OFF is output operations Assumes the result of the sequence program Assumes the OFF status operations Output from modules mounted on the base unit Output of Process CPUs to be refreshed from RX of CC Link Output other than above outside of the refresh range 2 The enforced ON OFF settings are cleared with the following operations e Power supply OFF ON e Reset with the Process CPU RESET L CLR switch e Reset with remote reset operations 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q e The timing for external I O enforced ON OFF is shown in the table below Output e During END processing input e During END processing output refresh refresh e During the execution of e During the execution of commands that used direct commands that used direct access input DX LD LDI AND access output DY OUT SET ANI OR ORI LDP LDF ANDP DELTA RST PLS PLF FF LDF I O modules on the base unit X Y ANDF ORP ORF MC I O of Process CPU to During END processing MELSECNET H refresh be refreshed from LX During execution of the COM command LY of MELSECNET H During execution of the ZCOM command I O of Process CPU to During END processing CC Link refresh be refreshed from RX During execution of the COM command RY of CC Link e During execution of the ZCOM command f A total of thirty two devices can be registered f
436. quired for sampling trace Set the sampling trace file in the memory card SRAM b The sampling trace can be executed from other station on the network or serial communication module However the trace cannot be executed from multiple areas at once The trace can only be executed from one area with Process CPU c The trace information trace file registered in the Process CPU is registered in the SRAM card and latched As the condition data is stored in the trace file even if the power is off or the Process CPU is reset the sampling trace can be executed under registered trace conditions At power on reset of Process CPU latched trace information is cleared in the cases where e The SRAM card registered in a trace file is not inserted e The trace file is corrupted This requires registering trace information once again by operating from GX Developer To clear data perform the latch clear operation with the RESET L CLR switch To perform sampling trace again after latch clear execute sampling trace after selecting Regist trace This is performed by connecting the Process CPU and GX Developer g While in STOP status the Process CPU cannot read sampling trace results To enable the Process CPU to read the sampling trace results enter the Process CPU into RUN status f When executing the sampling trace ensure that trigger conditions cannot be satisfied at trigger points If the trigger conditions are met when executing the
437. r low speed execution type programs in 100 us units Scan program execution time in 1 ms units Scan program execution time in 100 us units Unit module No Module service interval in 1 ms units Module service interval in 100 us units Special Register List Continued e Stores wait time when constant scan time has been set in 1 ms units Range from 0 to 65535 e Stores wait time when constant scan time has been set in 100 us units Range of 000 to 900 e Stores cumulative execution time for low speed execution type programs in 1 ms units e Range from 0 to 65535 Cleared to 0 following 1 low speed scan e Stores cumulative execution time for low speed execution type programs in 100 us units Range of 000 to 900 Cleared to 0 following 1 low speed scan Stores low speed program execution time during 1 scan in 1 ms units Range from 0 to 65535 e Stores each scan Stores low speed program execution time during 1 scan in 100 ps units Range of 000 to 900 e Stores each scan e Stores execution time for scan execution type program during 1 scan in 1 ms units e Range from 0 to 65535 e Stores each scan e Stores execution time for scan execution type program during 1 scan in 100 us units Range of 000 to 900 e Stores each scan Sets I O number for module that measures service interval When SM551 is ON stores service interval for module designated by SD550
438. r Modification column When a special relay for modification is provided the device number should be changed to the provided QGPU QnACPU special relay When W is provided the converted special relay can be used for the device number When AX is provided the device number does not work with QCPU QnACPU Special Relay List ACPU Special Special Applicable Special Relay after Relay for Name Meaning Details PP aes CPU Relay Conversion Modification e Turned on when there is one or more output units of OFF Normal which fuse has been blown Remains on if normal status M9000 SM1000 Fuse blown ON Fuse blown module with is restored blown fuse present Output modules of remote I O stations are also checked fore fuse condition Turned on if the states of I O module is different form entered states when power is turned on Remains on if normal states is restored I O module verification is done also to remote I O station modules V O module OFF Normal verification error JON Error Reset is enabled only when special registers SD1116 to SD1123 are reset OFF Normal e Turned on when the MINI S3 link error is detected on M9004 SM1004 NIMI link error ON i Error even one of the AJ71PT32 S3 modules being loaded Remains on if normal status is restored Comes ON it a momentary power interruption of less than 20ms occurred during use of the AC power supply module and reset by turning power OFF then ON
439. r earlier are not compatible with multiple PLC system 2 Compatible GX Configurators The GX Configurators listed can be used on multiple PLC systems without modification 14 9 14 9 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 14 2 5 Parameters that enable the use of multiple PLC system 1 Parameters that enable the use of multiple PLC system Compared with the single CPU system the multiple PLC system includes the CPU count control PLC refresh setting automatic refresh setting of PLC parameters The PLC parameters must be set to the same for all the CPU modules used in the multiple PLC system except some modules Make similar settings to the PC CPU module if one is included using the PC CPU module setting utility For the setting method refer to the manual of the PC CPU module 2 The PLC parameter settings for use with multiple PLC system The PLC parameters necessity of setup and descriptions that are required for using multiple PLC system are listed in table 14 3 Table 14 3 Setting list for the multiple PLC and I O Assignment I O Assignment ve Mostan O iY Sd Standard setting Baseman o Td Powerman o SY Sd Benson SC Sd e YS OY Swish setings SSS dT eae e Cont PLC E No of No of PLC ss Operation mode eea F Online module change C a ae The input condition outside of the group is taken a A ee The output condition outside of the group is taken Se een Ee ae Refresh se
440. r point setting Sampling is performed for each scan Before the sampling is finished by a trigger operation of a peripheral device data is sampled twice because the sampling timing is the same as that of trigger conditions Trace result Bit device Contact Coil Display units 10 x Sampling trace data 10 0 20 D0 1 co Coil Data when trigger condition is met Count 2048 Time sec Step Word device Current value 16 bit x Decimal hd Program 2048 2047 2046 2045 2043 0 0 0 a 15559 5458 0 0 0 0 15559 15559 5458 5458 0 0 15559 5458 0 0 15559 5458 0 0 155 545 ll v Count 2048 Timefsec Program 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q f The execution status of the sampling trace function is stored in the special relay SM800 SM802 SM804 and SM805 If an error occurs while the sampling trace function is used SM826 turns on By using special relays in a sequence program the execution status of the sampling trace function can be checked 1 After the trace data and trace conditions set using GX Developer are written to the Process CPU SM800 sampling trace ready turns on SM800 indicates whether the sampling trace can be executed or not 2 When a sampling trace start request is accepted the sampling trace starts and SM802 sampling trace executing turns on SM802
441. r than the content of SD526 the value is newly stored at each END Namely the maximum value of scan time is stored into SD526 in BIN code Sets the interval between consecutive program starts in multiples of 10 ms 0 No setting 1 to 200 Set Program is executed at intervals of set value x 10 ms Scan time is stored and updated in BIN code after every END When the PC CPU starts running it starts counting 1 every second It starts counting up from 0 to 32767 then down to 32768 and then again up to 0 Counting repeats this routine e Stores the year 2 lower digits and month in BCD B15 to Bi2B11_to_B8B7__to__B4 B38 Bo Example L H8707 Month Stores the day and hour in BCD B15 to Bi2B11 to B8B7 to B4B3 Bo Example 31th 10 o clock H3110 e Stores the Minute and second in BCD B15 to B12B11 to B8 B7 to B4 B3 ll OO _ ae Minute Stores the day of the week in BCD B8 B7 Example 35 minutes 48 seconds Second H3548 B15 to B12B11 to to Example Friday H0005 0 must be set o 2 Wednesday e Saturday E ion fil he block No of th ion fil i D9035 SD1035 SD648 xtension ile Use block No Stores t e bloc o of the extension file register register being used in BCD code Extension file registerfor designation of device number D9036 SD1036 xX D9037 SD1037 pA D9038 SD1038 SD207 D9039 SD1039 SD208 APP 39 LED display priority ranking Device num
442. r that PSTOP POFF Initial execution type yP Becomes scan 1 If the fixed scan execution type program is changed to another execution type you cannot return to the fixed scan execution type 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 2 1 Initial execution type program 1 Definition of initial execution type program a An initial execution type program is executed once only at power ON or when STOP to RUN switching occurs b This program s execute type is designated as initial in the program of the PLC parameters c Inthe same manner as the initial processing for the intelligent function module the initial execution program is executed only once and is not required in subsequent scans An instruction that contains a complete device cannot be used for an initial execution type program because the complete device needs several scans to complete the execution Control with one program Using initial execution type program Program A fe OD ee ee et ee md i ae i Initial execution initial program gt f i type program Biin he ie e ne ae See ak Division into initial execution type program Program B and scan execution type tage tw eS oa 2 Pew y 7d Program to execute Scan execution ateveryscan type program Dueh ee See a es 2 Using multiple initial execution type programs When multiple initial execution type programs are used
443. rameter dialog box a b c d e Qn H Parameter Switch setting Detailed setting If the start X and Y are not input the PLC assigns them automatically It is not possible to check correctly when there is a slot of the unsetting on the way Base mode E Auto Detail 8 fixation 12 fixation Settings should pe set as same when Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Read PLC data using multiple PLC Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple PLC Default Check End Cancel a Slot Displays the slot No and the ordinal position of the slot in the base unit If the base unit is not designated in Detail mode the stage number of the base unit is shown as and the ordinal number of a slot is counted from slot 0 of the main base unit b Type For Process CPU Select the type of module being mounted from the followings e Empty Empty slot e Input Input module e Hi Input Q Series high speed module e Output Output module e I O Mix I O mixed module e Intelligent Intelligent function module e Interrupt Q Series interruption module If the type is not designated the type of the actually mounted module is used Standard setting settings 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q Model name Designate the model name of the mounted module with 16 or less characters Process CPU does not use the designated model name It is used
444. rams are created it is not necessary to set the interrupt pointers in ascending order when creating multiple interrupt programs Process CPU Program A D Program memory Standard x A ROM Memory card Main routine program a Write i File of program A FEND 0H yio IRET Interrupt lt program B2 y1 c iret 28H y IRET END Interrupt pointer 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q b Using the interrupt program as a separate program Interrupt programs can also be managed as separate discrete programs stand by type programs See Section 4 2 4 for details on stand by type programs However the same interrupt program pointer number cannot be used more than once in the program being executed by the CPU module 3 Executing interrupt programs a In order to execute an interrupt program with the interrupt pointer 132 to 147 IMASK and El instructions are required to obtain permission for the interruption 1 1 If an interrupt factor occurs prior to an interruption permitted status the interrupt program corresponding to the factor will be executed when the interruption permitted status is established 2 Ifan interrupt factor occurs during a STOP PAUSE the interrupt program corresponding to the factor will be executed when the interruption permitted status is established following a return to the RUN status
445. rams are stopped by RUN STOP switch or remote STOP function See 7 6 1 for details on remote STOP function Process CPU might enter STOP status when a stopping error occurs b When entering the STOP status save the output status and turn off all output The device memory of other than the output Y is retained 3 PAUSE Status Operation Processing a The PAUSE status indicates that the sequence program operations are paused by remote PAUSE function while maintaining the output and device memory status See Section 7 6 2 for details on remote PAUSE function 4 Process CPU Operation Processing with RUN STOP status Sequence program operation processing RUN to STOP Executes up to the END JOS saves the output status Maintains the status immediately instruction and stops and all output are off before the STOP status Starts executing the operation Deeminey he upto s TOp aaue nen aoe STOP to RUN Starts at step 0 mode of the PLC parameter w initial value is designated at STOP to RUN however the value is set Local devices are cleared Device memory External output Y M L S T C D The Process EOE performs the following in any of RUN STOP and PAUSE status e O module refresh processing e Data communication with GX Developer and serial communication module e Refresh process of MELSECNET H and CC Link For this reason I O monitor and test operation using GX Developer reading writing from the serial
446. range can be stored in the Process CPU registers 4 46 4 46 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 8 2 HEX Hexadecimal 1 Hexadecimal notation In hexadecimal notation 4 binary bits are expressed in 1 digit If 4 binary bits are used in binary notation 16 different values from 0 to 15 can be represented Since hexadecimal notation represents 0 to 15 in 1 digit letters A to F are used to represent the numbers 10 to 15 Then acarry occurs after F Table 4 3 shows numeric expressions by binary hexadecimal and decimal notations Table 4 3 Comparison of BIN HEX and DEC Numeric Expressions DEC Decimal HEX Hexadecimal BIN Binary 9 A B C D E F Carry oO 2 Hexadecimal numeric expression Process CPU registers data registers link registers etc consist of 16 bits Therefore the numeric values expressed in hexadecimal notation can be stored in each register within 0 to FFFFu range 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 8 3 BCD Binary Coded Decimal 1 BCD notation BCD notation is binary expression with a carry similar to that of the decimal notation Though it uses 4 bit representation like hexadecimal notation it dose not use letters A to F Table 4 4 gives numeric expressions by binary BCD and decimal notations Table 4 4 Comparison of BIN BCD and DEC Numeric Expressions BCD DEC Decimal BIN Binary
447. rd B models installed 5 B8 B7 B4 B3 Bo EEE Memory Memory Drive 3 0 Does not exist cardB cardB RAM model 1 SRAM S Initial models models 0 Does not exist Drive 4 1 SRAM ROM model 2 EPROM 3 FLASH ROM Drive 4 is fixed to 3 because it has built in Flash ROM Drive 3 RAM Drive 3 capacity is stored in 1 kbyte units S Initial capacity Drive 4 ROM Drive 4 capacity is stored in 1 kbyte units S Initial capacity The conditions for usage for drive 3 4 are stored as bit patterns In use when ON The significance of these bit patterns is indicated below Boot operation QBT Not used Drive 3 4 Drive 3 4 Parameters QPA CPU fault history QFD ige es Device comments QCD Not used S Status conditione conditions Device initial value QDI Local device QDL change File R QDR Not used Trace QTS Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used APP 32 APP 32 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU ac 9 po TT i SD640 Stores drive number being used by file register sian Now Stores file register file name with extension selected at parameters or by use of QDRSET instruction as ASCII code B15 to B8 B7 to Bo SD641 Second character First character File register File register SD642 Fourth character drig character file name ienas
448. rd RAM SRAM card and Flash card Note that the file register access method differs depending on the memory type Standard SRAM Flash Read with a user s program CON Z Write with a user s program PLC read through the device setting PLC write through the device setting on ea O E PLC write from xDeveloper y dolo x How to Modify the PLC write from GX Developer FashRom x xo Stored Data Batch write from serial communication modue o x Device wite fromGoTeooseres OT OX Random write command rom GOT 900 Seres OT o x 10 44 10 44 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 7 3 Registering the file registers To use file registers register the file registers with the Process CPU in the following steps Setting of file register to be used ila di m Edl PLC file tab screen at PLC parameter dialog box PLC name PLC system PLC file S Device Progam Boot file SFC 1 0 assignment 1 File register Initial Device value Notused Notused se the same file name as the program _ Use the same file name as the program Conesponding Memor cardRAM Comtespondng sd memory H memory Use the following file Use the following file Corresponding z Corresponding z memory memory File name File name Capacity K 1K 1018K points Comment file used in a command File for local device Not used Not used Use the same file name as the program Use the following file Correspo
449. rd ROM is performed by GX Developer but using Automatic write to standard ROM moves the memory card in which the parameters and the changed programs are written to the Process CPU so that they are written into the standard ROM from the memory card The followings are necessary for Automatic write to standard ROM e Set Automatic write to standard ROM settings in the PLC Parameters dialog box e Memory card on which the parameters and programs are stored e Memory card mounted onto the Process CPU and the Process CPU switch settings Perform Automatic write to standard ROM after the Process CPU control is suspended A suspension error BOOT OK Error Code 9020 occurs when automatic write to standard ROM is completed It is necessary to reset the Process CPU or restart the power supply to the PLC after Automatic write to standard ROM is completed 6 PROCESS CPU FILES MELSEC Q 1 Execution procedure for Automatic write to standard ROM Observe the following procedure for Automatic write to standard ROM a Operations with the GX Developer Settings for Automatic write to Standard ROM 1 Check Auto Download all Data from Memory card to Standard ROM at the Boot file tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box Set the parameters and programs to be booted Set the Transfer from to Standard ROM Check Auto Download all Data from Memory card to Standard ROM Qn H Parameter x
450. red as a macro instruction 2 The GX Developer read mode provides an option to view a program in macro instruction format Choose View Macro Instruction format display to view macro instructions View Online Diagnostics Tools Window He Comment Ctrl F5 Statement Ctrl F Note Ctrl F8 Alias Alt Ctl F6 Macro instruction format display lt m Change of macro instruction display Comment format gt Alias format display gt Toolbar v Status bar Zoom v Project data list Alte0 Instruction list Alt F1 Set the contact Elapsed time 10 60 10 60 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 12 Constants 10 12 1 Decimal constants K 1 Definition Decimal constants are devices which designate decimal data in sequence programs They are designated as Ki settings e g K1234 and are stored in the Process CPU in binary BIN code See Section 4 8 1 for details on binary code 2 Designation range The setting ranges for decimal constants are as follows e For word data 16 bits K 32768 to K32767 e For 2 word data 82 bits K 2147483648 to K2147483647 10 12 2 Hexadecimal constants H 1 Definition Hexadecimal constants are devices which designate hexadecimal or BCD data in sequence programs For BCD data designations 0 to 9 digit designations are used Hexadecimal constants are designated as Hi settings e g H1234 See Section 4 8 3 for details on hexadecimal code 2
451. rmed The data in the failure history storage memory of the Process CPU will also be cleared by a remote latch clear operation 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 6 5 Relationship of the remote operation and Process CPU RUN STOP switch 1 Relationship of the Remote Operation and Process CPU Switch The Process CPU operation status is as follows with the combination of remote operations to RUN STOP switch Remote operation RUN 1 STOP PAUSE RESET Latch clear Ganor Cannot operate operate STOP STOP STOP STOP RESET 5 Latch clear x1 When performing the operation with remote RUN contact RUN PAUSE contact must be set at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box x2 When performing the operation with remote PAUSE contact RUN PAUSE contact must be set at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box In addition the remote PAUSE enable coil SM206 must be set ON x3 Remote reset enable must be set at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box 4 RESET or LATCH CLEAR can be performed if the Process CPU changed to the STOP status by a remote operation 5 This includes a situation where the Process CPU is stopped due to error 2 Remote Operations from the Same GX Developers When remote operations are performed from the same GX Developer the status of the remote operation that is executed last will be effective 3 Remote Operations from Multiple GX
452. rocessing time Constant scan wait time Cumulative execution time for low speed execution type programs Low speed execution time Scan program execution time Service interval time GX Developer monitor values e Execution time measurement e Scan time measurement e Constant scan 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 Operation Processing 4 3 1 Initial processing This is a preprocessing for sequence operation execution and is performed only once as shown in the table below When the initial processing is completed the Process CPU goes in the RUN STOP switch setting status See Section 4 4 Process CPU status Initial processing item When the power When reset is When STOP is turned on executed to RUN The 1 O module initialization Ee ae a Boot from the standard ROM memory card eo a ee Multiple PLC system parameter value equality check Device initialization of the range not latched bit device OFF word device 0 Execution of self diagnosis in the QOPU o l o x Automatic allocation of the I O number of installed modules Start of the MELSECNET H network information setting and network communication Switch setting of intelligent function module of of x CC Link data setting Ethernet data setting Setting of device initialization values ie executed x not executed x1 When parameters or programs are changed in the STOP status reset by the RESET L CLR switch
453. rom the beginning again 1 During execution of low speed execution type programs the constant scan time may deviate by the amount of the maximum instruction processing time low speed END processing time 6 Low speed scan time a The low speed scan time is the total time required for low speed execution type program execution and low speed END processing If multiple low speed execution type programs are executed the low speed scan time is the total time required to execute all the programs plus the low speed END processing time When an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program is executed the value added with the interrupt program fixed scan execution type program s execution time will become the low speed scan time 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q b The low speed scan time is measured by the Process CPU and the result is stored in special registers SD528 to SD535 1 The low speed scan time can therefore be checked by monitoring the SD528 to SD535 special registers Current value SD528 SD529 Initial value SD530 D531 Minimum value SD532 D533 Maximum value SD534 SD535 j__ Stores less than 1 ms low speed scan time unit u S gt Stores the low speed scan time in 1 ms units If the SD528 value is 50 and the SD529 value is 400 the low speed scan time is 50 4 ms x1 The accuracy of the scan time stored at the special registers
454. ructions and communication dedicated instructions between multiple PLCs omitting S P GINT instruction are made at the same time the instructions will be executed in order from the first instruction accepted If there are 33 or more unexecuted instructions an OPERATION ERROR error code 4107 will be triggered Refer to the Motion CPU Programming manual for details on and the necessity of use of the motion only instructions 16 11 16 11 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 16 3 2 Reading and writing device data It is possible to read and write device data into the Motion CPU PC CPU module from the Process CPU with the the communication dedicated instructions between multiple PLCs listed in the table below Reading or writing can not take place from the Process CPU to the Process CPU Motion CPU to the Process CPU or Motion CPU to Motion CPU CPU module _ module Instruction name Description ean PC CPU module S DDWR SP DDWR S DDRD SP DDRD Reads other CPU device data into the host CPU PaE S GINT SP GINT Requests start up of other CPU interruption programs he Ser For example Process CPU device data can be written into the Motion CPU s device data with the S DDWR instruction of the communication dedicated instruction between multiple PLCs Writes host CPU device data into other CPU devices High Performance model QCPU Motion CPU S DDWR instruction CON x Write
455. ry System area assured steps p Ksteps 0 15K step I Auto Download all Data from Memory card to Standard ROM r Boot file setting E Program LINE1 LINE2 MAINT E Device com COMME E Parameter PARAI Memory card RAM Memory card RAM f Program memory Memory card RAM Device initia w Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple PLC settings Default Check End Cancel Make the Process CPU hardware setting Set Process CPU Dip switches to specify a parameter driven drive Insert a memory card Insert a memory card in a slot if you want to store parameters or programs on the memory card during the boot run Write parameters and programs using GX Developer Write parameters on the parameter driven drive Write a program to the memory specified at the Boot file tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box Execute a program Reset the Process CPU with the RESET L CLR switch After the boot run is completed in the specified memory the BOOT LED lights up 6 PROCESS CPU FILES MELSEC Q 3 Changing Program Files While the Process CPU is in the Run Status a While the Process CPU is in RUN status addition change deletion of program files from the standard ROM or memory card to the program memory can be made by using any of the following instructions in a sequence program e PLOAD Loading program from memory card e PUNLAOD U
456. s 55 H Ladder that turns the Y5E output ON when an X5 input turns ON When Y5E turns ON fastest Input refresh Input refresh Output refresh 0 END 056 END 0 ON External contact id ON OFF 1 X5 QCPU ON devices OFF Y5E ON OFF External load Lag time Minimum 1 scan Y5E output turns on fastest if the external contact is turned ON immediately before the refresh operation Then X5 turns ON at the input refresh Y5E turns ON at step 56 and the external load turns ON at the output refresh following execution of the END instruction In this case the time lag between the external contact ON and the external load ON is 1 scan When Y5E turns ON slowest Input refresh Input refresh Output refresh 0 END o56 END 0 j Ha ON i i OF ie 9k External contact ON OFF x5 J QCPU ON devices OFF Y5E ON OFF External load i Lag time J Maximum 2 scan Y5E turns on slowest if the external contact is turned ON immediately after the refresh operation Then X5 turns ON at the input refresh Y5E turns ON at step 56 and the external load turns ON at the output refresh following execution of the END instruction In this case the time lag between the external contact ON and the external load ON is 2 scan Fig 4 8 Timing chart showing response of Output Y when Input X turns ON 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 7 2 Direct
457. s function 2 Remove the cause of the error 3 Either reset the PLC No 1 or restart the power to the PLC All PLCs on the entire multiple PLC system will be reset and the system restored when the PLC No 1 is reset or the power to the PLC is restarted 14 16 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 14 2 8 Reducing the time required for multiple PLC system processing 1 Multiple PLC system processing A bus base unit pattern extension cable is used by the CPU module when accessing the I O module and intelligent function module and this bus cannot be used by plural CPU module at the same time The CPU modules that attempted buss access afterwards when plural CPU module use the bus simultaneously will assume the Standby status until processing for the CPU module that executed the procedure first has been completed This Standby status the amount of time the CPU module must wait will cause delays in input and output on the multiple PLC system and result in extended scan times See Chapter 18 for details on extended scan times Maximum standby time The host PLC will reach the maximum standby time in the following cases with a multiple PLC system e When four CPU modules are used on the multiple PLC system e When additional base units are in use e When intelligent function modules that possess vast quantities of data are mounted onto additional base units e When four CPU modules simultaneously ac
458. s monitored 3 Precautions a Itis only a single program that local devices can be monitored or tested by operating from a single GX Developer Local devices in multiple programs cannot be monitored or tested by operating from a single GX Developer b It is amaximum of 16 programs that local devices can be monitored or tested by operating from multiple GX Developers connected to a RS 232 serial communication module of the Process CPU c If local devices in a stand by type program are monitored scan time is extended for some time because local device data is read and saved See Section 10 13 1 for details d Local devices in a fix scan execution type program cannot be monitored or tested 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 9 3 Enforced ON OFF for external I O Enforced ON OFF operations from GX Developer will forcibly switch the external I O on and off The information registered for ON OFF will be cancelled with GX Developer operations A GX Developer Version 6 or higher is required to use this function It is possible to perform enforced ON enforced ON registration enforced OFF enforced OFF registration and cancel enforced ON OFF cancel registration with the enforced ON OFF function The operations for performing enforced ON enforced OFF and canceling enforced ON OFF are shown in the table below Input X operation Output Y operation During canceling Performs sequence program Outputs the results of sequence
459. s 4 14 PSTOP instruction aossen nana 4 14 Purpose of I O assignment 5 11 Purpose of I O assignment using GX Developer eccecceceeceeceeteseeseeeeeeeeeaes 5 11 OCP ish E E fee ented es teast hentia A 18 310 peeeereerreree rere acer erer reer eerrerecreres 2 4 7 23 QNG RUiie cts sentra iene a hers A 18 CAIG PW sees eels cat desea tds ces AS hate A 18 R File register ssesceeeceeseeeseeeseeeeeeees 10 43 Reading from the time data ce 7 9 Real numbers E ccecccsceceseceeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 4 48 10 62 Refresh input eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteees 10 6 Index 2 S Refresh MOG cc cccecceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeenees 4 38 Refresh Output cceeccsecceeccteceeeeeteeeteeetes 10 9 Remote latch Clear oo eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeenteees 7 19 Remote Operation cceeccesceseeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 7 12 Remote PAUSE cccccceessstesstessteeseeeees 7 15 Remote password ccccceeeeees 7 1 7 67 Remote RESE Ties iavininn dieiiint aie 7 17 Remote RUN STOP ccccssceseeeeeeteees 7 12 Remote station I O nUMbe 00ceeeeee 5 10 Retentive timer OUT ST 02 ccceeesenees 10 21 RUN Status 0 cccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeeeaes 4 35 S Step relay ccccecceceeseececeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaes 10 18 SB Special link relay ccceceeeeeeeeee 10 18 Scan execution type program s 4 17 SCAN AINE Wi ie Nie iio pain NTA adie eos 4 18 SD Spe
460. s a 3 digit value designate the first 2 digits For X YFO X Y1F0 Designate 1F Setting range 00H to FEH When digital output values of channels CH 1 to CH 4 of the Q64AD Type Analog Digital Conversion Module X Y20 to 2F mounted at Slot 2 of the main base unit are stored in DO to D3 the I O number and the buffer memory address are specified as shown below Q64AD 11 CH 1 Digital output value 12 CH 2 Digital output value 13 CH 3 Digital output value 14 CH 4 Digital output value 2 Processing speed The processing speed for intelligent function module devices is a Reading or writing the buffer memory of the intelligent function module is rather faster than the processing speed of FROM TO instructions For example case of MOV U2 G11 DO b To conduct reading the buffer memory of the intelligent function module and another process in a single instruction add the processing speed of FROM TO instruction and processing speed of instruction to setup the reference value For example case of U2 G11 DO D10 If the same buffer memory of the same intelligent function module is used two or more times in a Sequence program the processing speed can be increased by using the FROM instruction to read that buffer memory data to a Process CPU device 1 1 For details on buffer memory addresses and applications refer to the intelligent function module manual 10 38 1
461. s being executed Goes OFF when CR is input or when input character string reaches 32 characters Goes ON when keyboard input is being conducted Goes when keyboard input has been stored at the CPU module Goes ON when MSG instruction is executed Selects whether only the general data process is performed for the execution of the COM instruction or the link refresh process is also performed e Determines whether to enable disable the local device in the program CALLED at CALL e Determines whether to enable disable the local device at the execution of interrupt programs MELSEC Q When Set Instruction execution S Instruction execution S Instruction execution S Instruction execution S Status change S Status change S Instruction execution S Instruction execution S Instruction execution U Status change U Status change APP 8 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 7 Debug eisai bolls ae __ OFF Not ready ee are S Status SM800 Trace preparation OF Ready Switches ON when the trace preparation is completed QCPU OFF Suspend e Trace is started when this relay switches ON ON i Ba Trace is suspended when this relay switches OFF U M9047 QCPU All related special Ms switches OFF smgo 1309 execution OEE Suspend Switches ON during execution of trace S Status vigo46 QCPU in progress ON Start change Trace is triggered when this relay
462. s in the device memory Reads the device memory Device memory Device memory One Process CPU can operate up to 32 Motion dedicated PLC instructions and communication dedicated commands between multiple PLCs omitting the S P GINT instruction at one time However if the Motion dedicated PLC instructions and communication dedicated instructions between multiple PLCs omitting S P GINT instruction are made at the same time the instructions will be executed in order from the first instruction accepted If there are 33 or more unexecuted instructions an OPERATION ERROR error code 4107 will be triggered Refer to the Motion CPU Programming Manual for details on and the necessity of use of the communication dedicated instructions between multiple PLCs 16 12 16 12 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 16 4 CPU Shared Memory The CPU shared memory is for exchanging data between CPU modules and consists of 4 096 words between OH and FFF The CPU shared memory consists of four areas the host PLC operation information area the system area the automatic refresh area and the user s free area An area consisting of the number of automatic refresh points from 800H is used as the automatic refresh area when the automatic refresh of device data is set up The beginning of the user s free area starts from the address immediately after the end of the automatic refresh area 800H to 811H
463. s le 7 Online module change Inte Outp None None None None None None Diagnostics Q1lzPHCPU Llig ut ent 32pt l6pt l6pt l6pt l6pt l6pt l6pt Module s Detailed 1 pt Information r Status Gtarb moniter Bi Module system error Module error _ Module waming fj Module change Stop monitor Close Base Information lt Product Inf List a Installed status Enables the controlling CPU the model an07 d the number of modules mounted onto the selected base unit to be confirmed Not installed will be displayed for slots in which modules have not been mounted When slots have been set as Empty at the I O assignment tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box the module s model will not be displayed when if a module has been mounted b Parameter status Enables the I O number the module type and the number of modules mounted for each of the slots on the selected base unit to be confirmed If the operation status shows 0 empty points and an allocation error is displayed it means that the PLC parameter s I O allocation and the actual status are different In this event align the PLC parameter s I O allocation with the actual status by allocating an I O c Base Enables the status of the modules mounted onto the base unit in use to be confirmed The status will be displayed in the unit column when an error has occurred for even one of the modules d Diagnostics
464. s that are different from the set values A BIN instruction is provided to convert the BCD input data to the BIN data compatible with the Process CPU A program which converts numeric data to BIN data can be created at the sequence program to allow the settings of numeric values from an external source without being conscious of the corresponding BIN values Process CPU Numeric data designation Digital switch BINP K4x0 Do H BCD input XF XO BIN data BCD D5 K4Y30 H Fig 4 11 Digital Switch Data Input to Process CPU 2 External numeric outputs from Process CPU A digital display can be used to display numeric data which is output from the Process CPU However BIN date cannot be displayed at the digital display as it is because the Process CPU use it for operation Therefore BCD instruction is provided for the Process CPU to convert the BIN data to BCD data A program which converts BIN data to BCD data can be created in the sequence program in order to display the output data in the same manner as decimal data Process CPU Numeric data designation BINP K4x0 Do Digital display OEE YF Y3 A BCD D5 K4Y30 H BCD output BIN data Fig 4 12 Digital Display of Data from Process CPU 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 8 1 BIN Binary Code 1 Binary code Binary date is represented by 0 O
465. s to update present values and switch contacts ON and OFF the use of a timer in the interrupt program would make a normal time count impossible d The following commands cannot be used in the interrupt program e COM e ZCOM El e DI e When the interrupt program fixed scan execution type program is executed at a measuring time such as the scan time or execution time the values of the interrupt program fixed scan execution type program are added to the measured time Thus if the interrupt program fixed scan execution type program is executed the values stored in the following special registers and GX Developer monitor values will be longer than when the interrupt program fixed scan execution type program is not executed 1 Special registers e SD520 SD521 Current scan time e SD522 SD523 Initial scan time e D524 SD525 Minimum scan time e SD526 SD527 Maximum scan time e SD528 SD529 Current scan time for low speed e SD532 SD533 Minimum scan time for low speed e SD534 SD535 Maximum scan time for low speed e SD540 SD541 END processing time e S D542 SD543 Constant scan wait time e SD544 SD545 Cumulative execution time for low speed execution type programs e SD546 SD547 Execution time for low speed execution type programs e SD548 SD549 Scan program execution time e S D551 SD552 Service interval time 2 GX Developer monitor values e Execution time measurement e Scan time measurement e Constant s
466. s turned off the latch range device memory is not retained but becomes undefined 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 4 Setting the Output Y Status when Changing from to STOP Status to from RUN Status 1 Output Y Status when changing from STOP Status to RUN Status When changing from RUN status to STOP status the RUN status output Y is stored in the sequence and all the outputs Y are turned OFF The status after transition from STOP to RUN can be selected from the following two options with the Process CPU e The output status prior to STOP is output e The output is cleared Default After transition from STOP to RUN the output Y status prior to STOP is output then the program is executed a Output Y status prior to STOP is output After the output Y status before the STOP status is output the sequence program calculations are performed b Output is cleared Clears all output Y and outputs the output Y after executing the sequence program calculations STOP status to RUN status Is output Y NO Output Y status prior to STOP is output status prior to STOP output YES Output is cleared Output the output Y status right before changing to STOP status Clear the output Y status Execute the sequence program calculations Fig 7 3 Processing when Change from STOP Status to RUN Status 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Setting the Output Y Status when Changing from STOP Status to
467. sed by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi chance losses lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products damages and secondary damages caused from special reasons regardless of Mitsubishi s expectations compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products and other duties 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi general purpose programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or National Defense purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications Note that even with these applications if the user approves that the appl
468. seeteeeseeeteeeeeeeeeaes 10 50 10 8 Nesting N ciccaii vee en a La in a aves Le ea en en even 10 52 10 9 Pointers P 1 S125 4iese ike Ai See AS See Mis aa Al aide aie indie neiiies 10 53 10 9 4 Local pOInters 28 4i can hi EA A ntti anita nn anti aanet iad 10 53 0 9 2 COMMON PONEIS 25 tatvecesekeseete tet aessa aeaaaee eaaa react aaa a aea e Saaai e aaaea ivan dive 10 54 TOMO terrupt Poniors isei A A O 10 56 10 Ii Other DOV OS a ese tei Gee anatase ese atin dene eae ee aN 10 58 10 11 14 SF C block device BE ss deick aide e ah nieces Medias ered a aaa eat tee hadas est iceareede 10 58 10 11 2 SFC transition device TR sinirini iniiai ia a i i i aia 10 58 10 11 3 Network No designation device J ssesssssesrssresuesnernssnernsnnsnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnunannnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnne 10 58 10 11 4 I O No designation device U cececceccesceeeceeceeeeseeeceeseeeeaeceeceeeeeeeaesaeseseaeeaesaeseeseaesesaeeeeseaeeaees 10 59 10 11 5 Macro instruction argument device VD ee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeseeseeseeeeeseeeseeeseneteneeaaes 10 60 1 0 12 GONStANIS 2A 41 raia E ete ek haere iin ted ih eda in ident A ihe aa ts 10 61 10 12 17 Decimal constants Kh nren ei Mees Shek eh edn 10 61 10 12 2 Hexadecimal Constants H ceceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeesaeeseeeseeesaeeseeeseeesaeeseeseeseeeseeeeentenetaaes 10 61 10 123 Real numbers EB ai ticdcness gti tinge dess a a deaadig hating dating eaiis dated 10 62 t0124 Char
469. settings multiple PLC system F All station stop by stop enor of PLC3 Change screens Seting Fy sation stop by stop error of PLICA Send range for each PLC PLC side device PLC PLC share G Dev starting Pant Stat End Start End Nad o No 2 0 No3 ol Nod The applicable device of head device is BM Y D W RZR The unit of points that send range for each PLC is word Settings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Check End Cancel 1 19 4 19 4 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM Multiple PLC settings Multiple PLC settings 19 5 MELSEC Q Setting the operating mode optional e Selects whether to halt operations for all PLCs or continue with operations when a stop error occurs Default Stop all PLCs upon a stopping error at PLC No 2 No 3 or No 4 No check For example if the tick beside the All station stop by stop error of PLC2 is removed the operations for all other PLCs will continue even when an error occurs in the PLC No 2 The operation mode for the PLC No 1 cannot be changed Out of the group input output settings optional Sets whether or not the I O status of non control PLCs are acquired Default Default Do not acquire No check Multiple PLC system optional e Sets the device and number of PLC share memory G points to perform data communications wi
470. sing gt Program A gt Program B gt Program C gt Program D Standard ROM Memory card MELSEC Q Programs A to D are executed in sequence 2 The execution sequence and execution gt conditions can be set to conform to programs Ato D x2 2 See Section 4 2 for details on the execution sequence and execution conditions OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 3 Convenient Programming Devices and Instructions The Process CPU features devices and instructions which facilitate program creation Some of them are described below 1 Flexible device designation a In the case of Process CPU A a Bit designation of XO DO0 5 word device m _______ lt aha Sa Switches b10 of DO ON and OFF 1 0 The 1 0 status of b5 of DO is used as ON OFF data Y b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi DOJ i ia a oO b ee a a a Word device bits can be designated to serve as contacts or coils In the case of AnS XO MOV K4M0 DO DO 5 l gt Bit designation bO Word device designation Direct processing in 1 point units is permitted within a program simply by using direct access inputs DX _ and direct access outputs DY 1 1 In the case of Process CPU Direct access input vo DXx104 M9036 H DY100 lt lt SET M9052 L Always ON utput to output M9036 module at SEG K1X10 K1BO instr
471. sing e This counter increases by 1 for each scan of the low speed Number of counts in execution type program after RUN of the CPU module e Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to 32768 to 0 e Used only for low speed execution type programs processing x Not counted by the scan in an initial execution type program APP 29 APP 29 APPENDICES Execution program No Low speed program No Maximum scan time Current scan time for low speed execution type programs Maximum scan time for low speed execution type programs processing time APP 30 4 Scan information Expl ee ic Execution type of program being executed File name of low speed execution in progress Current scan time in 1 ms units Current scan time in 100 us units Initial scan time in 1 ms units Initial scan time in 100 ps units Minimum scan time in 1 ms units Minimum scan time in 100 us units Maximum scan time in 1 ms units Maximum scan time in 100 us units Current scan time in 1 ms units Current scan time in 100 ps units Minimum scan time in 1 ms units Minimum scan time in 100 ps units Maximum scan time in 1 ms units Maximum scan time in 100 us units END processing time in 1 ms units END processing time in 100 ps units Special Register List Set by Program number of program currently being executed is stored as BIN value
472. sion Second character of extension SD666 APP 33 APP 33 APPENDICES D705 SD715 IMASK SD716 _ instruction Mask pattern mask pattern SD717 Mask pattern Mask pattern following manner 6 Instruction Related Registers e ae During block operations turning SM705 ON makes it possible to use the mask pattern being stored at SD705 or at SD705 and SD706 if double words are being used to operate on all data in the block with the masked values Patterns masked by use of the IMASK instruction are stored in the B15 Bi BO D715 115 to 11 10 D716 131 to 117 116 SD717 147 to MELSEC Q Corresponding ACPU Corresponding CPU S During s New execution 133 132 sed in A series programs SD718 e For use as replacement for accumulators u Program No Program No designation designation for PLOAD for PLOAD instruction instruction D720 Stores the program number of the program to be loaded by the PLOAD instruction when designated e Designation range 1 to 124 DEIR SD that temporarily stores keyboard data input by means of the S Durin SD736 PKEY input PKEY input i po y x mpu Sy 9 New PKEY instruction execution Stores the message designated by the MSG instruction to B8 B7 to BO SD738 2nd character ist character SD739 4th character 3rd character SD740 6t
473. sions When making the online module change of modules used with the Process CPU configure a multiple PLC system with the CPU modules given in the following table model QCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU No 04012 or later Motion CPU Q173CPU Version N or later Q172CPUN Q173CPUN Version A or later Bus interface driver PPC PPC CPU685 MS 64 aa A PC CPU module PPC CPU686 MS 128 iN 01 version 1 05 or 3 Online module change setting a Enable Online module change setting of all CPU modules in the multiple PLC system If Online module change setting is disabled in any one of the CPU modules PARAMETER ERROR error code 3014 occurs and control cannot be performed b When the online module change setting is enabled the non group inputs outputs cannot be imported 4 When PC CPU module is used When the PC CPU module is used online module change cannot be performed until the PC CPU module starts up 14 18 14 18 15 ALLOCATING MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 15 ALLOCATING MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM I O NUMBERS 15 1 Concept behind Allocating I O Numbers Multiple PLC ems ossess I O numbers to enable interactive transmission between the CPU modules and the I O modules and intelligent function modules and I O numbers to enable interactive transmission between the CPU modules 15 1 1 I O modules and intelligent function module I O numbers The difference with single CPU systems is the 00H position slot of the I
474. ss Automatic refresh area for 3 Reading performed with writing in the No 2 machine the PLC No 2 END process User s free area 2 Writing performed with the PLC No 2 END process Device memory Device memory BO to B1F For use of the PLC No 1 B20 to B3F For use of the PLC No 1 4 Reading performed with the PLC No 1 END process BO to B1F For use of the PLC No 1 B20 to B3F For use of the PLC No 1 The processes performed during the PLC No 1 END process c 16 2 1 The BO to B1F transmission device data for the PLC No 1 is transferred across to the host PLC shared memory automatic refresh area 4 The data in the PLC No 2 CPU shared memory automatic refresh area is transferred across to B20 to B3F in the host PLC The processes performed during the PLC No 2 END process 2 The B20 to B3F transmission device data for the PLC No 2 is transferred across to the host PLC shared memory automatic refresh area 3 The data in the PLC No 1 CPU shared memory automatic refresh area is transferred across to BO to B1F in the host PLC Executing automatic refresh Automatic refresh is executed when the CPU module is in RUN status STOP status or PAUSE status Automatic refresh cannot be performed when a stop error has been triggered in the CPU module If a stop error occurs on one module the other modules for which an error has not occurred will save the da
475. ssaessaeseaesaeseaeseaeseaeseaaeeeeseeeneeeeeneneeets A 18 Generic Terms and Abbreviations ccccccecceceeeeeeeceeeeseeeeceeceeeeaeeaecaeseeeeaecaecaeseaeeaesaesaeseaeeaesaeseseesaeseeseaseaees A 19 1 OVERVIEW 1 1to1 13 Wl Features orraa a a di aibiviea a ir a avian hiv adh avvavea i 1 2 T2 FOALS a See esate ei Lc AA a eat ee hl eat eee ht epee nape hes eae ee eee 1 6 1 3 Convenient Programming Devices and INStrUCtiONS cecceeeeeceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeaeceeeeaeeaesaeeaesaesaeeeeeeaeeaes 1 9 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM 2 1to2 5 2 1 System Configuration ccccccceccececeeseceeceeceeeseecaeceeeeeeeaecaeceeeeaesaesaeseeeeaecaeceeseeesaesaeseeseaesaeeeseaesaeseeseeeeaeeats 2 1 2 2 Precaution on System ConfiQuration ceccecccecceceeceseeceeeeeeeseceecaeeeeeeaecaecaeseaeeaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeseaeeeseeesaeeaes 2 4 2 3 Confirming the Serial Number and Function Versions c cccccecceceeseeeeceeeeeeesecaeeeeeeaesaesaeseeeeaesaeeaeseaeaes 2 5 3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION 3 1to3 3 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS 4 1to 4 51 4 1 Sequence Program ta veel tien niin Aris ata aa baits ete nl eae eevee pale neve at eave 4 1 4 1 1 Main routine program 0 eeeeceeeceeeceeeeeeneeeneeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeseaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeseaeesaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeas 4 3 EAD odo BAe ET E T 4 4 Ae SilIMtSrrUpt orogr cx svcvesssevsveets bvstoteg ves ex e tvs tetey yeneuse tes bede
476. ssignment with GX Developer Q38B j CPU module Input module Input module Input module rm Empty W Output module gt Output module or amp Output module gt Output module n o N eo N oo N 16 points points points points points points pointspoints X00 X20 X40 60 Y70 Y90 bes YDO Power supply module X1F X3F X5F 6F Y8F YAF YCF YEF Q68B wo A ol oO 2 Ko g function module Intelligent function module Intelligent function module Intelligent function module Output module Output module Output module oe N w N oe N oe N oe N oe N Power supply module points points pointsipoints points points FO 110 130 150 i a poy esi 5e 2 5 D 10F 12F 14F 16F 17F Y19F Y1BF Y1DF x1 This is the case where the number of points for an empty slot is set to 16 at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q b I O assignment with GX Developer Designate slot No 3 to 32 points at the I O assignment tab screen of GX Developer Qn H Parameter Lx PLC name PLC system PLC file PLC RAS Device Program Bootfile SFC 1 0 assignment 70 Assignment Slot Typ ich sting lo Pe PLO Switch setting 1 oeo Select 32 points ae Detailed setting
477. stination 1 Latch relays L should be used when a latch memory backup is required See Section 10 2 4 for details on latch relays 10 10 10 10 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 4 Latch relays L 1 Definition a Latch relays are auxiliary relays which can be latched by the programmable controller s internal latch memory backup Latch relay operation results ON OFF information are saved even in the following cases e When power is switched from OFF to ON e When reset occurs The latch is backed up by the Process CPU battery b Latch relays can be switched OFF by pertorming latch clear for the Process CPU However the latch relay set as Latch 2 Cannot clear with Latch Clear key at the Device tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box cannot be turned off even when the RESET L CLR switch remote latch clear is made for latch clear of it c There are no restrictions on the number of contacts N O contacts N C contacts used in the program provided the program capacity is not exceeded No restrictions on the quantity used LO switches ON at XO OFF to ON SET LO H The latch relay LO ON can only be used for internal QCPU processing and cannot be output externally K20 To 4 Y20 4 LO ON OFF information is output from the output module to an external destination L100 H lt 12047 Figure 10 6 Latch Relay 2 Procedure for external outputs Outputs Y are used to output sequence pr
478. stop by stop eror of PLC2 Refresh settings FZ All station stop by stop error of PLC3 hange screens Seting J All station stop by stop error of PLI ae PLU side device PLC PLC share memory G Dev starting Point Stat End Start End Not 0 No 2 U No 3 a No 4 a The applicable device of head device is B M Y D W A ZR The unit of points that send range for each PLC is word Settings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Check End Cancel a A MULTIPLE PLC DOWN error code 7000 error occurs for the CPU modules and the multiple PLC system will be halted when a stop error is occurs in CPU modules for which the All station stop by stop error of PLC n has been set See POINT on the next page for details b A MULTIPLE PLC ERROR error code 7010 error occurs for all other PLCs but operations will continue when a stop error occurs in CPU modules for which the All station stop by stop error of PLC n has not been set 14 15 14 15 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM 14 16 MELSEC Q A MULTIPLE PLC DOWN stop error will be occur for the PLC on which the error was detected when a stop error occurs There are cases where the timing of error detection will search for the PLC on which the stop error that has caused the MULTIPLE PLC DOWN error occurs not the first PLC on which a stop error occurs and the entire system will assume the MULTIPLE PLC D
479. supply module 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 10 1 Daily Inspection 10 2 Periodic Inspection 10 3 Battery Replacement 10 3 1 Battery life 10 3 2 Battery replacement procedure 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 1 Troubleshooting Basics 11 2 Troubleshooting 11 2 1 Troubleshooting flowchart 11 2 2 Flowchart when MODE LED is not turned on 11 2 3 When MODE LED is flickering 11 2 4 Flowchart when POWER LED is turned off 11 2 5 Flowchart when the RUN LED is turned off 11 2 6 When the RUN LED is flickering 11 2 7 Flowchart when ERR LED is on flickering 11 2 8 When USER LED is turned on 11 2 9 When BAT LED is turned on 11 2 10 When BOOT LED is flickering 11 2 11 When output module LED is not turned on 11 2 12 Flowchart when output load of output module does not turn on 11 2 13 Flowchart when unable to read a program 11 2 14 Flowchart when unable to write a program 11 2 15 Flowchart when it is unable to perform boot operation from memory card 11 2 16 Flowchart when UNIT VERIFY ERR occurs 11 2 17 Flowchart when CONTROL BUS ERR occurs 11 3 Error Code List 11 3 1 Procedure for reading error codes 11 3 2 Error code list 11 4 Canceling of Errors 11 5 I O Module Troubleshooting 11 5 1 Input circuit troubleshooting 11 6 Special Relay List 11 7 Special Register List APPENDICES APPENDIX 1 Error Code Return to Origin During General Data Processing APPENDIX 1 1 Error code overall explanation APPENDIX 1 2 Description of the errors of
480. switches from OFF to hee EE Star ON Identical to TRACE instruction execution status 4 MSOs QGPU OFF Not after trigger re ote S Status SM804 After trace trigger ON After trigger Switches ON after trace is triggered change New QCPU SM805 Trace completed OFF Bot comipleted Switches ON at completion of trace Slats 9043 QCPU ON End change Step trace OFF Not ready A N SM820 ON Ready Goes ON after program trace registration at ready Step trace starts OFF Suspend e When this goes ON step trace is started S Status M9182 format P ON Start Suspended when OFF Related special M all OFF change change Step trace SM801 Trace start Goes ON when step trace execution is underway S Status 5 M9181 Goes OFF at completion or suspension change 91g M822 execution underway Goes ON if even 1 block within the step trace being executed is triggered Goes OFF when step trace is commenced After Step trace OFF Is not after all triggers Goes ON ital blocks Wwithinithe step lace being S Status executed are triggered trigger On Is afterall triggers Goes OFF when step trace is commenced change Step OFF Not completed Goes ON at step trace completion S Status tracecompleted JON End Goes OFF when step trace is commenced change SM826 Trace error OFE Nema e Switches ON if error occurs during execution of trace Statue ON Errors change 8 Latch area Meaning Explanation When
481. t c Precautions for formatting 1 Formatting of program memory The Process CPU program memory can only be used after being formatted by GX Developer When formatting the program memory designate whether or not a system area is to be allocated for user settings Up to 16 k steps in 1 k step units can be allocated for the user setting system area System area 0 to 15k steps Unit of 1k step User files Memory capacity after formatting Parameters programs etc 2 System area setting If RS 232 and USB interfaces are connected to GX Developer the system area user setting data is used for registering monitor data from the GX Developer connected to serial communication module The allocation of space for system and user defined areas will make it much easier to perform monitoring operation by operating from the GX Developer connected to the serial communications module Although the designation of a user setting area speeds up monitoring from the GX Developer connected to serial communication module it also reduces the amount of space available for user files 1 1 This table shows an example in which 0 k step is allocated for a system area 2 2 In computing the memory capacity 1 step is equal to 4 bytes 3 3 Maximum number of executable program is 124 More than 124 programs can not be executed 6 PROCESS CPU FILES MELSEC Q 6 3 About the Standard ROM 1 What is the standard ROM a
482. t A B DO When local devices are DO in Program C is monitored D100 is monitored after Program specified C is executed When local devices are DO inthe displayed program is D100 is monitored after the not specified monitored displayed program is executed If the local device monitor setting is made and Program B is displayed for example this makes it possible to monitor the local devices in Program B Process CPU Program execution A gt B C Program A Program B Program C The local device data of the program B is displayed The local device monitor is set and the program B is monitored EX In case that the local device is from DO to D10 D0 4 is displayed when X10 is on and D9 8 is displayed Personal computer when X11 is on Install the GX Developer 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Monitoring the Local Devices Monitor local devices in the following steps Connect the personral computer to the CPU module Display the circuit in the circuit mode Change the mode to the monitor mode Select Tool Select Option e e e Display option window Select Program type e e e e Change to the option selection window by program Select Monitor to monitor naci hie local devine e e e Setting of the local device monitor The local device of the displayed program i
483. t allowed with the multiple PLC system If a reset is attempted all PLCs on the multiple PLC system will assume the MULTIPLE PLC DOWN status The entire multiple PLC system can be reset 1 It is not possible to reset the CPU modules for PLC No 2 to No 4 individually in the multiple PLC system If an attempt to reset any of the CPU modules for PLC No 2 to No 4 during operation of the multiple PLC system a MULTIPLE PLC DOWN error code 7000 error will occur for the other PLCs and the entire multiple PLC system will be halted However depending on the timing in which the CPU modules have been reset there are cases where errors other than the MULTIPLE PLC DOWN error will halt the other PLCs A MULTIPLE PLC DOWN error code 7000 error will occur regardless of the operation mode set at the Multiple PLC settings screen within the PLC Parameter dialog box stop continue all other PLCs on the CPU modules for PLC No 2 to No 4 error when the CPU modules for PLC No 2 to No 4 are reset See Section 14 2 8 for details on the multiple PLC setting operation modes 14 14 14 14 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 14 2 7 Processing when CPU module stop errors occur The operations for the entire system will differ when a PLC No 1 stop error occurs and when any of PLC No 2 to No 4 stop error occurs in the multiple PLC system 1 When astop error occurs at the PLC No 1 a A MULTIPLE PLC DOWN error cod
484. t arithmetic processing w Perform internal arithmetic operations in double precision T High speed execution Interrupt program Fixed scan program setting r Intelligent functional module setting r Module synchronization Interrupt pointer setting IV Synchronize intelligent module s pulse up APLC Settings should be set as same when using multiple PLC MV Use special relay special register from SM SD1000 settings Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple PLC Default Check End Cancel b When the Process CPU is in RUN status use remote STOP to arrange the STOP status c Reset Process CPU by the remote RESET operation 1 For the GX Developer this is performed by on line remote operation 2 The serial communication module and Ethernet interface module are controlled by commands complying with the MC protocol For details of the MC protocol refer to the following manual Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 Precautions a To perform the remote RESET check the Allow check box of the Remote reset section at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box and then write parameters into Process CPU If the Allow check box is not checked a remote RESET operation is not performed b Remote RESET cannot be performed when the Process CPU is in RUN status c After the reset operation is complete th
485. t function modules The intelligent function module is a module that allows Process CPU to process analog values or high speed pulses which cannot be processed with I O modules For example an analog value is converted into a digital value with the analog digital conversion module one of the intelligent function modules before being used 2 Communication with intelligent function modules The intelligent function module is equipped with memory buffer memory to store the data received from or output to external devices Process CPU reads writes the data from to the buffer memory 8 1 Communication Between Process CPU and Intelligent Function Modules The following methods enable the communication between Process CPU and intelligent function modules e Initial setting or automatic refresh setting using GX Configurator e Device initial value e FROM TO instruction e Intelligent function module device e Instructions dedicated for intelligent function modules The following table shows the communication timing for the communication methods with intelligent function modules described above Communication timing Storage location 1 Communication method with intelligent function High mogues model QCPU O Can be stored Cannot be stored x1 Indicates whether the data designated by the GX Configurator of the device initial value etc is stored in Process CPU or in an intelligent function module x2 Represents the interna
486. t operation from the GX Remote reset 1002H Developer Output mode at STOP to RUN 1003H Designates the output Y mode at STOP RUN switching Specifies the assignment of interrupt pointers 150 to 1255 leading Floating point arithmetic processing Intelligent functional module 400An setting interrupt pointer setting I O Nos and leading SI Nos of an intelligent function module 1005H Designates the common pointer first No Designates the number of empty slot points in the main extension Number of empty slots 1007H g ply p base units Interrupt counter start No Designates the interrupt counter first No 10084 Specifies time intervals at which to execute interrupt pointers 128 to 131 Interrupt program fixed scan 1008h Specifies whether to perform the high speed execution of an program setting interrupt program Specifies whether to bring the start of a CPU module into Module synchronization 100CH p RA Peis f synchronization with the start of an intelligent function module A PLC 100Du Specifies whether to use MELSEC A Series special relays special registers SM1000 SD1000 to SM1299 SD1299 Designates the various files used in the CPU module File register 11001 Designates the file for file registers to be used in the program 11014 Fixed scan interval Comment file used in a command Designates the file for comments to be used in the program Designates the file for the device initial val
487. t soring Therefore the I O number of the slot on the right side of the PC CPU module is 10H ot the empty slot at zero point UAn O OS of PLC Parameters dialog box to assign 00H to the first I number a Q 6j gt Q 2 gt n i D z e a peu count 4 If the number of CPU modules mounted on the main base unit is smaller than the number set at the Multiple PLC setting of PLC Parameter dialog box the ae on the right of the actually mounted CPU modules is are set as CPU Empty slot 00H to OFH occupied mopty he 10 number for the multiple PLC system can be confirmed with the system monitor 15 1 15 1 15 ALLOCATING MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 15 1 2 I O number of CPU module 15 2 O numbers are allocated to the CPU modules with the multiple PLC system in order to allow interactive communications between the CPU modules with the following commands e Multiple PLC commands e Motion dedicated commands e Dedicated communication commands between multiple PLCs The I O numbers for the CPU modules are fixed for the slots on which they are mounted and cannot be amended The table below shows the I O number allocated to each CPU module when the multiple CPU system is composed CPU modul CPU slot Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 mounting position First I O number 3E00H 3E10H 3E20H 3E30H The CPU modules I O numbers are used in the following cases e When writing data in the
488. t switch settings and the network parameters will not be transmitted from the Process CPU to a specified intelligent function module when the Process CPU is changed from STOP to RUN Switch the power supply to the PLC on once again ON OFF ON or reset the Process CPU when the PLC parameter s I O assignment switch settings and the network parameters have been amended If the Process CPU is changed from STOP to RUN after PLC parameter change without this procedure a PARAMETER ERROR error code 3000 is caused If the PLC parameter s I O assignment switch settings and the network parameters are changed switch the power supply to the PLC on once again ON OFF ON or reset the Process CPU Otherwise the new PLC parameter s I O assignment switch settings and network parameters are not validated 9 PARAMETER LIST MELSEC Q Table 9 1 Parameter List Designate the label and comment for the CPU module to be used These settings do not affect CPU operation 0000H Designates the label setting name and use 0001H Designates the comment setting These are the settings required for using the CPU module PLC system y Default values are available for PLC control Timer limi imer limit ow Spee 4000 a i Designates the low speed high speed timer settings setting High Speed Designates the contact which controls the CPU module s RUN PAUSE contact 1001 RUN PAUSE operation Enables disables the remote rese
489. t time of the watch dog timer Set the watch dog timer for a desired value by taking such an error into account b The watch dog timer is reset with the WDT instruction in the sequence program If the watch dog timer expires while the FOR and NEXT instructions are repetitiously executed reset the watch dog time with the WDT instruction FOR K1000 Program for repetition processing i i Repetition MO 1000 times H C WDT WDT reset NEXT 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q c The scan time value is not reset even if the watch dog timer is reset in the sequence program The scan time value is measured to the END instruction Internal processing time Sequence program Internal processing time mnm A A Low speed execution type Low speed execution type program C program C Scan execution Scan execution Scan execution type i type program A type program B END T 0 program A Next scan time WDT reset Sean time WDT reset QCPU internal processing QCPU internal processing Watchdog timer measured time Fig 7 9 Watch dog Timer Reset e Scan time is the time from when the Process CPU starts processing a sequence program at Step 0 until it restarts processing another sequence program with the same filename at Step 0 The scan time is not the same at every scan and differs depending on e Whether the commands used are executed or not executed e Whether to execute or not an interrupt program and a fixed sca
490. ta prior to the stop error being triggered For example if a stop error occurs in the PLC No 2 when B20 is ON the B20 in the PLC No 1 will remain at ON as shown in the operation outline in fig a When automatic refresh is carried out it is necessary to set the points to be transmitted by each CPU and the device in which the data is to be stored the device that will perform automatic refresh with the PLC parameter multiple PLC settings 16 2 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 2 Automatic refresh settings Set the points to be transmitted by each CPU and the device in which the data is to be stored with the PLC parameter multiple PLC settings for when automatic refresh is to performed Range of transmission setting for each CPU module pee Se sys Not 2 oso ost BOI 5 No2 2 oso 0801 hee ea Change screens setting x Switching between setting numbers Sets the header number of the device for which automatic refresh is to be performed uses consecutive numbers from the setup device number to the number of specified points PLC side device End J Send range for each PLC ELC share memory G Start a 2 3 No 3 No 4 N pi Setting switch range of transmission for each CPU refresh range 1 It is possible to set four ranges from Setting 1 to Setting 4 for the refresh setting with the setting switch For example it is p
491. tages is not assured even if the extension stage is skipped at the stage number setting connector of the base unit Lower I O numbers are assigned first To reserve empty extension stages for future expansion use the PLC parameter to set the base unit 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q The following shows the example of the I O number assignment when the base unit is set in Auto mode without I O assignment Q35B 5 slots occupied 0 2 3 qone Slot No E o 2 2 2 2 5 e e 2 E E a a a El 6 E E E gt gt 5 2 2 5 Allocate the I O number with Q c Cc 5 E 2 oO fo the I O points of each slot L 16 16 32 16 O A j j LI a points points points points Pe stheseeee I O numbering direction X00 X10 X20 Y40 Y50 Ss S S The slot numbers of the 1st stage s extension XOF X1 F X3F Y4E ygF base unit continue from the last slot number Btonsion s Q65B 5 slots occupied of the main base unit cable Pa 6 7 8 2 2 2 o 2 e Ga P Ae 2 52 82 82 2 a gt g z c 4 _ Empty slot points designated at the PLC system E T S tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box are Z Z fa r 2 5 0 allocated Default 16 points o0 L 32 32 32 16 16 points points points points gt 90 BO i YFO 100 AF CF EF YFF 10F The slot numbers of the 2nd stage
492. te instruction execution is complete SM1203 ON End e Used asa condition contact to reset M9202 and M9203 completion for after the ZNWR instruction is complete master station Use the RST instruction to reset ZNRD instruction LWTP instruction Loa F eo SM1204 for ACPU OFF Not completed On indicates that the ZNRD instruction is complete at the ne ON End local station reception for local station ZNWER instruction LRDP instruction OFF N Not completed SM1205 for ACPU ON End recep tion for local station Host station link OFF Normal Depends on whether or not the link parameter setting of SM1206 i parameter error ON Abnormal the host is valid Depends on whether or not the ZNRD word device read instruction execution is complete e Used as a condition contact for resetting M9200 and M9201 after the ZNRD instruction is complete On indicates that the ZNWR instruction is complete at the local station Link parameter a check results Depends on whether or not the link parameter setting of SM1207 station in tier three in a three tier system Valid only for the master stations in a three tier system y M9200 M9201 M9202 M9203 M9204 M9205 M9206 M9207 M9208 the master station in
493. teeteeeteeetes 10 63 Low speed END processing s s s 4 23 Low speed execution monitor time 4 24 Low speed execution type program 4 19 Low speed retentive timer ST 0 0 0 10 21 Low speed Scan timer cccseeeeteeeeeeeees 4 23 Low speed timer T eesse 10 19 Index 2 M N O P Q R M Internal relay sasasseseessesrsresrseesrersrnsrnens 10 10 Macro instruction argument device VD 10 60 Main routine program seseeeseeseererss 4 3 Memory Card onreine 6 10 Monitor condition setting cecseeeeeees 7 25 Monitoring the local devices eee 7 30 N N STING eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeateeateeas 10 52 COUTDUT CY erisia an alnan dieters tia bet 10 8 P POMON pariri eaa E TIRE 10 53 PassWord e nii aiir ei 7 65 PLOW instruction c ccccccscesesseeseeseenees 4 14 POFF instrucioni 4 14 Pointer P sss vata er E 10 53 Precautions for the use of device initial values 10 71 Precautions when using timers 0 10 23 Priority OF LED opar a 7 76 Procedure for using device initial values 10 70 Processing at annunciator OFF 10 14 Processing at annunciator ON 008 10 12 Program construction 1 6 Program execute tyPe eeeeeeeeseeseeeteeeteees 4 10 Program Memory ececeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeeeeeeateees 6 6 Program monitor list 7 39 PSCAN instruction cccccceeceeseeseeseeteee
494. tep No Stores the step number when the trace was executed c Program Name Stores the program name that executed the trace 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q c The created trace data and trace condition is written to the memory card The trace file is written to the memory card SRAM card The trace file is written to the memory card SRAM card from the Write to PLC dialog box in the Sampling Trace dialog box The files are written in the memory card SRAM card with file names so multiple trace files can be stored d Sampling trace is executed The sampling trace is executed at the Execute and status tab screen in the Sampling Trace dialog box ix Sampling trace Close Read file Write file Delete file Read from PLC Write to PLC Trace result Trace data Conditions Operation Trace status S Statt ettings Current art trace C Stop trace Eksala Total Times Times C Execute trigger After trigger Times Times fe an Trace Start monitor For start trace from Program Trace data Conditions Results storing dest l Target memory Fil j ais MAIN Displays only when Taco condition Display Status is selected Execute by overwriting the conditions on the PLC side Execute by following conditions written on the PLC side Operation Trace data Condition Results storing dest and Trace condition can be set when Execute and Status is display
495. th the automatic refresh process between CPU modules e This is linked from the device number set with the first device to the number of PLC share memory G points and used The 1st PLC share memory G point occupies the points shown in the table below B M Y 16 points D R ZR 1 point 19 5 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM f Qn H Parameter x PLC name PLC system PLC fie PLC RAS Device r120 Assignment Slot Type Model name Points Start Q PLC PLC No1 ov y 3E00 1_ PLC PLCNo2 v y 3E10 FA aE PLCNo3 7 v 3E20 3 PLC PLC Empty v 7 4 33 X X 5 J44 z hd 6 55 hi ba 7_j6 6 hs ha If the start X and Y are not input the PLC assigns them automatically It is not possible to check correctly when there is a slot of the unsetting on the way Standard settina Base model name Power model name Extention cable r Base mode Auto Points Increase C Detail Inctease2 Increase3 8 fixation 12 fixation Increase5 settings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Error time output mode HAW error time PLC operation mode 1 0 response time Control PLC PLC No 2 PLC No 3 PLC Empty PLC No 1 x PLC No 1 PLC No 1 PLC No 1 PLC No 1 PLC No 1 PLC No 1 v PLC No 1
496. than file registers 6 2 6 PROCESS CPU FILES MELSEC Q 6 1 About the Process CPU s Memory 1 User Memory A user memory can be created within the memory of the Process CPU by using the GX Developer sequence program The Process CPU has the following built in memories e Program memory e Standard RAM e Standard ROM A memory card can be mounted on the Process CPU to increase the size of a user memory a Programs used for arithmetic operations of the Process CPU are stored in the program memory Programs stored in the standard ROM or ona memory card are booted read into the program memory for arithmetic operation A batch of parameters and programs stored in the program memory can be copied to the standard ROM memory card Flash card Parameters and programs are stored in the standard ROM These data are used for ROM operation of the Process CPU File register and local device data is stored in the standard RAM The use of file registers in the standard RAM will enable high speed access as is the case with data registers Memory card A memory card can be connected to a memory card interface of the Process CPU This allows the read write of data The Process CPU supports three types of memory cards SRAM card Flash card and ATA card 1 The SRAM card allows the write read of programs through a sequence program in the following cases where e File registers are used in excess of the standard RAM capacity e Sampling tra
497. the following modules e Input module e Output module e Intelligent function module b 1O refresh time is given in the formula I O refresh time Number of inputs point 16 lt N1 Number of outputs point 16 XN2 c The table below shows N1 and N2 Benue yP Q30B Q5UB Q6UB Q30B Q5UB Q6UB Q12PHCPU Instruction execution time a Instruction execution time is the total processing time required to execute an instruction in a program on the Process CPU For details on the execution time of each instruction see the QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions b Overhead time is required for an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program Add overhead time to execution time END processing time a END processing time is the Process CPU processing time common to the above listed items 1 and 2 b The table below shows the length of END processing time CPU Type END Processing Time Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 11 1 11 PROCESS CPU PROCESSING TIME 11 2 Factors Responsible for Extended Scan Time 11 2 MELSEC Q 11 The following functions increase the length of scan time When using any of the following functions add a value of extended time to values obtained from Section 11 1 e MELSECNETH H refresh e CC Link automatic refresh e Sampling trace e GX Developer monitoring e Local devices e Execution of multiple programs e Installation removal of a memory card e File reg
498. the PLC main module power is turned on If the external power supply is turned on first it could result in erroneous output or erroneous operation e When there are communication problems with the data link refer to the corresponding data link manual for the operating status of each station Not doing so could result in erroneous output or erroneous operation e When connecting a peripheral device to the CPU module or connecting a personal computer or the like to the intelligent function module to exercise control data change on the running PLC configure up an interlock circuit in the sequence program to ensure that the whole system will always operate safely Also before exercising other control program change operating status change status control on the running PLC read the manual carefully and fully confirm safety Especially for the above control on the remote PLC from an external device an immediate action may not be taken for PLC trouble due to a data communication fault In addition to configuring up the interlock circuit in the sequence program corrective and other actions to be taken as a system for the occurrence of a data communication fault should be predetermined between the external device and PLC CPU A CAUTION e Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires or install them close to each other They should be installed 100 mm 3 94 inch or more from each other Not
499. the Trace Condition Set the trace condition at the Conditions tab screen in the Sampling trace dialog box The trace condition setting can set to No of traces Trace point setup Trigger point setup and Additional trace information Sampling trace Execute and status Trace data Conditions Close No of traces Additional trace information Read file No of times 2072 T Times T Time After trigger i T Step no Write file number of times fiazs Times I Program name 3 Delete file Trace point setup Each scan Y ms Device Current value Condition Read from PLC a 2 Write to PLC c Te Trace result EEEE H r hh Trigger point setup At the time of trigger operation Current value Condition le ce foc I i 1 No of traces a The No of times sets the number of times to execute the sampling trace from trace execution to trace complete b The After trigger number of times sets the number of times to executes the sampling trace from trigger execution to trace complete Trace start Trigger point m Trace complete EE l After trigger number of traces No of times Number of total times c The setting range for each number of times is shown below After trigger number of times lt No of times lt 8192 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Trace Point Setup This sets the timing to collect trace data Select one from the following a Eac
500. the above program is written to the Process CPU it occupies 2k steps on the Process CPU The reason is as shown below File header Executed program Steps secured for write during RUN A gt 34 steps Z KS gt 491 steps gt 500 steps J Simple addition of the above elements results in 34 steps 491 steps 500 steps 1025 steps However since a file is stored on the program memory in 1k step 1024 steps units the program occupies 2k steps 1024 steps 2048 steps on the Process CPU lt ie File header Executed program Steps secured for write during RUN Status of File on Process CPU 2k steps are occupied 6 PROCESS CPU FILES MELSEC Q 6 9 GX Developer File Operation and File Handling Precautions 6 9 1 File operation GX Developer online operation allows the files which are stored in the program memory standard ROM and memory card to perform the file operations in the table below However the available file operations vary according to the presence or absence of a password registered by GX Developer the Process CPU write protect switch setting status and the Process CPU RUN STOP status Table 6 5 File Operations from GX Developer Operation File Operation Enabled Disabled Operation Description ax p c 0 ReadfrompLc A Files are read from concemed memory Files are written to the program memory or Write to PLC x Pog 4 SRA
501. the host PLC with instructions that use UD GO g SP UNIT ERROR error code 2114 occurs if data is read from the CPU shared memory of the host PLC with the FROM instruction and instructions that use ULAGH h SP UNIT ERROR error code 2110 also occurs if access is attempted on a non mounted PLC with instructions that use UD GU 16 10 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 16 3 Interactive Communications between The Process CPU and Motion CPU 16 3 1 Control commands from the Process CPU to the Motion CPU It is possible to issue control commands from the Process CPU to the Motion CPU and read and write device data with the Motion dedicated PLC instructions listed below Control commands from Motion CPU to Motion CPU can not be used Instruction name Description S SFCS SP SFCS Requests startup of the motion SFC program S SVST SP SVST SP CHGV the real mode SP CHGA and the cam axes For example it is possible to start up the Motion CPU s motion SFC from the Process CPU with the S P SFCS instruction Requests the start of operations for the servo program Process CPU Motion SFC Startup request Motion SFC S SFCS instruction One Process CPU module can operate up to 32 Motion dedicated PLC instructions and communication dedicated commands between multiple PLCs omitting the S P GINT instruction at one time However if the Motion dedicated PLC inst
502. the number of slots of the main and extension base units The number of slots is designated for each base unit Switch setting Designates various switches of the intelligent function module Error time output 403H Designates whether the output is cleared or retained upon a module stopping error of the control PLC HW error time PLC 404H Designates whether the control PLC continues operation or it is operation mode stopped upon a hardware error of the intelligent function module Designates the response time of the input module high speed VOrespori e time input module and I O mixture module Designates the control PLC of the I O module and intelligent Coritrol PLG o eea module Ackn wiedge XV aasianiment Contents of I O allocation MELSECNET Ethernet setting and CC 9 9 Link setting can be checked Multiple CPU setting Defines settings for establishment of a multiple CPU system Designates the operation of the multiple CPU system upon a stopping error of the PLC No 2 to No 4 CPU modules The multiple CPU system is stopped if a stopping error occurs to the PLC No 1 Fixed Designates whether the input state of the input module and Out of group input setting intelligent function module controlled by other PLCs are acquired E04H or not Out of group output settin Designates whether the output state of the output module group oup 9 controlled by other PLCs are acquired or not Operating mode Designates the devices and t
503. the program Section 10 7 e Use the following file e Not used e Use the same file name as the program e Use the following file e Not used Use the same file name as the program Section 10 13 2 e Use the following file e Not used i ai Section 10 13 1 e Use the following file 9 PARAMETER LIST MELSEC Q Table 9 1 Parameter List continued i i These settings are used for the RAS function WDT Watch aog timer Set the watchdog timer of the CPU module oa 3000H Set the eee ee eee fl timer for the use of an initial execution type eee ee eee fl Set the ee ee eee timer for the use of a low speed execution type ee ee eee eter mode when there is an ET La _fPesanais the CPU module operation mode to be established when an error is detected P check 3001H Designates whether or not to detect a specified error Constant scanning 3003H Designates the constant Scanning time nalexecuton execution kooo a Low Low speed execution execution oO O Q i 0 execution at each scanning history latch range and the local device range Breakdown history Device point 2000H Designates the number of device points used Latch 1 range Latch clear key enabled 2001H Designates the latch range where the latch clear key is enabled Latch 2 range ee Latch clear key disabled 2002H Designates the latch range where the latch clear key is disabled Local device setting 2003H Designates the devi
504. the program and tests Control instruction Write The following functions set the PLC Parameter and Process CPU dip switches are performed even when the Process CPU system s SW1 setup switch is set to ON and the system protect function is activated e Booting from the standard ROM and the memory card e Automatic write to standard ROM 7 17 1 Password registration Password is used to prohibit reading and writing data of the program and comments in Process CPU from GX Developer The Password Registration is set for the specified memory program memory standard memory memory card program file device comment file and device initial file Either of the following two descriptions is to be registered e The file name is not displayed and read write cannot be performed as well e Write cannot be performed to the file Read only If the password is registered file operations from GX Developer cannot be performed unless the same password is input 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 1 Password Registration To register the password select GX Developer Online Password setup keyword set up for writing to PLC Register password Password registration change x Password is set up for the PLC and the project currently selected on GX Developer a gt Taiget memory Program memory Device memory x Data type Data name Registration Password Registration condition 1 Program MAIN mair write protect 2 Progr
505. ther to use a local device at the PLC file tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box If a local device is not specified the local devices used for previously executed programs are selected This does not require replacing local devices in a memory card with the device memory of the Process CPU If local devices are not used for Program B while executing Programs A B and C the local devices are used as shown below Used local device of program A Program B Program C Program A Program B Saved Restored Saved Restored Local device Local device For For program A program A For For program B program B For For program C program C T Using local devices used by the file where a sub routine program is stored It is possible to use local devices that are used by the file where a sub routine program is stored when executing a sub routine program Whether or not such local devices are used is set by special relay SM776 ON OFF setting 10 65 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 1 Switching over local devices by setting ON OFF for a special relay SM776 Di SM776 Executes calculation by the local devices that are used by the file OFF f where the sub routine program was called Executes calculation by the local devices that are used by the file ON f l where the sub routine program is stored Operation at SM776 OFF
506. tier two matches that of the master Sets master e Depends on whether or not the B and w data controlled station B and W by higher link master station host station is sent to eanemission OFF Transmits to tier2 and lower link local stations tertiary stations Pa SM1208 tier 3 When SM1208 is OFF B and W of host station is range for lower ON Transmits to tier2 only sent to tertiary stations link master When SM1208 is ON B and W of host station is stations only not sent to tertiary stations Link parameter Set to ON not to match B and W of the higher and lower check command OFF Executing the check links When SM1209 is ON the link parameters of the M9209 SM1209 for lower link function higher and lower links are not checked master stations ON Check non execution e When SM1209 is OFF the link parameters of the higher only and lower links are checked M9210 SM1210 Link card error for OFF Normal Depends on presence or absence of the link card master station ON Abnormal hardware error Judged by the CPU Link module error 7 OFF Normal M9211 SM1211 Ea for local station ON Abnormal use OFF Online M9224 SM1224 Link status ON Offline station to station Depends on whether the master station is online or offline test or self loopback or is in station to station test or self loopback test mode test M9225 SM1225 Forward loop error OFF Normal Depends on the error condition of the forward loop line ON
507. tion prevents illegal access to the Process CPU by users in remote locations The remote password function is enabled for use by setting it up in the Process CPU When the remote password function has been set a check will be run on remote passwords when users in remote locations attempt to access the Process CPU with serial communication modules or Ethernet modules with modem functions 1 Setting up amending and canceling remote passwords a Remote password setup Remote passwords are set up on the GX Developer s remote password setup screen The GX Developer is then connected to the Process CPU into which the remote password is to be set and the password uploaded The Process CPU will transmit the remote password to specified serial communication modules and Ethernet modules when the power supply to the sequence is switched on or the Process CPU is reset b Amending and canceling remote passwords It is possible to amend and cancel remote passwords by connecting the GX Developer to the relevant Process CPU Remote passwords set in the Process CPU can be amended or cancelled by setting up an amended password or canceling a remote password with the GX Developer Remote passwords cannot be amended or cancelled from a remote location For example an outline of what will happen when a remote passwords is set up amended or cancelled from an Ethernet module is shown below GX Developer Ethernet Power supply CPU module N
508. to 4 0800 oso BOC 0800 0801 No3 4l 0800 0803 0800 0801 Setting 2 In the case of link registers Change screens Send range for each PLC PLC side device PLC PLC share memory G Point Stat End Stat End e The same devices can be specified for settings 1 to 4 However as setting 1 in the illustration on the left uses CEE SSS SSS Sas SSS 160 points between BO and BOF ce OR BAO and higher can be used for setting 3 No part of a device number can be Setting 3 In the case of link relays duplicated as shown with BO to B9F on setting 1 and B90 to B10F on setting 3 Change screens Setting 3 x Send range for each PLC PLC share memory G Point Stat End Statt__ __End _ 0812 0813 B120 B13F 0804 0807 B140 B17F 0802 0805 B180 B1BF UR c HS The first and last will be calculated automatically with the GX Developer 16 5 16 5 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q e Each of the setting 1 to setting 4 devices can be set up independently For example the PLC No 1 can be set up as a link relay and the PLC No 2 can be set up as an internal relay Refresh setting for PLC No 1 Change screens Setting 1 Change screens Send range for each PLC PLC side device PLC _ RLC share memory G A Pann Nost nd stat ed Noy 16 0802 ott OW Nob 1f osoz oat wi WITF ae ee o RS GED SSeS as aes Ss s Set
509. to a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not possible after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of chance loss and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages cau
510. to the right of the decimal point Process CPU Memory card GX Developer Specified Sampling trace area device data Sampling trace area Data for 1st time R h Displays the DEVTE Data for 2nd time Snes data for the area peripheral Data for 3rd time device ae File Data for 4th time amoun Sampling trace register Data for 5th time data monitoring area Data for 6th time 1 Data for n 1 th time Data for n th time When stored for n th time the next data overwrites the 1st time data If the trigger point is executed the sampling trace area data is latched after sampling as many times as specified Fig 7 8 Sampling Trace Operation 7 FUNCTION e MELSEC Q The trace result displays the ON OFF status of the bit device for the sampling cycle and the current value of the word device Trace result Bit device Contact Coil Display units 10 Nd 2040 2030 2020 2010 20 D0 1 co Coil 4 ia Count 2048 Timefsec Step Program Word device Current value 16 bit Decimal be 2048 2047 2046 2045 2044 2043 204 a D1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D100 15559 15559 15559 15559 15559 15559 15 D300 5458 5458 5458 5458 5458 5458 545 KENI Count 2048 Timefsec Step Program Device details are read under trigger conditions specified in the trigge
511. transition OFF OFF ON Preserves Goes ON when a CC Link error is detected in any of the installed QU61QBT11 Goes OFF when normal operation is restored ON if SFC program is correctly registered and OFF if not registered S Initial M9100 e Goes OFF if SFC dedicated instruction is not correct e Initial value is set at the same value as SM320 Goes ON automatically if SFC program is present SFC program will not execute if this goes OFF prior to SFC program processing S Initial M9101 e Starts the SFC program when this relay goes from OFF U format change to ON Stops the SFC program when this relay goes from ON to OFF e Initial value is set at ON or OFF depending on parameters e When this relay is OFF all execution statuses at stop of SFC program are cleared and execution starts from the initial step of the block where the start request is made S Initial M9102 e When this relay is ON execution starts from the U format change execution block and execution step that were active at stop of SFC program ON is enabled only when resumptive start has been S Status change designated at parameters SM902 is not automatically designated for latch e When this relay is OFF transition to one scan one step occurs in all blocks e When this relay is ON transition to one continuous scan occurs in all blocks U M9103 In designation of individual blocks priority is given to the continuous transit
512. ts can be used by block conversion in increments of 32768 points RO to 32767 When a Flash card 4Mbyte is used The number of points of up to 1042432 points can be used by block conversion in increments of 32768 points RO to 32767 e When a standard RAM is used 131072 points ZRO to 131071 No block conversion necessary e When a SRAM card 1Mbyte is used 517120 points ZRO to 517119 No block conversion necessary e When a SRAM card 2Mbyte is used 1041408 points ZRO to 1041407 No block conversion necessary When a Flash card 2Mbyte is used 1041408 points ZRO to 1041407 No block conversion necessary When a Flash card 4Mbyte is used 1042432 points ZRO to 1042431 No block conversion necessary Timer T 122 2 fey a Q Q gt ne 5 ay Q E Zz When a Flash card is used read only is possible The ATA card cannot be used File register 3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION MELSEC Q Performance Specifications continued Item Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Special link relay SB 2048 points SBO to 7FF Special link register SW 2048 points SWO to 7FF Step relay S 8192 points SO to 8191 Index register Z 16 points Z0 to 15 Pointer P 4096 points PO to 4095 set parameter values to select usable range ointer of in file pointer shared pointers 296 points 10 10 253 The number of device l l The specified intervals of the system interrupt point
513. tting Send range for each PLC a o PLC side devices e x1 Necessity of setup column O Items that must be set up for multiple PLC system operations not possible if not set up A Items that may be set up when required for multiple PLC system Operations carried out with the default values when not set up Items that are the same as single CPU systems x2 Descriptions O Items that have the same settings for all CPU modules on the multiple PLC system A Items that have the same settings for all Process CPU High Performance model QCPUs and PC CPU module on the multiple PLC system items that do not have settings for motion CPUs Items that can be setup up individually for each CPU modules on the multiple PLC system 14 10 14 10 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM 14 11 MELSEC Q After parameters such as multiple PLC settings are changed reflect the changes to keep uniformity among all PLCs in the multiple PLC system then reset the PLC No 1 It is possible to transfer across and use the CPU settings and I O Assignments set up for other projects with GX Developer See section 19 2 3 for details on transferring and using multiple PLC settings and I O Assignments a CPU count setting Setup necessary 1 The number of CPU modules to be used on a multiple PLC system are set at the PLC parameter s Multiple PLC settings screen in the PLC Parameter dialog indicated with the A arr
514. tting the file registers Type Rn in the list box to view a listing of file registers b Setting the parameters Enter the desired data in columns to specify file registers This step is not needed when you specify only the capacity of file registers 10 47 10 47 10 DEVICES 10 48 MELSEC Q Registering the File Register File with the Process CPU If you click on the following check boxes at the PLC file tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box you must register a file register file with the Process CPU e Not used e Use the same file name as the program For registration of a file register file use the Write to PLC dialog box a a b c d Write to PLC x Connecting interface COMT lt gt PLC modue PLC Connection Neiwoti No fT Station No Host PLC type Q12PH Target Memory card RAM vj Title File selection Device data Program Common Local d Param Piog Select all Cancel all selections Close Password setup Related functions Transfer setup Remote operation Clear PLC memory Format PLC memory COMMENT PLC Network Remote password 5 5 File register wan p File register e Range specification ZR 32767 Selecting a memory to store file registers Choose the standard RAM memory card RAM or memory card ROM from this list box to specif
515. type program in 100 us units Range of 000 to 900 Stores the maximum scan time for all except low speed execution type program s first scan in 1 ms units e Range from 0 to 65535 Stores the maximum scan time for all except low speed execution type program s first scan in 100 us units Range of 000 to 900 Stores time from completion of scan program to start of next scan in 1 ms units Range from 0 to 65535 Stores time from completion of scan program to start of next scan in 100 us units Range of 000 to 900 S Every END processing S Every END processing S Every END processing S Every END processing S Every END processing MELSEC Q Corresponding ACPU Corresponding D9017 format change D9018 format change D9019 format change APP 30 APPENDICES elie Constant scan wait time Cumulative execution time for low speed execution type programs Execution time for low speed execution type programs Scan program execution time Service interval measurement module Service interval time APP 31 Constant scan wait time in 1 ms units Constant scan wait time in 100 us units Cumulative execution time for low speed execution type programs in 1 ms units Cumulative execution time for low speed execution type programs in 100 us units Execution time for low speed execution type programs in 1 ms units Execution time fo
516. uction execution X10 to X13 refresh gt Read from input MO a eine module at f instruction execution M9036 In the case of AnS SEG K1Y100 K1B0 H Y100 to Y103 refresh c Differential contacts HH eliminate the need of converting inputs to pulses In the case of Process CPU Differential contact XO X1 hH Y100 Y100 gt ON at leading edge of X0 In the case of AnS XO ea PLS Mmo H MO X1 H4 Y100 gt Y100 1 OVERVIEW 1 10 MELSEC Q d The buffer memory of intelligent function module e g Q64AD Q62DA can be used in the same way as devices when programming In the case of Process CPU In the case of AnS X0 x X0 e peo Ha kia 010 Ki Readout of Q64AD buffer memory s address 12 data me Buffer memory address designation Intelligent function module designation Process CPU Input 16 points Input 16 points Input 16 points Q64AD 16 points Output 16 points Output 16 points 2 gt 3 fe E gt a 2 ai N pes D fo A Q64AD 16 points Q62AD 16 points 1 0 Nos X Y40 to X Y4f e Direct access to link devices LX LY LB LW SB SW of MELSECNET H network modules e g QJ71LP21 25 is allowed without refresh settings X0 P Wsw Do Direct readout of the No 5 network module s
517. ues to be used in the CPU module 11031 Designates the file for local devices to be used in the program 11021 Initial Device value 9 2 File for local device 9 PARAMETER LIST MELSEC Q Default Value Setting Range Reference Section No setting Max of 10 characters fas gee Td No setting Max of 64 characters a Hooms fi to 1000 ms 1 ms units Section 10 2 10 H00ms _ 0 1 to 100 0 ms Section 10 2 10 No setting XO to X1FFF Section 7 6 1 Enabled Disabled Section 7 6 3 Previous status produce the status of Produce the status of an output X before STOP Clear the Section 7 4 an output X before STOP output output is 1 scan later f No setting 150 to 1255 leading I O No leading SI No Section 10 10 No setting PO to P4095 Section 10 9 2 0 16 32 64 128 256 51 2 1024 points Section 5 6 1 Noseta to C22722 Counter setting points can be set up to 256 Section 10 2 11 128 100 0 ms ae Ts mae 0 5 to 1000 ms 0 5 ms units Section 10 10 131 10 0 ms Section 4 1 3 The high speed execution is disabled Enable Disable the high speed execution Section 4 2 5 The start of an intelligent function Yes No to synchronize the start of an intelligent function module is synchronized module Special relays special registers after Yes NO to use the special relays special registers after Section 10 3 2 SM1000 SD1000 are used M1000 SD1000 Section 10 3 3 eS H y e Not used Use the same file name as
518. ulation that performs remote RUN STOP is as follows 1 Remote STOP Executes the program to the END instruction and enters the STOP status 2 Remote RUN When remote RUN is performed while in the STOP status using remote STOP the status changes to RUN and executes the program from step 0 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Method with Remote RUN STOP There are two ways to perform remote RUN STOP a Method with remote RUN contact The remote RUN contact is set at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box of GX Developer The device can be set in the range of input XO to 1FFF By turning the set remote RUN contact ON OFF the remote RUN STOP can be performed 1 When the remote RUN contact is OFF the QCPU enters the RUN status 2 When the remote RUN contact is ON the QCPU enters the STOP status Step 0 gt END FF Remote RUN contact Q CPU module RUN STOP status STOP status Fig 7 4 Time Chart for RUN STOP with Remote RUN Contact b Method with GX Developer serial communication module etc Process CPU RUN STOP can be performed by the remote RUN STOP operation from the GX Developer serial communication module etc The GX Developer operation is performed with on line remote operations The serial communication module and Ethernet interface module are controlled by commands complying with the MC protocol For details of the MC protocol refer to the following manual Q Corres
519. ule settings QU71E71 vjoooo Detail qg7ic2z24 0100 aes Necessary setting Mo setting Already set Clear Setting completion Cancel b Setup fields i Model selection QJ71E71 QJ71C24 Cs SetupyNotsetup O O O O FTP communication port TCP IP GX Developer communication Adds a check to the valid port TCP IP remote password port GX Developer communication port UDP IP HTTP port Refer to the following manuals for further details on the remote password function e Using Serial Communication Modules Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module Users Manual Application e Using Ethernet Modules Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module Users Manual Basic 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 18 Monitoring Process CPU System Status from GX Developer System Monitor It is possible to confirm the following information for Process CPUs connected to personal computers with the GX Developer system monitor see illustration below e Installed status e Operation status e Module s detailed information e Product information a Installed status Base c Base Module L L Main base EIE b eigi Dimes Ra WER Saks et eles OOe MasterPLC l 6pt 3Zpting Q12PHCPU Milas Eaa b gt Parameter status r Mode I 0 Address 0 lo 30 40 so 60 70 sa System monitor ofiflz 3af4f
520. ur CPU modules in order to control the I O modules and intelligent function modules j ig PC CPU module ede PLC CPU oie PC CPU module The allowable CPU modules are shown in the table below Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU PLC CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Motion CPU Q172CPU Q173CPU Q172CPUN Q173CPUN PC CPU module PPC CPU686 MS 64 PPC CPU686 MS 128 Choose the CPU modules suitable to the system size and application to configure the system It is necessary to set control PLC setup which CPU modules are to control which I O modules and intelligent function modules with a multiple PLC system CPU 0 2 3 5 7 gt odTPoOy Ly L2 2 2 2 2 2 2 A A 3 3 3 5 3 gt amp lolol l2 2 2 gjo g 3 2 Zia re j gel elite e D a E E E IE Ele E Cc oc Oc a5 oO 5 gt gt 22 3 22 3 z a ea ea les ea ss 2 fo SJL Ps 2 c es 2e 5 Oo Oo E 210 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 e Setup of the controlling QCPU 1 Control performed with the QnPHCPU1 sequence program Control performed with the QOPU2 sequence program b The CPU module that controls the I O modules and intelligent function modules is known as the Control PLC The I O modules and intelligent function modules controlled by the control PLC are known controled modules Other modules not controlled by the control PLC are known as non controlled modules 1 Indicates the grouping configuration on the
521. use an input or output failure e Securely load the memory card into the memory card loading connector After installation check for lifting Poor connections could cause an operation fault e Completely turn off the external power supply before loading or unloading the module Not doing so could result in electric shock or damage to the product Note that online module change can be made when the QnPHCPU is used Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be changed online and each module has a predetermined changing procedure For details refer to the section of online module change in the Process CPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection e Do not directly touch the module s conductive parts or electronic components Touching the conductive parts could cause an operation failure or give damage to the module Wiring Precautions lt gt DANGER e Completely turn off the external power supply when installing or placing wiring Not completely turning off all power could result in electric shock or damage to the product e When turning on the power supply or operating the module after installation or wiring work be sure that the module s terminal covers are correctly attached Not attaching the terminal cover could result in electric shock Wiring Precautions A CAUTION e Be sure to ground the FG terminals and LG terminals to the protective ground conductor Not doing so could result i
522. ute the programs required for control by converting them to scan execution type programs They will be reconverted to stand type programs after they completes the program execution 2 Stand by type program applications a Placing programs in the library 1 This application is used to manage sub routine and interrupt programs separately from the main routine program Multiple sub routine and interrupt programs can be created for a single stand by type program Scan execution type program Scan execution type program Main routine Main routine program program P100 Sub routine z z 3 z program _ Stand by type program _ 10 Interrupt a p100 Sub routine program program 3 10 Interrupt program 2 When stand by type program execution is completed the program which was active before the stand by type program was executed is executed A stand by type program s sub routine and interrupt programs are executed as shown below CALL P100 command execution Interrupt error factor occurred END aa END processing END processing Scan execution type program P100 RET Sub routine program H 10 IRET Interrupt program 1 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q b Changing the program setup 1 Create a program compatible with all programs and use it only to execute necessary programs Programs designated as stand by type programs in the PLC Parameter dialog box
523. utomatic refresh function are set in the file register of all programs automatic refresh will be performed on the file register that corresponds with the last scan execution type program executed 16 7 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q c There are cases where old data and new data will become mixed up for each PLC depending on the timing of refreshing the host PLC and reading data from other PLCs When performing the automatic refresh function create an interlock program similar to the one shown below that uses the first device to be refreshed for each PLC and do not use the data from other PLCs when old data does get mixed up with new data An example of a program set up with the following multiple PLC setting refresh settings is shown below e CPU device DO e PLC No 1 transmission points 1024 points DO to D1023 e PLC No 2 transmission points 1024 points D1024 to D2047 DO Used for the PLC No 1 interlock to gt PLC No 1 transmission device D1023 IN D1024 Used for the PLC No 2 interlock to PLC No 2 transmission device D2047 J Example of a program on the transmission side Example of a program on the reception side Interlock with bO of the PLC No 2 Interlock with bO of the PLC No 1 Writing first device D1024 first device DO command D1024 0 DO O Operation using the transmission data DO to D1023 D1024 0
524. window r Connection target information ld com lt gt ric module Target PLC Network No p Station No Fost PLC type ai2PH Clock setup r Specify execution target Currently specified station Group fi YY MM DD Hr Min Sec Day feo f pal ps pafe fre a i ExVECutGt amt fi Board na Close 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Method to Write from the Program The time data is written to the clock element by using the clock instruction DATEWR A program example to write the time data using the time data write instruction DATEWR Write request X0 0 MOVP K2002 DO Year 1999 move Ki D Month 8 move kis D2 Hpay 10 MovP K11 D3 Hour 11 MOVP K35 D4 Minute 35 MOVP K24 D5 Second 24 move K2 De pay Tuesday 2 DATEWR DO Refer to QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions for details on the DATEWR instruction b Reading Time Data When reading the time data to the data register use the time data read instruction DATERD from the program The figure below shows an example of a program used to read the clock data with the DATERD instruction and then store it in D10 to D16 Read request XI The time data is read and PAVER Do l then stored in D10 to D16 Refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common instructions for the details on the DATERD instruction 1 Time Data can be writt
525. wing additional instructions and functions e Process control instructions 52 instructions e Auto tuning function e Online module change e MELSECNET H multiplex remote I O system compatibility POINT 1 For details of the added instructions and auto tuning function refer to the QnPHCPU Programming Manual Process Control Instructions 2 For details of online module change refer to Section 4 6 of this manual 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 1 Features Process CPU has the following new features 1 52 instructions added as process control instructions 52 additional instructions are capable of high level process control 2 2 degree of freedom PID control system The 2 degree of freedom PID control system adopted enables optimum response to both set value variation and disturbance variation 3 Addition of auto tuning function PID constant initial value setting The auto tuning function automates control parameter adjustment shortens adjustment saves the labor of operators and control engineers and resolves differences in adjustment results between individuals 4 Module can be changed online online module change When a module fails you can change it without stopping the system Online module change applies to the Q series I O modules and to the A D converter D A converter thermocouple input and temperature control modules of function version C and later 5 Multiplex remote I O system of MELSECNET H can be c
526. write the applicable CPU according to the connection destination designation ccvececececcecocoeee Set the RESET L CLR switch of the QCPU of the PLC No 1 in the RESET position 19 1 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM 1 RUN STOP switch setting of all PLCs ns sss Cancellation of resetting of QCPU of PLC No 1 y Status confirmation of all PLCs m Confirmation and recovery of errors m All QCPUs debugged Start of actual operations 19 2 MELSEC Q sccccccccccssecsseee Select RUN at the RUN STOP switch of the QCPU for PLC No 1 to No 4 scecesceecesseeeeeee Set the RESET L CLR switch of the QCPU for the PLC No 1 in the OFF position to cancel resetting Check to see if a RUN status error has occurred with all PLCs on the mulitple PLC system when the reset status for the PLC No 1 is canceled cvcccccceccceecseeee Errors occurs confirm the details and recover the situation with the GX Developer s system monitor ccccccescceeseseseee PLC No 1 to PLC No 4 on the multiple PLC system debugged individually 19 19 2 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 19 2 Setting Up the Multiple PLC System Parameters Multiple PLC Settings Control PLC Settings This section explains the procedures for setting up the multiple PLC system parameters with GX Developer Refer to the GX Developer s operation manual for details on setting up a
527. y a memory to store file registers If you want to use the same filename as that of a program store a file register file in the memory specified in the PLC File sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box Selecting a file register file If amemory for file registers is selected a filename of a file register file is displayed Select the desired filename of a file register file Specifying the capacity and filename This section is used to specify the capacity of file registers and a filename of the file register file to be written onto the Process CPU QCPU side filename 1 The capacity of file registers can be specified from ZRO in the units of 1 point Note that the capacity is secured in 256 point units as a file If file registers cannot be assigned from ZRO this will result in a file register file that contains points from ZRO to the last point For example if the storing range of file registers are designated from ZR1000 to ZR1791 a file register file will contain points from ZRO to ZR1791 Specify file registers from ZRO because undefined data is from ZRO to ZR999 A check on the capacity of file registers is made in the units of 1k points The capacity of file registers should be specified from RO in the units of 1k points Storing a file register file in the Process CPU s memory This button is used to store a file register file with the specified number of points in the specified Process CPU s memory 10 48 10 DEVICES 10 7
528. y the following e Test operation by the GX Developer e A network refresh by MELSECNET H network system e Writing from a serial communication module e CC Link automatic refresh x3 The remote input refresh area indicates the area used when automatic refresh setting is made to the input X with MELSECNET H and CC Link Automatic refresh of the remote input refresh area is performed during END processing 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 2 Response lag An output module lags max 1 scan behind an input module See Fig 4 10 Ladder examples s5 Ej Ladder that turns the DY5E output Ml DYBE When DY5E turns ON fastest ON when an DX5 input turns ON LD DX5 OUT DY5E 0 5 z ON OFF DX5 ON OFF DY5E DY5E output turns fastest ON if the DX5 input is turned ON immediately before the step 55 operation If DX5 is ON when step 55 s LD DX5 is executed DY5E will turn ON within that scan Therefore in this case output DY5E lags minimally behind input DX5 When DY5E turns ON slowest LD DX5 OUT DY5E Y Y 0 5556 END 0 5556 p l T ON OFF DX5 idl ON OFF DY5E Lag time Maximum of 1 scan DY5E output turns ON slowest if the DX5 input is turned ON immediately after the step 55 operation In this case the DY5E output will turn ON during the next scan In this case output DY5E lag max 1 scan behind input DX5 Fig 4

Process CPU User`s Manual(Function Explanation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents